OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform V100R004C01

Hardware Description

Issue Date Part Number

02 2008-10-25 00440769

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Cabinet.........................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Cabinet Structure.............................................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet..........................................................................................................1-3 1.3 Specifications..................................................................................................................................................1-3 1.4 DC Power Distribution Box............................................................................................................................1-4

2 Subrack.........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Slot Description...............................................................................................................................................2-4 2.3 Fan Area..........................................................................................................................................................2-8 2.4 PIU..................................................................................................................................................................2-9 2.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................2-10 2.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................2-10 2.4.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................2-10 2.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................2-10 2.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................2-11 2.4.6 Specifications of the PIU......................................................................................................................2-11 2.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces.....................................................................2-12 2.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area............................................................................................................2-13 2.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board.................................................................................2-15 2.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces..............................................................................................................2-16

3 Frame............................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 DCM Frame.....................................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 CRPC Frame...................................................................................................................................................3-2

4 Overview of Boards...................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions..................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.2 Laser Safety Label..................................................................................................................................4-4 4.2 Bar Code for Boards........................................................................................................................................4-5 4.2.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................4-5 4.2.2 Characteristic Code................................................................................................................................4-6 4.3 Board Category...............................................................................................................................................4-6 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

Contents

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit........................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 ECOM.............................................................................................................................................................5-3 5.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................5-3 5.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................5-3 5.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................5-4 5.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................5-5 5.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................5-9 5.1.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-10 5.1.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-10 5.1.8 Specifications of the ECOM................................................................................................................5-13 5.2 L4G................................................................................................................................................................5-16 5.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-17 5.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-17 5.2.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-17 5.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-19 5.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-22 5.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-24 5.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G..........................................................................................................5-24 5.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-24 5.2.9 Specifications of the L4G.....................................................................................................................5-27 5.3 LDGD............................................................................................................................................................5-32 5.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-33 5.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-33 5.3.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-33 5.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-35 5.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-37 5.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-39 5.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD.......................................................................................................5-39 5.3.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-40 5.3.9 Specifications of the LDGD.................................................................................................................5-42 5.4 LDGS............................................................................................................................................................5-47 5.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-48 5.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-48 5.4.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-48 5.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-49 5.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-52 5.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-53 5.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS.......................................................................................................5-53 5.4.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-53 5.4.9 Specifications of the LDGS..................................................................................................................5-56 5.5 LDM..............................................................................................................................................................5-61 5.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-62 ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Contents

5.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-62 5.5.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-63 5.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-65 5.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-67 5.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-69 5.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM.........................................................................................................5-69 5.5.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-69 5.5.9 Specifications of the LDM...................................................................................................................5-70 5.6 LDMD...........................................................................................................................................................5-78 5.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-78 5.6.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-78 5.6.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-79 5.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-80 5.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-83 5.6.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-84 5.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD......................................................................................................5-84 5.6.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-85 5.6.9 Specifications of the LDMD................................................................................................................5-86 5.7 LDMS............................................................................................................................................................5-92 5.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-93 5.7.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-93 5.7.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-94 5.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-95 5.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-97 5.7.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-99 5.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS.......................................................................................................5-99 5.7.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................5-99 5.7.9 Specifications of the LDMS...............................................................................................................5-100 5.8 LOG.............................................................................................................................................................5-107 5.8.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................5-107 5.8.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................5-107 5.8.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................5-108 5.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................5-109 5.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................5-112 5.8.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................5-113 5.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG.......................................................................................................5-113 5.8.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................5-113 5.8.9 Specifications of the LOG..................................................................................................................5-116 5.9 LOM............................................................................................................................................................5-121 5.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................5-122 5.9.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................5-122 5.9.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................5-123 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

Contents

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description 5.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................5-124 5.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................5-127 5.9.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................5-129 5.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM.......................................................................................................5-130 5.9.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................5-130 5.9.9 Specifications of the LOM.................................................................................................................5-131

5.10 LQG...........................................................................................................................................................5-137 5.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-138 5.10.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-138 5.10.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-138 5.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-140 5.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-142 5.10.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-144 5.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG.....................................................................................................5-144 5.10.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-144 5.10.9 Specifications of the LQG................................................................................................................5-147 5.11 LQM..........................................................................................................................................................5-151 5.11.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-152 5.11.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-152 5.11.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-153 5.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-155 5.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-157 5.11.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-159 5.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM.....................................................................................................5-159 5.11.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-159 5.11.9 Specifications of the LQM...............................................................................................................5-163 5.12 LQMD.......................................................................................................................................................5-171 5.12.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-171 5.12.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-172 5.12.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-172 5.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-174 5.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-177 5.12.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-179 5.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD..................................................................................................5-179 5.12.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-180 5.12.9 Specifications of the LQMD............................................................................................................5-183 5.13 LQMS........................................................................................................................................................5-192 5.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-193 5.13.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-193 5.13.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-194 5.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-196 5.13.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-200 iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Contents

5.13.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-202 5.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS...................................................................................................5-202 5.13.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-202 5.13.9 Specifications of the LQMS.............................................................................................................5-207 5.14 LSX...........................................................................................................................................................5-216 5.14.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-217 5.14.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-217 5.14.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-218 5.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-219 5.14.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-222 5.14.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-224 5.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX......................................................................................................5-224 5.14.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-224 5.14.9 Specifications of the LSX................................................................................................................5-225 5.15 LSXL.........................................................................................................................................................5-230 5.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-230 5.15.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-231 5.15.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-231 5.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-232 5.15.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-235 5.15.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-236 5.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL....................................................................................................5-236 5.15.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-237 5.15.9 Specifications of the LSXL..............................................................................................................5-237 5.16 LSXLR......................................................................................................................................................5-240 5.16.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-240 5.16.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-240 5.16.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-241 5.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-242 5.16.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-244 5.16.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-245 5.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR.................................................................................................5-245 5.16.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-245 5.16.9 Specifications of the LSXLR...........................................................................................................5-246 5.17 LSXR.........................................................................................................................................................5-248 5.17.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-248 5.17.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-248 5.17.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-249 5.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-250 5.17.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-252 5.17.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-253 5.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR...................................................................................................5-253 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

Contents

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description 5.17.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-253 5.17.9 Specifications of the LSXR..............................................................................................................5-254

5.18 LWX2........................................................................................................................................................5-257 5.18.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-258 5.18.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-258 5.18.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-258 5.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-259 5.18.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-261 5.18.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-263 5.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2...................................................................................................5-263 5.18.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-264 5.18.9 Specifications of the LWX2.............................................................................................................5-264 5.19 LWXD.......................................................................................................................................................5-271 5.19.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-271 5.19.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-271 5.19.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-272 5.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-273 5.19.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-275 5.19.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-277 5.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD..................................................................................................5-277 5.19.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-278 5.19.9 Specifications of the LWXD............................................................................................................5-278 5.20 LWXS........................................................................................................................................................5-284 5.20.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-285 5.20.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-286 5.20.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-286 5.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-287 5.20.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-289 5.20.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-291 5.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS..................................................................................................5-291 5.20.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-291 5.20.9 Specifications of the LWXS.............................................................................................................5-292 5.21 TMX..........................................................................................................................................................5-298 5.21.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................5-299 5.21.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................5-299 5.21.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................5-299 5.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................5-301 5.21.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-303 5.21.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................5-305 5.21.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX.....................................................................................................5-305 5.21.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-305 5.21.9 Specifications of the TMX...............................................................................................................5-306 vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Contents

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit...................................................................................................6-1

6.1 ND2.................................................................................................................................................................6-2 6.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................6-2 6.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-2 6.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................6-3 6.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................6-4 6.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................6-6 6.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................6-8 6.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2............................................................................................................6-8 6.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................6-8 6.1.9 Specifications of the ND2....................................................................................................................6-12 6.2 NS2................................................................................................................................................................6-13 6.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-14 6.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-14 6.2.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-15 6.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-17 6.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-20 6.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-22 6.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2...........................................................................................................6-22 6.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................6-22 6.2.9 Specifications of the NS2.....................................................................................................................6-26 6.3 TBE...............................................................................................................................................................6-30 6.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-31 6.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-31 6.3.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-32 6.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-34 6.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-37 6.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-39 6.3.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................6-39 6.3.8 Specifications of the TBE....................................................................................................................6-41 6.4 TDG...............................................................................................................................................................6-46 6.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-47 6.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-47 6.4.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-47 6.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-48 6.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-50 6.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-52 6.4.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................6-52 6.4.8 Specifications of the TDG....................................................................................................................6-55 6.5 TDX...............................................................................................................................................................6-57 6.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-58 6.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-58 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

Contents

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description 6.5.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-59 6.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-59 6.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-63 6.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-65 6.5.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................6-65 6.5.8 Specifications of the TDX....................................................................................................................6-68

6.6 TOM..............................................................................................................................................................6-70 6.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-70 6.6.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-71 6.6.3 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................6-74 6.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-76 6.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-85 6.6.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-87 6.6.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................6-87 6.6.8 Specifications of the TOM...................................................................................................................6-94 6.7 TQM............................................................................................................................................................6-101 6.7.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................6-102 6.7.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................6-102 6.7.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................6-103 6.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................6-104 6.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................6-107 6.7.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................6-108 6.7.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................6-108 6.7.8 Specifications of the TQM.................................................................................................................6-112 6.8 TQS.............................................................................................................................................................6-118 6.8.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................6-119 6.8.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................6-119 6.8.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................6-119 6.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................6-120 6.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................6-122 6.8.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................6-124 6.8.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................6-124 6.8.8 Specifications of the TQS..................................................................................................................6-126 6.9 TQX.............................................................................................................................................................6-129 6.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................6-130 6.9.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................6-130 6.9.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................6-130 6.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................6-131 6.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................6-133 6.9.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................6-135 6.9.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................6-135 6.9.8 Specifications of the TQX..................................................................................................................6-137 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Contents

6.10 TSXL.........................................................................................................................................................6-139 6.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................6-139 6.10.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................6-139 6.10.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................6-140 6.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................6-140 6.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................6-142 6.10.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................6-144 6.10.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................6-144 6.10.8 Specifications of the TSXL..............................................................................................................6-146

7 Cross-connect Unit.....................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 XCS.................................................................................................................................................................7-2 7.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................7-2 7.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................7-3 7.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................7-3 7.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................7-4 7.1.5 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 7-5 7.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................7-6 7.1.7 Specifications of the XCS......................................................................................................................7-6

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit.......................................................................8-1

8.1 M40................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2 8.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................8-3 8.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................8-3 8.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................8-3 8.1.5 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 8-5 8.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................8-8 8.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40............................................................................................................8-8 8.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................8-9 8.1.9 Specifications of the M40...................................................................................................................... 8-9 8.2 M40V............................................................................................................................................................8-10 8.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-11 8.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-11 8.2.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................8-12 8.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-12 8.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-14 8.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-17 8.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V.......................................................................................................8-17 8.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................8-18 8.2.9 Specifications of the M40V..................................................................................................................8-19 8.3 D40................................................................................................................................................................8-19 8.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-20 8.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-20 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

Contents

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description 8.3.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................8-21 8.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-21 8.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-23 8.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-26 8.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40...........................................................................................................8-26 8.3.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................8-27 8.3.9 Specifications of the D40.....................................................................................................................8-28

8.4 D40V.............................................................................................................................................................8-28 8.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-29 8.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-29 8.4.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................8-30 8.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-30 8.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-32 8.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-35 8.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V........................................................................................................8-35 8.4.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................8-36 8.4.9 Specifications of the D40V..................................................................................................................8-37 8.5 FIU................................................................................................................................................................8-37 8.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-38 8.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-39 8.5.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................8-39 8.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-39 8.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-41 8.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-42 8.5.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU...........................................................................................................8-42 8.5.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................8-43 8.5.9 Specifications of the FIU......................................................................................................................8-44 8.6 ITL.................................................................................................................................................................8-44 8.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-45 8.6.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-46 8.6.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................8-46 8.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-47 8.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-48 8.6.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-51 8.6.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL............................................................................................................8-51 8.6.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................8-52 8.6.9 Specifications of the ITL......................................................................................................................8-52

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit............................................................................9-1

9.1 CMR2..............................................................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................9-3 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Contents

9.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................9-3 9.1.5 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................9-6 9.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2.........................................................................................................9-6 9.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................9-7 9.1.9 Specifications of the CMR2...................................................................................................................9-7 9.2 CMR4..............................................................................................................................................................9-9 9.2.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................9-9 9.2.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................9-9 9.2.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-10 9.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-10 9.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-12 9.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-13 9.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4.......................................................................................................9-13 9.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-14 9.2.9 Specifications of the CMR4.................................................................................................................9-15 9.3 DMR1............................................................................................................................................................9-16 9.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-17 9.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-17 9.3.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-17 9.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-18 9.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-19 9.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-21 9.3.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1.......................................................................................................9-21 9.3.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-21 9.3.9 Specifications of the DMR1.................................................................................................................9-22 9.4 MR2...............................................................................................................................................................9-23 9.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-24 9.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-24 9.4.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-24 9.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-25 9.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-26 9.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-28 9.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2.........................................................................................................9-28 9.4.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-28 9.4.9 Specifications of the MR2....................................................................................................................9-29 9.5 MR4...............................................................................................................................................................9-30 9.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-31 9.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-31 9.5.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-31 9.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-32 9.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-33 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

Contents

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description 9.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-35 9.5.7 Characteristic Code for of MR4...........................................................................................................9-35 9.5.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-36 9.5.9 Specifications of the MR4....................................................................................................................9-36

9.6 MR8...............................................................................................................................................................9-38 9.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-39 9.6.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-39 9.6.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-39 9.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-40 9.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-41 9.6.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-42 9.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8.........................................................................................................9-42 9.6.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-43 9.6.9 Specifications of the MR8....................................................................................................................9-44 9.7 SBM2............................................................................................................................................................9-46 9.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-46 9.7.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-46 9.7.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-47 9.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-47 9.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-48 9.7.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-50 9.7.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................9-50 9.7.8 Specifications of the SBM2..................................................................................................................9-51

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit...........................................10-1

10.1 RMU9..........................................................................................................................................................10-2 10.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................10-2 10.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................10-2 10.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................10-3 10.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................10-4 10.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................10-6 10.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................10-8 10.1.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................10-8 10.1.8 Specifications of the RMU9...............................................................................................................10-9 10.2 ROAM.......................................................................................................................................................10-10 10.2.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................10-10 10.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-11 10.2.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................10-11 10.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................10-12 10.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-13 10.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-17 10.2.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................10-17 10.2.8 Specifications of the ROAM............................................................................................................10-17 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Contents

10.3 WSD9........................................................................................................................................................10-19 10.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................10-19 10.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-20 10.3.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................10-21 10.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................10-22 10.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-23 10.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-25 10.3.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................10-26 10.3.8 Specifications of the WSD9.............................................................................................................10-26 10.4 WSM9.......................................................................................................................................................10-28 10.4.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................10-28 10.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-29 10.4.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................10-30 10.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................10-31 10.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-32 10.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-34 10.4.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................10-35 10.4.8 Specifications of the WSM9............................................................................................................10-35 10.5 WSMD4....................................................................................................................................................10-37 10.5.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................10-37 10.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-38 10.5.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................10-38 10.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................10-39 10.5.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-41 10.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-43 10.5.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................10-43 10.5.8 Specifications of the WSMD4..........................................................................................................10-44

11 Optical Amplifying Unit......................................................................................................11-1

11.1 CRPC...........................................................................................................................................................11-2 11.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................11-2 11.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................11-3 11.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................11-3 11.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................11-4 11.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................11-7 11.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................11-8 11.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper......................................................................................................................11-8 11.1.8 Characteristic Code for of CRPC.......................................................................................................11-9 11.1.9 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................11-10 11.1.10 Specifications of the CRPC............................................................................................................11-10 11.2 HBA..........................................................................................................................................................11-11 11.2.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-12 11.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-12 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

Contents

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description 11.2.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................11-12 11.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-13 11.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-15 11.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-16 11.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA.....................................................................................................11-16 11.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................11-17 11.2.9 Specifications of the HBA................................................................................................................11-18

11.3 OAU1........................................................................................................................................................11-19 11.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-19 11.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-20 11.3.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................11-20 11.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-21 11.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-23 11.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-25 11.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1...................................................................................................11-25 11.3.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................11-26 11.3.9 Specifications of the OAU1.............................................................................................................11-27 11.4 OBU1........................................................................................................................................................11-30 11.4.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-31 11.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-31 11.4.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................11-32 11.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-33 11.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-34 11.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-36 11.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1...................................................................................................11-36 11.4.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................11-37 11.4.9 Specifications of the OBU1..............................................................................................................11-37 11.5 OBU2........................................................................................................................................................11-39 11.5.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-39 11.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-39 11.5.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................11-40 11.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-41 11.5.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-42 11.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-44 11.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2...................................................................................................11-44 11.5.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................11-45 11.5.9 Specifications of the OBU2..............................................................................................................11-45

12 System Control and Communication Unit........................................................................12-1

12.1 SCC............................................................................................................................................................. 12-2 12.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................12-2 12.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................12-2 12.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................12-2 xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Contents

12.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................12-3 12.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................12-5 12.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................12-6 12.1.7 Jumper................................................................................................................................................12-6 12.1.8 Specifications of the SCC..................................................................................................................12-7 12.2 AUX............................................................................................................................................................12-7 12.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................12-7 12.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................12-8 12.2.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................12-8 12.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................12-8 12.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................12-9 12.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-10 12.2.7 Jumper..............................................................................................................................................12-10 12.2.8 Specifications of the AUX...............................................................................................................12-10

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit.....................................................................................13-1

13.1 SC1..............................................................................................................................................................13-2 13.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................13-2 13.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................13-3 13.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................13-3 13.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................13-4 13.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................13-7 13.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................13-8 13.1.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1.........................................................................................................13-8 13.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................13-9 13.1.9 Specifications of the SC1...................................................................................................................13-9 13.2 SC2............................................................................................................................................................13-10 13.2.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................13-11 13.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................13-11 13.2.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................13-12 13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................13-12 13.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................13-15 13.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-16 13.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2.......................................................................................................13-16 13.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................13-17 13.2.9 Specifications of the SC2.................................................................................................................13-17

14 Optical Protection Unit.........................................................................................................14-1

14.1 DCP.............................................................................................................................................................14-2 14.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................14-2 14.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................14-3 14.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................14-4 14.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................14-5 14.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................14-7 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

Contents

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description 14.1.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-10 14.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP......................................................................................................14-10 14.1.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................14-11 14.1.9 Specifications of the DCP................................................................................................................14-12

14.2 OLP...........................................................................................................................................................14-13 14.2.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................14-13 14.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................14-14 14.2.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................14-15 14.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................14-16 14.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................14-18 14.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-20 14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP......................................................................................................14-20 14.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................14-21 14.2.9 Specifications of the OLP................................................................................................................14-21 14.3 SCS............................................................................................................................................................14-23 14.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................14-23 14.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................14-24 14.3.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................14-24 14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................14-25 14.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................14-26 14.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-28 14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS.......................................................................................................14-28 14.3.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................14-28 14.3.9 Specifications of the SCS.................................................................................................................14-29

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit.......................................................................................................15-1

15.1 MCA4..........................................................................................................................................................15-2 15.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................15-2 15.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................15-2 15.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................15-3 15.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................15-3 15.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................... 15-5 15.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................15-6 15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.....................................................................................................15-6 15.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................15-7 15.1.9 Specifications of the MCA4...............................................................................................................15-7 15.2 MCA8..........................................................................................................................................................15-8 15.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................15-8 15.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................15-9 15.2.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................15-9 15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................15-9 15.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................15-11 15.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-12 xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Contents

15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8...................................................................................................15-12 15.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................15-13 15.2.9 Specifications of the MCA8.............................................................................................................15-13 15.3 WMU.........................................................................................................................................................15-14 15.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................15-14 15.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................15-14 15.3.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................15-15 15.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................15-16 15.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................15-17 15.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-18 15.3.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................15-18 15.3.8 Specifications of the WMU..............................................................................................................15-18

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit.......................................................................................16-1

16.1 VA1.............................................................................................................................................................16-2 16.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................16-2 16.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................16-3 16.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................16-3 16.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................16-4 16.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................16-5 16.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................16-7 16.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1........................................................................................................16-7 16.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................16-7 16.1.9 Specifications of the VA1..................................................................................................................16-8 16.2 VA4.............................................................................................................................................................16-9 16.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................16-9 16.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................16-10 16.2.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................16-10 16.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................16-11 16.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................16-12 16.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................16-14 16.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4......................................................................................................16-14 16.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................16-14 16.2.9 Specifications of the VA4................................................................................................................16-15

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit..............................................................17-1

17.1 DCU............................................................................................................................................................17-2 17.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................17-2 17.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................17-2 17.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................17-3 17.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................17-3 17.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................17-4 17.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................17-6 17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU.......................................................................................................17-6 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

Contents

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description 17.1.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................17-6 17.1.9 Specifications of the DCU..................................................................................................................17-7

17.2 GFU.............................................................................................................................................................17-7 17.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................17-8 17.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................17-8 17.2.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................17-9 17.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................17-9 17.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................17-10 17.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................17-12 17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the GFU......................................................................................................17-12 17.2.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................17-12 17.2.9 Specifications of the GFU................................................................................................................17-13

18 Cables.......................................................................................................................................18-1
18.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables..........................................................................................................18-2 18.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables......................................................................................18-2 18.1.2 Subrack Power Cables........................................................................................................................18-5 18.2 Optical Fibers..............................................................................................................................................18-6 18.2.1 Classification......................................................................................................................................18-6 18.2.2 Connectors..........................................................................................................................................18-7 18.3 Grounding Cables........................................................................................................................................18-8 18.3.1 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables........................................................................................................18-8 18.3.2 PDU Grounding Cable.......................................................................................................................18-9 18.4 Alarm Cables.............................................................................................................................................18-10 18.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable....................................................................................................................18-11 18.4.2 Alarm Interface Cable......................................................................................................................18-12 18.4.3 Alarm Concatenating/Inter-Subrack Concatenating Cable..............................................................18-13 18.5 Management Cables..................................................................................................................................18-15 18.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable....................................................................................................................18-15

A Indicators...................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicators..........................................................................................................................................A-2 A.2 Subrack Indicator...........................................................................................................................................A-2 A.3 Board Indicators............................................................................................................................................A-3 A.4 Fan Indicator..................................................................................................................................................A-6 A.5 PIU Indicator.................................................................................................................................................A-6

B Bar Code for Boards..................................................................................................................B-1

B.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................................B-3 B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.......................................................................................................................B-3 B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs................................................................................................B-4 B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs..............................................................B-6 B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs.................................................................................................B-6 B.3 Characteristic Code for Line Unit..................................................................................................................B-7 xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Contents

B.4 Characteristic Code for FOADMs.................................................................................................................B-7 B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR2.......................................................................................................B-8 B.4.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR4.......................................................................................................B-8 B.4.3 Characteristic Code for the DMR1.......................................................................................................B-9 B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the MR2..........................................................................................................B-9 B.4.5 Characteristic Code for of MR4..........................................................................................................B-10 B.4.6 Characteristic Code for the MR8........................................................................................................B-11 B.5 Characteristic Code for MCAs.....................................................................................................................B-11 B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.....................................................................................................B-11 B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8.....................................................................................................B-12 B.6 Characteristic Code for OAUs.....................................................................................................................B-12 B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA........................................................................................................B-13 B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1......................................................................................................B-13 B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1......................................................................................................B-14 B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2......................................................................................................B-14 B.6.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC........................................................................................................B-15 B.7 Characteristic Code for Optical MUX/DMUX Units..................................................................................B-15 B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40.........................................................................................................B-16 B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V.......................................................................................................B-16 B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the FIU..........................................................................................................B-17 B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the ITL..........................................................................................................B-17 B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the M40.........................................................................................................B-18 B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40V......................................................................................................B-18 B.8 Characteristic Code for Protection Units.....................................................................................................B-19 B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP.........................................................................................................B-19 B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP.........................................................................................................B-20 B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS.........................................................................................................B-20 B.9 Characteristic Code for VOAs.....................................................................................................................B-21 B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1.........................................................................................................B-21 B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4.........................................................................................................B-21 B.10 Characteristic Code for PDE Units............................................................................................................B-22 B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU......................................................................................................B-22 B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU......................................................................................................B-22

C Parameter Description.............................................................................................................C-1
C.1 Optical Transponder Units (OTUs), Tributary Units and Line Units............................................................C-2 C.1.1 Path Use Status.....................................................................................................................................C-2 C.1.2 Optical Interface Loopback...................................................................................................................C-3 C.1.3 Service Type.........................................................................................................................................C-4 C.1.4 Client Service Bearer Rate (M).............................................................................................................C-6 C.1.5 Port Mapping........................................................................................................................................C-7 C.1.6 Laser Status...........................................................................................................................................C-8 C.1.7 Automatic Laser Shutdown...................................................................................................................C-9 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix

Contents

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description C.1.8 Current Bearer Rate (M).......................................................................................................................C-9 C.1.9 Service Mode......................................................................................................................................C-10 C.1.10 FEC Working State...........................................................................................................................C-11 C.1.11 FEC Type..........................................................................................................................................C-12 C.1.12 PAUSE Frame Flow Control............................................................................................................C-12 C.1.13 Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz).....................................................C-13 C.1.14 Configure Band Type........................................................................................................................C-14 C.1.15 Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)...........................................................C-14 C.1.16 Actual Band Type.............................................................................................................................C-15 C.1.17 Maximum Packet Length..................................................................................................................C-16 C.1.18 Ethernet Working Mode...................................................................................................................C-16 C.1.19 LPT Enabled.....................................................................................................................................C-17 C.1.20 Path Loopback..................................................................................................................................C-18 C.1.21 SD Trigger Condition.......................................................................................................................C-18 C.1.22 FC Distance Extension......................................................................................................................C-19 C.1.23 Board Mode......................................................................................................................................C-19 C.1.24 Line Rate...........................................................................................................................................C-20

C.2 Optical Multiplexing Units (MUXs) and Optical Demultiplexing Units (DMUXs) ..................................C-21 C.2.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)............................................................................................C-21 C.2.2 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) ..............................................................................................C-22 C.2.3 Configure Band...................................................................................................................................C-22 C.2.4 Configure Working Band Parity.........................................................................................................C-23 C.2.5 Actual Band........................................................................................................................................C-24 C.2.6 Actual Working Band Parity...............................................................................................................C-24 C.2.7 Board Mode........................................................................................................................................C-25 C.3 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Units (OADMs)........................................................................................C-25 C.3.1 Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)......................................C-25 C.3.2 Configure Band Type..........................................................................................................................C-26 C.4 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit (ROADMs)......................................................C-26 C.4.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) ..............................................................................................C-27 C.4.2 Wavelength Target Power (dBm).......................................................................................................C-27 C.4.3 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)............................................................................................C-28 C.4.4 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)......................................................................................................C-29 C.4.5 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB).......................................................................................................C-29 C.4.6 Configure Band...................................................................................................................................C-30 C.4.7 Configure Working Band Parity.........................................................................................................C-30 C.4.8 Actual Band........................................................................................................................................C-31 C.4.9 Actual Working Band Parity...............................................................................................................C-31 C.5 Optical Amplifier Units...............................................................................................................................C-32 C.5.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) ..............................................................................................C-32 C.5.2 Laser Status.........................................................................................................................................C-33 C.5.3 Gain (dB)............................................................................................................................................C-33 xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Contents

C.5.4 Nominal Gain (dB).............................................................................................................................C-34 C.5.5 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB).................................................................................................C-35 C.5.6 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB).................................................................................................C-35 C.5.7 Rated Optical Power (dBm)................................................................................................................C-36 C.5.8 Board Work Type...............................................................................................................................C-37 C.5.9 Configure Band...................................................................................................................................C-37 C.5.10 Configure Working Band Parity.......................................................................................................C-38 C.5.11 Actual Band......................................................................................................................................C-38 C.5.12 Actual Working Band Parity.............................................................................................................C-39 C.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Units (OSCs)................................................................................................C-39 C.6.1 Optical Interface Loopback.................................................................................................................C-39 C.6.2 Laser Status.........................................................................................................................................C-40 C.7 Optical Protection Units...............................................................................................................................C-41 C.7.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) ..............................................................................................C-41 C.7.2 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB).......................................C-42 C.7.3 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)..........................................C-42 C.8 Spectrum Analyzer Units.............................................................................................................................C-43 C.8.1 Optical Monitoring..............................................................................................................................C-43 C.8.2 Monitor Interval (min)........................................................................................................................C-44 C.8.3 Wavelength Monitor Status................................................................................................................C-45 C.8.4 Configure Band...................................................................................................................................C-45 C.8.5 Configure Working Band Parity.........................................................................................................C-46 C.8.6 Actual Band........................................................................................................................................C-46 C.8.7 Actual Working Band Parity...............................................................................................................C-47 C.9 Variable Optical Attenuator Units (VOAs).................................................................................................C-47 C.9.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)............................................................................................C-48 C.9.2 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)......................................................................................................C-48 C.9.3 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB).......................................................................................................C-49 C.9.4 Path Use Status...................................................................................................................................C-49 C.9.5 Configure Band...................................................................................................................................C-50 C.9.6 Configure Working Band Parity.........................................................................................................C-50 C.9.7 Actual Band........................................................................................................................................C-51 C.9.8 Actual Working Band Parity...............................................................................................................C-52 C.9.9 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)...............................................................................................C-52

D Quick Reference Table of the Units.....................................................................................D-1

D.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification..............................................................................D-2 D.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the Client Side........................................D-2 D.1.2 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side.....................................D-16 D.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification.......................................................................................................D-24 D.3 Other Unit Specification..............................................................................................................................D-26 D.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio..............................................................................................................D-28 D.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ..................................................................D-29 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi

Contents

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..............................................................D-32 D.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ..................................................................D-34 D.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..................................................D-36

E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards..................................................E-1 F Glossary.......................................................................................................................................F-1 G Acronyms and Abbreviations...............................................................................................G-1 Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1

xxii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figures

Figures
Figure 1-1 Appearance of an ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet........................................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Front panel of the DC power distribution box....................................................................................1-4 Figure 1-3 Internal cable connection of the DC power distribution box..............................................................1-5 Figure 1-4 Junction box structure.........................................................................................................................1-5 Figure 1-5 Junction box mounting position.........................................................................................................1-6 Figure 2-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram......................................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 Slots of the subrack.............................................................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-3 Appearance of a fan area....................................................................................................................2-8 Figure 2-4 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system.....................................................................2-9 Figure 2-5 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system.......................................................................2-9 Figure 2-6 PIU front panel.................................................................................................................................2-11 Figure 2-7 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack......................................................................................2-12 Figure 2-8 Interfaces in the interface area..........................................................................................................2-13 Figure 2-9 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX.........................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-10 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector..........................................................................................2-16 Figure 2-11 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector............................................................................................2-16 Figure 3-1 DCM frame in the cabinet..................................................................................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 Appearance of CRPC frame...............................................................................................................3-3 Figure 4-1 Description of the bar code (example 1).............................................................................................4-6 Figure 4-2 Description of the bar code (example 2).............................................................................................4-6 Figure 5-1 Position of the ECOM in the network with the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 900A.................5-4 Figure 5-2 Position of the ECOM in the WDM system.......................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM............................................................................5-6 Figure 5-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM............................................................................5-7 Figure 5-5 ECOM front panel..............................................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-6 Port diagram of the ECOM...............................................................................................................5-11 Figure 5-7 Cross-connection diagram of the ECOM.........................................................................................5-13 Figure 5-8 Position of the L4G in the WDM system.........................................................................................5-17 Figure 5-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G..............................................................................5-20 Figure 5-10 L4G front panel..............................................................................................................................5-23 Figure 5-11 Port diagram of the L4G.................................................................................................................5-25 Figure 5-12 Cross-connection diagram of the L4G............................................................................................5-27 Figure 5-13 Position of the LDGD in the WDM system...................................................................................5-33 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiii

Figures

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description Figure 5-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD.........................................................................5-35 Figure 5-15 LDGD front panel...........................................................................................................................5-38 Figure 5-16 Port diagram of the LDGD.............................................................................................................5-41 Figure 5-17 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGD........................................................................................5-42 Figure 5-18 Position of the LDGS in the WDM system....................................................................................5-48

Figure 5-19 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS.........................................................................5-50 Figure 5-20 LDGS front panel...........................................................................................................................5-52 Figure 5-21 Port diagram of the LDGS..............................................................................................................5-54 Figure 5-22 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGS........................................................................................5-56 Figure 5-23 Position of the LDM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving).................................5-63 Figure 5-24 Position of the LDM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)...............................5-63 Figure 5-25 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM...........................................................................5-65 Figure 5-26 LDM front panel.............................................................................................................................5-68 Figure 5-27 Position of the LDMD in the WDM system...................................................................................5-79 Figure 5-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD........................................................................5-81 Figure 5-29 LDMD front panel..........................................................................................................................5-83 Figure 5-30 Position of the LDMS in the WDM system...................................................................................5-93 Figure 5-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS.........................................................................5-95 Figure 5-32 LDMS front panel...........................................................................................................................5-98 Figure 5-33 Position of the LOG in the WDM system.................................................................................... 5-108 Figure 5-34 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG......................................................................... 5-110 Figure 5-35 LOG front panel............................................................................................................................5-112 Figure 5-36 Port diagram of the LOG..............................................................................................................5-115 Figure 5-37 Cross-connection diagram of the LOG.........................................................................................5-116 Figure 5-38 Position of the LOM in the WDM system....................................................................................5-122 Figure 5-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOM.........................................................................5-125 Figure 5-40 LOM front panel...........................................................................................................................5-128 Figure 5-41 Position of the LQG in the WDM system.................................................................................... 5-138 Figure 5-42 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG......................................................................... 5-140 Figure 5-43 LQG front panel............................................................................................................................5-143 Figure 5-44 Port diagram of the LQG..............................................................................................................5-145 Figure 5-45 Cross-connection diagram of the LQG.........................................................................................5-147 Figure 5-46 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)...............................5-152 Figure 5-47 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)............................. 5-153 Figure 5-48 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM.........................................................................5-155 Figure 5-49 LQM front panel...........................................................................................................................5-158 Figure 5-50 Port diagram of the LQM............................................................................................................. 5-160 Figure 5-51 Cross-connection diagram of the LQM........................................................................................5-162 Figure 5-52 Position of the LQMD in the WDM system.................................................................................5-172 Figure 5-53 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD......................................................................5-175 Figure 5-54 LQMD front panel........................................................................................................................5-178 Figure 5-55 Port diagram of the LQMD.......................................................................................................... 5-181 xxiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figures

Figure 5-56 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMD.....................................................................................5-182 Figure 5-57 Position of the LQMS in the WDM system.................................................................................5-194 Figure 5-58 Position of the LQMS in the WDM system.................................................................................5-194 Figure 5-59 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS.......................................................................5-197 Figure 5-60 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS (NS1 Mode).................................................5-198 Figure 5-61 LQMS front panel.........................................................................................................................5-201 Figure 5-62 Port diagram of the LQMS (LQM Mode)....................................................................................5-203 Figure 5-63 Port diagram of the LQMS (NS1 Mode)......................................................................................5-204 Figure 5-64 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS......................................................................................5-205 Figure 5-65 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS......................................................................................5-207 Figure 5-66 Position of the LSX in the WDM system.....................................................................................5-217 Figure 5-67 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX.................................................................5-219 Figure 5-68 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX.................................................................5-220 Figure 5-69 LSX front panel............................................................................................................................5-223 Figure 5-70 Position of the LSXL in the WDM system...................................................................................5-231 Figure 5-71 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL..............................................................5-233 Figure 5-72 TN11LSXL front panel................................................................................................................5-235 Figure 5-73 Position of the LSXLR in the WDM system................................................................................5-241 Figure 5-74 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR.....................................................................5-242 Figure 5-75 TN11LSXLR front panel..............................................................................................................5-244 Figure 5-76 Position of the LSXR in the WDM system..................................................................................5-249 Figure 5-77 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR.......................................................................5-250 Figure 5-78 LSXR front panel..........................................................................................................................5-252 Figure 5-79 Position of the LWX2 in the WDM system.................................................................................5-258 Figure 5-80 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2.......................................................................5-260 Figure 5-81 LWX2 front panel.........................................................................................................................5-262 Figure 5-82 Position of the LWXD in the WDM system.................................................................................5-272 Figure 5-83 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD......................................................................5-273 Figure 5-84 LWXD front panel........................................................................................................................5-276 Figure 5-85 Position of the LWXS in the WDM system.................................................................................5-286 Figure 5-86 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS......................................................................5-288 Figure 5-87 LWXS front panel........................................................................................................................5-290 Figure 5-88 Position of the TMX in the WDM system....................................................................................5-299 Figure 5-89 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX.........................................................................5-301 Figure 5-90 TMX front panel...........................................................................................................................5-304 Figure 6-1 Position of the ND2 in the WDM system...........................................................................................6-3 Figure 6-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the ND2................................................................................6-5 Figure 6-3 ND2 front panel..................................................................................................................................6-7 Figure 6-4 Port diagram of the ND2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)........................................................6-9 Figure 6-5 Port diagram of the ND2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)........................................................6-9 Figure 6-6 Cross-connection diagram of the ND2 (ODU1 level)......................................................................6-11 Figure 6-7 Cross-connection diagram of the ND2 (ODU2 level)......................................................................6-12 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxv

Figures

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description Figure 6-8 Position of the NS2 in the WDM system.........................................................................................6-15

Figure 6-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2.....................................................................6-17 Figure 6-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2...................................................................6-18 Figure 6-11 NS2 front panel...............................................................................................................................6-21 Figure 6-12 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)...........................................6-23 Figure 6-13 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)...........................................6-23 Figure 6-14 Cross-connection diagram of the NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)...............................6-25 Figure 6-15 Cross-connection diagram of the NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)...............................6-25 Figure 6-16 Position of the TBE in the WDM system.......................................................................................6-31 Figure 6-17 Position of the TBE in the WDM system.......................................................................................6-32 Figure 6-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE............................................................................6-35 Figure 6-19 TBE front panel..............................................................................................................................6-38 Figure 6-20 Port diagram of the TBE.................................................................................................................6-40 Figure 6-21 Cross-connection diagram of the TBE...........................................................................................6-41 Figure 6-22 Position of the TDG in the WDM system......................................................................................6-47 Figure 6-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG...........................................................................6-49 Figure 6-24 TDG front panel..............................................................................................................................6-51 Figure 6-25 Port diagram of the TDG................................................................................................................6-53 Figure 6-26 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG...........................................................................................6-54 Figure 6-27 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG...........................................................................................6-54 Figure 6-28 Position of the TDX in the WDM system......................................................................................6-58 Figure 6-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TDX..................................................................6-60 Figure 6-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12TDX..................................................................6-61 Figure 6-31 TDX front panel..............................................................................................................................6-64 Figure 6-32 Port diagram of the TN11TDX.......................................................................................................6-66 Figure 6-33 Port diagram of the TN12TDX.......................................................................................................6-66 Figure 6-34 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TDX.................................................................................6-67 Figure 6-35 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12TDX.................................................................................6-68 Figure 6-36 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary board in alone mode)...................................6-71 Figure 6-37 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary board in connect mode)...............................6-71 Figure 6-38 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in alone mode).......................6-72 Figure 6-39 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in connect mode)....................6-72 Figure 6-40 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in connect mode)....................6-73 Figure 6-41 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (electrical regeneration board)....................................6-73 Figure 6-42 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary board in alone mode)........................6-76 Figure 6-43 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary board in connect mode)....................6-78 Figure 6-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in alone mode).............6-79 Figure 6-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in connect mode).........6-80 Figure 6-46 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in connect mode).........6-82 Figure 6-47 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (electrical regeneration board).........................6-83 Figure 6-48 TOM front panel.............................................................................................................................6-86 Figure 6-49 Port diagram of the TOM (tributary board in connect mode)........................................................6-88 xxvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figures

Figure 6-50 Port diagram of the TOM (tributary & line in connect mode).......................................................6-88 Figure 6-51 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM..........................................................................................6-90 Figure 6-52 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM..........................................................................................6-91 Figure 6-53 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM..........................................................................................6-92 Figure 6-54 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM..........................................................................................6-93 Figure 6-55 Position of the TQM in the WDM system....................................................................................6-103 Figure 6-56 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.........................................................................6-105 Figure 6-57 TQM front panel...........................................................................................................................6-107 Figure 6-58 Port diagram of the TQM.............................................................................................................6-109 Figure 6-59 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM........................................................................................6-111 Figure 6-60 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM........................................................................................6-111 Figure 6-61 Position of the TQS in the WDM system.....................................................................................6-119 Figure 6-62 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS..........................................................................6-121 Figure 6-63 TQS front panel............................................................................................................................6-123 Figure 6-64 Port diagram of the TQS...............................................................................................................6-125 Figure 6-65 Cross-connection diagram of the TQS.........................................................................................6-126 Figure 6-66 Position of the TQX in the WDM system....................................................................................6-130 Figure 6-67 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQX.........................................................................6-132 Figure 6-68 TQX front panel............................................................................................................................6-134 Figure 6-69 Port diagram of the TQX..............................................................................................................6-136 Figure 6-70 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX.........................................................................................6-137 Figure 6-71 Position of the TSXL in the WDM system...................................................................................6-139 Figure 6-72 Functional modules and signal flow of the TSXL........................................................................6-141 Figure 6-73 TSXL front panel..........................................................................................................................6-143 Figure 6-74 Port diagram of the TSXL............................................................................................................6-145 Figure 6-75 Cross-connection diagram of the TSXL.......................................................................................6-145 Figure 7-1 Position of the XCS in the WDM system...........................................................................................7-3 Figure 7-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS................................................................................7-4 Figure 7-3 XCS front panel..................................................................................................................................7-5 Figure 8-1 Position of the M40 in the WDM system...........................................................................................8-3 Figure 8-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40................................................................................8-4 Figure 8-3 M40 front panel..................................................................................................................................8-5 Figure 8-4 Position of the M40V in the WDM system......................................................................................8-11 Figure 8-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V...........................................................................8-13 Figure 8-6 M40V front panel.............................................................................................................................8-14 Figure 8-7 Position of the D40 in the WDM system..........................................................................................8-21 Figure 8-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40...............................................................................8-22 Figure 8-9 D40 front panel.................................................................................................................................8-23 Figure 8-10 Position of the D40V in the WDM system.....................................................................................8-30 Figure 8-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V..........................................................................8-31 Figure 8-12 D40V front panel............................................................................................................................8-32 Figure 8-13 Position of the FIU in the WDM system........................................................................................8-39 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxvii

Figures

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description Figure 8-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the FIU.............................................................................8-40

Figure 8-15 FIU front panel...............................................................................................................................8-41 Figure 8-16 Position of the ITL in the WDM system........................................................................................8-46 Figure 8-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the ITL.............................................................................8-47 Figure 8-18 TN11ITL front panel......................................................................................................................8-49 Figure 8-19 TN12ITL front panel......................................................................................................................8-50 Figure 9-1 Position of the CMR2 in the CWDM system.....................................................................................9-2 Figure 9-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2.............................................................................9-3 Figure 9-3 CMR2 front panel...............................................................................................................................9-5 Figure 9-4 Position of the CMR4 in the CWDM system...................................................................................9-10 Figure 9-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4...........................................................................9-11 Figure 9-6 CMR4 front panel.............................................................................................................................9-12 Figure 9-7 Position of the DMR1 in the CWDM system...................................................................................9-17 Figure 9-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1...........................................................................9-18 Figure 9-9 DMR1 front panel.............................................................................................................................9-20 Figure 9-10 Position of the MR2 in the DWDM system...................................................................................9-24 Figure 9-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR2...........................................................................9-25 Figure 9-12 MR2 front panel..............................................................................................................................9-27 Figure 9-13 Position of the MR4 in the DWDM system...................................................................................9-31 Figure 9-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR4...........................................................................9-32 Figure 9-15 MR4 front panel..............................................................................................................................9-34 Figure 9-16 Position of the MR8 in the DWDM system...................................................................................9-39 Figure 9-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8...........................................................................9-40 Figure 9-18 MR8 front panel..............................................................................................................................9-41 Figure 9-19 Position of the SBM2 in the CWDM system.................................................................................9-46 Figure 9-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2.........................................................................9-47 Figure 9-21 SBM2 front panel...........................................................................................................................9-49 Figure 10-1 Position of the RMU9 in the DWDM system.................................................................................10-3 Figure 10-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9.........................................................................10-5 Figure 10-3 RMU9 front panel...........................................................................................................................10-7 Figure 10-4 Position of the ROAM in the DWDM system..............................................................................10-11 Figure 10-5 Functions and features of the ROAM...........................................................................................10-12 Figure 10-6 ROAM front panel........................................................................................................................10-14 Figure 10-7 Position of the WSD9 in the DWDM system...............................................................................10-21 Figure 10-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9.......................................................................10-22 Figure 10-9 WSD9 front panel.........................................................................................................................10-24 Figure 10-10 Position of the WSM9 in the DWDM system............................................................................10-30 Figure 10-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9....................................................................10-31 Figure 10-12 WSM9 front panel......................................................................................................................10-33 Figure 10-13 Position of the WSMD4 in the DWDM system.........................................................................10-38 Figure 10-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4.................................................................10-40 Figure 10-15 WSMD4 front panel...................................................................................................................10-42 xxviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figures

Figure 11-1 Position of the CRPC in the WDM system (backward pump).......................................................11-3 Figure 11-2 Position of the CRPC in the WDM system (forward pump)..........................................................11-3 Figure 11-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC (backward pump)............................................11-5 Figure 11-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC (forward pump)...............................................11-6 Figure 11-5 CRPC front panel............................................................................................................................11-7 Figure 11-6 Jumpers on the CRPC board...........................................................................................................11-9 Figure 11-7 Position of the HBA in the WDM system....................................................................................11-12 Figure 11-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA.........................................................................11-14 Figure 11-9 HBA front panel........................................................................................................................... 11-15 Figure 11-10 Position of the OAU1 in the WDM system................................................................................11-20 Figure 11-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the OAU1.....................................................................11-22 Figure 11-12 OAU1 front panel.......................................................................................................................11-24 Figure 11-13 Position of the OBU1 in the WDM system................................................................................11-32 Figure 11-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the OBU1.....................................................................11-33 Figure 11-15 OBU1 front panel....................................................................................................................... 11-35 Figure 11-16 Position of the OBU2 in the WDM system................................................................................11-40 Figure 11-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2.....................................................................11-41 Figure 11-18 OBU2 front panel....................................................................................................................... 11-43 Figure 12-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC............................................................................12-4 Figure 12-2 SCC front panel..............................................................................................................................12-5 Figure 12-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the AUX...........................................................................12-8 Figure 12-4 AUX front panel.............................................................................................................................12-9 Figure 13-1 Position of the SC1 in the WDM system........................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1.............................................................................13-5 Figure 13-3 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead......................................................................13-5 Figure 13-4 SC1 front panel...............................................................................................................................13-7 Figure 13-5 Position of the SC2 in the WDM system......................................................................................13-11 Figure 13-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2...........................................................................13-13 Figure 13-7 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead.................................................................... 13-13 Figure 13-8 SC2 front panel.............................................................................................................................13-15 Figure 14-1 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection).........................................14-3 Figure 14-2 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)..........................................14-4 Figure 14-3 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (OWSP protection).......................................................14-4 Figure 14-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP............................................................................14-6 Figure 14-5 DCP front panel..............................................................................................................................14-8 Figure 14-6 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (optical line protection)..............................................14-14 Figure 14-7 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection).......................................14-15 Figure 14-8 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)........................................14-15 Figure 14-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP..........................................................................14-17 Figure 14-10 OLP front panel..........................................................................................................................14-19 Figure 14-11 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection).......................................14-24 Figure 14-12 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended mode)...........14-24 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxix

Figures

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description Figure 14-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS.........................................................................14-25 Figure 14-14 SCS front panel...........................................................................................................................14-27

Figure 15-1 Position of the MCA4 in the WDM system...................................................................................15-2 Figure 15-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4.........................................................................15-4 Figure 15-3 MCA4 front panel...........................................................................................................................15-5 Figure 15-4 Position of the MCA8 in the WDM system...................................................................................15-9 Figure 15-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8.......................................................................15-10 Figure 15-6 MCA8 front panel.........................................................................................................................15-11 Figure 15-7 Position of the WMU in the WDM system..................................................................................15-15 Figure 15-8 Functional block diagram of the WMU........................................................................................15-16 Figure 15-9 WMU front panel..........................................................................................................................15-17 Figure 16-1 Position of the VA1 in the WDM system.......................................................................................16-3 Figure 16-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1............................................................................16-4 Figure 16-3 VA1 front panel..............................................................................................................................16-6 Figure 16-4 Position of the VA4 in the WDM system.....................................................................................16-10 Figure 16-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4..........................................................................16-11 Figure 16-6 VA4 front panel............................................................................................................................16-13 Figure 17-1 Position of the DCU in the WDM system......................................................................................17-3 Figure 17-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU...........................................................................17-4 Figure 17-3 DCU front panel.............................................................................................................................17-5 Figure 17-4 Position of the GFU in the WDM system.......................................................................................17-8 Figure 17-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the GFU............................................................................17-9 Figure 17-6 GFU front panel............................................................................................................................17-11 Figure 18-1 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable..........................18-2 Figure 18-2 Structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable............................................................................18-3 Figure 18-3 Structure of the subrack power cable..............................................................................................18-5 Figure 18-4 LC/PC fiber connector....................................................................................................................18-7 Figure 18-5 FC/PC fiber connector....................................................................................................................18-7 Figure 18-6 SC/PC fiber connector....................................................................................................................18-8 Figure 18-7 LSH/APC fiber connector..............................................................................................................18-8 Figure 18-8 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable................................................................................18-9 Figure 18-9 Structure of the PDU grounding cable.........................................................................................18-10 Figure 18-10 Structure of the cabinet indicator alarm cable............................................................................18-11 Figure 18-11 Alarm interface cable..................................................................................................................18-12 Figure 18-12 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable...................................18-14 Figure 18-13 Structure of the OAM serial port cable.......................................................................................18-15 Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)...........................................................................................B-3 Figure B-2 Description of the bar code (example 2)...........................................................................................B-3

xxx

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Tables

Tables
Table 1-1 Full configuration of cabinets of different heights...............................................................................1-3 Table 1-2 Technical specifications of the cabinet................................................................................................1-3 Table 2-1 Technical specifications of the subrack...............................................................................................2-3 Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly................................................................................2-3 Table 2-3 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800.....................................................2-3 Table 2-4 Mapping between boards and slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 ..............................................................2-5 Table 2-5 Functions..............................................................................................................................................2-8 Table 2-6 Functions and features of the PIU......................................................................................................2-10 Table 2-7 Performance Indexes of the PIU Board..............................................................................................2-11 Table 2-8 Description of interfaces in the interface area....................................................................................2-13 Table 2-9 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board.........................................................2-15 Table 2-10 Pin assignment of the COM interface..............................................................................................2-16 Table 2-11 Pin assignment of the ETH3 interface.............................................................................................2-17 Table 2-12 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces..................................................................2-18 Table 2-13 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces............................................................2-18 Table 2-14 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface.........................................................................................2-19 Table 2-15 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface...........................................................................................2-19 Table 2-16 Pin assignment of the ALMI2..........................................................................................................2-20 Table 2-17 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces..............................................................2-20 Table 2-18 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface......................................................................................2-20 Table 2-19 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface......................................................................................2-21 Table 2-20 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface.............................................................................................2-22 Table 2-21 Pin assignment of the ETH2 interface.............................................................................................2-22 Table 3-1 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame....................................................................................3-3 Table 4-1 The board appearance and dimensions.................................................................................................4-2 Table 4-2 Laser levels...........................................................................................................................................4-4 Table 4-3 Board list..............................................................................................................................................4-7 Table 5-1 Functions and features of the ECOM...................................................................................................5-5 Table 5-2 Types and functions of the ECOM interfaces....................................................................................5-10 Table 5-3 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ECOM displayed on the NM................................................5-10 Table 5-4 Meaning of NM port of the ECOM....................................................................................................5-11 Table 5-5 Specifications of optical module at the client side(FE)......................................................................5-13 Table 5-6 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side (FE).............................................5-14 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxi

Tables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description Table 5-7 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the CWDM side.................................................5-15 Table 5-8 Functions and features of the L4G.....................................................................................................5-18 Table 5-9 Types and functions of the L4G interfaces........................................................................................5-24 Table 5-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the L4G displayed on the NM..................................................5-24 Table 5-11 Meaning of NM port of the L4G......................................................................................................5-26 Table 5-12 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................5-28 Table 5-13 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-29 Table 5-14 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.......................................................................5-30 Table 5-15 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side.......................................................................5-31 Table 5-16 Functions and features of the LDGD...............................................................................................5-33 Table 5-17 Types and functions of the LDGD interfaces...................................................................................5-39 Table 5-18 Characteristic code for the LDGD...................................................................................................5-39 Table 5-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGD displayed on the NM..............................................5-40 Table 5-20 Meaning of NM port of the LDGD..................................................................................................5-41 Table 5-21 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................5-42 Table 5-22 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-44 Table 5-23 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.......................................................................5-45 Table 5-24 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side.......................................................................5-46 Table 5-25 Functions and features of the LDGS................................................................................................5-48 Table 5-26 Types and functions of the LDGS interfaces...................................................................................5-53 Table 5-27 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGS displayed on the NM...............................................5-54 Table 5-28 Meaning of NM port of the LDGS...................................................................................................5-55 Table 5-29 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................5-56 Table 5-30 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-58 Table 5-31 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.......................................................................5-59 Table 5-32 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side.......................................................................5-60 Table 5-33 Type description of the LDM...........................................................................................................5-62 Table 5-34 Functions and features of the LDM.................................................................................................5-63 Table 5-35 Types and functions of the TN12LDM interfaces...........................................................................5-69 Table 5-36 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDM displayed on the NM................................................5-70 Table 5-37 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side..................................................................5-71 Table 5-38 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................5-72 Table 5-39 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-74 Table 5-40 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-75 Table 5-41 Functions and features of the LDMD...............................................................................................5-79 Table 5-42 Types and functions of the LDMD interfaces..................................................................................5-84 Table 5-43 Characteristic code for the LDMD...................................................................................................5-85 Table 5-44 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMD displayed on the NM.............................................5-85 Table 5-45 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side..................................................................5-86 Table 5-46 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................5-88 Table 5-47 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-89 Table 5-48 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...................................................5-90

xxxii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Tables

Table 5-49 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.......................................................................5-91 Table 5-50 Functions and features of the LDMS...............................................................................................5-94 Table 5-51 Types and functions of the LDMS interfaces..................................................................................5-99 Table 5-52 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMS displayed on the NM............................................5-100 Table 5-53 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side................................................................5-101 Table 5-54 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-102 Table 5-55 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-104 Table 5-56 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-105 Table 5-57 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.....................................................................5-106 Table 5-58 Functions and features of the LOG................................................................................................5-108 Table 5-59 Types and functions of the LOG interfaces...................................................................................5-113 Table 5-60 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOG displayed on the NM...............................................5-114 Table 5-61 Meaning of NM port of the LOG...................................................................................................5-115 Table 5-62 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-116 Table 5-63 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-117 Table 5-64 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side...........................................................5-119 Table 5-65 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side........................................................5-120 Table 5-66 Functions and features of the LOM...............................................................................................5-123 Table 5-67 Types and functions of the LOM interfaces...................................................................................5-129 Table 5-68 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOM displayed on the NM..............................................5-130 Table 5-69 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-131 Table 5-70 Specifications of FC optical module at the client side...................................................................5-132 Table 5-71 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-133 Table 5-72 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side...........................................................5-134 Table 5-73 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side........................................................5-135 Table 5-74 Functions and features of the LQG................................................................................................5-138 Table 5-75 Types and functions of the LQG interfaces...................................................................................5-144 Table 5-76 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQG displayed on the NM...............................................5-144 Table 5-77 Meaning of NM port of the LQG...................................................................................................5-146 Table 5-78 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-147 Table 5-79 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-149 Table 5-80 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side.....................................................................5-150 Table 5-81 Type description of the LQM.........................................................................................................5-152 Table 5-82 Functions and features of the LQM...............................................................................................5-153 Table 5-83 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces...................................................................................5-159 Table 5-84 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQM displayed on the NM..............................................5-160 Table 5-85 Meaning of NM port of the LQM..................................................................................................5-161 Table 5-86 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side................................................................5-164 Table 5-87 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-165 Table 5-88 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-167 Table 5-89 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-168 Table 5-90 Version description of the LQMD.................................................................................................5-171 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxiii

Tables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description Table 5-91 Functions and features of the LQMD.............................................................................................5-173 Table 5-92 Types and functions of the LQMD interfaces................................................................................5-179 Table 5-93 Characteristic code for the LQMD.................................................................................................5-179 Table 5-94 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMD displayed on the NM...........................................5-180 Table 5-95 Meaning of NM port of the LQMD...............................................................................................5-181 Table 5-96 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side................................................................5-184 Table 5-97 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................5-185 Table 5-98 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-187 Table 5-99 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side.................................................5-188 Table 5-100 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-189 Table 5-101 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-190 Table 5-102 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side...................................................................5-191 Table 5-103 Version description of the LQMS................................................................................................5-193 Table 5-104 Functions and features of the LQMS...........................................................................................5-195 Table 5-105 Types and functions of the LQMS interfaces..............................................................................5-202 Table 5-106 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMS displayed on the NM..........................................5-203 Table 5-107 Meaning of NM port of the LQMS..............................................................................................5-204 Table 5-108 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side..............................................................5-207 Table 5-109 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.................................................................5-209 Table 5-110 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-210 Table 5-111 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-211 Table 5-112 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-212 Table 5-113 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-214 Table 5-114 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side...................................................................5-215 Table 5-115 Version description of the LSX....................................................................................................5-217 Table 5-116 Functions and features of the LSX...............................................................................................5-218 Table 5-117 Types and functions of the LSX interfaces..................................................................................5-224 Table 5-118 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSX displayed on the NM..............................................5-224 Table 5-119 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-225 Table 5-120 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side.........................................................5-227 Table 5-121 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side......................................................5-228 Table 5-122 Functions and features of the LSXL............................................................................................5-231 Table 5-123 Types and functions of the LSXL interfaces................................................................................5-236 Table 5-124 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXL displayed on the NM...........................................5-237 Table 5-125 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-238 Table 5-126 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-238 Table 5-127 Functions and features of the LSXLR..........................................................................................5-241 Table 5-128 Types and functions of the LSXLR interfaces.............................................................................5-245 Table 5-129 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXLR displayed on the NM........................................5-246 Table 5-130 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-246 Table 5-131 Functions and features of the LSXR............................................................................................5-249 Table 5-132 Types and functions of the LSXR interfaces...............................................................................5-253

xxxiv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Tables

Table 5-133 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXR displayed on the NM...........................................5-254 Table 5-134 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side.........................................................5-254 Table 5-135 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side......................................................5-255 Table 5-136 Functions and features of the LWX2...........................................................................................5-258 Table 5-137 Types and functions of the LWX2 interfaces...............................................................................5-263 Table 5-138 Characteristic code for the LWX2...............................................................................................5-263 Table 5-139 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWX2 displayed on the NM..........................................5-264 Table 5-140 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-265 Table 5-141 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-266 Table 5-142 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-267 Table 5-143 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-268 Table 5-144 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side...................................................................5-270 Table 5-145 Functions and features of the LWXD..........................................................................................5-272 Table 5-146 Types and functions of the LWXD interfaces..............................................................................5-277 Table 5-147 Characteristic code for the LWXD...............................................................................................5-277 Table 5-148 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXD displayed on the NM.........................................5-278 Table 5-149 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-279 Table 5-150 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-280 Table 5-151 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-281 Table 5-152 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-282 Table 5-153 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side...................................................................5-283 Table 5-154 Version description of the LWXS................................................................................................5-285 Table 5-155 Functions and features of the LWXS...........................................................................................5-286 Table 5-156 Types and functions of the LWXS interfaces..............................................................................5-291 Table 5-157 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXS displayed on the NM..........................................5-291 Table 5-158 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-292 Table 5-159 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-294 Table 5-160 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-295 Table 5-161 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side...................................................................5-296 Table 5-162 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side...................................................................5-297 Table 5-163 Functions and features of the TMX.............................................................................................5-299 Table 5-164 Types and functions of the TMX interfaces.................................................................................5-305 Table 5-165 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TMX displayed on the NM............................................5-305 Table 5-166 Specifications of optical module at the client side.......................................................................5-306 Table 5-167 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-308 Table 5-168 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...............................................5-309 Table 5-169 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side.........................................................5-309 Table 5-170 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side......................................................5-310 Table 6-1 Functions and features of the ND2.......................................................................................................6-3 Table 6-2 Types and functions of the ND2 interfaces..........................................................................................6-8 Table 6-3 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ND2 displayed on the NM.....................................................6-8 Table 6-4 Meaning of NM port of the ND2.......................................................................................................6-10 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxv

Tables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description Table 6-5 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side...............................................................6-12 Table 6-6 Version description of the NS2..........................................................................................................6-14 Table 6-7 Functions and features of the NS2.....................................................................................................6-15 Table 6-8 Types and functions of the NS2 interfaces........................................................................................6-22 Table 6-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the NS2 displayed on the NM....................................................6-22 Table 6-10 Meaning of NM port of the NS2......................................................................................................6-24 Table 6-11 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side.............................................................6-26 Table 6-12 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side..........................................................6-27 Table 6-13 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side.............................................................6-28 Table 6-14 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side..........................................................6-29 Table 6-15 Functions and features of the TBE...................................................................................................6-32 Table 6-16 Types and functions of the TBE interfaces......................................................................................6-39 Table 6-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TBE displayed on the NM..................................................6-39 Table 6-18 Meaning of NM port of the TBE......................................................................................................6-40 Table 6-19 Specifications of optical module at the client side(FE)....................................................................6-42 Table 6-20 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................6-42 Table 6-21 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................6-44 Table 6-22 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side..................................................................6-45 Table 6-23 Functions and features of the TDG..................................................................................................6-47 Table 6-24 Types and functions of the TDG interfaces.....................................................................................6-52 Table 6-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDG displayed on the NM.................................................6-52 Table 6-26 Meaning of NM port of the TDG.....................................................................................................6-53 Table 6-27 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................6-55 Table 6-28 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................6-56 Table 6-29 Version description of the TDX.......................................................................................................6-58 Table 6-30 Functions and features of the TDX..................................................................................................6-59 Table 6-31 Types and functions of the TDX interfaces.....................................................................................6-65 Table 6-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDX displayed on the NM.................................................6-65 Table 6-33 Meaning of NM port of the TDX.....................................................................................................6-66 Table 6-34 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side..................................................................6-68 Table 6-35 Functions and features of the TOM.................................................................................................6-74 Table 6-36 Types and functions of the TOM interfaces.....................................................................................6-87 Table 6-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TOM displayed on the NM................................................6-87 Table 6-38 Meaning of NM port of the TOM (connect mode)..........................................................................6-88 Table 6-39 Meaning of NM port of the TOM (alone mode)..............................................................................6-89 Table 6-40 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side..................................................................6-94 Table 6-41 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side.....................................................................6-96 Table 6-42 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side...................................................6-97 Table 6-43 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side...................................................6-98 Table 6-44 Version description of the TQM....................................................................................................6-102 Table 6-45 Functions and features of the TQM...............................................................................................6-103 Table 6-46 Types and functions of the TQM interfaces...................................................................................6-108

xxxvi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Tables

Table 6-47 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQM displayed on the NM..............................................6-109 Table 6-48 Meaning of NM port of the TQM..................................................................................................6-110 Table 6-49 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side................................................................6-113 Table 6-50 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side...................................................................6-114 Table 6-51 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................6-116 Table 6-52 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side.................................................6-117 Table 6-53 Functions and features of the TQS.................................................................................................6-119 Table 6-54 Types and functions of the TQS interfaces....................................................................................6-124 Table 6-55 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQS displayed on the NM................................................6-124 Table 6-56 Meaning of NM port of the TQS....................................................................................................6-125 Table 6-57 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side................................................................6-126 Table 6-58 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side.................................................6-128 Table 6-59 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side.................................................6-128 Table 6-60 Functions and features of the TQX................................................................................................6-131 Table 6-61 Types and functions of the TQX interfaces...................................................................................6-135 Table 6-62 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQX displayed on the NM...............................................6-135 Table 6-63 Meaning of NM port of the TQX...................................................................................................6-136 Table 6-64 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side................................................................6-137 Table 6-65 Functions and features of the TSXL..............................................................................................6-140 Table 6-66 Types and functions of the TSXL interfaces..................................................................................6-144 Table 6-67 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TSXL displayed on the NM.............................................6-144 Table 6-68 Meaning of NM port of the TSXL.................................................................................................6-145 Table 6-69 Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side......................................................................6-146 Table 7-1 Version description of the XCS...........................................................................................................7-2 Table 7-2 Functions and features of the XCS.......................................................................................................7-3 Table 8-1 Type description of the M40................................................................................................................8-2 Table 8-2 Functions and features of the M40.......................................................................................................8-3 Table 8-3 Types and functions of the M40 interfaces..........................................................................................8-6 Table 8-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11M4001 board (C_EVEN).............................................................................................................................................................8-6 Table 8-5 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11M4002 board (C_ODD)...............................................................................................................................................................8-7 Table 8-6 Characteristic code for the M40...........................................................................................................8-9 Table 8-7 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 displayed on the NM......................................................8-9 Table 8-8 Optical specifications of the M40......................................................................................................8-10 Table 8-9 Type description of the M40V...........................................................................................................8-11 Table 8-10 Functions and features of the M40V................................................................................................8-12 Table 8-11 Types and functions of the M40V interfaces...................................................................................8-15 Table 8-12 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40V board (even) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-15 Table 8-13 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40V board (odd) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-16 Table 8-14 Characteristic code for the M40V....................................................................................................8-18 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxvii

Tables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description Table 8-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V displayed on the NM...............................................8-18 Table 8-16 Optical specifications of the M40V.................................................................................................8-19 Table 8-17 Type description of the D40.............................................................................................................8-20 Table 8-18 Functions and features of the D40...................................................................................................8-21 Table 8-19 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces.......................................................................................8-24 Table 8-20 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D4001 board (C_EVEN)...........................................................................................................................................................8-24 Table 8-21 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D4002 board (C_ODD).............................................................................................................................................................8-25 Table 8-22 Characteristic code for the D40........................................................................................................8-27 Table 8-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM..................................................8-27 Table 8-24 Optical specifications of the D40.....................................................................................................8-28 Table 8-25 Type description of the D40V..........................................................................................................8-29 Table 8-26 Functions and features of the D40V.................................................................................................8-30 Table 8-27 Types and functions of the D40V interfaces....................................................................................8-33 Table 8-28 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V01 board (C_EVEN)...........................................................................................................................................................8-33 Table 8-29 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V02 board (C_ODD).............................................................................................................................................................8-34 Table 8-30 Characteristic code for the D40V.....................................................................................................8-36 Table 8-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40v displayed on the NM................................................8-36 Table 8-32 Optical specifications of the D40V..................................................................................................8-37 Table 8-33 Version description of the FIU.........................................................................................................8-38 Table 8-34 Functions and features of the FIU....................................................................................................8-39 Table 8-35 Types and functions of the FIU interfaces.......................................................................................8-42 Table 8-36 Characteristic code for the FIU........................................................................................................8-43 Table 8-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU displayed on the NM...................................................8-43 Table 8-38 Optical specifications of the FIU.....................................................................................................8-44 Table 8-39 Version description of the ITL.........................................................................................................8-45 Table 8-40 Functions and features of the ITL....................................................................................................8-47 Table 8-41 Types and functions of the ITL interfaces.......................................................................................8-51 Table 8-42 Characteristic code for the ITL........................................................................................................8-52 Table 8-43 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL displayed on the NM...................................................8-52 Table 8-44 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL............................................................................................8-53 Table 8-45 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL............................................................................................8-53 Table 9-1 Functions and features of the CMR2...................................................................................................9-3 Table 9-2 Types and functions of the CMR2 interfaces.......................................................................................9-5 Table 9-3 Characteristic code for the CMR2........................................................................................................9-6 Table 9-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 displayed on the NM..................................................9-7 Table 9-5 Optical specifications of the CMR2.....................................................................................................9-7 Table 9-6 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR2...........................................................................9-8 Table 9-7 Functions and features of the CMR4.................................................................................................9-10 Table 9-8 Types and functions of the CMR4 interfaces.....................................................................................9-13

xxxviii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Tables

Table 9-9 Characteristic code for the CMR4......................................................................................................9-13 Table 9-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 displayed on the NM..............................................9-14 Table 9-11 Optical specifications of the CMR4.................................................................................................9-15 Table 9-12 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR4.......................................................................9-16 Table 9-13 Functions and features of the DMR1 board.....................................................................................9-17 Table 9-14 Types and functions of the DMR1 interfaces..................................................................................9-20 Table 9-15 Characteristic code for the DMR1...................................................................................................9-21 Table 9-16 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board.....................................9-22 Table 9-17 Optical specifications of the DMR1.................................................................................................9-22 Table 9-18 Functions and features of the MR2..................................................................................................9-24 Table 9-19 Types and functions of the MR2 interfaces.....................................................................................9-27 Table 9-20 Characteristic code for the MR2......................................................................................................9-28 Table 9-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 displayed on the NM.................................................9-29 Table 9-22 Optical specifications of the MR2....................................................................................................9-29 Table 9-23 Functions and features of the MR4..................................................................................................9-32 Table 9-24 Types and functions of the MR4 interfaces.....................................................................................9-34 Table 9-25 Characteristic code for the MR4......................................................................................................9-35 Table 9-26 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR4 displayed on the NM.................................................9-36 Table 9-27 Optical specifications of the MR4....................................................................................................9-37 Table 9-28 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the MR4..........................................................................9-37 Table 9-29 Functions and features of the MR8..................................................................................................9-39 Table 9-30 Types and functions of the MR8 interfaces.....................................................................................9-42 Table 9-31 Characteristic code for the MR8......................................................................................................9-43 Table 9-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8 displayed on the NM.................................................9-43 Table 9-33 Optical specifications of the MR8....................................................................................................9-44 Table 9-34 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8..........................................................................9-45 Table 9-35 Functions and features of the SBM2................................................................................................9-47 Table 9-36 Types and functions of the SBM2 interfaces...................................................................................9-49 Table 9-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 displayed on the NM...............................................9-50 Table 9-38 Optical specifications of the SBM2.................................................................................................9-51 Table 10-1 Type description of the RMU9........................................................................................................10-2 Table 10-2 Functions and features of the RMU9...............................................................................................10-4 Table 10-3 Types and functions of the RMU9 interfaces..................................................................................10-8 Table 10-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 displayed on the NM..............................................10-9 Table 10-5 Optical specifications of the RMU9.................................................................................................10-9 Table 10-6 Type description of the ROAM......................................................................................................10-11 Table 10-7 Functions and features of the ROAM............................................................................................10-12 Table 10-8 Types and functions of the ROAM interfaces................................................................................10-15 Table 10-9 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (even) ...........................................................................................................................................................................10-15 Table 10-10 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (odd) ...........................................................................................................................................................................10-16 Table 10-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM displayed on the NM.........................................10-17 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxix

Tables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description Table 10-12 Optical specifications of the ROAM............................................................................................10-18 Table 10-13 Version description of the WSD9................................................................................................10-19 Table 10-14 Type description of the WSD9.....................................................................................................10-20 Table 10-15 Functions and features of the WSD9...........................................................................................10-21 Table 10-16 Types and functions of the WSD9 interfaces...............................................................................10-25 Table 10-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 displayed on the NM..........................................10-26 Table 10-18 Optical specifications of the WSD9.............................................................................................10-26 Table 10-19 Version description of the WSM9................................................................................................10-29 Table 10-20 Type description of the WSM9....................................................................................................10-29 Table 10-21 Functions and features of the WSM9...........................................................................................10-30 Table 10-22 Types and functions of the WSM9 interfaces..............................................................................10-34 Table 10-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 displayed on the NM..........................................10-35 Table 10-24 Optical specifications of the WSM9............................................................................................10-35 Table 10-25 Version description of the WSMD4.............................................................................................10-38 Table 10-26 Functions and features of the WSMD4........................................................................................10-39 Table 10-27 Types and functions of the WSMD4 interfaces...........................................................................10-43 Table 10-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD4 displayed on the NM.......................................10-44 Table 10-29 Optical specifications of the WSMD4.........................................................................................10-44 Table 11-1 Type description of the CRPC.........................................................................................................11-3 Table 11-2 Functions and features of the CRPC................................................................................................11-4 Table 11-3 Types and functions of the CRPC interfaces...................................................................................11-8 Table 11-4 Characteristic code for the CRPC....................................................................................................11-9 Table 11-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC displayed on the NM.............................................11-10 Table 11-6 Optical specifications of the CRPC................................................................................................11-10 Table 11-7 Functions and features of the HBA................................................................................................11-13 Table 11-8 Types and functions of the HBA interfaces...................................................................................11-16 Table 11-9 Characteristic code for the HBA....................................................................................................11-17 Table 11-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA displayed on the NM.............................................11-17 Table 11-11 Optical specifications of the HBA...............................................................................................11-18 Table 11-12 Type description of the OAU1.....................................................................................................11-20 Table 11-13 Functions and features of the OAU1............................................................................................11-20 Table 11-14 Types and functions of the OAU1 interfaces...............................................................................11-25 Table 11-15 Characteristic code for the OAU1................................................................................................11-25 Table 11-16 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OAU1 displayed on the NM..........................................11-26 Table 11-17 Optical specifications of the OAU101.........................................................................................11-27 Table 11-18 Optical specifications of the OAU102.........................................................................................11-28 Table 11-19 Optical specifications of the OAU103.........................................................................................11-28 Table 11-20 Optical specifications of the OAU105.........................................................................................11-29 Table 11-21 Type description of the OBU1.....................................................................................................11-31 Table 11-22 Functions and features of the OBU1............................................................................................11-32 Table 11-23 Types and functions of the OBU1 interfaces...............................................................................11-36 Table 11-24 Characteristic code for the OBU1................................................................................................11-36

xl

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Tables

Table 11-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OBU1 displayed on the NM...........................................11-37 Table 11-26 Optical specifications of the OBU1.............................................................................................11-37 Table 11-27 Functions and features of the OBU2............................................................................................11-40 Table 11-28 Types and functions of the OBU2 interfaces...............................................................................11-44 Table 11-29 Characteristic code for the OBU2................................................................................................11-44 Table 11-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OBU2 displayed on the NM...........................................11-45 Table 11-31 Optical specifications of the OBU2.............................................................................................11-45 Table 12-1 Functions and features of the SCC...................................................................................................12-3 Table 12-2 Functions of the SCC buttons..........................................................................................................12-6 Table 12-3 Function of the SCC LED indicator.................................................................................................12-6 Table 12-4 Functions and features of the AUX..................................................................................................12-8 Table 12-5 Types and functions of the AUX interfaces...................................................................................12-10 Table 13-1 Version description of the SC1........................................................................................................13-2 Table 13-2 Functions and features of the SC1...................................................................................................13-4 Table 13-3 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC....................................................................13-6 Table 13-4 Types and functions of the SC1 interfaces.......................................................................................13-8 Table 13-5 Characteristic code for the SC1........................................................................................................13-8 Table 13-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 displayed on the NM..................................................13-9 Table 13-7 Optical specifications of the SC1...................................................................................................13-10 Table 13-8 Version description of the SC2......................................................................................................13-11 Table 13-9 Functions and features of the SC2.................................................................................................13-12 Table 13-10 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC................................................................13-14 Table 13-11 Types and functions of the SC2 interfaces...................................................................................13-16 Table 13-12 Characteristic code for the SC2....................................................................................................13-16 Table 13-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 displayed on the NM..............................................13-17 Table 13-14 Optical specifications of the SC2.................................................................................................13-18 Table 14-1 Version description of the DCP.......................................................................................................14-2 Table 14-2 Type description of the DCP............................................................................................................14-3 Table 14-3 Functions and features of the DCP...................................................................................................14-5 Table 14-4 Types and functions of the DCP interfaces......................................................................................14-9 Table 14-5 Characteristic code for the DCP.....................................................................................................14-11 Table 14-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP displayed on the NM...............................................14-11 Table 14-7 Optical specifications of the DCP..................................................................................................14-12 Table 14-8 Version description of the OLP......................................................................................................14-14 Table 14-9 Type description of the OLP..........................................................................................................14-14 Table 14-10 Functions and features of the OLP...............................................................................................14-16 Table 14-11 Types and functions of the OLP interfaces..................................................................................14-20 Table 14-12 Characteristic code for the OLP...................................................................................................14-21 Table 14-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP displayed on the NM..............................................14-21 Table 14-14 Optical specifications of the OLP................................................................................................14-22 Table 14-15 Type description of the SCS........................................................................................................14-23 Table 14-16 Functions and features of the SCS...............................................................................................14-24 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xli

Tables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description Table 14-17 Types and functions of the SCS interfaces..................................................................................14-27 Table 14-18 Characteristic code for the SCS...................................................................................................14-28 Table 14-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS displayed on the NM..............................................14-29 Table 14-20 Optical specifications of the SCS.................................................................................................14-29 Table 15-1 Functions and features of the MCA4...............................................................................................15-3 Table 15-2 Types and functions of the MCA4 interfaces..................................................................................15-6 Table 15-3 Characteristic code for the MCA4...................................................................................................15-6 Table 15-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 displayed on the NM..............................................15-7 Table 15-5 Optical specifications of the MCA4.................................................................................................15-7 Table 15-6 Functions and features of the MCA8...............................................................................................15-9 Table 15-7 Types and functions of the MCA8 interfaces................................................................................15-12 Table 15-8 Characteristic code for the MCA8.................................................................................................15-12 Table 15-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 displayed on the NM............................................15-13 Table 15-10 Optical specifications of the MCA8.............................................................................................15-13 Table 15-11 Functions and features of the WMU............................................................................................15-15 Table 15-12 Types and functions of the WMU interfaces...............................................................................15-18 Table 15-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU displayed on the NM...........................................15-18 Table 15-14 Optical specifications of the WMU..............................................................................................15-19 Table 16-1 Version description of the VA1.......................................................................................................16-2 Table 16-2 Functions and features of the VA1...................................................................................................16-3 Table 16-3 Types and functions of the VA1 interfaces......................................................................................16-7 Table 16-4 Characteristic code for the VA1.......................................................................................................16-7 Table 16-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM.................................................16-7 Table 16-6 Optical specifications of the VA1....................................................................................................16-8 Table 16-7 Version description of the VA4.....................................................................................................16-10 Table 16-8 Functions and features of the VA4.................................................................................................16-10 Table 16-9 Types and functions of the VA4 interfaces ...................................................................................16-14 Table 16-10 Characteristic code for the VA4...................................................................................................16-14 Table 16-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 displayed on the NM.............................................16-14 Table 16-12 Optical specifications of the VA4................................................................................................16-15 Table 17-1 Functions and features of the DCU..................................................................................................17-3 Table 17-2 Types and functions of the DCU interfaces.....................................................................................17-5 Table 17-3 Characteristic code for the DCU......................................................................................................17-6 Table 17-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU displayed on the NM.................................................17-6 Table 17-5 Optical specifications of the DCU...................................................................................................17-7 Table 17-6 Functions and features of the GFU..................................................................................................17-9 Table 17-7 Types and functions of the GFU interfaces....................................................................................17-11 Table 17-8 Characteristic code for the GFU....................................................................................................17-12 Table 17-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the GFU displayed on the NM...............................................17-12 Table 17-10 Optical specifications of the GFU................................................................................................17-13 Table 18-1 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(16 mm2).....................................18-3 Table 18-2 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(25 mm2).....................................18-3

xlii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Tables

Table 18-3 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (35 mm2)....................................18-4 Table 18-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables...............................................................18-4 Table 18-5 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables....................................................................................18-5 Table 18-6 Technical parameters of subrack power cables................................................................................18-5 Table 18-7 Classification of optical fiber jumpers.............................................................................................18-6 Table 18-8 Classification of fiber connectors.....................................................................................................18-7 Table 18-9 Technical parameters of the cabinet door grounding cables............................................................18-9 Table 18-10 Technical parameters of the PDU grounding cable.....................................................................18-10 Table 18-11 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable....................................................................18-11 Table 18-12 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable..........................................................18-12 Table 18-13 Pin assignment of X1 ..................................................................................................................18-13 Table 18-14 Technical parameters of the alarm interface cable.......................................................................18-13 Table 18-15 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable...........................18-14 Table 18-16 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable.................18-14 Table 18-17 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port........................................................................................18-15 Table 18-18 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable....................................................................18-16 Table A-1 Indicators description of the cabinet...................................................................................................A-2 Table A-2 Indicators description of the subrack..................................................................................................A-2 Table A-3 Indicator description of the boards.....................................................................................................A-3 Table A-4 Indicator description of the SCC board..............................................................................................A-4 Table A-5 Indicator description of the FAN........................................................................................................A-6 Table A-6 Indicators description of the PIU........................................................................................................A-6 Table B-1 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU..............................................................................................B-4 Table B-2 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules..........................................................................B-4 Table B-3 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU.............................................................B-6 Table B-4 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules............................................................................B-6 Table B-5 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU..............................................................................................B-7 Table B-6 Characteristic code for the CMR2......................................................................................................B-8 Table B-7 Characteristic code for the CMR4......................................................................................................B-8 Table B-8 Characteristic code for the DMR1......................................................................................................B-9 Table B-9 Characteristic code for the MR2.......................................................................................................B-10 Table B-10 Characteristic code for the MR4.....................................................................................................B-10 Table B-11 Characteristic code for the MR8.....................................................................................................B-11 Table B-12 Characteristic code for the MCA4..................................................................................................B-12 Table B-13 Characteristic code for the MCA8..................................................................................................B-12 Table B-14 Characteristic code for the HBA.....................................................................................................B-13 Table B-15 Characteristic code for the OAU1..................................................................................................B-13 Table B-16 Characteristic code for the OBU1...................................................................................................B-14 Table B-17 Characteristic code for the OBU2...................................................................................................B-15 Table B-18 Characteristic code for the CRPC...................................................................................................B-15 Table B-19 Characteristic code for the D40......................................................................................................B-16 Table B-20 Characteristic code for the D40V...................................................................................................B-17 Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xliii

Tables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description Table B-21 Characteristic code for the FIU.......................................................................................................B-17 Table B-22 Characteristic code for the ITL.......................................................................................................B-18 Table B-23 Characteristic code for the M40......................................................................................................B-18 Table B-24 Characteristic code for the M40V...................................................................................................B-19 Table B-25 Characteristic code for the DCP.....................................................................................................B-19 Table B-26 Characteristic code for the OLP......................................................................................................B-20 Table B-27 Characteristic code for the SCS......................................................................................................B-20 Table B-28 Characteristic code for the VA1.....................................................................................................B-21 Table B-29 Characteristic code for the VA4.....................................................................................................B-21 Table B-30 Characteristic code for the DCU.....................................................................................................B-22 Table B-31 Characteristic code for the GFU.....................................................................................................B-22 Table D-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTU boards..................................................D-2 Table D-2 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards............................................D-17 Table D-3 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards............................................D-23 Table D-4 Quick reference table for optical amplifying unit............................................................................D-24 Table D-5 Quick reference table for CRPC ......................................................................................................D-25 Table D-6 Quick reference table for HBA.........................................................................................................D-26 Table D-7 Quick reference table for specifications of other boards..................................................................D-26 Table D-8 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board ............................................................................................................................................................................D-29 Table D-9 Basic functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards.............................................................D-29 Table D-10 Loopback function of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards......................................................D-32 Table D-11 Loop function of the Ethernet boards.............................................................................................D-33 Table D-12 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards..........................................................D-34 Table D-13 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards ........................................D-36 Table E-1 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards.....................................E-1

xliv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
The OptiX OSN 6800 Hardware Description describes the hardware architecture and composition of the equipment, including boards, interfaces, as well as their functions and parameters.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX iManager T2000 Version V100R004C01 V200R007C01

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:
l l l l l l l

Network Planning Engineer Hardware Installation Engineer Installation and Commissioning Engineer Field Maintenance Engineer Network Monitoring Engineer Data Configuration Engineer System Maintenance Engineer

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Organization
This document describes the cabinet, subrack, overview of boards and the function and the working principle of all the units. Chapter Chapter 1 Cabinet Chapter 2 Subrack Chapter 3 Frame Chapter 4 Overview of Boards Chapter 5 Optical Transponder Unit Chapter 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit Chapter 7 Cross-Connect Unit Chapter 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit Chapter 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit Chapter 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit Chapter 11 Optical Amplifying Unit Chapter 12 System Control and Communication Unit Chapter 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Chapter 14 Optical Protection Unit Chapter 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Description This chapter describes the mechanical structure and technical specifications of the cabinet. This chapter describes the mechanical structure, technical specifications, and interfaces of the subrack. This chapter describes the structure of the DCM frame and CRPC frame. This chapter describes the classification and appearance of boards. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical transponder units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of tributary units and line unit. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of cross-connect Units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical add and drop multiplexing units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing units.

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical amplifier units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of system control and communication units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical supervisory channel units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical protection units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of spectrum analyzer units.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

About This Document

Chapter Chapter 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Chapter 17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit Chapter 18 Cables Appendix A Indicators Appendix B Bar Code for Boards Appendix C Parameter Description Appendix D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Description This chapter describes the function and the working principle of variable optical attenuator units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical power and dispersion equalizing unit. This chapter describes the cables of the OptiX OSN 6800. This chapter describes the indicators of the OptiX OSN 6800. This chapter describes the bar codes of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800. This chapter describes the parameters of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800. This chapter describes the basic function of the optical transponder units and the tributary and line unit and the specifications of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800.

Appendix E Power This chapter describes the power consumption, weight and slots Consumption, Weight and of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800. Valid Slots of Boards Appendix F Glossary Appendix G Acronyms and Abbreviations This appendix lists the terms that are used in this document. This appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations that are used in this document.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows Symbol Description

DANGER

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance degradation, or unexpected results.

WARNING

CAUTION

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Symbol
TIP

Description Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save you time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

NOTE

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Terminal display is in Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

About This Document

Convention Boldface >

Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Based on Product Version V100R004C01

The update of contents is described as follows:
l

Some bugs in the manual are fixed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

About This Document

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Updates in Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Based on Product Version V100R004C01

The update of contents is described as follows:
l

Chapter 5 Optical Transponder Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN12LDM, TN11LDMD, TN11LDMS, TN11LQG, TN13LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS are added.

Chapter 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN11ND2, TN12NS2, TN12TDX, TN11TQX, TN11TOM, TN12TQM are added.

Chapter 7 Cross-Connect Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN12XCS are added. Chapter 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN11D08, TN11M08, TN12ITL are added.

Chapter 11 Optical Amplifying Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN11OAU102, TN11OAU105 are added.

Chapter 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN12SC1, TN12SC2 are added. Chapter 14 Optical Protection Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN12DCP, TN12OLP are added. Chapter 17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN11GFU are added.

Updates in Issue 03 (2008-03-08) Based on Product Version V100R003

The update of contents is described as follows:
l

Some bugs in the manual are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2008-01-21) Based on Product Version V100R003

The update of contents is described as follows:
l

Some bugs in the manual are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-12-25) Based on Product Version V100R003

The update of contents is described as follows:
l

Chapter 2 Subrack: Power consumption of the common units is added. Chapter 3 Frame: CRPC frame is added. Chapter 5 Optical Transponder Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the ECOM, LOG, LOM, LSXL, LSXLR, TMX boards are added.

Chapter 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit:

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

About This Document

Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TBE and TDX boards are added.
l

Chapter 8: Optical Mutiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the ITL board are added. Chapter 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the SBM2 board is added. Chapter 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the WSMD4 board is added. Chapter 11 Optical Amplifying Unit: Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the OBU2 and HBA boards are added. Chapter 15: Spectrum Analyzer Unit Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the WMU board are added. Chapter 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Description of the functions, principle and indexes of the TN12VA1 and TN12VA4 boards are added.

The structure is adjusted. Appendix "Quick" is added.

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-12-25) Based on Product Version V100R002

The update of contents is described as follows:
l

Chapter 2 Subrack: Power consumption of the common units is added. The structure is adjusted. Appendix "Quick" is added.

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-8-20) Based on Product Version V100R002

The update of contents is described as follows:
l

Chapter 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit: Description of the functions of the EOW interfaces (orderwire phone interfaces) on the SC1 and SC2 boards are added.

Updates in Issue 04 (2007-8-20) Based on Product Version V100R001

The update of contents is described as follows:
l

Chapter 2 Subrack:

Description of the appearance and functions of the fan tray assembly are added. Description of the functions, applications and indexes of the PIU board are added.

Chapter 5 Optical Transponder Unit: Description of eSFP optical module indexes are added. Chapter 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit: Description of the functions and principle of the DMR1 board are added.

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-6-29) Based on Product Version V100R001

The update of contents is described as follows:
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

About This Document

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Chapter 4 Overview of Boards: Description of the split ratio of the MON interface are added. Description of the electrical cross-connect capability of the OTU board and tributary/line unit are added.

Chapter 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit: Rules for wavelength allocation are added. Appendix C Parameters: This chapter is added to describe the parameter settings of each board on the T2000.

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-4-18) Based on Product Version V100R001

The update of contents is described as follows:
l l

The front panel diagrams of the boards are updated. The descriptions of subrack indicators are added.

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-2-14) Based on Product Version V100R001

The first commercial release of the OptiX OSN 6800 V100R001.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

1 Cabinet

1
About This Chapter

Cabinet

1.1 Cabinet Structure The OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transmission Platform (OptiX OSN 6800 for short) has hardware such as cabinet, subrack, DCM frame and board. 1.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet The ETSI cabinets can be of three heights respectively. Cabinets of different types can be configured with different quantity of OptiX OSN 6800 subracks. 1.3 Specifications The specifications of the integrated cabinet include dimensions, weight, maximum power, voltage, and so on. 1.4 DC Power Distribution Box A DC power distribution box is mounted at the top part of a cabinet. Its input interface area is divided into two parts: part A and part B. Each part contains two power input terminals and two power grounding terminals. That is, on the DC power distribution box, there are eight terminals in total.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

1 Cabinet

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

1.1 Cabinet Structure

The OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transmission Platform (OptiX OSN 6800 for short) has hardware such as cabinet, subrack, DCM frame and board. The OptiX OSN 6800 takes subracks as the basic working units. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has independent power supply and can be installed in ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet, standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet, or a 23-inch open rack. In typical configuration, the OptiX OSN 6800 is installed in ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet. The main frame of the ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet is a rack with a door fixed at the front, a rear door with air vents fixed at the back and movable side doors at both sides. Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of an OptiX OSN 6800 ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet. Figure 1-1 Appearance of an ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet

H W D

1-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

1 Cabinet

1.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet

The ETSI cabinets can be of three heights respectively. Cabinets of different types can be configured with different quantity of OptiX OSN 6800 subracks. Table 1-1 lists the full configuration of cabinets of different heights. When the cabinet is not fully configured, configure the subracks from bottom to top. Table 1-1 Full configuration of cabinets of different heights Item Quantity of configurable subracks in a ETSI 300 mm middle-column cabinet Quantity of configurable subracks in a standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet Quantity of configurable subracks in a 23inch open rack 2.2-m high cabinet 4 3 2.6-m high cabinet 4 4 23-inch open rack 4

NOTE

Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd. only provides the ETSI 300 mm middle-column cabinet and standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet.

1.3 Specifications
The specifications of the integrated cabinet include dimensions, weight, maximum power, voltage, and so on. Table 1-2 lists the technical specifications of the different types of cabinets. Table 1-2 Technical specifications of the cabinet Item Dimensions Weight Maximum power consumption (full configuration) Normal working voltage Working voltage range 2.2-m high cabinet 600 mm (W) 300 mm (D) 2200 mm (H) 69 kg 4800 W 2.6-m high cabinet 600 mm (W) 300 mm (D) 2600 mm (H) 80 kg 4800 W

-48 V DC/-60 V DC -40 V DCto -72 V DC

-48 V DC/-60 V DC -40 V DC to -72 V DC

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

1 Cabinet

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

1.4 DC Power Distribution Box

A DC power distribution box is mounted at the top part of a cabinet. Its input interface area is divided into two parts: part A and part B. Each part contains two power input terminals and two power grounding terminals. That is, on the DC power distribution box, there are eight terminals in total. Based on the current of the power supply equipment in the equipment room, there are two power supply modes:
l l

When the current of each power input is 63 A, four power inputs are required. When the current of each power input is 100 A to 128 A inclusive, one power input is required for part A and part B, respectively. That is, two inputs in total are required. In this mode, a junction box need be mounted. For details about the junction box, refer to Junction Box.

The power distribution box consists of part A and part B for mutual backup. Part A and part B access two -48 V DC power each.
l

For the two working inputs, the RTN1(+) and NEG1(-), and the RTN2(+) and NEG2(-) in part A are connected. For the two protection inputs, the RTN1(+) and NEG1(-), and the RTN2(+) and NEG2(-) in part B are connected.

The PDU provides twelve power output interfaces (For the OptiX OSN 6800, both parts A and B use only power switches SW2, SW3, SW4 and SW5 which correspond to four subracks respectively from bottom up.) to supply power to the subracks in the cabinet. Figure 1-2 shows the front panel of the DC power distribution box. Figure 1-2 Front panel of the DC power distribution box
1 2 3 3 2 1

4 OUTPUT

3 4 OUTPUT

ON OFF
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-) RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)

ON OFF
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6

INPUT

INPUT

1. Output cable terminal 3. Input cable terminal

2. Grounding screw 4. Power switch

Output cable terminal: There are six output cable terminals in each part, which lead in the power cables connected to the subracks. Grounding screw: It is used to access the protection grounding cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

1-4

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

1 Cabinet

Input cable terminal: Part A and part B connect to two -48 V DC power cables and two power grounding cables, respectively. Totally, the input cable terminals lead in four -48 V DC power cables and four power grounding cables. Power switch: There are six power switches matched for the corresponding output cable terminals in each part so as to control the power supply of each subrack.

Figure 1-3 shows the internal cable connection of the DC power distribution box. Figure 1-3 Internal cable connection of the DC power distribution box
OUTPUT

+- +

OUTPUT

+- +

ON OFF

+- +- +
ON OFF

+- +- +

+
INPUT

+
INPUT

In part A, the input cable terminals RTN1(+) and NEG1(-) are in one group. They supply power to output cable terminals 1, 2, and 3. The corresponding power switches are respectively SW1, SW2, and SW3. In part A, the input cable terminals RTN2(+) and NEG2(-) are in one group. They supply power to output cable terminals 4, 5, and 6. The corresponding power switches are respectively SW4, SW5, and SW6. Part B is the same.

Junction Box
When the current of each power input is 100 A to 128 A inclusive, a junction box need be mounted. One input is required for part A and part B, respectively. That is, two inputs in total are required. In this case, a power distribution box need be mounted on each part.Figure 1-4 and Figure 1-5 show the structure and mounting position of the junction box. Figure 1-4 Junction box structure

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-5

1 Cabinet

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 1-5 Junction box mounting position

1-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2 Subrack

2
About This Chapter

Subrack

2.1 Structure The OptiX OSN 6800 takes subracks as the basic working units. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has independent power supply. 2.2 Slot Description The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, defined as IU1 to IU21 from left to right. 2.3 Fan Area In the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray assembly and air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned. 2.4 PIU PIU: power interface unit 2.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

2 Subrack

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 6800 takes subracks as the basic working units. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has independent power supply. Figure 2-1 shows the structure of the subrack. Figure 2-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram
1

2 3

4 5

1. Indicator 4. Fan tray assembly 7. Mounting ear

2. Board area 5. Air filter

3. Fiber cabling area 6. Fiber spool

NOTE

The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.
l l l

Indicators: They indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack. Board area: All service boards are in this area. Totally 21 slots are available. Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of the boards are routed to the area before reaching the matched side of the cabinet. The mechanical VOA is also installed in this area. Fan tray assembly: This area contains 10 fans for ventilation and heat dissipation of the subrack. Air filter: It protects the subrack from outside dust in the air. It needs to be taken out and cleaned periodically. Fiber spool: The fiber spool serves to coil the extra fibers. Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. The fibers whose extras are coiled in the fiber spool on the cabinet side enter another subrack. Mounting ears: They fix the subrack in the cabinet.

2-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

2 Subrack

Interface area: This area is behind the subrack indicator panel, providing functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.

Table 2-1 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. Table 2-1 Technical specifications of the subrack Item Dimensions Weight (empty subracka) Maximum power consumption Rated working current Nominal working voltage Working voltage range Specification 487 mm (W) 295 mm (D) 400 mm (H) 13 kg 1200 W 25 A -48 V DC/-60 V DC -40 V DCto -72 V DC

a: The empty subrack means no board is installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly and no air filter is installed.

Table 2-2 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 fan tray assembly. Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Specification 493.7 mm (W) 266.6 mm (D) 56.1 mm (H) 3.6 kg 120 W

Table 2-3 lists the power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800. Table 2-3 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800 Unit Name Subrack OTU subrack Maximum Power Consumptiona 640 W Remarks It is the power consumption when the subrack is installed with seventeen OTU10G (LSX), one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

2 Subrack

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Unit Name OTM subrack

Maximum Power Consumptiona 520 W

Remarks It is the power consumption when the subrack is installed with one M40V, one D40V, one OAU, one OBU, eight OTU10G (LSX), one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly. It is the power consumption when the subrack is installed with two OBU101, two OBU103, four VA1, one SC2, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly. It is the power consumption when the subrack is installed with two OAU101, four VA1, two MR4, four OTU10G, one SC2, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly. It is the power consumption when the cabinet is installed with two OTU subrack and one OTM subrack.

OLA subrack

270 W

OADM subrack

380 W

Cabinet

OTM cabinet (4010Gbits)

1800 W

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module.

NOTE

The power consumption value in the table is the measured value when the ambient temperature is 25 . During the starting up of the equipment or in high or low temperature, the power consumption of the equipment increases. Hence, the actual power consumption of the equipment is 1.2 to 1.5 times of the value in the table.

2.2 Slot Description

The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, defined as IU1 to IU21 from left to right. Slots of the subrack is shown in Figure 2-2.

2-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2 Subrack

Figure 2-2 Slots of the subrack

Board area

X C I I I I I I I I S U U U U U U U U / 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I U 9

X C S / I U 1 0
5

I U 1 1

I U 1 2

I U 1 3

I U 1 4

I U 1 5

I U 1 6

S C C / I U 1 7

P I S U C C P / I I U U 1 A 8 U X

IU19

IU20

IU21

VOA area

l l l l l l

IU1-IU17 are for service boards. IU21 is for the AUX. IU19 and IU20 are for the PIU. IU18 is for the active SCC. IU17 is available for the standby SCC or the other service boards. IU9 and IU10 are available for the XCS or for the other service boards.

Mapping of Pair Slots

Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes. For the two boards in the paired slots, the inter-board cross-connection can be directly configured, and the cross-connect grooming of services can be realized without the cross-connect board. The OptiX OSN 6800 supports eight pair slots, which are IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16. The pairs slots support distributed grooming except IU9 and IU10.

Mapping of Boards and Slots

Table 2-4 shows the mapping between boards and slots of the OptiX OSN 6800. Table 2-4 Mapping between boards and slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 Board TN11AUX TN11CMR2 TN11CMR4 TN11D40 TN11D40V
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Available slot IU21 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU15 IU1-IU15

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-5

2 Subrack

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board TN11DCP/ TN12DCP TN11DCU TN11DMR1 TN11ECOM TN11FIU/ TN12FIU TN11GFU TN11HBA TN11ITL/ TN12ITL TN11L4G TN11LDGD TN11LDGS TN12LDM TN11LDMD TN11LDMS TN11LOG TN11LOM TN11LQG TN13LQM TN11LQMS/ TN12LQMS TN11LQMD/ TN12LQMD TN11LSX/ TN12LSX TN11LSXL TN11LSXLR TN11LSXR TN11LWX2 TN11LWXD TN11LWXS/ TN12LWXS TN11M40 TN11M40V TN11MCA4

Available slot IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU16 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU14 IU1-IU14 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU15 IU1-IU15 IU1-IU16

2-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2 Subrack

Board TN11MCA8 TN11MR2 TN11MR4 TN11MR8 TN11ND2 TN11NS2/ TN12NS2 TN11OAU1 TN11OBU1 TN11OBU2 TN11OLP/ TN12OLP TN11RMU9 TN11ROAM TN11SBM2 TN11SC1/ TN12SC1 TN11SC2/ TN12SC2 TN11SCC TN11SCS TN11TBE TN11TDG TN11TDX/ TN12TDX TN11TOM TN11TMX TN11TQM/ TN12TQM TN11TQS TN11TQX TN11TSXL TN11VA1/ TN12VA1 TN11VA4/ TN12VA4 TN11WMU TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9

Available slot IU1-IU16 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU15 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU17, IU18 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1, IU4, IU11, IU14 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU16

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-7

2 Subrack

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board TN13WSM9 TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9 TN11WSMD4 TN11XCS/ TN12XCS

Available slot IU1-IU15 IU1-IU16 IU1-IU15 IU1-IU16 IU9, IU10

2.3 Fan Area

In the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray assembly and air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.

Appearance
Figure 2-3 shows the appearance of a fan area. Figure 2-3 Appearance of a fan area

1. Air filter

2. Fan running indicators

3. Fans (ten in total)

Functions and Features

Table 2-5 shows the function of a fan area. Table 2-5 Functions Function Basic function Commissioning control Describes Realizes heat dissipation on an NE, so that the NE is able to work normally and effectively under the designed temperature.
l

Realizes intelligent speed regulating of fans. The speed varies automatically with the temperature. The fan speed can be manually adjusted.

2-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2 Subrack

The fan area realizes heat dissipation on an NE. Hence, the NE is able to work normally and effectively under the designed temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part of the subrack. It adopts blowing method, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 6800. Figure 2-4 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet

Board area

Optical fiber laying area Fan tray assembly Air inlet

Figure 2-5 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Airduct frame

Air outlet

Board area

Fan tray assembly

Optical fiber laying area

Air inlet

NOTE

When multiple subracks are used, an airduct frame is required to help in heat dissipation.

2.4 PIU
PIU: power interface unit

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-9

2 Subrack

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2.4.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the PIU board is available, that is TN21. 2.4.2 Application The OptiX OSN 6800 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup. 2.4.3 Functions and Features The PIU is an power interface unit. It accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering functions. 2.4.4 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the board front panel. 2.4.5 Valid Slots The PIU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the PIU are IU19 and IU20. 2.4.6 Specifications of the PIU Specifications include performance indexes, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

2.4.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the PIU board is available, that is TN21.

2.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 6800 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup.

2.4.3 Functions and Features

The PIU is an power interface unit. It accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering functions. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 2-6. Table 2-6 Functions and features of the PIU Function and Feature Basic function Description Accesses DC power from -40 V to -72 V for the system. Provides protection and filtering functions for the accessed power. Provides the fan tray assembly with a -48 V DC power after voltage reduction.

2.4.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the board front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 2-6 shows the PIU front panel.
2-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2 Subrack

Figure 2-6 PIU front panel

PIU
RUN

NEG(-) RTN(+)

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l

Running status indicator (RUN) - green

Interface
There is only one power interface on the front panel of the PIU board. The interface is used to access the DC power from -40 V to -72 V.

2.4.5 Valid Slots

The PIU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the PIU are IU19 and IU20.

2.4.6 Specifications of the PIU

Specifications include performance indexes, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Performance Indexes
Table 2-7 Performance Indexes of the PIU Board Item Number of DC input power supplies Input DC power voltage range Input DC power current Unit V DC A Value 1 -40 to -72 30

Mechanical Specifications
l l

Dimensions of front panel: 65 mm (H) x 28 mm (W) (2.6 in. (H) x 1.1 in. (W)) Weight: 1.10 lb.(0.5 kg)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-11

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

2 Subrack

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 35 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 37 W

2.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces

The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance. These interfaces are located in the interface area of the subrack and on the front panel of the AUX, as shown in Figure 2-7. Figure 2-7 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
COM ETH3 ALM01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM04 SERIAL ALMI1 ALMI2 LAMP1 ALMP2

xcs
STAT ACT PROG SRV

SCC
STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC

PIU
RUN

NEG(-) RTN(+)

SubRACK_ID

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 ETH1 ETH2

Fan

RESET STAT PROG LAMP TEST

AUX

ALM CUT

xcs

SCC

NOTE

The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.

2.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area The interface area provides functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface. 2.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board
2-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2 Subrack

The AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and emergent communication interface. 2.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces The interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 used for data communication and equipment maintenance use the RJ-45 and the DB9 connectors. The pin assignment figures and the functions of the pins are given in this section.

2.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area

The interface area provides functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface. The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Figure 2-8 shows the front panel. Figure 2-8 Interfaces in the interface area
COM ETH3 ALM 01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM 04 SERIAL ALM I1 ALM I2 LAM P1 LAM P2

Description of interfaces in the interface area is list in Table 2-8. Table 2-8 Description of interfaces in the interface area Interface Commissioning interface Inter-subrack communication interface Silk-screen COM ETH3 Connector RJ-45 RJ-45 Function It is for the commissioning. Connects the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack through a network cable to such interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-13

2 Subrack

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface Alarm output and cascading interface

Silk-screen ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMO3 ALMO4

Connector RJ-45

Function The definitions for the pins of the ALM01 and ALM02 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively. The definitions for the pins of the ALM03 and ALM04 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/ cascading, respectively. Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to realize integrated display of alarms. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm outputs. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded. The OAM interface is a serial NM interface, providing functions of serial NM and supporting X.25 protocol. When this interface is a COA management interface, it can manage external equipment such as COA, TDA, and DCU. The interface rate is 9.6 kbit/s. External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm inputs. The name of the eight alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to realize remote monitoring of external alarms. This interface drives the running indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.

OAM interface

SERIAL

DB9

Alarm input interface

ALMI1 ALMI2

RJ-45

Subrack alarm output and cascading interface

LAMP1 LAMP2

RJ-45

2-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2 Subrack

2.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board

The AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and emergent communication interface. Figure 2-9 shows the front panel of the AUX. The AUX is inserted in slot IU21. Figure 2-9 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 ETH1 ETH2

STAT PROG

AUX

Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board is list in Table 2-9. Table 2-9 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board Interface NE management interface Silk-screen NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 Connector RJ-45 Function
l

Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 through a network cable to that on the T2000 server to achieve the management of the T2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. Connects the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.

Inter-subrack communication interface

ETH1/ETH2

RJ-45

Connects the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack through a network cable to such interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-15

2 Subrack

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces

The interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 used for data communication and equipment maintenance use the RJ-45 and the DB9 connectors. The pin assignment figures and the functions of the pins are given in this section.

Pin assignment of the RJ-45 Connector

Figure 2-10 shows the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector. Figure 2-10 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

Pin Assignment of the DB9 Connector

Figure 2-11 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector. Figure 2-11 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

Pin Assignment of the COM Interface

For the pin assignment of the COM interface, refer to Table 2-10 . Table 2-10 Pin assignment of the COM interface Pin 1 2
2-16

Signal ETNTX_P_1 ETNTX_N_1

Function Transmits the data positive Transmits the data negative

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2 Subrack

Pin 3 4 5 6 7 8

Signal ETNRX_P_1 NC NC ETNRX_N_1 NC NC

Function Receives the data positive Not connected Not connected Receives data negative Not connected Not connected

Pin Assignment of the ETH3 Interface

For the pin assignment of the ETH3 interface, refer to Table 2-11. Table 2-11 Pin assignment of the ETH3 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH3_TXP Function Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for intersubrack ordinary communications Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for intersubrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for intersubrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for intersubrack emergent communications

ETH3_TXN

3 4

ETH3_RXP ETH3_CRIT_TXP

ETH3_CRIT_TXN

6 7 8

ETH3_RXN ETH3_CRIT_RXP ETH3_CRIT_RXN

Pin Assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces, refer to Table 2-12.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-17

2 Subrack

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 2-12 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N Function Outputs the critical alarm signal positive Outputs the critical alarm signal negative Outputs the major alarm signal positive Outputs the minor alarm signal positive Outputs the minor alarm signal negative Outputs the major alarm signal negative Alarm signal output 1 positive Alarm signal output 1 negative

Pin Assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces, refer to Table 2-13. Table 2-13 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N ALM_SWITCH_OUT6P ALM_SWITCH_OUT6N Function Alarm signal output 2 positive Alarm signal output 2 negative Alarm signal output 3 positive Alarm signal output 4 positive Alarm signal output 4 negative Alarm signal output 3 negative Alarm signal output 5 positive Alarm signal output 5 negative

Pin Assignment of the SERIAL Interface

For the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 2-14.
2-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2 Subrack

Table 2-14 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal N.C RXD TXD DTR GND F_RS232RX F_RS232TX GND 5VOADM Function Not defined Receive end of data Transmit end of data Data terminal equipment ready Ground F&f receive end of data F&f transmit end of data GND Power supply for OADM

Pin Assignment of the ALMI1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface, refer to Table 2-15. Table 2-15 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal SWITCHI_IN1 GND SWITCHI_IN2 SWITCHI_IN3 GND GND SWITCHI_IN4 GND Function Alarm input 1 Ground Alarm input 2 Alarm input 3 Ground Ground Alarm input 4 Ground

Pin Assignment of the ALMI2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface, refer to Table 2-16.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-19

2 Subrack

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 2-16 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal SWITCHI_IN5 GND SWITCHI_IN6 SWITCHI_IN7 GND GND SWITCHI_IN8 GND Function Alarm input 5 Ground Alarm input 6 Alarm input 7 Ground Ground Alarm input 8 Ground

Pin Assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 2-17. Table 2-17 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal CRIT_ALMP CRIT_ALMN MAJ_ALMP RUNP RUNN MAJ_ALMN MIN_ALMP MIN_ALMN Function Critical alarm signal positive Critical alarm signal negative Major alarm signal positive Power indicating signal positive Power indicating signal negative Major alarm signal positive Minor alarm signal positive Minor alarm signal negative

Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface, refer to Table 2-18. Table 2-18 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface Pin 1 Signal NM_ETNTXP Function NM communications, transmits the data positive
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

2-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2 Subrack

Pin 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Signal NM_ETNTXN NM_ETNRXP NC NC NM_ETNRXN NC NC

Function NM communications, transmits the data negative NM communications, receives the data positive Not connected. Not connected. NM communications, receives the data negative Not connected. Not connected.

Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface, refer to Table 2-19. Table 2-19 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal NMJL_ETNTXP NMJL_ETNTXN NMJL_ETNRXP NC NC NMJL_ETNRXN NC NC Function Transmits the concatenated data positive for NM communications Transmits the concatenated data negative for NM communications Receives the concatenated data positive for NM communications Not connected Not connected Receives the concatenated data negative for NM communications Not connected Not connected

Pin Assignment of the ETH1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 2-20.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-21

2 Subrack

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 2-20 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH1_TXP Function Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for intersubrack ordinary communications Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for intersubrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for intersubrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for intersubrack emergent communications

ETH1_TXN

3 4

ETH1_RXP ETH1_CRIT_TXP

ETH1_CRIT_TXN

6 7 8

ETH1_RXN ETH1_CRIT_RXP ETH1_CRIT_RXN

Pin Assignment of the ETH2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the ETH2 interface, refer to Table 2-21. Table 2-21 Pin assignment of the ETH2 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH2_TXP Function Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for intersubrack ordinary communications Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications

ETH2_TXN

3 4

ETH2_RXP ETH2_CRIT_TXP

2-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2 Subrack

Pin 5

Signal ETH2_CRIT_TXN

Function Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for intersubrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for intersubrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for intersubrack emergent communications

6 7 8

ETH2_RXN ETH2_CRIT_RXP ETH2_CRIT_RXN

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-23

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

3 Frame

3
About This Chapter

Frame

3.1 DCM Frame The DCM frame can be used to hold DCM modules which compensate the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber, so as to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. 3.2 CRPC Frame CRPC frame is used to place CRPC board, fan tray assembly and power supply box. The frame is installed into the cabinet.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

3 Frame

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

3.1 DCM Frame

The DCM frame can be used to hold DCM modules which compensate the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber, so as to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight types of DCMs of eight compensation distance specifications: 5 km (3.1 mi.), 10 km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.), 100 km (62.1 mi.) and 120 km (74.6 mi.). Each DCM frame can hold two DCMs at most. The DCM frame is fixed onto the columns of the cabinet by mounting brackets and screws, as shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 DCM frame in the cabinet

2 1

1. DCM frame

2. DCMs

3.2 CRPC Frame

CRPC frame is used to place CRPC board, fan tray assembly and power supply box. The frame is installed into the cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows the appearance of a CRPC frame. In the middle of the frame, the one with the front panel is the CRPC board. The fan tray assembly is at the left of the board. At the right are two power supplies as mutual backup.

3-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

3 Frame

Figure 3-2 Appearance of CRPC frame

2 1

1: Fan tray assembly

2: CRPC board

3: Power distribution box

Table 3-1 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame Item Mechanical Specifications Weight Value 535 mm (W) 257 mm (D) 86 mm (H) (21.1 in. (W) 10.1 in. (D) 3.4 in. (H)) 6.6 lb.(3 kg)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

4 Overview of Boards

4
About This Chapter

Overview of Boards

4.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, imensions and the laser safety label. 4.2 Bar Code for Boards There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code. 4.3 Board Category The OptiX OSN 6800 has 14 kinds of boards.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

4 Overview of Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

4.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions

The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, imensions and the laser safety label. 4.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board. 4.1.2 Laser Safety Label Lasers are of four safety levels according to the value of the output power.

4.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions

This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.

CAUTION
Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is well grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board. Table 4-1 shows the board appearance and dimensions of the OptiX OSN 6800. Table 4-1 The board appearance and dimensions Board appearance Board name L4G Number of slots occupied 1 Height (mm) 264.6 Width (mm) 25.4 Depth (mm) 220.0

4-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

4 Overview of Boards

Board appearance

Board name OAU1

Number of slots occupied 2

Height (mm) 264.6

Width (mm) 50.8

Depth (mm) 220.0

M40

264.6

76.2

220.0

AUX

107.6

25.4

220.0

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

4 Overview of Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board appearance

Board name LSXL

Number of slots occupied 4

Height (mm) 264.6

Width (mm) 101.6

Depth (mm) 220.0

4.1.2 Laser Safety Label

Lasers are of four safety levels according to the value of the output power.

WARNING
It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface during the installation and maintenance of the fiber, because the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes. Table 4-2 shows the laser levels of the unit. Table 4-2 Laser levels Laser Level Class 1
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

Label

Reference Power Range <10.00 dBm (<10.00 mW)

Class 1M

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

10.00 dBm - 22.15 dBm (10.00 mW - 164 mW)

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

4-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

4 Overview of Boards

Laser Level Class 3B

Label
LASER RADIATION AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT

Reference Power Range 22.15 dBm - 27.00 dBm (164.00 mW - 500.00 mW)

Class 4

LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED RADIATION

>27.00 dBm (>500.00 mW)

CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT

4.2 Bar Code for Boards

There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code. 4.2.1 Overview There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 4.2.2 Characteristic Code For the detailed description of the board characteristic code, refer to Appendix B.

4.2.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. The information of a bar code includes can be queried on the T2000, for details refer to Supporting Tasks.
NOTE

Such information as frequency of signals queried on the T2000 is a commissioning value, different from that on the bar code.

Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 show a bar code.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

4 Overview of Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 4-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)

Delivery information Board version (TN11) Board model number

2102313242 1059000003 Y TN1M1L4G 01 19210PA

BOM Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly) Board name Characteristic code

Figure 4-2 Description of the bar code (example 2)

Delivery information Board version Board model number

030FBQ1073000001 N TN11MR4 01 -94509520

Last four numbers of the BOM Environmental friendliness flag (N: Environmentally unfriendly) Board name Characteristic code

4.2.2 Characteristic Code

For the detailed description of the board characteristic code, refer to Appendix B.

4.3 Board Category

The OptiX OSN 6800 has 14 kinds of boards.
l l l l l l l l l l

Optical transponder unit Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit Optical add and drop multiplexing unit Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit Tributary unit Line unit Cross-connect unit Optical amplifier unit Optical supervisory channel unit System control and communication unit
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

4-6

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l l l l

4 Overview of Boards

Optical protection unit Spectrum analyzer unit Variable optical attenuator unit Optical power and dispersion slope equalizing unit

Table 4-3 shows the board list. Table 4-3 Board list Board Category Optical transponder unit Board Name ECOM L4G LDGS LDGD LDM LDMD Board Description Enhanced communication interface unit Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board (AFEC) 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
4-7

LDMS

LOG LOM LQG LQM LQMS

LQMD

LSX LSXL
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4 Overview of Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Category

Board Name LSXLR LSXR LWXS

Board Description 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit Arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) Arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit) Arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dualwavelength conversion board 4 channels STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board 40-channel multiplexing unit 40-channel demultiplexing unit 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA Fiber interface unit interleaver board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/ drop multiplexing unit 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board 9-port ROADM multiplexing board reconfigurable optical adding board 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

LWXD

LWX2 TMX Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit M40 D40 M40V D40V FIU ITL Optical add and drop multiplexing unit MR2 MR4 MR8 CMR2 CMR4 DMR1 SBM2 Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit RMU9 ROAM WSD9

4-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

4 Overview of Boards

Board Category

Board Name WSM9 WSMD4

Board Description 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board 2 x GE tributary service processing board 2 x 10G Tributary service processing board 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 2 x (4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2) opticalinterface board 4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2 optical interface board cross-connect and clock unit high-power booster amplifier board optical amplifying unit optical booster unit optical booster unit case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for Cband unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit system control and communication Unit system auxiliary interface unit 2-channel optical path protection unit

Tributary unit

TBE TDG TDX TOM TQM TQS TQX TSXL

Line unit

ND2 NS2

Cross-connect unit Optical amplifier unit

XCS HBA OAU1 OBU1 OBU2 CRPC

Optical supervisory channel unit

SC1 SC2

System control and communication unit Optical protection unit

SCC AUX DCP

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

4 Overview of Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Category

Board Name OLP SCS

Board Description optical line protection unit sync optical channel separator unit 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit wavelength monitored unit 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit dispersion compensation board gain flatness unit

Spectrum analyzer unit

MCA4 MCA8 WMU

Variable optical attenuator unit Optical power and dispersion equalizing unit

VA1 VA4 DCU GFU

4-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

5
About This Chapter

Optical Transponder Unit

5.1 ECOM ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit 5.2 L4G L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity 5.3 LDGD LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving 5.4 LDGS LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving 5.5 LDM LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 5.6 LDMD LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 5.7 LDMS LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 5.8 LOG LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit 5.9 LOM LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board (AFEC) 5.10 LQG LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board 5.11 LQM LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 5.12 LQMD LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-1

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5.13 LQMS LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 5.14 LSX LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 5.15 LSXL LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 5.16 LSXLR LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit 5.17 LSXR LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit 5.18 LWX2 LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board 5.19 LWXD LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit) 5.20 LWXS LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) 5.21 TMX TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board

5-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

5.1 ECOM
ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit 5.1.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the ECOM board is available, that is TN11. 5.1.2 Application The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service. 5.1.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the ECOM are cross-connection at the electrical layer and wavelength tunable. 5.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ECOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ECOM front panel. 5.1.6 Valid Slots The ECOM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ECOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 5.1.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.1.8 Specifications of the ECOM Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.1.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the ECOM board is available, that is TN11.

5.1.2 Application
The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.

Application Scenario 1: Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 900A
The management signal and service signal of the OptiX OSN 900A are together transmitted to the OptiX OSN 6800 over the line. The FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800 separates the signal received into management signal and service signal. The service signal is processed by the OTU board. The management signal is accessed by the ECOM board through the FE port and then is transmitted to the SCC board through the backplane. For the position of the ECOM in the network with the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 900A, see Figure 5-1.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-3

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-1 Position of the ECOM in the network with the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 900A
OptiX OSN 900A Service signal F I Management signal U OTU

ECOM

ETH

OptiX OSN 6800 SCC

OptiX OSN 900A

Management signal F I Service signal U

OTU

NOTE

Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.

Application Scenario 2: Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service

When used for convergence or deconvergence, the ECOM board can be used only in the CWDM system. For the position of the ECOM in the WDM system, see Figure 5-2. Figure 5-2 Position of the ECOM in the WDM system
GE
1 GE

MUX ECOM

DMUX ECOM

FE 8

FE
8

DMUX
GE

MUX

GE

Client side

Client side

NOTE

The MUX and DMUX boards shown in the figure are the OADM boards used in the CWDM system.

5.1.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the ECOM are cross-connection at the electrical layer and wavelength tunable. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-1.

5-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-1 Functions and features of the ECOM Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Achieves the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 900A. Converges/deconverges 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.

Client-side service type WDM specification Cross-connect capabilities

FE Supports the CWDM specifications. Supports the transmission of one GE signal each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of one GE signal to the paired slots through the backplane. Not Supported

Tunable wavelength function Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function eSFP Loopback

l l

Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.

Not Supported Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Not Supported Supported Supported

5.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The ECOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 show the functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM

FE Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8 Backplane(management signal transmission)

WDM side O/E E/O

Client-side optical module

E/O L2 switching module Cross-connect module O/E

WDM-side optical module

OUT

IN

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

DC power supply from a backplane

Signal FlowAchieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 900A
The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals. In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the SCC board, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of FE signals (management signals) from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module, and groomed by the backplane to the SCC board through the ETH interface.

Receive direction The L2 switching module receives FE signals from the SCC board, and then sends them to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the FE electrical signals, and then outputs the optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

5-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM

GE Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8

Backplane(service cross-connection) WDM side

O/E E/O
Client-side optical module

E/O L2 switching module Cross-connect module O/E

WDM-side optical module

OUT

IN

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

DC power supply from a backplane

Signal Flow (Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service)

The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals. In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the WDM side of the ECOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as converging eight channels of FE signals into one channel of GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of GE signals to the cross-connect module. The cross-connect module performs operations such as the service cross-connection of the GE signals. The GE signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths GE optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant GE optical signals at CWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

After the O/E conversion, the GE signals are sent to the cross-connect module. The module performs operations such as the service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs one channel of GE signals. The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends a maximum of eight channels of FE signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of eight channels of FE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from eight channels of internal electrical signals to FE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of GE optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. Realizes the forwarding of the service signals. Realizes the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the ECOM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

L2 switching module

Cross-connect module

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

5.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ECOM front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-5 shows the ECOM front panel. Figure 5-5 ECOM front panel

ECOM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 OUT IN

ECOM

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-9

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the ECOM front panel. Table 5-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 5-2 Types and functions of the ECOM interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT

LC

TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.1.6 Valid Slots

The ECOM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ECOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

5.1.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-3. Table 5-3 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ECOM displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3
5-10

Interface on the NM 1 3 4 5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Interface on the Panel TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8

Interface on the NM 6 7 8 9 10

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Laser Status Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Board Mode

Port Description
Figure 5-6 shows the NM ports of the ECOM board. Table 5-4 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 5-6 Port diagram of the ECOM
Client side
PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8 PORT9 PORT10

WDM side

VCTRUNK1

101( AP1/AP1)-1

1(IN/OUT)-1

L2 switching module

Cross-connect WDM-side optical module module

Table 5-4 Meaning of NM port of the ECOM Port Name PORT3-PORT10 Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/ TX1-RX8/TX8.
5-11

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Port Name VCTRUNK1 AP1 IN/OUT

Meaning Internal virtual port. Internal convergence port. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the ECOM board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM interfaces on the T2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Service Mode and HUB Mode.
NOTE

If the HUB mode need be configured, there must be one-to-one connection between ports, which need not be set on the T2000.

If the service mode need be configured, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the T2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the eight channels of FE optical signals and one channel of GE electrical signals accessed from the client-side ports is realized through the L2 switching module. Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the T2000. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and AP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for the inter-board services deconvergence), as shown (1) in Figure 5-7. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for the inter-board services convergence), as shown (2) in Figure 5-7. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnections of GE level between the AP port and the IN/OUT port of the ECOM, realizing the cross-connect grooming of GE services.

5-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-7 Cross-connection diagram of the ECOM

Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

WDM side

Client side
1 101(AP1/AP1)-1 2

WDM side

Cross-connect module

ECOM board
1 2

The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

5.1.8 Specifications of the ECOM

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-5 Specifications of optical module at the client side(FE) Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 100BASE-FX 1310 nm-40 km NRZ 40 100BASE-FX 1310 nm-2 km NRZ 2

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

dBm dBm dB nm

0 -5 10 1310

-14 -19 10 1310

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 100BASE-FX 1310 nm-40 km 100BASE-FX 1310 nm-2 km IEEE802.3zcompliant

IEEE802.3zcompliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity (EOL) Minimum receiver overload dBm dBm PIN -30 -10 PIN -30 -14

Table 5-6 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side (FE) Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB 5 0 9 1471 to 1611 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3zcompliant 5 0 8.2 1471 to 1611 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R

5-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM) 2.67Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM) APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

nm dBm dBm dB

PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Table 5-7 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the CWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R

Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-15

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

nm dBm dBm dB

PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.0 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 19.6 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 21.6 W

5.2 L4G
L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity 5.2.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the L4G board is available, that is TN11. 5.2.2 Application The L4G is a type of optical transponder unit. The L4G realizes the conversion between six GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. 5.2.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the L4G are tunable wavelength, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The L4G board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the L4G front panel. 5.2.6 Valid Slots
5-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

The L4G occupies one slot. The valid slots for the L4G are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 5.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.2.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.2.9 Specifications of the L4G Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.2.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the L4G board is available, that is TN11.

5.2.2 Application
The L4G is a type of optical transponder unit. The L4G realizes the conversion between six GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the L4G in the WDM system, see Figure 5-8. Figure 5-8 Position of the L4G in the WDM system
1 GE 6 Client side WDM side L4G G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1/ G.694.2 L4G 6 Client side 1 GE

NOTE

The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

5.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the L4G are tunable wavelength, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-8.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-8 Functions and features of the L4G Function and Feature Basic function Description Converges up to six non-full bandwidth GE service signals into four GE service signals and multiplexes these four signals into an OTU 5G/FEC 5G signal. Converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G. 694.2. The reverse process is similar. GE Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane.
l

Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities OTN function

Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU5G signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU5G and ODU5G. Supports TCM function for ODU5G.

l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.

5-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature Protection scheme

Description
l l l l l l

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the VLAN SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection. Supports the MS SNCP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side MAC PHY Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The L4G board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the L4G.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G

GE
Client side RX1 RX2 RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6 E/O O/E
6GE 4GE

Backplane(service cross-connection)
WDM side E/O

L2 switching module
4GE

GE CrossOTN encapsulation connect processing and mapping module module module

OUT

O/E IN WDM-side optical module

Client-side optical 6GE module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the L4G board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the L4G board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the L4G to the WDM side of the L4G, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives a maximum of six channels of flat-rate GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the six channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of four channels of GE signals to the signal processing module. The signal processing module performs operations such as the service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals. The OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU 5G/ FEC 5G optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU 5G/

5-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

FEC 5G optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU 5G/FEC 5G in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of GE signals. The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends six channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of six channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from six channels of internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. Realizes the forwarding of the service signals. Realizes the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals.

L2 switching module

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the L4G and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.

GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU 5G/ FEC 5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-21

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Realizes the framing of OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, processes the overheads of the OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the L4G front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-10 shows the L4G front panel.

5-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-10 L4G front panel

L4G
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 OUT IN

L4G

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the L4G front panel. Table 5-9 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-23

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-9 Types and functions of the L4G interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT

LC

TX1-TX6 RX1-RX6

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.2.6 Valid Slots

The L4G occupies one slot. The valid slots for the L4G are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

5.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.2.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-10. Table 5-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the L4G displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT TX1/RX1
5-24

Interface on the NM 1 3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Interface on the Panel TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6

Interface on the NM 4 5 6 7 8

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown Service Mode FEC Working State Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type LPT Enabled SD Trigger Condition

Port Description
Figure 5-11 describes the NM ports of the L4G board. Table 5-11 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 5-11 Port diagram of the L4G
Client side PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8
VCTRUNK1 101(AP1/AP1)-1 VCTRUNK2 102(AP2/AP2)-1 VCTRUNK3 103(AP3/AP3)-1 VCTRUNK4 104(AP4/AP4)-1 L2 swithing module

WDM side 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1

Cross-connect Service processing WDM-side optical module module module

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-25

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-11 Meaning of NM port of the L4G Port Name PORT3-PORT8 VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4 AP1-AP4 LP IN/OUT Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX6/TX6. Internal virtual port. Internal convergence port. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the L4G board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the T2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the six channels of GE optical signals and the four channels of GE electrical signals accessed from the clientside ports is realized through the L2 switching module.
NOTE

One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 1.25 Gbit/s.
l

Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the T2000. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnection between the AP and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be realized:

Create the cross-connection between the internal AP and LP ports of the L4G board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 5-12. Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the L4G board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-12. Create the cross-connection between the AP port or RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the L4G board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-12.

5-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-12 Cross-connection diagram of the L4G

Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1/3(RX1/TX1)-1 4 102(AP2/AP2)-1/4(RX2/TX2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1/5(RX3/TX3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1/6(RX4/TX4)-1 6 5 3 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(LP/LP)-1

WDM side

Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1 2 1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

WDM side

Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board

L4G board
1 2 3 4 5 6

The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board The WDM side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other board (It is used to realize the passing-through of the broadcast services), as shown (5) in Figure 5-12. Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the AP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service deconvergence), as shown (6) in Figure 5-12. The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.

5.2.9 Specifications of the L4G

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-27

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-12 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

5-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-13 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km km NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-80km NRZ 80

Line code format Target distance

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-29

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-14 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 3400 ps/nm NRZ 6400 ps/nm NRZ 3400 ps/nmtunable NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz 2 -2 10 192.10 to 196.00 10 -1 -5 10 4 0 10

nm dB

0.3 35

0.3 35

0.3 35

ps/nm

3400

6400

3400

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -25 -9 -27 -25 -9 -27 -25 -9 -27 APD APD

5-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Table 5-15 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 5G CWDM NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 5 2.5 5 1271 to 1451 6.5 0.3 35 400

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -25 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)

l l

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-31

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) 50.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) 55.0

TN11L4G

NRZ-fixed(D)(5G) (3400 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm) NRZ-fixed(C)(5G) (3400 ps/nm) NRZ-tunable(5G) (3400 ps/nm)

45.0 53.0

50.0 58.0

5.3 LDGD
LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving 5.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDGD board is available, that is TN11. 5.3.2 Application The LDGD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDGD realizes the conversion between two GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. 5.3.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LDGD are tunable wavelength, crossconnection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDGD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDGD front panel. 5.3.6 Valid Slots The LDGD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDGD are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 5.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD The characteristic code for the LDGD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. 5.3.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.3.9 Specifications of the LDGD Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

5.3.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LDGD board is available, that is TN11.

5.3.2 Application
The LDGD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDGD realizes the conversion between two GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. For the position of the LDGD in the WDM system, see Figure 5-13. Figure 5-13 Position of the LDGD in the WDM system
MUX
1 GE 2 LDGD G.694.1/ G.694.2

DMUX
1

DMUX MUX DMUX

MUX DMUX MUX

G.694.1/ LDGD G.694.2 2

GE

Client side

WDM side

WDM side

Client side

5.3.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LDGD are tunable wavelength, crossconnection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-16. Table 5-16 Functions and features of the LDGD Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one OTU1/STM-16 signal and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

Client-side service type

GE

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-33

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Cross-connect capabilities

Description
l

Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1.

OTN function

l l

l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l l

Protection scheme

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported

5-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature

Description Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported

5.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LDGD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD. Figure 5-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD
GE Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2 O/E Crossconnect module GE encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module E/O

Backplane(service cross-connection) WDM side

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2

E/O Client-side optical module

O/E WDM-side optical module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGD board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LDGD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGD to the WDM side of the LDGD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-35

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the

5-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

LDGD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.

GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDGD front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-15 shows the LDGD front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-37

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-15 LDGD front panel

LDGD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LDGD

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the LDGD front panel. Table 5-17 lists the type and function of each interface.

5-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-17 Types and functions of the LDGD interfaces Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT1-OUT2

LC

TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.3.6 Valid Slots

The LDGD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDGD are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

5.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD

The characteristic code for the LDGD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 5-18. Table 5-18 Characteristic code for the LDGD Code The first four digits Meaning The frequency of forth optical signal Description The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.

The last four digits

The frequency of forth optical signal

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGD is 92109220.

l

"9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-39

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

"9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.20 THz.

5.3.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-19. Table 5-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGD displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown Service Mode FEC Working State Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode LPT Enabled SD Trigger Condition

Port Description
Figure 5-16 shows the NM ports of the LDGD board. Table 5-20 describes the meaning of each port.
5-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-16 Port diagram of the LDGD

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2

201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2

1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1

Cross-connect module

Service processing module

WDM-side optical module

Table 5-20 Meaning of NM port of the LDGD Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 LP IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2. Respectively corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LDGD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be realized.

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGD board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 5-17. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGD board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-17. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LDGD board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-17.
NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-41

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-17 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGD

Client side Cross-connect module
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4 4(RX2/TX2)-1 3 5 201(LP/LP)-2

Other board
201(LP/LP)-1

WDM side

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 2 4(RX2/TX2)-1 1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-1

WDM side

Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board

LDGD board

1 2 3 4 5

The client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board The WDM side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGD board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGD board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown (5) in Figure 5-17. The two paths of the LP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.

5.3.9 Specifications of the LDGD

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-21 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format
5-42

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ

NRZ

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Target distance

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km 10 1000 BASELX-40 km 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km 80

km

0.5

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-43

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-22 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km km NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-80km NRZ 80

Line code format Target distance

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

5-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-23 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/ nm- PIN 12800 ps/ nm-APD 6500 ps/ nm- PIN 3200 ps/ nm2mWAPD NRZ 12800 ps/ nmtunable NRZ 6400 ps/ nm-four channelstunable NRZ

Line code format

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB -4 -8 10 -4 -8 10 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 10 0 -5 8.2

192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 0.2 35 0.5 30 0.5 30 0.2 35 0.5 35

ps/nm -

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

G.957 - compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 0 -27 -28 -9 -27 -18 0 -27 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-45

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Table 5-24 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-4mW NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 2 -0.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)

l l

5-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) 34.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) 37.4

TN11LDGD

Fixed(2.5G) 12800 ps/nm-PIN 12800 ps/nm-APD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/nm-2mWAPD 1600 ps/nm-4mW) Tunable(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm)

38.0

41.8

5.4 LDGS
LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving 5.4.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDGS board is available, that is TN11. 5.4.2 Application The LDGS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDGS realizes the conversion between two GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. 5.4.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LDGS are tunable wavelength, crossconnection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDGS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDGS front panel. 5.4.6 Valid Slots The LDGS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDGS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 5.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.4.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.4.9 Specifications of the LDGS Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-47

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5.4.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LDGS board is available, that is TN11.

5.4.2 Application
The LDGS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDGS realizes the conversion between two GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the LDGS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-18. Figure 5-18 Position of the LDGS in the WDM system
1 GE 2
Client side WDM side

MUX LDGS G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX

DMUX G.694.1/ LDGS G.694.2 MUX

WDM side

1 GE 2
Client side

5.4.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LDGS are tunable wavelength, crossconnection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-25. Table 5-25 Functions and features of the LDGS Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one 2.5 Gbit/s OTU1/STM-16 signal and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G. 694.2. The reverse process is similar.
l

Crossconnect capabilities

Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OTN function

l l

l l

5-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Description Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function Protection scheme

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LDGS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-19 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-49

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-19 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS

GE Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2

Backplane(service cross-connection) WDM side

O/E
Crossconnect module GE encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module

E/O

OUT

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

IN

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGS board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LDGS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGS to the WDM side of the LDGS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.

5-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LDGS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.

GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-51

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDGS front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-20 shows the LDGS front panel. Figure 5-20 LDGS front panel

LDGS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT IN

LDGS

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-52

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l l l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the LDGD front panel. Table 5-26 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 5-26 Types and functions of the LDGS interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT

LC

TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.4.6 Valid Slots

The LDGS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDGS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

5.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.4.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-53

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-27. Table 5-27 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGS displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Interface on the NM 1 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown Service Mode FEC Working State Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode LPT Enabled SD Trigger Condition

Port Description
Figure 5-21 shows the NM ports of the LDGS board. Table 5-28 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 5-21 Port diagram of the LDGS
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 Service processing module 1(IN/OUT)-1 WDM side

Cross-connect module

WDM-side optical module

5-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-28 Meaning of NM port of the LDGS Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 LP IN/OUT Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LDGS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be realized.

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGS board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 5-22. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGS board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-22. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LDGS board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-22.
NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-55

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-22 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGS

Client side Cross-connect module
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4 4(RX2/TX2)-1 3 5 201(LP/LP)-2

Other board
201(LP/LP)-1

WDM side

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 2 4(RX2/TX2)-1 1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-1

WDM side

Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board

LDGS board
1 2 3 4 5

The client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board The WDM side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGS board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGS board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown (5) in Figure 5-22. The two paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/ OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the T2000

5.4.9 Specifications of the LDGS

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-29 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ

5-56

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Target distance

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km 10 1000 BASELX-40 km 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km 80

km

0.5

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-57

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-30 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km km NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-80km NRZ 80

Line code format Target distance

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

5-58

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-31 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/ nm- PIN 12800 ps/ nm-APD 6500 ps/ nm- PIN 3200 ps/ nm2mWAPD NRZ 12800 ps/ nmtunable NRZ 6400 ps/ nm- four channelstunable NRZ

Line code format

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz -1 -5 10 -1 -5 10 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 10 3 -2 8.2

192.10 to 196.00 10

nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5

dB

35

35

30

30

35

35

ps/nm -

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28

dBm

-18

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-59

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 12800 ps/ nm- PIN 12800 ps/ nm-APD 6500 ps/ nm- PIN 3200 ps/ nm2mWAPD -9 12800 ps/ nmtunable -9 6400 ps/ nm- four channelstunable -9

Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

dBm

-9

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Table 5-32 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-4mW NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 5 2.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity
5-60

nm dBm

APD 1200 to 1650 -28

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

Unit

Value 1600 ps/nm-4mW

dBm dB

-9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) 32.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) 35.2

TN11LDGS

Fixed(2.5G) 12800 ps/nm-PIN 12800 ps/nm-APD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/nm-2mWAPD 1600 ps/nm-4mW) Tunable(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm)

36.0

39.6

5.5 LDM
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 5.5.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDM board is available, that is TN12. 5.5.2 Application The LDM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDM realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. 5.5.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LDM are OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-61

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The LDM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDM front panel. 5.5.6 Valid Slots The LDM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDM are IU1-IU17. 5.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.5.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.5.9 Specifications of the LDM Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.5.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LDM board is available, that is TN12.

Type
The system provides two types of the LDM: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 5-33 lists the types of the LDM. Table 5-33 Type description of the LDM Board LDM Type One type is the single transmitting and single receiving board. Other type is the dual-fed selectively receiving board. Description The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/OUT1. The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.

NOTE

The WDM-side interfaces of LDM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the T2000.

5.5.2 Application
The LDM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDM realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the LDM in the WDM system, see Figure 5-23 and Figure 5-24.

5-62

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-23 Position of the LDM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)

1 MUX 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDM G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX 2 Client side WDM side WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1/ LDM G.694.2

1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

2 Client side

Figure 5-24 Position of the LDM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
G.694.1/ G.694.2 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDM DMUX MUX 2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side MUX DMUX 2 LDM DMUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2

NOTE

The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

5.5.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LDM are OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-34. Table 5-34 Functions and features of the LDM Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/ s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application scenario.
5-63

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Client-side service type OTN function

Description OTU1, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HDTV, GE, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON, FE, FDDI
l

Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1.

l l

WDM specification ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function Protection scheme

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

eSFP

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the WDM side.

Loopback

WDM side

Inloop Outloop

Supported Supported Supported Supported

Client side

Inloop Outloop

5-64

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

5.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LDM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-25 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDM. Figure 5-25 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM
Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2

WDM side O/E Service encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module E/O
OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LDM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE

The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.5.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the LDM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDM to the WDM side of the LDM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-65

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
NOTE

Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board realizes the single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Service encapsulation and mapping module

5-66

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDM front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-26 shows the LDM front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-67

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-26 LDM front panel

LDM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LDM

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the LDM front panel. Table 5-35 lists the type and function of each interface.
5-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-35 Types and functions of the TN12LDM interfaces Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT1-OUT2

LC

TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2

LC LC

NOTE

The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.5.6 Valid Slots

The LDM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDM are IU1-IU17.

5.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.5.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-36

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-69

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-36 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDM displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode LPT Enabled

5.5.9 Specifications of the LDM

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

5-70

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-37 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 40

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580

dBm

-3

dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

dB

NA

30

30

30

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN APD APD

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-71

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

Unit

Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-18 -3

-18 0

-27 -9

-28 -9

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Table 5-38 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

5-72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km -3 1000 BASELX-40 km 0 1000 BASEZX-80 km 5

dBm

-2.5

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-73

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-39 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

5-74

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-40 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-75

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Target distance

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)

km

80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB 5 0 8.2 1471 to 1611 6.5 1 30 G.957 - compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power

5-76

dBm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)

dBm dB THz nm nm dB ps/nm -

0 8.5 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 22.6 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 24.8 W

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-77

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5.6 LDMD
LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 5.6.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDMD board is available, that is TN11. 5.6.2 Application The LDMD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDMD realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and dual fed and selective receiving on the WDM side. 5.6.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LDMD are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.6.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDMD front panel. 5.6.6 Valid Slots The LDMD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDMD are IU1-IU17. 5.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD The characteristic code for the LDMD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. 5.6.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.6.9 Specifications of the LDMD Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.6.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LDMD board is available, that is TN11.

5.6.2 Application
The LDMD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDMD realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and dual fed and selective receiving on the WDM side. For the position of the LDMD in the WDM system, see Figure 5-27.

5-78

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-27 Position of the LDMD in the WDM system

G.694.1 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDMD DMUX MUX 2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side MUX DMUX 2 LDMD DMUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1

NOTE

The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

5.6.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LDMD are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-41. Table 5-41 Functions and features of the LDMD Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/ s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

Client-side service type OTN function

OTU1, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HDTV, GE, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON, FE, FDDI
l

Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1.

l l

WDM specification

Supports the DWDM specifications.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-79

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Tunable wavelength function ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Description Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function Protection scheme

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LDMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-28 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD.

5-80

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD

Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2

WDM side O/E Service encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module E/O
OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE

The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.6.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the LDMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMD to the WDM side of the LDMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-81

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-82

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDMD front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-29 shows the LDMD front panel. Figure 5-29 LDMD front panel

LDMD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LDMD

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-83

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l l l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the LDMD front panel. Table 5-42 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 5-42 Types and functions of the LDMD interfaces Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT1-OUT2

LC

TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2

LC LC

NOTE

The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.6.6 Valid Slots

The LDMD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDMD are IU1-IU17.

5.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD

The characteristic code for the LDMD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 5-43.

5-84

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-43 Characteristic code for the LDMD Code The first four digits Meaning The frequency of forth optical signal Description The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.

The last four digits

The frequency of forth optical signal

For example, the characteristic code for the LDMD is 92109220.

l

"9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz. "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.20 THz.

5.6.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-44. Table 5-44 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMD displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-85

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode LPT Enabled

5.6.9 Specifications of the LDMD

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Table 5-45 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 40

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580

dBm

-3

5-86

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

dB

NA

30

30

30

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-18 -3

-18 0

-27 -9

-28 -9

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-87

5 Optical Transponder Unit

NOTE

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Table 5-46 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm

-17

-19

-20

-22

5-88

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km -3 1000 BASELX-40 km -3 1000 BASEZX-80 km -3

dBm

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 5-47 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm dBm dBm dB nm nm 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-89

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 30 G.957-compliant

dB -

30 IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 5-48 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio THz GHz dBm dBm dB 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5

5-90

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)

nm dB ps/nm -

1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-49 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 12800 ps/nmAPD NRZ 12800 ps/nmtunable NRZ 6400ps/nmfour channelstunable NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

dBm dBm dB THz GHz

-4 -8 10 192.10 to 196.00 10

0 -5 10

0 -5 8.2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-91

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 12800 ps/nmAPD 12800 ps/nmtunable 0.2 35 12800 6400ps/nmfour channelstunable 0.5 35 6400

nm dB ps/nm -

0.2 35 12800 G.957 - compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27 APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.7 lb. (1.2 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 26.9 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 29.6 W

5.7 LDMS
LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 5.7.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDMS board is available, that is TN11. 5.7.2 Application
5-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

The LDMS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDMS realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. 5.7.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LDMS are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.7.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDMS front panel. 5.7.6 Valid Slots The LDMS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDMS are IU1-IU17. 5.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.7.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.7.9 Specifications of the LDMS Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.7.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LDMS board is available, that is TN11.

5.7.2 Application
The LDMS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDMS realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the LDMS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-30. Figure 5-30 Position of the LDMS in the WDM system

1 MUX 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDMS G.694.1 DMUX 2 Client side WDM side WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LDMS

1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

2 Client side

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-93

5 Optical Transponder Unit

NOTE

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

5.7.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LDMS are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-50. Table 5-50 Functions and features of the LDMS Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type OTN function Description Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/ s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. OTU1, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HDTV, GE, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON, FE, FDDI
l

Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1.

l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-94

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature Protection scheme eSFP Loopback

Description
l l

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LDMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-31 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS. Figure 5-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS
Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2

WDM side O/E Service encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module E/O
OUT

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

IN

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-95

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE

The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.7.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the LDMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMS to the WDM side of the LDMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-96

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDMS front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-32 shows the LDMS front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-97

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-32 LDMS front panel

LDMS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT IN

LDMS

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the LDMS front panel. Table 5-51 lists the type and function of each interface.

5-98

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-51 Types and functions of the LDMS interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT

LC

TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2

LC LC

NOTE

The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.7.6 Valid Slots

The LDMS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDMS are IU1-IU17.

5.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.7.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-52.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-99

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-52 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMS displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Interface on the NM 1 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode LPT Enabled

5.7.9 Specifications of the LDMS

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

5-100

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-53 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 40

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580

dBm

-3

dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

dB

NA

30

30

30

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN APD APD

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-101

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

Unit

Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-18 -3

-18 0

-27 -9

-28 -9

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Table 5-54 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

5-102

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km -3 1000 BASELX-40 km 0 1000 BASEZX-80 km 5

dBm

-2.5

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-103

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-55 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

5-104

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-56 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-105

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-57 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 12800 ps/nmAPD NRZ 12800 ps/nmtunable NRZ 6400ps/nmfour channelstunable NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm -1 -5 10 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 G.957 - compliant 0.2 35 12800 0.5 35 6400 3 -2 10 3 -2 8.2

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27 APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-106

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 26.9 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 29.6 W

5.8 LOG
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit 5.8.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LOG board is available, that is TN11. 5.8.2 Application The LOG is a type of optical transponder unit. It is applied for conversion between eight channels of GE service optical signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant OTU2 optical signals. 5.8.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LOG are tunable wavelength, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LOG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LOG front panel. 5.8.6 Valid Slots The LOG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LOG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 5.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.8.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.8.9 Specifications of the LOG Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.8.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LOG board is available, that is TN11.

5.8.2 Application
The LOG is a type of optical transponder unit. It is applied for conversion between eight channels of GE service optical signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant OTU2 optical signals. For the position of the LOG in the WDM system, see Figure 5-33.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-107

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-33 Position of the LOG in the WDM system

1 GE 8 Client side WDM side LOG G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LOG 8 Client side 1 GE

5.8.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LOG are tunable wavelength, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-58. Table 5-58 Functions and features of the LOG Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes eight channels of GE service optical signals into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converse them to DWDM standard wavelength that comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. GE Supports the grooming of eight channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane.
l l

Client-side service type Cross-connect capabilities

OTN function

Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU2/OTU2v signals. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. Supports TCM function for ODU2.

l l

WDM specification

Supports the DWDM specification.

5-108

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature Tunable wavelength function

Description Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of:
l l

40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz

ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l l l

Protection scheme

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection. Supports the MS SNCP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LOG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-34 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LOG.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-109

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-34 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG

8 Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8

GE

Backplane(service cross-connection) WDM side

O/E
Crossconnect module GE OTN encapsulation processing and mapping module module

E/O

OUT

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

IN

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The client side of the LOG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOG to the WDM side of the LOG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping,

5-110

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of eight channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LOG and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.

GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU2 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-111

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LOG front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-35 shows the LOG front panel. Figure 5-35 LOG front panel

LOG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 OUT IN

LOG

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-112

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l l l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the LOG front panel.Table 5-59 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 5-59 Types and functions of the LOG interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT

LC

TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.8.6 Valid Slots

The LOG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LOG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

5.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.8.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-113

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-60. Table 5-60 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOG displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Interface on the NM 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State FEC Type Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode LPT Enabled SD Trigger Condition

Port Description
Figure 5-36 shows the NM ports of the LOG board. Table 5-61 describes the meaning of each port.
5-114 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-36 Port diagram of the LOG

Client side
3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8) 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1

Cross-connect module

Service processing module

WDM-side opticalmodule

Table 5-61 Meaning of NM port of the LOG Port Name RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 LP IN/OUT Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be realized.

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LOG board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 5-37. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LOG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-37. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LOG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-37.
NOTE

One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port. There should be no more than eight cross-connections between the RX/TX ports of the local board or other boards and the LP port of the local board.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-115

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-37 Cross-connection diagram of the LOG

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8

WDM side

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

5 3 4 2 1

Cross-connect module

201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8

WDM side

LOG board
1 2 3 4 5

The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board The WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LOG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LOG board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown (5) in Figure 5-37. The eight paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.

5.8.9 Specifications of the LOG

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of optical module at the client side

Table 5-62 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance
5-116

Unit

Value 2.125G Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

km

NRZ 0.5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 2.125G Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

Table 5-63 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km NRZ 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-80km NRZ

Line code format

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-117

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-80km 80

Target distance

km

40

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

5-118

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side

Table 5-64 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 800 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even wavelengths) 1600 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm NRZ- 80 channels fixed

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800 4 0 9 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.3 35 1600 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -26 -9 -27 -16 0 -27 APD PIN

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-119

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-65 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/nm - tunablePIN NRZ- 80 channels tunable 1200 ps/ nm tunableAPD NRZ- 80 channels tunable 4800 ps/nm -ODBtunable ODB- 80 channels tunable 800 ps/nmDRZtunable DRZ- 80 channels tunable

Line code format

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB 2 -3 10 2 -3 10 2 -3 NAa 2 -3 10

192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35

ps/nm

1200

1200

4800

800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 -26 -26 -16 APD APD PIN

dBm dB

0 -27

-9 -27

-9 -27

0 -27

a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

5-120

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 3.5 lb. (1.6 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) 49.5 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) 54.5

TN11LOG

NRZ-fixed(10G) (800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

50.0

55.0

51.2

56.1

55.0

60.5

5.9 LOM
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board (AFEC) 5.9.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LOM board is available, that is TN11. 5.9.2 Application The LOM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LOM multiplexes a maximum of eight GE/ FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G, or two FC400 signals into one OTU2 signal. It also realizes conversion between these signals and ITU-T Recommendationcompliant WDM signals. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. 5.9.3 Functions and Features
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-121

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The main functions and features supported by the LOM are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.9.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the LOM front panel. 5.9.6 Valid Slots The LOM occupies two slots. The valid slots for the LOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16 in the subrack. 5.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.9.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.9.9 Specifications of the LOM Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.9.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LOM board is available, that is TN11.

5.9.2 Application
The LOM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LOM multiplexes a maximum of eight GE/ FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G, or two FC400 signals into one OTU2 signal. It also realizes conversion between these signals and ITU-T Recommendationcompliant WDM signals. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. For the position of the LOM in the WDM system, see Figure 5-38. Figure 5-38 Position of the LOM in the WDM system
ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ 1 GE/ FC100/ FC200/ FC400/ 8 FICON/ FICON Express Client side MUX LOM G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side DMUX G.694.1 LOM 8 1 ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ GE/ FC100/ FC200/ FC400/ FICON/ FICON Express

Client side

5-122

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

NOTE

5 Optical Transponder Unit

For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all available. For FICON Express and FC200 services, though any optical interface can access the ISC 2G, FICON Express or FC200 services, only any two of the first and last four optical interfaces can access the FICON Express or FC200 services at the same time. For FC400 services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available.

5.9.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LOM are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-66. Table 5-66 Functions and features of the LOM Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Multiplexes eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G services, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G services, or two FC400 services into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converse them to DWDM standard wavelength that comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. It can also perform the reverse process. Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The overall bandwidth of the first and last four optical interfaces should be equal to or less than 4 Gbit/s, respectively. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the data width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. For FC100/FC200/FC400 services, the maximum transmission distance of the WDM side is 3000 km.

Client-side service type OTN function

GE electric signal, GE optical signal, FC100, FC200, FC400, FICON, FICON Express, ISC 1G, ISC 2G
l

Supports the mapping of up to eight channels of client-side signals into OTU2/OTU2v signals. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with GDPS, ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. Supports TCM function for ODU2.

l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function

Supports the DWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of:
l l

40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-123

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function

Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding. Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l

Protection scheme

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-39 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LOM.

5-124

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOM

GE encapsulation and mapping module

Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8

O/E

FC encapsulation and mapping module FICON encapsulation and mapping module

E/O
OTN processing module

WDM side
OUT

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
IN

ISC encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module

WDM-side optical module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LOM board can access the following signals:
l l l l l l l l l

GE optical signals GE electrical signals ISC 1G optical signals ISC 2G optical signals FC100 optical signals FC200 optical signals FC400 optical signals FICON optical signals FICON Express optical signals
NOTE

l l

For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all available. For FICON Express and FC200 services, though any optical interface can access the ISC 2G, FICON Express or FC200 services, only any two of the first and last four optical interfaces can access the FICON Express or FC200 services at the same time. For FC400 services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-125

5 Optical Transponder Unit

NOTE

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l l l

The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.

In the signal flow of the LOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOM to the WDM side of the LOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight (eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four (four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G service signals) or two (two channels of FC400 service signals) channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2v in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs eight (eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four (four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G service signals) or two (two channels of FC400 service signals) channels of the electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the eight (eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four (four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G service signals) or two (two channels of FC400 service signals) channels of the electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of eight channels of GE/FC100/ FICON/ISC 1G optical signals or four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G optical signals or two channels of FC400 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from eight or four or two channels of the internal electrical signals to the corresponding optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-126

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2v optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2v optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the GE encapsulation and mapping module, ISC encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, FICON encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance monitoring function.

ISC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of ISC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the ISC performance monitoring function.

FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2v payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function.

FICON encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FICON signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FICON performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU2/OTU2v signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2/ OTU2v signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the LOM front panel.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-127

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-40 shows the LOM front panel. Figure 5-40 LOM front panel

WSD9 LOM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO DO NOT NOT VIEW VIEW DIRECTLY DIRECTLY WITH WITH OPTICAL OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

LINK/ACT1 LINK/ACT2 LINK/ACT3 LINK/ACT4 LINK/ACT5 LINK/ACT6 LINK/ACT7 LINK/ACT8

WSD9 LOM

TX1 RX1 MONO MONI TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 EXPO IN DM1 DM2 OUT DM3 IN DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8

Indicators
There are twelve indicators on the front panel.
l l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Data port connection/data transceive indicator (LINK/ACTn) - green

5-128

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the LOM front panel. Table 5-67 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 5-67 Types and functions of the LOM interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used. RX1-RX8 LC Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.

OUT

LC

TX1-TX8

LC

NOTE

For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all available. For FICON Express and FC200 services, though any optical interface can access the ISC 2G, FICON Express or FC200 services, only any two of the first and last four optical interfaces can access the FICON Express or FC200 services at the same time. For FC400 services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available. Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.9.6 Valid Slots

The LOM occupies two slots. The valid slots for the LOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the LOM board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if the LOM occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the LOM displayed on the NM is IU1.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-129

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.9.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-68. Table 5-68 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOM displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Interface on the NM 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State FEC Type

5-130

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode FC Distance Extension LPT Enabled SD Trigger Condition

5 Optical Transponder Unit

5.9.9 Specifications of the LOM

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of optical module at the client side

Table 5-69 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125G Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R

Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-131

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload

Unit

Value 2.125G Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km PIN 1270 to 1355 1000 BASELX-40 km PIN 1270 to 1355 1000 BASEZX-80 km PIN 1500 to 1580

nm

PIN 770 to 860

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

Table 5-70 Specifications of FC optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value FC400 Module Multimode NRZ 0.3 Single mode NRZ 10 FC100/FC200/FICON/ FICON Express module Multimode NRZ 0.5 Single mode NRZ 2

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 830 to 860 1266 to 1360

dBm

-1

-2

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9

-8

-9.5

-10

Compliant with Fiber Channelphysical interface (FC-PI-2) parameter template

5-132

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value FC400 Module Multimode Single mode FC100/FC200/FICON/ FICON Express module Multimode Single mode

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1260 to 1600 PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1580

dBm dBm

-14 0

-16 0

-17 0

-18 0

dB

-12

-12

-12

-27

Table 5-71 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km km NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-80km NRZ 80

Line code format Target distance

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm dBm dBm dB nm nm 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-133

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-80km 30 G.957-compliant

Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

dB -

30 IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-72 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 800 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even wavelengths) 1600 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm NRZ- 80 channels fixed

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation dBm dBm dB THz GHz 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 4 0 9 192.10 to 196.00 10 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5

5-134

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance

Unit

Value 800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 0.3 35 1600 800 ps/nm 0.3 35 800

nm dB ps/nm

0.3 35 800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -26 -9 -27 -16 0 -27 APD PIN

Table 5-73 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/nm - tunablePIN NRZ- 80 channels tunable 1200 ps/ nm tunableAPD NRZ- 80 channels tunable 4800 ps/nm -ODBtunable ODB- 80 channels tunable 800 ps/nmDRZtunable DRZ- 80 channels tunable

Line code format

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

dBm dBm dB THz GHz

2 -3 10

2 -3 10

2 -3 NAa

2 -3 10

192.10 to 196.05 5 5 5 5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-135

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 1200 ps/nm - tunablePIN 1200 ps/ nm tunableAPD 0.3 35 4800 ps/nm -ODBtunable 0.3 35 800 ps/nmDRZtunable 0.3 35

Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance

nm dB

0.3 35

ps/nm

1200

1200

4800

800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 -26 -26 -16 APD APD PIN

dBm dB

0 -27

-9 -27

-9 -27

0 -27

a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W)) Weight: 5.1 lb. (2.3 kg)

l l

5-136

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) 92.7 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) 101.7

LOM

NRZ-fixed(10G) (800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

92.9

101.9

93.4

102.7

98.2

108.0

5.10 LQG
LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board 5.10.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LQG board is available, that is TN11. 5.10.2 Application The LQG is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQG realizes the conversion between four GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. 5.10.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LQG are tunable wavelength, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.10.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQG front panel. 5.10.6 Valid Slots The LQG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-137

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.10.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.10.9 Specifications of the LQG Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.10.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LQG board is available, that is TN11.

5.10.2 Application
The LQG is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQG realizes the conversion between four GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the LQG in the WDM system, see Figure 5-41. Figure 5-41 Position of the LQG in the WDM system
1 GE 4 Clinet side WDMside LQG G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LQG 4 Client side 1 GE

5.10.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LQG are tunable wavelength, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-74. Table 5-74 Functions and features of the LQG Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes four channels of GE service optical signals into one channel of OTU1 optical signals and converse them to DWDM standard wavelength that comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. GE

Client-side service type

5-138

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature Crossconnect capabilities OTN function

Description Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane.
l

Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU5G signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU5G and ODU5G. Supports TCM function for ODU5G.

l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports the DWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l l l

Protection scheme

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection. Supports the MS SNCP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Supported Supported Supported

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-139

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature

Description Outloop Supported

5.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LQG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-42 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQG. Figure 5-42 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG
GE Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side

O/E
Crossconnect module GE OTN encapsulation processing and mapping module module

E/O

OUT

E/O Client-side optical module

O/E WDM-side optical module

IN

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The client side of the LQG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LQG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQG to the WDM side of the LQG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.

5-140

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU5G/FEC5G signals. The OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU5G/FEC5G in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQG and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.

GE encapsulation and mapping module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-141

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU5G/ FEC5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU5G/FEC5G signals, processes the overheads of the OTU5G/FEC5G signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQG front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-43 shows the LQG front panel.

5-142

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-43 LQG front panel

LQG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT IN

LQG

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the LQG front panel. Table 5-75 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-143

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-75 Types and functions of the LQG interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT

LC

TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.10.6 Valid Slots

The LQG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

5.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.10.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-76. Table 5-76 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQG displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT TX1/RX1
5-144

Interface on the NM 1 3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Interface on the Panel TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4

Interface on the NM 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Mode Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode LPT Enabled

Port Description
Figure 5-44 shows the NM ports of the LQG board. Table 5-77 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 5-44 Port diagram of the LQG
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 Cross-connect module Service processing module WDM-side optical module 201(LP/LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1 WDM side

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-145

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-77 Meaning of NM port of the LQG Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 LP IN/OUT Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LQG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be realized.

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LQG board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 5-45. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-45. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LQG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-45.
NOTE

One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.

5-146

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-45 Cross-connection diagram of the LQG

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

WDM side

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 3

5 4 2 1

201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

WDM side

Cross-connect module

LQG board

The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board The WDM side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

1 2 3 4 5

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LQG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LQG board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown (5) in Figure 5-45. The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.

5.10.9 Specifications of the LQG

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-78 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ

NRZ

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-147

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Target distance

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km 10 1000 BASELX-40 km 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km 80

km

0.5

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

5-148

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-79 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km km NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-80km NRZ 80

Line code format Target distance

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-149

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-80 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 3400 ps/ nm NRZ 6400 ps/ nm NRZ 3400 ps/ nmtunable NRZ 6400 ps/ nm-ODB tunable ODB

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -2 10 -1 -5 10 4 0 10 2 -3 9

192.10 to 196.00 10 0.3 35 3400 0.3 35 6400 0.3 35 3400 0.3 35 6400

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -25 -9 -27 -25 -9 -27 -25 -9 -27 -25 -9 -27 APD APD APD

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))

5-150

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 30.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 33.0

TN11LQG

NRZ-fixed (5G) (3400 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm) NRZ-tunable (5G) (3400 ps/nm) ODB-tunable (5G) (6400 ps/nm)

31.0 36.0

34.4 40.0

5.11 LQM
LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 5.11.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LQM board is available, that is TN13. 5.11.2 Application The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. 5.11.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LQM are tunable wavelength, crossconnection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.11.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQM front panel. 5.11.6 Valid Slots The LQM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 5.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.11.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.11.9 Specifications of the LQM Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-151

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5.11.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LQM board is available, that is TN13.

Type
The system provides two types of the LQM: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 5-81 lists the types of the LQM. Table 5-81 Type description of the LQM Board LQM Type One type is the single transmitting and single receiving board. Other type is the dual-fed selectively receiving board. Description The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/ OUT1. The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/ OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.

NOTE

The WDM-side interfaces of LQM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the T2000.

5.11.2 Application
The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the LQM in the WDM system, see Figure 5-46 and Figure 5-47. Figure 5-46 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)

1 MUX 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LQM G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX 4 Client side WDM side WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1/ LQM G.694.2

1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

4 Client side

5-152

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-47 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
G.694.1/ G.694.2 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LQM DMUX MUX 4 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side MUX DMUX 4 LQM DMUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2

NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

5.11.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LQM are tunable wavelength, crossconnection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-82. Table 5-82 Functions and features of the LQM Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength. Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application scenario.

Client-side service type

STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-153

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Crossconnect capabilities

Description
l

Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services or one channel of OTU1 services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1.

OTN function

l l

WDM specification ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function Protection scheme

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l l l

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection. Supports the MS SNCP protection.

eSFP

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the WDM side.

Loopback

WDM side

Inloop Outloop

Supported Supported Supported

Client side

Inloop

5-154

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature

Description Outloop Supported

5.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LQM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-48 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQM. Figure 5-48 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

WDM side O/E

Crossconnect module Service OTN encapsulation processing and mapping module module

E/O

OUT1 OUT2 IN1

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

IN2

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.11.3 Functions and Features.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-155

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

In the signal flow of the LQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQM to the WDM side of the LQM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE

Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board realizes the single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-156

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.

Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.11.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQM front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-49 shows the LQM front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-157

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-49 LQM front panel

LQM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LQM

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the LQM front panel. Table 5-83 lists the type and function of each interface.

5-158

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-83 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT1-OUT2

LC

TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4

LC LC

NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.11.6 Valid Slots

The LQM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

5.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.11.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-84

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-159

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-84 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQM displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode LPT Enabled

Port Description
Figure 5-50 shows the NM ports of the LQM board. Table 5-85 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 5-50 Port diagram of the LQM
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 WDM-side optical module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1

Service processing module

5-160

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-85 Meaning of NM port of the LQM Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be realized.

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQM board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 5-51. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-51. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQM board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQM board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-51.
NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-161

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-51 Cross-connection diagram of the LQM

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

WDM side

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 3

5 4 2 1

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

WDM side

Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board

LQM board
1 2 3 4 5

The client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQM board The WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown (5) in Figure 5-51. The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/ OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the T2000. According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots.

Configuration Principle
l

The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end. For each LQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1 and HDTV services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQM board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE Number of Timeslots 7
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-162

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Service Type FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express HDTV DVBASI DVBSDI ESCON FDDI

Number of Timeslots 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12 11 2 3 2 1

5.11.9 Specifications of the LQM

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-163

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-86 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 40

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580

dBm

-3

dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

dB

NA

30

30

30

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN APD APD

5-164

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

Unit

Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-18 -3

-18 0

-27 -9

-28 -9

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Table 5-87 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-165

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km -3 1000 BASELX-40 km 0 1000 BASEZX-80 km 5

dBm

-2.5

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

5-166

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-88 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-167

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-89 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ

5-168

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Target distance

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)

km

80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB 5 0 8.2 1471 to 1611 6.5 1 30 G.957 - compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

dBm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-169

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)

dBm dB THz nm nm dB ps/nm -

0 8.5 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 32.6 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 35.9 W

5-170

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

5.12 LQMD
LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 5.12.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the LQMD board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main differences between the two versions lie in whether the board of different versions supports the function of processing OTU1/HDTV/DVB-SDI/FDDI services and CWDM specifications. 5.12.2 Application The LQMD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQMD realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. 5.12.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LQMD are tunable wavelength, crossconnection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.12.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQMD front panel. 5.12.6 Valid Slots The LQMD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQMD are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 5.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD The characteristic code for the LQMD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. 5.12.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.12.9 Specifications of the LQMD Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.12.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the LQMD board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main differences between the two versions lie in whether the board of different versions supports the function of processing OTU1/HDTV/DVB-SDI/FDDI services and CWDM specifications. Table 5-90 lists the version description of the LQMD. Table 5-90 Version description of the LQMD Item Functional version
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Description Two functional versions of the LQMD board are available: TN11 and TN12.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-171

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Similarity Difference

Description The TN12LQMD works in the same way as the TN11LQMD. TN12LQMD board supports the function of processing OTU1/HDTV/ DVB-SDI/FDDI services. TN12LQMD supports the DWDM specifications. TN11LQMD supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.

Replacement

In the DWDM system, the TN12LQMD board can replace the TN11LQMD board, but after the replacement, the SCC software need be upgraded. The TN11LQMD board, however, cannot replace the TN12LQMD board.

5.12.2 Application
The LQMD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQMD realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. For the position of the LQMD in the WDM system, see Figure 5-52. Figure 5-52 Position of the LQMD in the WDM system
MUX DMUX

1 100Mbit/s -2.5Gbit/s 4
DMUX MUX DMUX MUX

1 LQMD G.694.1/ G.694.2 G.694.1/ LQMD G.694.2 DMUX 4 100Mbit/s -2.5Gbit/s

MUX

Client side

WDM side

WDM side

Client side

NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. TN12LQMD supports the DWDM specifications only.

5.12.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LQMD are tunable wavelength, crossconnection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-91.

5-172

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-91 Functions and features of the LQMD Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength. Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

Client-side service type

TN11LQMD: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express TN12LQMD: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI

Crossconnect capabilities

Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services or one channel of OTU1 services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1.

OTN function

l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

TN11LQMD: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications. TN12LQMD: Supports the DWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-173

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature ALS function Protection scheme

Description The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l l l

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection. Supports the MS SNCP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LQMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-53 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD.

5-174

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-53 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD

100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

WDM side O/E

Crossconnect module Service OTN encapsulation processing and mapping module module

E/O

OUT1 OUT2 IN1

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

IN2

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.12.3 Functions and Features. TN12LQMD supports the DWDM specifications only.

In the signal flow of the LQMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMD to the WDM side of the LQMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-175

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.

Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-176

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.12.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQMD front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-54 shows the LQMD front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-177

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-54 LQMD front panel

LQMD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LQMD

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the LQMD front panel. Table 5-92 lists the type and function of each interface.

5-178

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-92 Types and functions of the LQMD interfaces Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT1-OUT2

LC

TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4

LC LC

NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.12.6 Valid Slots

The LQMD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQMD are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

5.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD

The characteristic code for the LQMD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 5-93. Table 5-93 Characteristic code for the LQMD Code The first four digits Meaning The frequency of forth optical signal Description The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.

The last four digits

The frequency of forth optical signal

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-179

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

For example, the characteristic code for the LQMD is 92109220.

l

"9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz. "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.20 THz.

5.12.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-94. Table 5-94 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMD displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode

5-180

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

LPT Enabled

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Port Description
Figure 5-55 shows the NM ports of the LQMD board. Table 5-95 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 5-55 Port diagram of the LQMD
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 WDM-side optical module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1

Service processing module

NOTE

TN11LQMD: The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12LQMD: The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ ClientLP)-4.

Table 5-95 Meaning of NM port of the LQMD Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LQMD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be realized.

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQMD board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 5-56. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMD board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-56. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQMD board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-181

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMD board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-56.
NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.

Figure 5-56 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMD

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

WDM side

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 3

5 4 2 1

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

WDM side

Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board

LQMD board
1 2 3 4 5

The client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMD board The WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMD board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown (5) in Figure 5-55. The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/ OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the T2000. According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots.

Configuration Principle
l

The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end. For each LQMD board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16.

5-182

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HDTV services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMD board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express HDTV DVBASI DVBSDI ESCON FDDI Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12 11 2 3 2 1

5.12.9 Specifications of the LQMD

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-183

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-96 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 40

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580

dBm

-3

dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

dB

NA

30

30

30

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN APD APD

5-184

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

Unit

Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-18 -3

-18 0

-27 -9

-28 -9

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Table 5-97 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-185

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km -3 1000 BASELX-40 km 0 1000 BASEZX-80 km 5

dBm

-2.5

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

5-186

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-98 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

TN12LQMD: Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-187

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-99 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27

5-188

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

TN11LQMD: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-100 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/ nm- PIN 12800 ps/ nm-APD 6500 ps/ nm- PIN 3200 ps/ nm2mWAPD NRZ 12800 ps/ nmtunable NRZ 6400 ps/ nm-four channelstunable NRZ

Line code format

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB -4 -8 10 -4 -8 10 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 10 0 -5 8.2

192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 0.2 35 0.5 30 0.5 30 0.2 35 0.5 35

ps/nm -

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

G.957 - compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 0 -27 -28 -9 -27 -18 0 -27 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-189

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

TN12LQMD: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-101 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 12800 ps/nmAPD NRZ 12800 ps/nmtunable NRZ 6400ps/nmfour channelstunable NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm -4 -8 10 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 G.957 - compliant 0.2 35 12800 0.5 35 6400 0 -5 10 0 -5 8.2

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27 APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27

5-190

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

TN11LQMD: Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Table 5-102 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-4mW NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 2 -0.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)

l l

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-191

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) 54.9 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) 60.4

TN11LQMD

Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm-PIN 12800 ps/nm-APD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/nm-2mWAPD 1600 ps/nm-4mW) Tunable(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm)

59.1

65.1

TN12LQMD

32.1

35.3

5.13 LQMS
LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 5.13.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the LQMS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in the types of services that the board of different versions supports. 5.13.2 Application The LQMS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQMS realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals or realizes the conversion between ODU1 signals from the cross-connet board and ITUT Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. 5.13.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LQMS are tunable wavelength, crossconnection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.13.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQMS front panel. 5.13.6 Valid Slots The LQMS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQMS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 5.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.
5-192 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

5.13.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.13.9 Specifications of the LQMS Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.13.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the LQMS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in the types of services that the board of different versions supports. Table 5-103 lists the version description of the LQMS. Table 5-103 Version description of the LQMS Item Functional version Similarity Difference Description Two functional versions of the LQMS board are available: TN11 and TN12. As a service convergence board, the TN12LQMS works in the same way as the TN11LQMS. TN12LQMS supports the function of processing OTU1/HDTV/DVB-SDI/ FDDI services. TN12LQMS supports the NS1 Mode: realizes the conversion between ODU1 electrical signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. TN12LQMS supports the DWDM specifications. TN11LQMS supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications. Replacement In the DWDM system, as a service convergence board, the TN12LQMS board can replace the TN11LQMS board, but after the replacement, the SCC software need be upgraded. The TN11LQMDS board, however, cannot replace the TN12LQMS board.

5.13.2 Application
The LQMS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQMS realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals or realizes the conversion between ODU1 signals from the cross-connet board and ITUT Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.

Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion between Signals at the Rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM Signals
For the position of the LQMS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-57.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-193

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-57 Position of the LQMS in the WDM system

1 100Mbit/s -2.5Gbit/s 4 Client side WDM side LQMS G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1/ LQMS G.694.2 4 WDM side Client side 1 100Mbit/s -2.5Gbit/s

NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. TN12LQMS supports the DWDM specifications only.

Application Scenario 2: Realizes the Conversion between ODU1 Electrical Signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals
For the position of the LQMS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-58. Figure 5-58 Position of the LQMS in the WDM system
WDM side DMUX G.694.1 MUX LQMS LQMS G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX

5.13.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LQMS are tunable wavelength, crossconnection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-104.

5-194

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-104 Functions and features of the LQMS Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength. Maps ODU1 signal into OTU1 optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.

Client-side service type

TN11LQMS: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express TN12LQMS: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI

Crossconnect capabilities

Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services or one channel of OTU1 services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal between the LQMS and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slots through the backplane. Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into one channel of OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1.

OTN function

l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function FEC encoding

TN11LQMS: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications. TN12LQMS: Supports the DWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-195

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring

Description
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function Protection scheme

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l l l

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection. Supports the MS SNCP protection. Supports the tibutary SNCP protection (NS1 Mode).

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LQMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-59 and Figure 5-60 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS.

5-196

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-59 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS

100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

WDM side O/E

Crossconnect module Service encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module

E/O

OUT

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

IN

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.13.3 Functions and Features. TN12LQMS supports the DWDM specifications only.

In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the WDM side of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-197

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Figure 5-60 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS (NS1 Mode)
ODU1 Backplane(service cross-connection) WDM side E/O Crossconnect module OTN processing module OUT

O/E WDM-side optical module

IN

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow (NS1 Mode)

The client side of the LQMS board accesses ODU1 electrical signals. In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the backplane of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
5-198 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Transmit direction The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals.

Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-199

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.
l

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.13.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQMS front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-61 shows the LQMS front panel.

5-200

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-61 LQMS front panel

LQMS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT IN

LQMS

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the LQMS front panel. Table 5-105 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-201

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-105 Types and functions of the LQMS interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT

LC

TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4

LC LC

NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.13.6 Valid Slots

The LQMS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQMS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

5.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.13.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-106.

5-202

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-106 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMS displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Interface on the NM 1 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode LPT Enabled Board Mode

Port Description
Figure 5-62 and Figure 5-63 show the NM ports of the LQMS board. Table 5-107 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 5-62 Port diagram of the LQMS (LQM Mode)
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module Service processing module WDM-side optical module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-1 WDM side

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-203

5 Optical Transponder Unit

NOTE

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

TN11LQMS: The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12LQMS (LQM Mode): The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-4.

Figure 5-63 Port diagram of the LQMS (NS1 Mode)

WDM side 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

Cross-connect module

Service processing module

WDM-side optical module

Table 5-107 Meaning of NM port of the LQMS Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP ODU1LP IN/OUT Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LQMS board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM interfaces on the T2000. The valid values of the board mode field are LQM Mode and NS1 Mode.
NOTE

The TN11LQMS board does not require the configuration of the board mode. The electrical cross-connect services of the TN11LQMS are created in the same way as the electrical cross-connect services of the TN12LQMS in the LQM mode.

LQM Mode:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be realized.

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQMS board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 5-64. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-204

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 5-64.

Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQMS board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMS board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 5-64.
NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.

Figure 5-64 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

WDM side

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 3

5 4 2 1

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

WDM side

Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board

LQMS board
1 2 3 4 5

The client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMS board The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown (5) in Figure 5-64. The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There is no need for configuration on the T2000. According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots.

Configuration Principle
l

The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-205

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end. For each LQMS board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HDTV services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMS board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express HDTV DVBASI DVBSDI ESCON FDDI Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12 11 2 3 2 1

NS1 Mode:
l

Create the cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards (For regeneration) shown in Figure 5-65. The four paths of the ODU1LP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.

5-206

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-65 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

WDM side

WDM side

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

Cross-connect module

LQMS board

5.13.9 Specifications of the LQMS

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Table 5-108 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 40

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-207

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580

dBm

-3

dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

dB

NA

30

30

30

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-18 -3

-18 0

-27 -9

-28 -9

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

5-208

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Table 5-109 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN PIN PIN

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-209

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASELX-40 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASEZX-80 km 1500 to 1580

nm

770 to 860

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 5-110 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio
5-210

nm dBm dBm dB

1471 to 1611 5 0 9

1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

nm nm dB -

6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

TN12LQMS: Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 5-111 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

THz GHz dBm

192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-211

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)

dBm dB nm dB ps/nm -

0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27

TN11LQMS: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-112 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/ nm- PIN 12800 ps/ nm-APD 6500 ps/ nm- PIN 3200 ps/ nm2mWAPD NRZ 12800 ps/ nmtunable NRZ 6400 ps/ nm- four channelstunable NRZ

Line code format

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power dBm dBm -1 -5 -1 -5 3 -2 3 -2 3 -2 3 -2

5-212

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 12800 ps/ nm- PIN 12800 ps/ nm-APD 6500 ps/ nm- PIN 3200 ps/ nm2mWAPD 8.2 12800 ps/ nmtunable 10 6400 ps/ nm- four channelstunable 8.2

Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

dB THz GHz

10

10

8.2

192.10 to 196.00 10

nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5

dB

35

35

30

30

35

35

ps/nm -

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -18 0 -28 -9 -28 -9 -28 -9

dBm dBm

-18 0

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-213

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

TN12LQMS: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-113 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 12800 ps/nmAPD NRZ 12800 ps/nmtunable NRZ 6400ps/nmfour channelstunable NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm -1 -5 10 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 G.957 - compliant 0.2 35 12800 0.5 35 6400 3 -2 10 3 -2 8.2

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27 APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27

5-214

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

TN11LQMS: Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Table 5-114 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-4mW NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 5 2.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)

l l

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-215

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) 53.2 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) 58.5

TN11LQMS

Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm-PIN 12800 ps/nm-APD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/nm-2mWAPD 1600 ps/nm-4mW) Tunable(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm)

57.8

63.6

TN12LQMS

32.1

35.3

5.14 LSX
LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 5.14.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the LSX board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the FC1200 service. 5.14.2 Application The LSX is a type of optical transponder unit, serving to map one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2v signals and realizing the conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant. 5.14.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LSX are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.14.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSX front panel. 5.14.6 Valid Slots The LSX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LSX are IU1-IU17. 5.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.14.8 NM Configuration Reference
5-216 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.14.9 Specifications of the LSX Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.14.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the LSX board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the FC1200 service. Table 5-115 lists the version description of the LSX. Table 5-115 Version description of the LSX Item Functional version Similarity Difference Replacement Description Two functional versions of the LSX board are available: TN11 and TN12. Supports to process the STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN and OTU2 services. The TN12LSX board supports the function of processing FC1200 service. The TN12LSX board can replace the TN11LSX board, but after the replacement, the SCC software need be upgraded. The TN11LSX board, however, cannot replace the TN12LSX board.

5.14.2 Application
The LSX is a type of optical transponder unit, serving to map one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2v signals and realizing the conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant. For the position of the LSX in the WDM system, see Figure 5-66. Figure 5-66 Position of the LSX in the WDM system
10GE LAN / 10GE WAN / STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ FC1200 Client side MUX LSX G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side DMUX G.694.1 LSX 10GE LAN / 10GE WAN / STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ FC1200 Client side

NOTE

l l

Client-side service type of the TN11LSX are 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192 and OTU2. Client-side service type of the TN12LSX are 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 and FC1200.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-217

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5.14.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LSX are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-116. Table 5-116 Functions and features of the LSX Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type OTN function Description Serving to map one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2v signals and realizing the conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant TN11LSX: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 TN12LSX: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, FC1200
l l

Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/ OTU2 into OTU2/OTU2v signals, and the transparence mapping of 10GE LAN into OTU2v signals. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. Supports TCM function for ODU2. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.

l l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function

Supports DWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of:
l l

40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz

ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function

Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding. Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.

5-218

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature Protection scheme

Description
l l l

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

XFP Loopback

Supports the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LSX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-67 and Figure 5-68 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LSX. Figure 5-67 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX
Client side
RX O/E SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN processing module TX E/O Client-side optical module

WDM side
E/O

OTN processing module

OUT

10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module

O/E WDM-side optical module

IN

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-219

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-68 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX

Client side
RX SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module

WDM side E/O OTN processing module

OUT

O/E

Client-side OTN processing module 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module

TX

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

IN

FC encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LSX board can access the following optical signals: TN11LSX:
l l l l l

OC-192 optical signals STM-64 optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals OTU2 optical signals

TN12LSX:
l l l l l l

OC-192 optical signals STM-64 optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals OTU2 optical signals FC1200 optical signals
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-220

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

In the signal flow of the LSX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSX to the WDM side of the LSX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX optical interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2/ OTU2v electrical signals. The OTU2/OTU2v signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2v signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2v in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/FC1200 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/OTU2/FC1200 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/FC1200 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2v optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2v optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-221

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function.

10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/ OTU2v payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function.

FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2v payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function.

Client-side OTN processing module Realizes the OTN performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU2/OTU2v signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2/ OTU2v signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.14.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSX front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-69 shows the LSX front panel.

5-222

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-69 LSX front panel

LSX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX RX OUT IN

LSX

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the LSX front panel. Table 5-117 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-223

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-117 Types and functions of the LSX interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT

LC

TX RX

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.14.6 Valid Slots

The LSX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LSX are IU1-IU17.

5.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.14.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-118. Table 5-118 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSX displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT TX/RX Interface on the NM 1 3

5-224

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

NOTE

5 Optical Transponder Unit

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Port Mapping Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State FEC Type PAUSE Frame Flow Control Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type LPT Enabled SD Trigger Condition

5.14.9 Specifications of the LSX

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

10 Gbit/s Multi-rate -10km module and 10 Gbit/s Multi-rate -40km module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE, and OTU2 signals. The specifications listed following completely apply to OTU2 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OC-192, STM-64, or 10GE signals.

Table 5-119 Specifications of optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40km NRZ SLM 40 10Gbit/s Multirate -80km NRZ SLM 80 10Gbit/s Single rate -0.3km NRZ MLM 0.3

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-225

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40km 1530 to 1565 10Gbit/s Multirate -80km 1530 to 1565 10Gbit/s Single rate -0.3km 840 to 860

nm

1290 to 1330

dBm

-1

-1.3

dBm

-6

-1

-7.3

dB

8.2

nm

NA

NA

NA

NA

dB

30

30

30

30

G.691-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1290 to 1330 PIN 1530 to 1565 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860

dBm dBm

-11 0.5

-14 -1

-24 -7

-7.5 -1

dB

NA

NA

NA

NA

5-226

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-120 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 800 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even wavelengths) 1600 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm NRZ- 80 channels fixed

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800 4 0 9 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.3 35 1600 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -26 -9 -27 -16 0 -27 APD PIN

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-227

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-121 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/nm - tunablePIN NRZ- 80 channels tunable 1200 ps/ nm tunableAPD NRZ- 80 channels tunable 4800 ps/nm -ODBtunable ODB- 80 channels tunable 800 ps/nmDRZtunable DRZ- 80 channels tunable

Line code format

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB 2 -3 10 2 -3 10 2 -3 NAa 2 -3 10

192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35

ps/nm

1200

1200

4800

800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 -26 -26 -16 APD APD PIN

dBm dB

0 -27

-9 -27

-9 -27

0 -27

a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

5-228

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 47.7 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 52.3

TN11LSX

NRZ-fixed(10G) (800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

47.9

52.5

49.7

52.7

52.7

55.7

TN12LSX

NRZ-fixed(10G) (800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

32.0

38.4

32.2

38.6

34.0

40.8

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-229

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board

Optical Module Type

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 36.0

The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 43.2

ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

5.15 LSXL
LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 5.15.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LSXL board is available, that is TN11. 5.15.2 Application The LSXL is a type of optical transponder unit. The LSXL realizes the conversion between one STM-256/OC-768 signal and ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendation-compliant OTU3 signal. 5.15.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LSXL are tunable wavelength function, OTN interfaces and ESC function. 5.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSXL board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.15.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXL front panel. 5.15.6 Valid Slots The TN11LSXL occupies four slots. The valid slots for the TN11LSXL are IU1-IU14 in the subrack. 5.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.15.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.15.9 Specifications of the LSXL Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.15.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LSXL board is available, that is TN11.

5-230

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

5.15.2 Application
The LSXL is a type of optical transponder unit. The LSXL realizes the conversion between one STM-256/OC-768 signal and ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendation-compliant OTU3 signal. For the position of the LSXL in the WDM system, see Figure 5-70. Figure 5-70 Position of the LSXL in the WDM system
MUX STM-256/ OC-768 LSXL G.694.1 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX Client side DMUX G.694.1 LSXL STM-256/ OC-768

WDM side

5.15.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LSXL are tunable wavelength function, OTN interfaces and ESC function. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-122. Table 5-122 Functions and features of the LSXL Function and Feature Basic function Description Maps one STM-256/OC-768 signal into one OTU3 optical signal and converts the signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM wavelength. It also performs the reverse process. TN11LSXL: STM-256, OC-768
l l

Client-side service type OTN function

Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Up to one channel of client-side service signals can be mapped into OTU3/OTU3e signals. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3. Supports TCM function for ODU3.

l l

WDM specification

Supports the DWDM specification.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-231

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Tunable wavelength function

Description Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of:
l l

40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz

ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l

Protection scheme

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection. Inloop Outloop Not supported Not supported Supported Supported

Loopback

Client side

WDM side

Inloop Outloop

5.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LSXL board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-71 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXL.

5-232

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-71 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL

Client side
RX

WDM side O/E

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module

OTN processing module

E/O

OUT

TX

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

IN

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

SCC

Signal Flow
The client side of the LSXL board can access the following optical signals: TN11LSXL:
l l

STM-256 optical signals OC-768 optical signals

In the signal flow of the LSXL board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSXL to the WDM side of the LSXL, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU3 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3 electrical signals. The OTU3 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU3 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-233

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU3 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU3 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU3 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to STM-256/OC-768 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU3 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing module.

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU3 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU3 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU3 signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-234

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.15.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXL front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-72 shows the LSXL front panel. Figure 5-72 TN11LSXL front panel

LSXL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX RX

OUT IN

LSXL

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-235

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l l l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the LSXL front panel. Table 5-123 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 5-123 Types and functions of the LSXL interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT

LC

TX RX

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.15.6 Valid Slots

The TN11LSXL occupies four slots. The valid slots for the TN11LSXL are IU1-IU14 in the subrack. The back connector of the TN11LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the TN11LSXL displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the four occupied slots. For example, if the TN11LSXL occupies slots IU1, IU2, IU3 and IU4, the slot number of the TN11LSXL displayed on the NM is IU1.

5.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.
5-236 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

5.15.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-124. Table 5-124 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXL displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT TX/RX Interface on the NM 1 3

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown Service Type FEC Working State FEC Type Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type SD Trigger Condition

5.15.9 Specifications of the LSXL

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-237

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of Optical Module at the client Side

Table 5-125 Specifications of optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1290 to 1570 -6 3 -27 nm dBm dBm dB dB ps/nm 1530 to 1565 3 0 8.2 35 40 Unit Value Transponder NRZ

TN11LSXL: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-126 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value Transponder ODB Tunable DRZ Tunable

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio
5-238

THz dBm dBm dB

192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 8.2

192.10 to 196.00 0 -5 8.2

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance

Unit

Value Transponder

GHz nm dB ps/nm

2.5 0.6 35 550

5 1 35 400

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1529 to 1567 -16 0 -27 PIN 1529 to 1567 -16 0 -27

Mechanical Specifications
The TN11LSXL consists of three main boards: board A, board B and board C. The mechanical dimension of each main board is provided below:
l l l

Board A: 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2.2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Board B: 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Board C: 73.5 mm (H) x 72 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (2.9 in. (H) x 2.8 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))

TN11LSXL
l l

Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 101.6 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 4.0 in. (W)) Weight: 11.0 lb. (5.0 kg)

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 103.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 110.0

TN11LSXL

DRZ-tunable(40G) (Transponder)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-239

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board

Optical Module Type

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 98.0

The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 105.0

ODB-tunable(40G) (Transponder)

5.16 LSXLR
LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit 5.16.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LSXLR board is available, that is TN11. 5.16.2 Application The LSXLR is a type of optical transponder unit. Used in an electrical REG station in the system, the LSXLR realizes the electrical regeneration of the corresponding optical signal. 5.16.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LSXLR are tunable wavelength function, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSXLR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.16.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXLR front panel. 5.16.6 Valid Slots The TN11LSXLR occupies four slots. The valid slots for the TN11LSXLR are IU1-IU14 in the subrack. 5.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.16.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.16.9 Specifications of the LSXLR Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.16.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LSXLR board is available, that is TN11.

5.16.2 Application
The LSXLR is a type of optical transponder unit. Used in an electrical REG station in the system, the LSXLR realizes the electrical regeneration of the corresponding optical signal.
5-240 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

For the position of the LSXLR in the WDM system, see Figure 5-73. Figure 5-73 Position of the LSXLR in the WDM system
WDM side DMUX G.694.1 MUX LSXLR LSXLR G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX

5.16.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LSXLR are tunable wavelength function, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-127. Table 5-127 Functions and features of the LSXLR Function and Feature Basic function Regenerating rate OTN function Description The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system, realizing the electrical regeneration of corresponding optical signals. TN11LSXLR: OTU3
l l

Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3. Supports TCM function for ODU3. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3.

l l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function

Supports the DWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of:
l l

40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz

ESC function FEC encoding

Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-241

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring

Description
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function Protection scheme Loopback

Not supported Not supported Not supported

5.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LSXLR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-74 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR. Figure 5-74 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR

WDM side IN O/E Optical receiving module

Decoding module

Overhead module

Encoding module

WDM side E/O Optical transmitting module OUT

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

5-242

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Signal Flow
The LSXLR board realizes the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU3 optical signals. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs the O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU3 signals . The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.

Module Function
l

Optical receiving module

Performs the O/E conversion of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU3 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to the ITU-T G.694.1compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU3 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Optical transmitting module

The signal processing module The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module.

Decoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU3 signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.

Encoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU3 signals. Overhead module Performs overhead processing of OTU3 signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-243

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.16.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXLR front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-75 shows the LSXLR front panel. Figure 5-75 TN11LSXLR front panel

LSXLR
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

OUT IN

LSXLR

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-244

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l l l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 2 optical interfaces on the LSXLR front panel. Table 5-128 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 5-128 Types and functions of the LSXLR interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

OUT

LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.16.6 Valid Slots

The TN11LSXLR occupies four slots. The valid slots for the TN11LSXLR are IU1-IU14 in the subrack. The back connector of the TN11LSXLR is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the TN11LSXLR displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the four occupied slots. For example, if the TN11LSXLR occupies slots IU1, IU2, IU3 and IU4, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR displayed on the NM is IU1.

5.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.16.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-245

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-129. Table 5-129 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXLR displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Laser Status FEC Working State FEC Type Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type

5.16.9 Specifications of the LSXLR

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

TN11LSXLR: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-130 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value Transponder ODB Tunable DRZ Tunable

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio
5-246

THz dBm dBm dB

192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 8.2

192.10 to 196.00 0 -5 8.2

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance

Unit

Value Transponder

GHz nm dB ps/nm

2.5 0.6 35 550

5 1 35 400

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1529 to 1567 -16 0 -27 PIN 1529 to 1567 -16 0 -27

Mechanical Specifications
The TN11LSXLR consists of three main boards: board A, board B and board C. The mechanical dimension of each main board is provided below:
l l l

Board A: 235.0 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2.2 mm (T) (9.3 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Board B: 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Board C: 73.5 mm (H) x 72 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (2.9 in. (H) x 2.8 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))

TN11LSXLR
l l

Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 101.6 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 4.0 in. (W)) Weight: 6.7 lb. (3.1 kg)

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 87.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 90.0

TN11LSXLR

DRZ-tunable(40G) (Transponder)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-247

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board

Optical Module Type

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 82.0

The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 85.0

ODB-tunable(40G) (Transponder)

5.17 LSXR
LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit 5.17.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LSXR board is available, that is TN11. 5.17.2 Application The LSXR is a type of optical transponder unit. Used in an electrical REG station in the system, the LSXR realizes the electrical regeneration of the corresponding optical signal. 5.17.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LSXR are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSXR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.17.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXR front panel. 5.17.6 Valid Slots The LSXR occupies one slot. Valid slots for the LSXR are IU1-IU17. 5.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.17.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.17.9 Specifications of the LSXR Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.17.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LSXR board is available, that is TN11.

5.17.2 Application
The LSXR is a type of optical transponder unit. Used in an electrical REG station in the system, the LSXR realizes the electrical regeneration of the corresponding optical signal. For the position of the LSXR in the WDM system, see Figure 5-76.
5-248 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Figure 5-76 Position of the LSXR in the WDM system

WDM side DMUX G.694.1 MUX LSXR WDM side MUX G.694.1 DMUX

LSXR

5.17.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LSXR are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-131. Table 5-131 Functions and features of the LSXR Function and Feature Basic function Regenerating rate OTN function Description The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system, realizing the electrical regeneration of corresponding optical signals. OTU2/OTU2v
l l

Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. Supports TCM function for ODU2. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.

l l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function

Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of:
l l

40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz

ESC function FEC encoding

Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975 and AFEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.1.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-249

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring

Description
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function Protection scheme Loopback

Not supported Not supported Not supported

5.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LSXR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-77 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR. Figure 5-77 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR

WDM side
IN

O/E Optical receiving module

Decoding module

Overhead module

Encoding module

WDM side E/O Optical transmitting module

OUT

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

5-250

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Signal Flow
The LSXR board realizes the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs the O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v signals . The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.

Module Function
l

Optical receiving module

Performs the O/E conversion of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to the ITU-T G.694.1compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2v optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Optical transmitting module

The signal processing module The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module.

Decoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU2/OTU2v signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.

Encoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU2/OTU2v signals. Overhead module Performs overhead processing of OTU2/OTU2v signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-251

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.17.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXR front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-78 shows the LSXR front panel. Figure 5-78 LSXR front panel

LSXR
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

OUT IN

LSXR

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-252

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l l l

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the LSXR front panel. Table 5-132 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 5-132 Types and functions of the LSXR interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

OUT

LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.17.6 Valid Slots

The LSXR occupies one slot. Valid slots for the LSXR are IU1-IU17.

5.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.17.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-133.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-253

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 5-133 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXR displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Laser Status FEC Working State FEC Type Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type

5.17.9 Specifications of the LSXR

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-134 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 800 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even wavelengths) 1600 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm NRZ- 80 channels fixed

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency
5-254

dBm dBm dB THz

2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05

4 0 9 192.10 to 196.00

2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance

Unit

Value 800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 10 0.3 35 1600 800 ps/nm 5 0.3 35 800

GHz nm dB ps/nm

10 0.3 35 800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -26 -9 -27 -16 0 -27 APD PIN

Table 5-135 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/nm - tunablePIN NRZ- 80 channels tunable 1200 ps/ nm tunableAPD NRZ- 80 channels tunable 4800 ps/nm -ODBtunable ODB- 80 channels tunable 800 ps/nmDRZtunable DRZ- 80 channels tunable

Line code format

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

dBm dBm dB THz

2 -3 10

2 -3 10

2 -3 NAa

2 -3 10

192.10 to 196.05
5-255

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 1200 ps/nm - tunablePIN 1200 ps/ nm tunableAPD 5 0.3 35 4800 ps/nm -ODBtunable 5 0.3 35 800 ps/nmDRZtunable 5 0.3 35

Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance

GHz nm dB

5 0.3 35

ps/nm

1200

1200

4800

800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 -26 -26 -16 APD APD PIN

dBm dB

0 -27

-9 -27

-9 -27

0 -27

a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)

l l

5-256

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 34.8 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 38.3

TN11LSXR

NRZ-fixed(10G) (800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

35.0

38.5

36.8

40.3

39.8

43.3

5.18 LWX2
LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board 5.18.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is TN11. 5.18.2 Application The LWX2 is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWX2 realizes the conversion between two optical signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendationcompliant WDM signals. 5.18.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LWX2 are tunable wavelength and ESC. 5.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LWX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.18.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWX2 front panel. 5.18.6 Valid Slots The LWX2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWX2 are IU1-IU17.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-257

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2 The characteristic code for the LWX2 consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. 5.18.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.18.9 Specifications of the LWX2 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.18.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is TN11.

5.18.2 Application
The LWX2 is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWX2 realizes the conversion between two optical signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendationcompliant WDM signals. For the position of the LWX2 in the WDM system, see Figure 5-79. Figure 5-79 Position of the LWX2 in the WDM system
MUX 1 16Mbit/s 2.7Gbit/s 2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side G.694.1/ LWX2 G.694.2 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX 2 G.694.1/ G.694.2 LWX2 DMUX 1 16Mbit/s 2.7Gbit/s

5.18.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LWX2 are tunable wavelength and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-136. Table 5-136 Functions and features of the LWX2 Function and Feature Basic function Description Receives two optical signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and converts them into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with the ITUT G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelengths compliant with the ITU-T G. 694.2. The reverse process is similar.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-258

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature Client-side service type WDM specification Tunable wavelength function

Description STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI/SDI, FICON, FICON Express, HDTV Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. In the case of configuring four-wavelength tunable optical module, configure every four continuous wavelengths (first group started with the 1st wavelength) in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing as one group. In this way, the optical signal output on the WDM side are tunable within the four wavelengths of every group. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal.
l

ESC function Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Protection scheme eSFP Loopback

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LWX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-80 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-259

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-80 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2

Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2

WDM side O/E Service processing module E/O

OUT1 OUT2

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

IN1 IN2

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LWX2 board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
NOTE

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.18.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the LWX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWX2 to the WDM side of the LWX2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the OUT1-OTU2 optical interfaces.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard

5-260

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of Any optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. Regenerates Any signals in two directions. Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Service processing module

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.18.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWX2 front panel.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-261

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-81 shows the LWX2 front panel. Figure 5-81 LWX2 front panel

LWX2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LWX2

NOTE

The WDM-side optical modules must be inserted in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in an ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-262

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Interfaces
There are 8 optical interfaces on the LWX2 front panel. Table 5-137 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 5-137 Types and functions of the LWX2 interfaces Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT1-OUT2

LC

TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.18.6 Valid Slots

The LWX2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWX2 are IU1-IU17.

5.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2

The characteristic code for the LWX2 consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 5-138. Table 5-138 Characteristic code for the LWX2 Code The first four digits Meaning The frequency of forth optical signal Description The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.

The last four digits

The frequency of forth optical signal

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-263

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 is 92109220.

l

"9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz. "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.20 THz.

5.18.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-139. Table 5-139 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWX2 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Interface on the NM 1 3 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Client Service Bearer Rate (M) Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown Current Bearer Rate (M) Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type SD Trigger Condition

5.18.9 Specifications of the LWX2

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5-264 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

Table 5-140 Specifications of optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ MLM 0.5 I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-10

-5

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

NA

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-265

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2

dB

NA

NA

30

30

IEEE802.3zcompliant

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-18 -3

-18 0

-28 -9

dB

NA

-27

-27

-27

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE

2.5Gbit/sMulti-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 5-141 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format
5-266

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

NRZ

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Target distance

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 80

km

40

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Table 5-142 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-267

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)

THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm dB -

192.1 to 196.0 3 0 8.5 12.5 1 30 5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services.

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance dBm dBm dB APD -28 -9 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-143 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800ps/ nm-PINa 12800ps/ nm-APDa 6500 ps/nm PIN 3200 ps/nm -2mW-APD 6400 ps/nm four channelstunable NRZ

Line code format

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power dBm dBm -1 -5 -1 -5 3 -2 3 -2 3 -2

5-268

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 12800ps/ nm-PINa 12800ps/ nm-APDa 6500 ps/nm PIN 3200 ps/nm -2mW-APD 6400 ps/nm four channelstunable 8.2

Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

dB THz GHz

10

10

8.2

8.2

192.10 to 196.00 10

nm dB

0.2 35

0.2 35

0.5 30

0.5 30

0.5 35

ps/nm -

12800

12800

6500

3200

6400

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 0 -27 -28 -9 -27 -18 0 -27 -26 -10 -27 APD PIN APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27

Operating nm wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance dBm dBm dB

a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-269

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Table 5-144 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-4mW NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 5 2.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)

l l

5-270

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 38.5 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 42.4 W

5.19 LWXD
LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit) 5.19.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is TN11. 5.19.2 Application The LWXD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWXD realizes the conversion between the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendationcompliant WDM signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. 5.19.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LWXD are tunable wavelength and ESC. 5.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LWXD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.19.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWXD front panel. 5.19.6 Valid Slots The LWXD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWXD are IU1-IU17. 5.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD The characteristic code for the LWXD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. 5.19.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.19.9 Specifications of the LWXD Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.19.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is TN11.

5.19.2 Application
The LWXD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWXD realizes the conversion between the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendationcompliant WDM signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. For the position of the LWXD in the WDM system, see Figure 5-82.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-271

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-82 Position of the LWXD in the WDM system

MUX DMUX MUX DMUX Client side WDM side DMUX MUX DMUX MUX WDM side Client side G.694.1/ LWXD G.694.2 16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s

16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s

G.694.1/ LWXD G.694.2

5.19.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LWXD are tunable wavelength and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-145. Table 5-145 Functions and features of the LWXD Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Receives a signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and converts the signal into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITUT G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

Client-side service type WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function

STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI/SDI, FICON, FICON Express, HDTV Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.

5-272

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature Protection scheme

Description
l l l

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LWXD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-83 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD. Figure 5-83 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD
Client side
RX

WDM side O/E Service processing module E/O

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2

TX

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-273

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
NOTE

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.19.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the LWXD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXD to the WDM side of the LWXD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of Any optical signals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-274

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. Regenerates Any signals in two directions. Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Service processing module

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.19.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWXD front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-84 shows the LWXD front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-275

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-84 LWXD front panel

LWXD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LWXD

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the LWXD front panel. Table 5-146 lists the type and function of each interface.

5-276

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-146 Types and functions of the LWXD interfaces Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT1-OUT2

LC

TX RX

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.19.6 Valid Slots

The LWXD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWXD are IU1-IU17.

5.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD

The characteristic code for the LWXD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 5-147. Table 5-147 Characteristic code for the LWXD Code The first four digits Meaning The frequency of forth optical signal Description The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.

The last four digits

The frequency of forth optical signal

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 is 92109220.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-277

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

"9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz. "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.20 THz.

5.19.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-148. Table 5-148 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXD displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX/RX Interface on the NM 1 2 3

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Client Service Bearer Rate (M) Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown Current Bearer Rate (M) Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type SD Trigger Condition

5.19.9 Specifications of the LWXD

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5-278

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Specifications of optical module at the client side

NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

Table 5-149 Specifications of optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ MLM 0.5 I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-10

-5

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

NA

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-279

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2

dB

NA

NA

30

30

IEEE802.3zcompliant

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-18 -3

-18 0

-28 -9

dB

NA

-27

-27

-27

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE

2.5Gbit/sMulti-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 5-150 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format
5-280

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

NRZ

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Target distance

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 80

km

40

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Table 5-151 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-281

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)

THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm dB -

192.1 to 196.0 3 0 8.5 12.5 1 30 5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services.

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance dBm dBm dB APD -28 -9 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-152 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800ps/ nm-PINa 12800ps/ nm-APDa 6500 ps/ nm -PIN 3200 ps/ nm -2mWAPD NRZ 12800 ps/ nmtunable NRZ 6400 ps/ nm-four channelstunable NRZ

Line code format

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power dBm dBm -4 -8 -4 -8 0 -5 0 -5 0 -5 0 -5

5-282

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 12800ps/ nm-PINa 12800ps/ nm-APDa 6500 ps/ nm -PIN 3200 ps/ nm -2mWAPD 8.2 12800 ps/ nmtunable 10 6400 ps/ nm-four channelstunable 8.2

Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

dB THz GHz nm dB

10

10

8.2

192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 0.2 35 0.5 30 0.5 30 0.2 35 0.5 35

ps/nm -

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 0 -27 -28 -9 -27 -18 0 -27 -26 -10 -27 -28 -9 -27 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27

a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Table 5-153 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-4mW NRZ

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-283

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 1600 ps/nm-4mW

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 2 -0.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 35.8 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 39.4 W

5.20 LWXS
LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)
5-284 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

5.20.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the LWXS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ETR/CLO services. 5.20.2 Application The LWXS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWXS realizes the conversion between the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendationcompliant WDM signal. 5.20.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LWXS are tunable wavelength and ESC. 5.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LWXS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.20.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWXS front panel. 5.20.6 Valid Slots The LWXS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWXS are IU1-IU17. 5.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.20.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.20.9 Specifications of the LWXS Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.20.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the LWXS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ETR/CLO services. Table 5-154 lists the version description of the LWXS. Table 5-154 Version description of the LWXS Item Functional version Similarity Difference Description Two functional versions of the LWXS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The TN12LWXS works in the same way as the TN11LWXS. The TN12LWXS board supports the function of processing ISC 1G/ISC 2G/ETR/CLO services.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-285

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Replacement

Description The TN12LWXS board can replace the TN11LWXS board, but after the replacement, the SCC software need be upgraded. The TN11LWXS board, however, cannot replace the TN12LWXS board.

5.20.2 Application
The LWXS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWXS realizes the conversion between the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendationcompliant WDM signal. For the position of the LWXS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-85. Figure 5-85 Position of the LWXS in the WDM system
MUX 16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s LWXS G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side DMUX G.694.1/ LWXS G.694.2 16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s

Client side

5.20.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the LWXS are tunable wavelength and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-155. Table 5-155 Functions and features of the LWXS Function and Feature Basic function Description Receives a signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and converts the signal into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G. 694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G. 694.2. The reverse process is similar. TN11LWXS: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI/SDI, FICON, FICON Express, HDTV TN12LWXS: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI/SDI, FICON, FICON Express, HDTV, ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO WDM specification
5-286

Client-side service type

Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature Tunable wavelength function ESC function Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Protection scheme eSFP Loopback

Description Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported

5.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The LWXS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-86 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-287

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-86 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS

Client side
RX

WDM side O/E Service processing module E/O

OUT

TX

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

IN

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
NOTE

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 5.20.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the LWXS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXS to the WDM side of the LWXS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard

5-288

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of Any electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of Any optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. Regenerates Any signals in two directions. Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Service processing module

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.20.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWXS front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-87 shows the LWXS front panel.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-289

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-87 LWXS front panel

LWXS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 OUT IN

LWXS

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the LWXS front panel. Table 5-156 lists the type and function of each interface.

5-290

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-156 Types and functions of the LWXS interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT

LC

TX RX

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.20.6 Valid Slots

The LWXS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWXS are IU1-IU17.

5.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.20.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-157. Table 5-157 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXS displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT TX/RX Interface on the NM 1 3

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-291

5 Optical Transponder Unit

NOTE

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Client Service Bearer Rate (M) Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown Current Bearer Rate (M) Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type SD Trigger Condition

5.20.9 Specifications of the LWXS

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 can be used to access ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

Table 5-158 Specifications of optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance
5-292

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2

km

NRZ MLM 0.5

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 80

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-10

-5

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

NA

dB

NA

NA

30

30

IEEE802.3zcompliant

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

nm

PIN 770 to 860

PIN 1270 to 1580

PIN 1270 to 1580

APD 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-18 -3

-18 0

-28 -9

dB

NA

-27

-27

-27

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-293

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE

2.5Gbit/sMulti-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 5-159 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range

5-294

nm

PIN 1270 to 1620

APD 1270 to 1620

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) -28 -9 -27

dBm dBm dB

-19 -3 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-160 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm dB 192.1 to 196.0 3 0 8.5 12.5 1 30 5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services.

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance dBm dBm dB APD -28 -9 -27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-295

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-161 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800ps/ nm-PINa 12800ps/ nm-APDa 6500 ps/ nm -PIN 3200 ps/ nm -2mWAPD NRZ 12800 ps/ nmtunable NRZ 6400 ps/ nm- four channelstunable NRZ

Line code format

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3

dBm dB THz GHz

-5 10

-5 10

-2 8.2

-2 8.2

-2 10

-2 8.2

192.10 to 196.00 10

nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5

dB

35

35

30

30

35

35

ps/nm -

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575

5-296

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 12800ps/ nm-PINa 12800ps/ nm-APDa 6500 ps/ nm -PIN 3200 ps/ nm -2mWAPD -26 -10 12800 ps/ nmtunable -28 -9 6400 ps/ nm- four channelstunable -28 -9

Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

dBm dBm

-18 0

-28 -9

-18 0

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Table 5-162 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-4mW NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 5 2.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-297

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

Unit

Value 1600 ps/nm-4mW

nm dBm dBm dB

APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 33.9 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 37.3 W

5.21 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board 5.21.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TMX board is available, that is TN11. 5.21.2 Application The TMX is a type of optical transponder unit. The TMX multiplexes four STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 service signals into one OTU2 signal. It also realizes conversion between these signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. 5.21.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the TMX are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. 5.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TMX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 5.21.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TMX front panel. 5.21.6 Valid Slots The TMX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TMX are IU1-IU17. 5.21.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX
5-298 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 5.21.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 5.21.9 Specifications of the TMX Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.21.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the TMX board is available, that is TN11.

5.21.2 Application
The TMX is a type of optical transponder unit. The TMX multiplexes four STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 service signals into one OTU2 signal. It also realizes conversion between these signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the TMX in the WDM system, see Figure 5-88. Figure 5-88 Position of the TMX in the WDM system
1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 4 Client side TMX G.694.1 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 TMX 4 WDM side 1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1

WDM side

Client side

5.21.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the TMX are tunable wavelength, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 5-163. Table 5-163 Functions and features of the TMX Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 service optical signals into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converse them to DWDM standard wavelength that comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. It can also perform the reverse process. STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 (without FEC)

Client-side service type

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-299

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature OTN function

Description
l l

Provides the OTU2/OTU2v interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports 4ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports SM functions for OTU2. Supports TCM function for ODU1. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2.

l l l l l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function

Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of:
l l

40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz

ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975 and AFEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.1.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l

Protection scheme

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Supported Supported Supported
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-300

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Function and Feature

Description Outloop Supported

5.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The TMX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 5-89 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TMX. Figure 5-89 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

WDM side O/E

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN processing module

E/O OTN processing module

OUT

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

IN

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the TMX board can access the following optical signals:
l l l

STM-16 optical signals OC-48 optical signals OTU1 (without FEC) optical signals

In the signal flow of the TMX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX to the WDM side of the TMX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-301

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU1 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 electrical signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module.

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5-302

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Encapsulates multiples channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function.

Client-side OTN processing module Realizes the OTN performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU2 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

5.21.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TMX front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-90 shows the TMX front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-303

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 5-90 TMX front panel

TMX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT IN

TMX

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the TMX front panel.Table 5-164 lists the type and function of each interface.

5-304

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-164 Types and functions of the TMX interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

OUT

LC

TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4

LC LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

5.21.6 Valid Slots

The TMX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TMX are IU1-IU17.

5.21.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

5.21.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-165. Table 5-165 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TMX displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT TX1/RX1
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Interface on the NM 1 3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-305

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface on the Panel TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4

Interface on the NM 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State FEC Type Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type

5.21.9 Specifications of the TMX

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of optical module at the client side

Table 5-166 Specifications of optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 40

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

5-306 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580

dBm

-3

dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

dB

NA

30

30

30

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-18 -3

-18 0

-27 -9

-28 -9

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-307

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Remark

Unit

Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

These modules access STM-16 and OTU1 services. The indexes listed in the table above are applicable for the STM-16 services. When the module accesses OTU1 services, the indexes are slightly different.

Table 5-167 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance km nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB nm dBm dBm dB Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1 30 G.957-compliant APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

5-308

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 5-168 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm dB 192.1 to 196.0 3 0 8.5 12.5 1 30 5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services.

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance dBm dBm dB APD -28 -9 -27

Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side

Table 5-169 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 800 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even wavelengths) 1600 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm NRZ- 80 channels fixed

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-309

5 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 800 ps/nm

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800 4 0 9 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.3 35 1600 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -26 -9 -27 -16 0 -27 APD PIN

Table 5-170 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/nm - tunablePIN NRZ- 80 channels tunable 1200 ps/ nm tunableAPD NRZ- 80 channels tunable 4800 ps/nm -ODBtunable ODB- 80 channels tunable 800 ps/nmDRZtunable DRZ- 80 channels tunable
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Line code format

5-310

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

5 Optical Transponder Unit

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 1200 ps/nm - tunablePIN 1200 ps/ nm tunableAPD 4800 ps/nm -ODBtunable 800 ps/nmDRZtunable

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB 2 -3 10 2 -3 10 2 -3 NAa 2 -3 10

192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35

ps/nm

1200

1200

4800

800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 -26 -26 -16 APD APD PIN

dBm dB

0 -27

-9 -27

-9 -27

0 -27

a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-311

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

5 Optical Transponder Unit

l l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) 42.1 46.4 The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 40.3 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 44.3

TN11TMX

42.4

46.6

46.5

51.2

5-312

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

6
About This Chapter

Tributary Unit and Line Unit

6.1 ND2 ND2: 2 x (4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2) optical interface board 6.2 NS2 NS2: 4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2 optical interface board 6.3 TBE TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board 6.4 TDG TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board 6.5 TDX TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board 6.6 TOM TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board 6.7 TQM TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board 6.8 TQS TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board 6.9 TQX TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 6.10 TSXL TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6.1 ND2
ND2: 2 x (4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2) optical interface board 6.1.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the ND2 board is available, that is TN11. 6.1.2 Application The ND2 is a type of line board. The ND2 realizes the conversion between eight cross-connect ODU1 signals or two cross-connect ODU2 signals and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2 signals. 6.1.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the ND2 are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 6.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 6.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ND2 front panel. 6.1.6 Valid Slots The ND2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ND2 are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 6.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2 The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 6.1.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 6.1.9 Specifications of the ND2 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

6.1.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the ND2 board is available, that is TN11.

6.1.2 Application
The ND2 is a type of line board. The ND2 realizes the conversion between eight cross-connect ODU1 signals or two cross-connect ODU2 signals and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2 signals. For the position of the ND2 in the WDM system, see Figure 6-1.

6-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-1 Position of the ND2 in the WDM system

G.694.1 MUX 1 TDX 8 ND2 DMUX MUX DMUX ND2 8 G.694.1

1 TDX

Client side

WDM side

WDM side

Client side

NOTE

In the application scenario with TN11TDX, the ND2 accesses eight channels of ODU1 signals. In the application scenario with TN12TDX, the ND2 accesses two channels of ODU2 signals.

6.1.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the ND2 are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-1. Table 6-1 Functions and features of the ND2 Function and feature Basic function Description Maps double channels of 4 x ODU1 electrical signals or double channels of ODU2 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board into two OTU2 signals and converts the signal into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Supports the cross-connection of double channels of 4 x ODU1 electrical signals or double channels of ODU2 electrical signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board.
l l l

Crossconnect capabilities OTN function

Supports 4 x ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2. Supports ODU2 mapping into OTU2. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.

l l l

WDM specification ESC function

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Supports the DWDM specification. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-3

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and feature FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Description Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975 and AFEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.1.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function Protection scheme

Not supported
l l l l l

Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection. Supports the ODUk SPRing protection. Supports the tributary SNCP protection. Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Not supported Supported

Loopback

WDM side

Client side Path Loopback

6.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The ND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 6-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ND2.

6-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the ND2

8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2 Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2

O/E WDM-side optical module

IN1 IN2

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the ND2 board can access the following optical signals:
l l

ODU1 electrical signals ODU2 electrical signals

In the signal flow of the ND2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the ND2 to the WDM side of the ND2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The OTN processing module receives double channels of 4 x ODU1 electrical signals or double channels of ODU2 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs two channels of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-5

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module sends out double channels of 4 x ODU1 electrical signals or double channels of ODU2 electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

Module Function
l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU2 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

6.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ND2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-3 shows the ND2 front panel.

6-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-3 ND2 front panel

ND2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

ND2

NOTE

The WDM-side optical modules must be inserted in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in an ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the ND2 front panel. Table 6-2 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-7

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 6-2 Types and functions of the ND2 interfaces Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

OUT1-OUT2

LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

6.1.6 Valid Slots

The ND2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ND2 are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

6.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for Line Unit.

6.1.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 6-3. Table 6-3 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ND2 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 Interface on the NM 1 2

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

6-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Laser Status Service Mode FEC Working State FEC Type Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Path Loopback Line Rate

Port Description
Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5 shows the NM ports of the ND2 board. Table 6-4 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 6-4 Port diagram of the ND2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-2 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1

Fixed cross-connection

Service processing module

Figure 6-5 Port diagram of the ND2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1

Fixed cross-connection

Service processing module

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 6-4 Meaning of NM port of the ND2 Port Name ODU1LP1-ODU1LP2 ODU2LP1-ODU2LP2 IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Meaning Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logic ports. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the ND2 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the ND2 board and the optical channels of the ClientLP port or LP port on other boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown (1) in Figure 6-6. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1 cross-connections between the ODU1LP port of the ND2 board and the optical channels of the ODU1LP port on other TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards (or IN/OUT port on TN11NS2 board) to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services (For regeneration or service passthrough), as shown (2) in Figure 6-6. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU2 cross-connection between the ODU2LP port of the ND2 board and the optical channels of the ClientLP port or LP port on other boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU2 services, as shown (1) in Figure 6-7. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU2 cross-connections between the ODU2LP port of the ND2 board and ODU2LP port of other TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU2 services (For regeneration or service passthrough), as shown (2) in Figure 6-7. The paths of the ODU1LP/ODU2LP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1-IN2/ OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.

6-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-6 Cross-connection diagram of the ND2 (ODU1 level)

Client side
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

Other board Cross-connect module

WDM side

WDM side
1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-2 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4

Fixed cross-connection

ND2 board WDM side

Fixed cross-connection

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-2 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4

Other ND2 board

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 board The WDM side of the ND2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other ND2 boards 1 2

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-11

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-7 Cross-connection diagram of the ND2 (ODU2 level)

Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

Other board Cross-connect module

Fixed cross-connection

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1

WDM side

ND2 board WDM side Fixed cross-connection

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 2 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1

Other ND2 board

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 board The WDM side of the ND2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other ND2 boards 1 2

6.1.9 Specifications of the ND2

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 6-5 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 800ps/nm- NRZ-fixed NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even wavelengths)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation
6-12

dBm dBm dB THz GHz

2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Item Optical Module Type Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance

Unit

Value 800ps/nm- NRZ-fixed

nm dB ps/nm

0.3 35 800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2.2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 3.5 lb. (1.6 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 68.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 74.8 W

6.2 NS2
NS2: 4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2 optical interface board 6.2.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the NS2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the grooming of the ODU2 service. 6.2.2 Application The NS2 is a type of line board. The NS2 realizes the conversion between four cross-connect ODU1 signals or a ODU2 electrical signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2 signals. 6.2.3 Functions and Features
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-13

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The main functions and features supported by the NS2 are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 6.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NS2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 6.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the NS2 front panel. 6.2.6 Valid Slots The NS2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the NS2 are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 6.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2 The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. 6.2.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 6.2.9 Specifications of the NS2 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

6.2.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the NS2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the grooming of the ODU2 service. Table 6-6 lists the version description of the NS2. Table 6-6 Version description of the NS2 Item Functional version Similarity Difference Replacement Description Two functional versions of the NS2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. Both supports the grooming of the ODU1 service. The TN12NS2 board supports the grooming of the ODU2 service. TN11NS2 and TN12NS2 can not be replaced with each other.

6.2.2 Application
The NS2 is a type of line board. The NS2 realizes the conversion between four cross-connect ODU1 signals or a ODU2 electrical signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2 signals. For the position of the NS2 in the WDM system, see Figure 6-8.

6-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-8 Position of the NS2 in the WDM system

G.694.1 1 TQS 4 Client side 4 1 NS2 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX NS2 4 G.694.1 1 TQS 4 Client side 1

WDM side

WDM side

6.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the NS2 are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-7. Table 6-7 Functions and features of the NS2 Function and feature Basic function Description
l

TN11NS2: Maps four ODU1 signals sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot into an OTU2 signal and converts the signal into a standard DWDM signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. TN12NS2: Maps four ODU1 signals or an ODU2 signal sent from the cross-connection board into an OTU2 signal and converts the signal into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.

Crossconnect capabilities

TN11NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the NS2 and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot. TN12NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals or an ODU2 signal between the NS2 and the cross-connect board.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-15

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and feature OTN function

Description TN11NS2:
l l

Supports 4ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. Supports 4ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2. Supports ODU2 mapping into OTU2. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.

l l l

TN12NS2:
l l l

l l l

WDM specification Tunable wavelength function

Supports the DWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of:
l l

40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz

ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975 and AFEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.1.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function

Not supported

6-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Function and feature Protection scheme

Description
l l l l l

Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection. Supports the ODUk SPRing protection. Supports the tributary SNCP protection. Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Not supported Supported

Loopback

WDM side

Client side Path Loopback

6.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The NS2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 6-9 and Figure 6-10 show the functional modules and signal flow of the NS2. Figure 6-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2
ODU1 Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O Cross-connect module OTN processing module OUT

O/E WDM-side optical module

IN

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

Backplane SCC (controlled by SCC)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-17

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Signal Flow of TN11NS2

The signal processing module of the NS2 board accesses ODU1 electrical signals. In the signal flow of the TN11NS2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the TN11NS2 to the WDM side of the TN11NS2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The signal processing module receives four channels of ODU1 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane for service crossconnection.

Figure 6-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2

4 X ODU1/ 1 X ODU2 Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT

O/E WDM-side optical module

IN

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

Backplane SCC (controlled by SCC)

6-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Signal Flow of TN12NS2

The client side of the NS2 board can access the following optical signals:
l l

ODU1 electrical signals ODU2 electrical signals

In the signal flow of the NS2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS2 to the WDM side of the NS2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The OTN processing module receives four channels of ODU1 electrical signals or one channel of ODU2 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/ AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU2 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 in frame, decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 electrical signals or one channel of ODU2 electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

Module Function
l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the NS2 and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals.
NOTE

The signal processing module of the TN12NS2 does not contain a cross-connect unit. This board, however, is fixedly connected to the cross-connect board.

OTN processing module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-19

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Realizes the framing of OTU2 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

6.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the NS2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-11 shows the NS2 front panel.

6-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-11 NS2 front panel

NS2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

OUT IN

NS2

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the NS2 front panel. Table 6-8 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-21

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 6-8 Types and functions of the NS2 interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

OUT

LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

6.2.6 Valid Slots

The NS2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the NS2 are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

6.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for Line Unit.

6.2.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 6-9. Table 6-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the NS2 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

6-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Laser Status Service Mode FEC Working State FEC Type Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Path Loopback SD Trigger Condition Line Rate

Port Description
Figure 6-12 andFigure 6-13 show the NM ports of the NS2 board. Table 6-10 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 6-12 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4 Fixed cross-connection Service processing module 1(IN/OUT)-1 WDM side

NOTE

TN11NS2: The optical paths of internal logic port are 1(IN/OUT)-1 to 1(IN/OUT)-4. TN12NS2 (ODU1 level): The optical paths of internal logic port are 51 (ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1 to 51 (ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4.

Figure 6-13 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)
WDM side
71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1

1(IN/OUT)-1

Fixed cross-connection

Service processing module

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-23

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 6-10 Meaning of NM port of the NS2 Port Name ODU1LP ODU2LP IN/OUT Meaning Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logic port. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the NS2 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

.During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the NS2 board and the optical channels of the ClientLP or LP port on other boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown (1) in Figure 6-14. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1 cross-connections between the ODU1LP port of the TN12NS2 board and the optical channels of the ODU1LP port on other TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards (or IN/OUT port on TN11NS2 board) to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services (For regeneration or service passthrough), as shown (2) in Figure 6-14. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU2 cross-connection between the ODU2LP port of the NS2 board and the optical channels of the ClientLP port or LP port on other boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU2 services, as shown (1) in Figure 6-15. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU2 cross-connections between the ODU2LP port of the TN12NS2 board and ODU2LP port of other TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU2 services (For regeneration or service passthrough), as shown (2) in Figure 6-15. The paths of the ODU1LP/ODU2LP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There is no need for configuration on the T2000.

6-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-14 Cross-connection diagram of the NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

Other board Cross-connect module

Fixed cross-connection NS2 board

1 2

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4

WDM side

Fixed cross-connection Other NS2 board

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4 1 2

WDM side

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other NS2 boards

Figure 6-15 Cross-connection diagram of the NS2 (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

Other board Cross-connect module

Fixed cross-connection

1 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1 2

WDM side

NS2 board

WDM side Fixed cross-connection

71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1

Other NS2 board

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other NS2 boards 1 2

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-25

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6.2.9 Specifications of the NS2

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

TN11NS2: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 6-11 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 800 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even wavelengths) 1600 ps/nm NRZ- 40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm NRZ- 80 channels fixed

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800 4 0 9 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.3 35 1600 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -26 -9 -27 -16 0 -27 APD PIN

6-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Table 6-12 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/nm - tunablePIN NRZ- 80 channels tunable 1200 ps/ nm tunableAPD NRZ- 80 channels tunable 4800 ps/nm -ODBtunable ODB- 80 channels tunable 800 ps/nmDRZtunable DRZ- 80 channels tunable

Line code format

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB 2 -3 10 2 -3 10 2 -3 NAa 2 -3 10

192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35 5 0.3 35

ps/nm

1200

1200

4800

800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 -26 -26 -16 APD APD PIN

dBm dB

0 -27

-9 -27

-9 -27

0 -27

a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-27

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

TN12NS2: Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 6-13 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 800ps/nm- NRZ-fixed NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even wavelengths)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27

6-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Table 6-14 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/ nm tunablePIN NRZ- 80 channels tunable 1200 ps/ nm tunable -APD NRZ- 80 channels tunable 4800 ps/ nm ODBtunable ODB- 80 channels tunable 800ps/nmDRZtunable DRZ- 80 channels tunable

Line code format

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 2 -3 10 2 -3 NAa 2 -3 10

192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 1200 5 0.3 35 1200 5 0.3 35 4800 5 0.3 35 800

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -26 -9 -27 -26 -9 -27 -16 0 -27 APD APD PIN

a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-29

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

l l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.64 lb (1.2 kg)

Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 38.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 41.8

TN11NS2

NRZ-fixed(10G) (800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

39.0

42.9

41.0

45.1

44.0

48.4

TN12NS2

39.5

47.4

6.3 TBE
TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board 6.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TBE board is available, that is TN11. 6.3.2 Application The TBE is a type of tributary board. Converges eight GE services and a maximum of 16 crossconnect GE services into one 10GE service and deconverges one 10GE service into multiple GE services; converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service; realizes transparent transmission of GE-GE services. 6.3.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature supported by the TBE is cross-connection at the electrical layer and ALS. 6.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
6-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

The TBE board consists of the client-side GE optical module, client-side 10GE optical module, L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 6.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TBE front panel. 6.3.6 Valid Slots The TBE occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TBE are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 6.3.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 6.3.8 Specifications of the TBE Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

6.3.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the TBE board is available, that is TN11.

6.3.2 Application
The TBE is a type of tributary board. Converges eight GE services and a maximum of 16 crossconnect GE services into one 10GE service and deconverges one 10GE service into multiple GE services; converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service; realizes transparent transmission of GE-GE services.

Application Scenario 1: Converging/Deconverging 8xGE Services and a Maximum of 16 Cross-Connect GE Services to/from One 10GE Services
For the position of the TBE in the WDM system, see Figure 6-16. Figure 6-16 Position of the TBE in the WDM system
8GE Local
client side Local client side

8GE

10GE TBE 4 GE 4 L4G 4 L4G

G.694.1 MUX

G.694.1 DMUX L4G 4 TBE 4 GE

10GE

DMUX

MUX

L4G 4

Client side

WDM side

WDM side

Client side

Application Scenario 2: Transparent Transmission of GE-GE Services

For the position of the TBE in the WDM system, see Figure 6-17.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-31

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-17 Position of the TBE in the WDM system

GE 1 1 GE 8 4 Client side GE WDM side WDM side TBE 4 1 L4G DMUX MUX L4G 4 GE Client side L4G MUX DMUX L4G 4 1 8 TBE G.694.1 G.694.1 GE 1 1 GE

6.3.3 Functions and Features

The main function and feature supported by the TBE is cross-connection at the electrical layer and ALS. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-15. Table 6-15 Functions and features of the TBE Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Converges eight GE services and a maximum of 16 cross-connect GE services into one 10GE service and deconverges one 10GE service into multiple GE services. Converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service. Realizes transparent transmission of GE-GE services.

l l

The reverse process is similar. Client-side service type Cross-connect capabilities Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function FE optical signal, FE electric signal, GE optical signal, GE electric signal, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN Supports cross-connecting 16 GE signals to the central working/ protection cross-connect board. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the FE, GE, 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN.

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received. Supports Stacking VLAN. Supports CAR (Committed Access Rate) and CoS (Class of Service). Supports IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah-compliant ETH OAM protocol.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

QinQ QoS (Quality of Service) ETH OAM

6-32

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Function and Feature LAG (Link Aggregation Group) VLAN broadcast CVLAN group port Layer 2 switching Flow control EPL (Ethernet Private Line) EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line) Port working mode

Description Supports the aggregation group protocol to aggregate services from IP port to Trunk port; supports manual and static link aggregation; supports payload equalization and non-payload equalization. Supports VLAN-based service group broadcast. Supports a group of CVLAN to be used as one VLAN. Supports the MAC address learning and aging. Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow control termination. Provides point-to-point EPL dedicated line. Provides point-to-multipoint EVPL dedicated line and supports VLANbased switching. 10GE optical interface: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN GE optical interface: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation GE electric interface: auto-negotiation FE optical interface: 100MFULL FE electric interface: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL, auto-negotiation

Protection scheme

l l l l l

Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the VLAN SNCP. 10GE optical interface /GE optical interface /FE optical interface: Supports the board-level protection. Supports the DBPS protection. Supports the DLAG protection. Supports the MS SNCP protection.

l l l

eSFP XFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. Supports the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. 10GE optical interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Supported Supported Supported

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-33

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature

Description Outloop GE optical interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop GE electric interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop FE optical interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop FE electric interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Supported

6.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The TBE board consists of the client-side GE optical module, client-side 10GE optical module, L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 6-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TBE.

6-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE

Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8 RX TX

GE

16

O/E 8 E/O
Client-side GE optical module

16

L2 switching module 16

Cross-connect module

O/E E/O
Client-side 10GE optical module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the TBE board accesses the following signals:
l l l l l l

GE optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals FE optical signals FE electrical signals GE electrical signals
NOTE

l l l

The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.

Convergence of Multiple GE Services into 10GE Services

Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-35

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Positive process:

The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The eight channels of GE electrical signals are converged with a maximum of sixteen channels of GE electrical signals groomed from the cross-connect module into one channel of 10GE electrical signals. The 10GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side 10GE optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out 10GE optical signals through the TX optical interface. The client-side 10GE optical module receives 10GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, 10GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. This module deconverges the one channel of 10GE electrical signals into multiple channels of GE electrical signals. A maximum of eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side GE optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out GE optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces. A maximum of sixteen channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the cross-connection board by the cross-connect module through the backplane.

Negative process:

Convergence or Transparent Transmission of GE-to-GE Services

l

Positive process:

The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. Based on the service requirement, the L2 switching module either transparently transmits the received GE signals or converges the received multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals into one channel of GE signals. The GE signals are sent to the cross-connection board by the cross-connect module through the backplane. The cross-connect module receives the GE electrical signals groomed from the crossconnection board through the backplane. GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The L2 switching module either transparently transmits the received GE signals or deconverges the received GE signals into multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals. The client-side GE optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs the optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Negative process:

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of GE/10GE optical signals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6-36

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to GE/10GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. Realizes the forwarding of the service signals. Realizes the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. Grooms the electrical signals between the TBE and the cross-connection board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. Realizes cross-connecting eight GE signals to the central working/protection crossconnect board through the backplane. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

L2 switching module

Cross-connect module

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

6.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TBE front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-19 shows the TBE front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-37

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-19 TBE front panel

TBE
STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 TX RX
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TBE

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are eighteen optical interfaces on the TBE front panel. Table 6-16 lists the type and function of each interface.

6-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Table 6-16 Types and functions of the TBE interfaces Interface TX1-TX8 Type LC Function Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used. TX RX1-RX8 LC LC Transmits the 10 GE service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used. RX LC Receives the 10 GE service signal from the client-side equipment.

NOTE

Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

6.3.6 Valid Slots

The TBE occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TBE are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

6.3.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 6-17. Table 6-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TBE displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TX/RX TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Interface on the NM 3 4 5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-39

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface on the Panel TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8

Interface on the NM 6 7 8 9 10 11

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown LPT Enabled

Port Description
Figure 6-20 describes the NM ports of the TBE board. Table 6-18 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 6-20 Port diagram of the TBE
Client side PORT3 PORT4 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1

PORT11

VCTRUNK16 116(AP16/AP16)-1 L2 swiching module Cross-connect module

Table 6-18 Meaning of NM port of the TBE Port Name PORT3 PORT4-PORT11 VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
6-40

Meaning Corresponding to the client side optical interface RX/TX. Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8. Internal virtual port.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Port Name AP1-AP16

Meaning Internal convergence port.

If the TBE board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the T2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The deconvergence of the 10GE services that are accessed from the client-side PORT3 port is realized through the L2 switching module. Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the T2000. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the AP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service deconvergence), as shown (1) in Figure 6-21. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (2) in Figure 6-21.

Figure 6-21 Cross-connection diagram of the TBE

Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

WDM side

Client side

101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 116(AP16/AP16)-1

Cross-connect module

TBE board
1 2

The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

6.3.8 Specifications of the TBE

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-41

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 6-19 Specifications of optical module at the client side(FE) Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 100BASE-FX 1310 nm-40 km NRZ 40 100BASE-FX 1310 nm-2 km NRZ 2

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm 0 -5 10 1310 IEEE802.3zcompliant -14 -19 10 1310 IEEE802.3zcompliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity (EOL) Minimum receiver overload dBm dBm PIN -30 -10 PIN -30 -14

Table 6-20 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125G Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

6-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.125G Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASELX-40 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASEZX-80 km 1500 to 1580

nm

830 to 860

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

NOTE

When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-43

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 6-21 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km km NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-80km NRZ 80

Line code format Target distance

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

6-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Table 6-22 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10Gbit/s Multirate-4 0km NRZ SLM 40 10Gbit/s Multirate-8 0km NRZ SLM 80 10Gbit/s Multirate-0. 3km NRZ MLM 0.3

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860

dBm

-1

-1.3

dBm

-6

-1

-7.3

dB

8.2

nm

NA

NA

NA

NA

dB

30

30

30

30

G.691-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN APD PIN

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-45

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

Unit

Value 10Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10Gbit/s Multirate-4 0km 1530 to 1565 10Gbit/s Multirate-8 0km 1270 to 1600 10Gbit/s Multirate-0. 3km 840 to 860

nm

1290 to 1330

dBm dBm

-11 0.5

-14 -1

-24 -7

-7.5 -1

dB

NA

NA

NA

NA

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 40.7 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 44.8 W

6.4 TDG
TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board 6.4.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is TN11. 6.4.2 Application The TDG is a type of tributary board. The TDG realizes the conversion between two GE optical signals and two GE electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection. 6.4.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature supported by the TDG is cross-connection at the electrical layer. 6.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TDG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 6.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TDG front panel.
6-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

6.4.6 Valid Slots The TDG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TDG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 6.4.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 6.4.8 Specifications of the TDG Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

6.4.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is TN11.

6.4.2 Application
The TDG is a type of tributary board. The TDG realizes the conversion between two GE optical signals and two GE electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection. For the position of the TDG in the WDM system, see Figure 6-22. Figure 6-22 Position of the TDG in the WDM system
G.694.1 MUX GE TDG NS2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side DMUX NS2 TDG GE G.694.1

6.4.3 Functions and Features

The main function and feature supported by the TDG is cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-23. Table 6-23 Functions and features of the TDG Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Description Realizes the conversion between two GE optical signals and two GE electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through the cross-connect board or with the board in the paired slot. GE Supports the cross-connection of an ODU1 signal and two GE signals between the TDG and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot through the backplane.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-47

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Protection scheme

Description
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l l

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the MS SNCP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Not supported Supported Supported

6.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The TDG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 6-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDG.

6-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG

2 X GE/ 1 X ODU1
Client side
RX1 RX2

Backplane (service corss-connection)

O/E Cross-connect module

TX1 TX2

E/O Client-side optical module

GE encapsulation and mapping module

OTN processing module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the TDG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDG to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out two channels of GE signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. Then,

If the signals are GE signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module. If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 in frame, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of GE signals to the client-side optical module.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-49

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the TDG and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals.

GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the GE performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of ODU1 signals and processes the overheads of the ODU1 signals.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

6.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TDG front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-24 shows the TDG front panel.

6-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-24 TDG front panel

TDG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

TDG

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the TDG front panel. Table 6-24 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-51

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 6-24 Types and functions of the TDG interfaces Interface TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2 Type LC LC Function Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

6.4.6 Valid Slots

The TDG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TDG are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

6.4.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 6-25. Table 6-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDG displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Interface on the NM 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode

6-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

LPT Enabled SD Trigger Condition

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Port Description
Figure 6-25 describes the NM ports of the TDG board. Table 6-26 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 6-25 Port diagram of the TDG
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 Cross-connect module Service processing module

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

Table 6-26 Meaning of NM port of the TDG Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 LP Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1and 2.

If the TDG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports to realize the cross-connect grooming of GE services. The following three cross-connections can be realized.

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the TDG board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 6-26. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TDG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 6-26. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the TDG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TDG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 6-26.
NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-53

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-26 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG

Client side Cross-connect module
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2

WDM side

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 3 4(RX2/TX2)-1

4 201(LP/LP)-1 2 1 201(LP/LP)-2

Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board

TDG board
1 2 3 4

The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TDG board

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the LP port and IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board (or ODU1LP port of TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards) to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 6-27. Figure 6-27 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG
Cross-connect module NS2 board
1(IN/OUT)-1 1(IN/OUT)-2 1(IN/OUT)-3 1(IN/OUT)-4

WDM side

Client side
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2

Cross-connect module

TDG board

6-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

6.4.8 Specifications of the TDG

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 6-27 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm

-17

-19

-20

-22

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-55

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km -3 1000 BASELX-40 km -3 1000 BASEZX-80 km -3

dBm

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 6-28 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km km NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-80km NRZ 80

Line code format Target distance

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1270 to 1620 APD 1270 to 1620

6-56

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-80km -28 -9 -27

Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance

dBm dBm dB

-19 -3 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 29.7 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 32.7 W

6.5 TDX
TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board 6.5.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the TDX board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in the types of the output electrical signals through O/E conversion. 6.5.2 Application The TDX is a type of tributary board. The TDX realizes the conversion between two 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and eight 2.5Gbit/s ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals /two 10Gbit/s ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection. 6.5.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature supported by the TDX is cross-connection at the electrical layer. 6.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TDX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 6.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TDX front panel. 6.5.6 Valid Slots The TDX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TDX are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 6.5.7 NM Configuration Reference
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-57

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 6.5.8 Specifications of the TDX Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

6.5.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the TDX board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in the types of the output electrical signals through O/E conversion. Table 6-29 lists the version description of the TDX. Table 6-29 Version description of the TDX Item Functional version Similarity Difference Description Two functional versions of the TDX board are available: TN11 and TN12. The TN12TDX works in the same way as the TN11TDX. TN11TDX supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU1 electrical signals. TN12TDX supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU2 electrical signals. Replacement TN11TDX and TN12TDX can not be replaced with each other.

6.5.2 Application
The TDX is a type of tributary board. The TDX realizes the conversion between two 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and eight 2.5Gbit/s ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals /two 10Gbit/s ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TDX in the WDM system, see Figure 6-28. Figure 6-28 Position of the TDX in the WDM system
G.694.1 4 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 TDX 4 NS2 DMUX MUX NS2 4 NS2 MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 4 TDX 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192

Client side

WDM side

WDM side

Client side

NOTE

TN12TDX supports the conversion between two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and two 10Gbit/s ODU2 electrical signals. In this application scenario, two NS2 boards respectively access one channel of ODU2 signals.

6-58

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

6.5.3 Functions and Features

The main function and feature supported by the TDX is cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-30. Table 6-30 Functions and features of the TDX Function and Feature Basic function Description Realizes the conversion between two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192 optical signals and eight ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals/two 10Gbit/s ODU2 electrical signals. 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192 TN11TDX: Supports the cross-connection of eight ODU1 signals between the TDX and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot through the backplane. TN12TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two ODU2 signals between the TDX and the cross-connect board through the backplane. OTN function TN12TDX:
l

Client-side service type Cross-connect capabilities

Supports mapping each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2 signals at the ODU2 interface of the backplane. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G. 709 and G.Sup43. Supports PM functions for ODU2.

ALS function

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l

Protection scheme

Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the tributary SNCP protection (TN12TDX).

XFP Loopback

Supports the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Not supported Supported Supported

6.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The TDX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-59

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-29 and Figure 6-30 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TDX. Figure 6-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TDX
8 Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2 O/E Crossconnect module SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module

ODU1

Backplane(service cross-connection)

E/O Client-side optical module

OTN processing module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication

Control and communication module

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow of TN11TDX

The client side of the TDX board can access the following optical signals:
l l l l

10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals STM-64 optical signals OC-192 optical signals

In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane for grooming.

6-60

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 in frame, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192 electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Figure 6-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12TDX

ODU2 Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2

Backplane(service cross-connection)

O/E

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module

E/O
Client-side optical module

OTN processing module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication

Control and communication module

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow of TN12TDX

The client side of the TDX board can access the following optical signals:
l l l l

10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals STM-64 optical signals OC-192 optical signals

In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-61

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out two channels of ODU2 signals to the backplane for grooming.

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU2 electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2 in frame, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192 electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
NOTE

The signal processing module of the TN12TDX does not contain a cross-connect unit. This board, however, is fixedly connected to the cross-connect board.

Cross-connect module Realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the TDX and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals.

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function.

10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function.

6-62

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of ODU1/ODU2 signals and processes the overheads of the ODU1/ODU2 signals.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

6.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TDX front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-31 shows the TDX front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-63

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-31 TDX front panel

TDX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TDX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

TDX

TDX

TN11TDX

TN12TDX

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the TDX front panel.Table 6-31 lists the type and function of each interface.

6-64

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Table 6-31 Types and functions of the TDX interfaces Interface TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2 Type LC LC Function Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

6.5.6 Valid Slots

The TDX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TDX are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

6.5.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 6-32. Table 6-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDX displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Interface on the NM 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown PAUSE Frame Flow Control

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-65

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Maximum Packet Length SD Trigger Condition LPT Enabled

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Port Description
Figure 6-32 and Figure 6-33 shows the NM ports of the TDX board. Table 6-33 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 6-32 Port diagram of the TN11TDX
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1
151(imp1/imp1)-1 151(imp1/imp1)-2 151(imp1/imp1)-3 151(imp1/imp1)-4 152(imp2/imp2)-1 152(imp2/imp2)-2 152(imp2/imp2)-3 152(imp2/imp2)-4

4(RX2/TX2)-1

Service proccessing module

Cross-connect module

Figure 6-33 Port diagram of the TN12TDX

Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

Service proccessing module

Fixed cross-connection

Table 6-33 Meaning of NM port of the TDX Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 imp1-imp2 ClientLP1-ClientLP2 Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. The internal mapping port. The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. The internal mapping port.

If the TN11TDX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, configure the bandwidth binding of the imp port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6-66

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

NOTE

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

The bandwidth of each imp port that accesses 10GE can be bound with 1-4 ODU1s. For bandwidth binding, each 10GE signal must be bound with the first ODU1, and must be bound in order.
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnections of ODU1 level between the imp port and the IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board (or the ODU1LP port of the TN12NS2/TN11ND2), realizing the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 6-34.

Figure 6-34 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TDX

Cross-connect module NS2 board
1(IN/OUT)-1 1(IN/OUT)-2 1(IN/OUT)-3 1(IN/OUT)-4

WDM side

Client side

151(imp1/imp1)-1 151(imp1/imp1)-2 151(imp1/imp1)-3 151(imp1/imp1)-4 152(imp2/imp2)-1 152(imp2/imp2)-2 152(imp2/imp2)-3 152(imp2/imp2)-4

Cross-connect module

TDX board

If the TN12TDX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of the TN12NS2/TN11ND2 board, as shown in Figure 6-35.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-67

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-35 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12TDX

Fixed cross-connection WDM side ND2 board

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1

Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

Fixed cross-connection

TDX board

6.5.8 Specifications of the TDX

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 6-34 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10Gbit/s Multirate-4 0km NRZ SLM 40 10Gbit/s Multirate-8 0km NRZ SLM 80 10Gbit/s Multirate-0. 3km NRZ MLM 0.3

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860

dBm

-1

-1.3

6-68

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 10Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10Gbit/s Multirate-4 0km -1 10Gbit/s Multirate-8 0km 0 10Gbit/s Multirate-0. 3km -7.3

dBm

-6

dB

8.2

nm

NA

NA

NA

NA

dB

30

30

30

30

G.691-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1290 to 1330 PIN 1530 to 1565 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860

dBm dBm

-11 0.5

-14 -1

-24 -7

-7.5 -1

dB

NA

NA

NA

NA

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))

Weight

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-69

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

l l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

TN11TDX: 2.8 lb. (1.3 kg) TN12TDX: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)

Power Consumption
Board The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 78.0 40.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 80.0 44.0

TN11TDX TN12TDX

6.6 TOM
TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board 6.6.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TOM board is available, that is TN11. 6.6.2 Application The TOM can be used in six different application scenarios. In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces. The maximum access capacity of the TOM at the client side is 10 Gbit/s. 6.6.3 Function and Feature The main functions and features supported by the TOM are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 6.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 6.6.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TOM front panel. 6.6.6 Valid Slots The TOM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 6.6.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 6.6.8 Specifications of the TOM Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

6.6.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the TOM board is available, that is TN11.

6-70

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

6.6.2 Application
The TOM can be used in six different application scenarios. In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces. The maximum access capacity of the TOM at the client side is 10 Gbit/s.

Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion between Eight Optical Signals at the Rate between 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-36. Figure 6-36 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary board in alone mode)
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 8 Client side TOM 4 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 4 1 TOM 8 Client side 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NOTE

In this application scenario, the client-side interfaces are divided into four groups: RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2, RX3/TX3-RX4/TX4, RX5/TX5-RX6/TX6, and RX7/TX7-RX8/TX8. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), any group of these optical interfaces can access up to only one channel. The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

Application Scenario 2: Realizes the Conversion between Eight Optical Signals at the Rate between 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s and One ODU1 Electrical Signals
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-37. Figure 6-37 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary board in connect mode)
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 8 Client side TOM NS2 G.694.1 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 TOM 8 WDM side Client side 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

WDM side

NOTE

For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-71

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Application Scenario 3: Realizes the Conversion between Four Optical Signals at the Rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and Four ITU-T Recommendationcompliant WDM Signals
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-38. Figure 6-38 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in alone mode)
G.694.1/ G.694.2 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 1 MUX DMUX G.694.1/ G.694.2 1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

TOM DMUX MUX

TOM

4 Client side

4 Client side

WDM side

WDM side

NOTE

The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as you like.

Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion between Seven Optical Signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM Signals
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-39. Figure 6-39 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in connect mode)

1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2

MUX TOM

DMUX G.694.1/ G.694.2 TOM

1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

7 Client side

DMUX

MUX

7 WDM side Client side

WDM side

NOTE

For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. The client-side seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In connect mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

6-72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Application Scenario 5: Realizes the Conversion between Six Optical Signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM Signals, and the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function on the WDM Side
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-40. Figure 6-40 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (tributary & line board in connect mode)
G.694.1/ G.694.2 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s MUX DMUX TOM MUX 6 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side DMUX 6 DMUX 1 MUX TOM 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2

NOTE

For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In connect mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

Application Scenario 6: Realizes the Electrical Regeneration of One/Four OTU1 Optical Signals
For the position of the TOM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-41.
NOTE

In the connect mode, the TOM realizes the electrical regeneration of one OTU1 signals. In the alone mode, the TOM realizes the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 signals

Figure 6-41 Position of the TOM in the WDM system (electrical regeneration board)
WDM side DMUX
4

WDM side TOM

4

MUX

G.694.1 MUX
4

G.694.1 TOM
4 DMUX

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-73

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6.6.3 Function and Feature

The main functions and features supported by the TOM are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-35. Table 6-35 Functions and features of the TOM Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Realizes the conversion between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s and four ODU1 electrical signals. Realizes the conversion between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 electrical signals. Realizes the conversion between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and four ITU-T recommendation-compliant WDM signals. Realizes the conversion between seven optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T recommendation-compliant WDM signals. Realizes the conversion between six optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. Realizes the electrical regeneration of one/four OTU1 optical signals.

Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities

OC-3, STM-1, OC-12, STM-4, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FE, GE, ESCON, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, HDTV, FDDI Supports the grooming of one/four channels of ODU1 services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of one/four ODU1 signals to the paired slots through the backplane. Supports the grooming of eight channels of GE services or one channel of OTU1 services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.

6-74

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Function and Feature OTN function

Description
l

Supports the mapping up to eight client-side services into up four ODU1 signals from the backplane side. Supports mapping up to seven client-side services into up to four OTU1 signals from the WDM side. The maximum number of optical interfaces at the client side and WDM side is eight. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITUT G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1.

l l

WDM specification ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function Protection scheme

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l l l l l

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection. Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the tributary SNCP protection. Supports the MS SNCP protection.

eSFP

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the WDM side.

Loopback

WDM side

Inloop Outloop

Supported Supported Supported

6-75

Client side
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Inloop

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature

Description Outloop Supported

6.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The TOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. The signal flow of the board and the functional modules over which the signals travel vary with the application scenarios. Figure 6-42 to Figure 6-47 show the block diagram of the functions of the TOM board. Figure 6-42 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary board in alone mode)
8 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 4 X ODU1 Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8

Backplane (service cross-connection)

O/E
8

E/O
Client-side optical module 8

Crossconnect module

Service encapsulation and mapping module

OTN processing module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow (tributary board in alone mode)

Realizes the conversion between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/ s and four ODU1 electrical signals. The client side of the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).

6-76

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

NOTE

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.6.3 Function and Feature. In this application scenario, the client-side interfaces are divided into four groups: RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2, RX3/TX3-RX4/TX4, RX5/TX5-RX6/TX6, and RX7/TX7-RX8/TX8. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), any group of these optical interfaces can access up to only one channel. The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals or four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. Then,

If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module. If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 in frame, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-77

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-43 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary board in connect mode)
8 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 1X ODU1 Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8

Backplane (service cross-connection)

O/E
8

E/O
Client-side optical module 8

Crossconnect module

Service encapsulation and mapping module

OTN processing module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow (tributary board in connect mode)

Realizes the conversion between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/ s and one ODU1 electrical signals. The client side of the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.6.3 Function and Feature. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.

Receive direction
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6-78

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. Then,

If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module. If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 in frame, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces. Figure 6-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in alone mode)
100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

Backplane (service cross-connection) WDM side

O/E Crossconnect module Service encapsulation and mapping module

E/O

TX5 TX6 TX7 TX8 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow (tributary & line board in alone mode)

Realizes the conversion between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and four ITU-T recommendation-compliant WDM signals. The client side of the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.6.3 Function and Feature. The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as you like.

In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the WDM side of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-79

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and Any signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out four channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the TX5TX8 optical interfaces.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the RX5-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals, performance monitoring of SDH and Any signals and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Figure 6-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in connect mode)
100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s Client side
RX1 RX2 RX7 TX1 TX2 TX7

Backplane (service cross-connection) WDM side

O/E Service CrossOTN connect encapsulation processing module and mapping module module Signal processing module

E/O

TX8

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

RX8

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

6-80

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Signal Flow (tributary & line board in connect mode)

Realizes the conversion between seven optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/ s and ITU-T recommendation-compliant WDM signals. The client side of the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.6.3 Function and Feature. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channels. The client-side seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In connect mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the WDM side of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives seven channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the TX8 optical interface.

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the RX8 optical interface. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs seven channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the seven channels of electrical signals, and then outputs seven channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX7 optical interfaces.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-81

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-46 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (tributary & line board in connect mode)
100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s Client side
RX1 RX2 RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6

Backplane (service cross-connection) WDM side

O/E Service CrossOTN connect encapsulation processing module and mapping module module Signal processing module

E/O

TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8

E/O
Client-side optical module

O/E
WDM-side optical module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow (tributary & line board in connect mode)

Realizes the conversion between six optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. The client side of the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.6.3 Function and Feature. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channels. The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In connect mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the WDM side of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the six channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.

6-82

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. The optical signals are splited into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces.
l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the RX7-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 in frame, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs six channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.

Figure 6-47 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM (electrical regeneration board)
ODU1 WDM side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

Backplane (service cross-connection) WDM side

TX1

O/E Optical receiving module

Crossconnect module

Service regeneration module

E/O Optical transmitting module

TX2 TX3 TX4

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

Backplane SCC (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow (electrical regeneration board)

Realizes the electrical regeneration of one/four OTU1 optical signals. The TOM board realizes the regeneration of one/four channels of unidirectional optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-83

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the RX1RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs service cross-connection, decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 signals . The optical signals are output through the TX1-TX4 interfaces.
NOTE

In connect mode, realizes the electrical regeneration of one OTU1 optical signals. Only RX7/TX7 or RX8/ TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces. In alone mode, realizes the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. Four pairs of RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 can be chosen as the WDM-side optical interfaces as you like.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

WDM-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and WDM-side transmitter.

WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of standard optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module, service processing module, and service regeneration module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the TOM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1/Any signals.

Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function.

6-84

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the OTU1 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

Service processing module Realizes the regeneration of Any signals and performance monitoring of SDH and Any signals in two directions.

Service regeneration module Realizes the FEC decoding/encoding and overhead processing of OTU1 signals. Monitors the performance of WDM-side services.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

6.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TOM front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-48 shows the TOM front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-85

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-48 TOM front panel

TOM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8

TOM

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are sixteen optical interfaces on the TOM front panel. Table 6-36 lists the type and function of each interface.

6-86

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Table 6-36 Types and functions of the TOM interfaces Interface TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8 Type LC LC Function Transmits the service signal. Receives the service signal.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

6.6.6 Valid Slots

The TOM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

6.6.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 6-37. Table 6-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TOM displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Interface on the NM 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-87

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode LPT Enabled Board Mode

Description of NM ports
Figure 6-49 and Figure 6-50 show the NM ports of the TOM board. Table 6-38 and Table 6-39 describe the meaning of each port. Figure 6-49 Port diagram of the TOM (tributary board in connect mode)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

Cross-connect module

Service processing module

Figure 6-50 Port diagram of the TOM (tributary & line in connect mode)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7

WDM side
201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ ODU1LP1)-1

10(RX8/TX8)

Cross-connect module

Service processing module

Service processing module

WDM-side optical module

NOTE

In connect mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

Table 6-38 Meaning of NM port of the TOM (connect mode) Port Name RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6-88

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Port Name ClientLP1 ODU1LP1

Meaning Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8. Internal logic port.

a: In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.

Table 6-39 Meaning of NM port of the TOM (alone mode) Port Name RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a ClientLP1, ClientLP3 ClientLP2, ClientLP4 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4 Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 4. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2. Internal logic port.

a: In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.

NOTE

Only the display of NM port in connect mode is different from that in alone mode. The configuration in connect mode is similar to the configuration in alone mode. This section describes the configuration in connect mode only. The configurations of application scenario 1 and 2 are similar. This section describes the configuration of application scenario 2 only. The configurations of application scenario 3, 4, 5 and 6 are similar. This section describes the configuration of application scenario 4 only.

If the TOM board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM interfaces on the T2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Connect Mode and Alone Mode. Connect Mode (tributary board):
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE/Any/ OTU1 cross-connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be realized.

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 6-51. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TOM board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 6-51.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-89

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the TOM board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the Client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TOM board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 6-51.
NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port.

Figure 6-51 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8

WDM side

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

4 2 1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8

Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board

TOM board
1 2 3 4

The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The Client side of other boards are cross-connected to the Clinet side of the TOM board

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards (or IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board) to realize the crossconnect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 6-52.

6-90

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-52 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM

Fixed cross-connection NS2 board WDM side

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

Client side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

Cross-connect module
l

TOM board

According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the GE/Any/ OTU1 cross-connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be realized.

Connect Mode (tributary & line board):

l

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 6-53. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TOM board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 6-53. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the TOM board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TOM board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 6-53.
NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClinetLP port.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-91

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-53 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7

WDM side

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

5 3 4 2 1

Cross-connect module

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7

WDM side

TOM board
1 2 3 4 5

The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TOM board The WDM side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown (5) in Figure 6-53. Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port and ODU1LP port of the TOM board to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown (1) in Figure 6-54.
NOTE

Be as the electrical regeneration board, the TOM supports creating the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of other boards and ODU1LP port of the TOM board.
l

Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU1LP port and RX8/TX8 port of the TOM board to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown (2) in Figure 6-54. According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots.

6-92

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-54 Cross-connection diagram of the TOM

Cross-connect module TOM board WDM side

10(RX8/TX8)-1

Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 1

Cross-connect module

TOM board
1 2

The ClientLP port of the TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP port. The ODU1LP port is cross-connected to the WDM side of the TOM board.

Configuration Principle
l

The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end. For each TOM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 64. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HDTV services, in the application scenario 2, 4 and 5, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the TOM board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-93

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Service Type OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express HDTV DVBASI DVBSDI ESCON FDDI

Number of Timeslots 16 6 12 6 12 11 2 3 2 1

6.6.8 Specifications of the TOM

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Table 6-40 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 40

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

6-94

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580

dBm

-3

dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

dB

NA

30

30

30

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-18 -3

-18 0

-27 -9

-28 -9

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-95

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Table 6-41 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN PIN PIN

6-96

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASELX-40 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASEZX-80 km 1500 to 1580

nm

770 to 860

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 6-42 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

nm dBm dBm dB

1471 to 1611 5 0 9

1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2

6-97

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

nm nm dB -

6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 6-43 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation THz GHz 192.10 to 196.00 12.5

6-98

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)

dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm -

3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power dBm dBm 5 0

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-99

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)

dB nm nm nm dB -

8.2 1471 to 1611 6.5 1 30 G.957 - compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation dBm dBm dB THz nm 3 0 8.5 192.10 to 196.00 12.5

6-100

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Item Optical Module Type Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)

nm dB ps/nm -

1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 55.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 60.0 W

6.7 TQM
TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board 6.7.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the TQM board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the function of processing OTU1/HDTV/DVB-SDI/FDDI services. 6.7.2 Application
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-101

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The TQM is a type of tributary board. The TQM realizes the conversion between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection. 6.7.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature supported by the TQM is cross-connection at the electrical layer. 6.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TQM board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 6.7.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQM front panel. 6.7.6 Valid Slots The TQM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 6.7.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 6.7.8 Specifications of the TQM Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

6.7.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the TQM board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the function of processing OTU1/HDTV/DVB-SDI/FDDI services. Table 6-44 lists the version description of the TQM. Table 6-44 Version description of the TQM Item Functional version Similarity Difference Replacement Description Two functional versions of the TQM board are available: TN11 and TN12. The TN12TQM works in the same way as the TN11TQM. The TN12TQM board supports the function of processing OTU1/HDTV/ DVB-SDI/FDDI services. The TN12TQM board can replace the TN11TQM board, but after the replacement, the SCC software need be upgraded. The TN11TQM board, however, cannot replace the TN12TQM board.

6.7.2 Application
The TQM is a type of tributary board. The TQM realizes the conversion between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection. For the position of the TQM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-55.
6-102 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-55 Position of the TQM in the WDM system

G.694.1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 4 Client side WDM side TQM NS2 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX G.694.1 DMUX NS2 TQM 4 Client side 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

6.7.3 Functions and Features

The main function and feature supported by the TQM is cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-45. Table 6-45 Functions and features of the TQM Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type Description Converts four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal and sends the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection. TN11TQM: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE electrical signals, GE optical signals, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express TN12TQM: STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE electrical signals, GE optical signals, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI Crossconnect capabilities
l

Supports the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s between the boards in paired slots. Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal or four GE signals or one OTU1 signal between the TQM and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot. Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into ODU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports TCM function for ODU1.

OTN function

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-103

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature ALS function Protection scheme

Description The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l l l

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the MS SNCP protection. Supports the Tributary SNCP protection (TN12TQM).

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Not supported Supported Supported

6.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The TQM board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 6-56 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.

6-104

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-56 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM

4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 1X ODU1 Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

Backplane (service cross-connection)

O/E

E/O Client-side optical module

OTN Service Cross-connect encapsulation and processing module module mapping module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication

Control and communication module

DC power supply from a backplne

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the TQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and GE electrical signals.
NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 6.7.3 Functions and Features.
NOTE

The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.

In the signal flow of the TQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQM to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-105

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of Any signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. Then,

If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module. If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 in frame, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the TQM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals.

Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of ODU1 signals and processes the overheads of the ODU1 signals.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6-106

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

6.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQM front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-57 shows the TQM front panel. Figure 6-57 TQM front panel

TQM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4

TQM

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-107

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

l l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the TQM front panel. Table 6-46 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 6-46 Types and functions of the TQM interfaces Interface TX1-TX4 Type LC Function Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used. RX1-RX4 LC Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.

NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, HDTV), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

6.7.6 Valid Slots

The TQM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

6.7.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 6-47.

6-108

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Table 6-47 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQM displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Interface on the NM 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown Maximum Packet Length Ethernet Working Mode LPT Enabled SD Trigger Condition

Port Description
Figure 6-58 shows the NM ports of the TQM board. Table 6-48 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 6-58 Port diagram of the TQM
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module Service processing module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1

NOTE

TN11TQM: The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12TQM: The optical paths of internal logic port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ ClientLP)-4.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-109

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 6-48 Meaning of NM port of the TQM Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logic port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.

If the TQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is realized through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be realized.

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TQM board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1) and (2) in Figure 6-59. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 6-59.. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the TQM board (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TQM board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown (4) in Figure 6-59.
NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.

6-110

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-59 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

Cross-connect module

Other board
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

WDM side

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 3

4 2 1

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board

TQM board
1 2 3 4

The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TQM board

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the board and IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board (or ODU1LP port of TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards) to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 6-60.

Figure 6-60 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM

Fixed cross-connection NS2 board WDM side

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

Client side
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

Cross-connect module

TQM board

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-111

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots.

Configuration Principle
l

The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end. For each TQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HDTV services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the TQM board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express HDTV DVBASI DVBSDI ESCON FDDI Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12 11 2 3 2 1

6.7.8 Specifications of the TQM

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
6-112 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side

NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Table 6-49 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 40

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580

dBm

-3

dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

dB

NA

30

30

30

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-113

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-18 -3

-18 0

-27 -9

-28 -9

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.125Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Table 6-50 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance
6-114

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80

km

NRZ 0.5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Item Optical Module Type

Unit

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

dBm

-2.5

-3

dBm

-9.5

-11.5

-4.5

-2

dB

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-17 0

-19 -3

-20 -3

-22 -3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-115

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

NOTE

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 6-51 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 40 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

6-116

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 6-52 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM) NRZ 120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-117

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))

Weight
l l

TN11TQM: 2.64 lb (1.2 kg) TN12TQM: 2.43 lb (1.1 kg)

Power Consumption
Board The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 50.3 25.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 57.6 27.5

TN11TQM TN12TQM

6.8 TQS
TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board 6.8.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is TN11. 6.8.2 Application The TQS is a type of tributary board. The TQS realizes the conversion between four STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals. 6.8.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the TQS are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. 6.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TQS board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 6.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQS front panel. 6.8.6 Valid Slots The TQS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. 6.8.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 6.8.8 Specifications of the TQS Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

6-118

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

6.8.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is TN11.

6.8.2 Application
The TQS is a type of tributary board. The TQS realizes the conversion between four STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals. For the position of the TQS in the WDM system, see Figure 6-61. Figure 6-61 Position of the TQS in the WDM system
G.694.1 1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 TQS 4 4 1 NS2 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side MUX DMUX NS2 4 G.694.1 1 TQS 4 Client side 1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1

Client side

6.8.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the TQS are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-53. Table 6-53 Functions and features of the TQS Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities OTN function Description Converts four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals into four ODU1 signals and sends the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection. The reverse process is similar. STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TQS and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot.
l

Supports mapping each channel of 2.5G signals into the ODU1 signals at the ODU1 interface of the backplane. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. Supports PM functions for ODU1.
6-119

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Protection scheme

Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
l

Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l

Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the tributary SNCP protection.

eSFP Loopback

Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Not supported Supported Supported

6.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The TQS board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 6-62 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQS.

6-120

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-62 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS

ODU1

Backplane(service cross-connection)

Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

O/E
Cross-connect module

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN procssing module

E/O
Client-side optical module

OTN processing module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the TQS board can access the following optical signals:
l l l

STM-16 optical signals OC-48 optical signals OTU1 optical signals

In the signal flow of the TQS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQS to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 in frame and FEC decoding with OTU1 signals, and performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing with STM-16/OC-48 signals. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane for grooming.

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 in frame, framing of OTU1 signals, encoding of FEC, demapping,

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-121

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module.

Cross-connect module Realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the TQS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals.

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function.

Client-side OTN processing module Realizes the OTN performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Realizes the framing of ODU1/OTU1 signals, processes the overheads of the ODU1/ OTU1 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding of the OTU1 signals.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

6.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQS front panel.
6-122 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-63 shows the TQS front panel. Figure 6-63 TQS front panel

TQS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4

TQS

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the TQS front panel. Table 6-54 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-123

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 6-54 Types and functions of the TQS interfaces Interface TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4 Type LC LC Function Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

6.8.6 Valid Slots

The TQS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQS are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

6.8.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 6-55. Table 6-55 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQS displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Interface on the NM 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type

6-124

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown FEC Working State

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Port Description
Figure 6-64 shows the NM ports of the TQS board. Table 6-56 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 6-64 Port diagram of the TQS
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1
Service processing module

201(LP1/LP1)-1 202(LP2/LP2)-1 203(LP3/LP3)-1 204(LP4/LP4)-1

Cross-connect module

Table 6-56 Meaning of NM port of the TQS Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 LP1-LP4 Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Respectively corresponding to the internal logic ports. All optical paths are numbered 1.

If the TQS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

The corresponding channels of the four LP ports are respectively connected to the RX1/ TX1-RX4/TX4. There is no need for configuration on the T2000. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the LP port of the TQS board and the optical channels of the IN/ OUT port on the NS2 board (or ODU1LP port of TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards) to realize the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown Figure 6-65.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-125

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-65 Cross-connection diagram of the TQS

Cross-connect module NS2 board
1(IN/OUT)-1 1(IN/OUT)-2 1(IN/OUT)-3 1(IN/OUT)-4

WDM side

Client side

201(LP1/LP1)-1 202(LP2/LP2)-1 203(LP3/LP3)-1 204(LP4/LP4)-1

Cross-connect module

TQS board

6.8.8 Specifications of the TQS

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

This module is used to access STM-16 and OTU1 signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1 signals.

Table 6-57 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

NRZ MLM 2

NRZ SLM 15

NRZ SLM 40

NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

6-126

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580

dBm

-3

dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2

dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

nm

NA

dB

NA

30

30

30

G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580

dBm dBm

-18 -3

-18 0

-27 -9

-28 -9

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-127

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to OTU1 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are STM-16, OC-48.

Table 6-58 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM) NRZ 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27

Table 6-59 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format
6-128

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)

NRZ
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Item Optical Module Type Target distance

Unit

Value 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)

km

120

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm dB 192.1 to 196.0 3 0 8.5 12.5 1 30 5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services.

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance dBm dBm dB APD -28 -9 -27

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 43.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 47.3 W

6.9 TQX
TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-129

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6.9.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TQX board is available, that is TN11. 6.9.2 Application The TQX is a type of tributary board. The TQX realizes the conversion between four 10GE LAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and four ODU2 electrical signals through crossconnection. 6.9.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature supported by the TQX is cross-connection at the electrical layer. 6.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 6.9.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQX front panel. 6.9.6 Valid Slots The TQX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQX are IU1, IU4, IU11 and IU14. 6.9.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 6.9.8 Specifications of the TQX Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

6.9.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the TQX board is available, that is TN11.

6.9.2 Application
The TQX is a type of tributary board. The TQX realizes the conversion between four 10GE LAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and four ODU2 electrical signals through crossconnection. For the position of the TQX in the WDM system, see Figure 6-66. Figure 6-66 Position of the TQX in the WDM system
G.694.1 2 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 1 TQX 4 2 ND2 DMUX WDM side MUX ND2 2 WDM side ND2 MUX DMUX G.694.1 ND2 2 1 TQX 4 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192

Client side

Client side

6.9.3 Functions and Features

The main function and feature supported by the TQX is cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-60.
6-130 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Table 6-60 Functions and features of the TQX Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities OTN function Description Converts four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals into four ODU2 electrical signals. The reverse process is similar. 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192 Supports the cross-connection of four ODU2 signals between the TQX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.
l

Supports mapping each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2 signals at the ODU2 interface of the backplane. Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43. Supports TCM function for ODU2. Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line. Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.

Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Protection scheme

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l

Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the tributary SNCP protection.

XFP Loopback

Supports the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Not supported Supported Supported

6.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The TQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 6-67 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQX.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-131

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-67 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQX

ODU2 Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

O/E

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module

E/O
Client-side optical module

10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module

OTN processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The client side of the TQX board can access the following optical signals:
l l l l

10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals STM-64 optical signals OC-192 optical signals

In the signal flow of the TQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU2 signals to the backplane for grooming.

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU2 electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2 in frame, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four

6-132

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function.

10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of ODU2 signals and processes the overheads of the ODU2 signals.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

6.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQX front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-68 shows the TQX front panel.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-133

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 6-68 TQX front panel

TQX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4

TQX

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the TQX front panel. Table 6-61 lists the type and function of each interface.

6-134

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Table 6-61 Types and functions of the TQX interfaces Interface TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4 Type LC LC Function Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

6.9.6 Valid Slots

The TQX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQX are IU1, IU4, IU11 and IU14.

6.9.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 6-62. Table 6-62 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQX displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Interface on the NM 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-135

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown Maximum Packet Length LPT Enabled

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Description of NM ports
Figure 6-69 shows the NM ports of the TQX board. Table 6-63 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 6-69 Port diagram of the TQX
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 Service processing module Fixed cross-connection

Table 6-63 Meaning of NM port of the TQX Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP1-ClientLP4 Meaning Respectively corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logic port.

If the TQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of the TN12NS2/TN11ND2 boards, realizing the cross-connect grooming of ODU2 services, as shown Figure 6-70.

6-136

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-70 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX

Fixed cross-connection WDM side ND2 board

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1

Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1

Fixed cross-connection

TQX board

6.9.8 Specifications of the TQX

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 6-64 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10Gbit/s Multirate-4 0km NRZ SLM 40 10Gbit/s Multirate-8 0km NRZ SLM 80 10Gbit/s Multirate-0. 3km NRZ MLM 0.3

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860

dBm

-1

-1.3

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-137

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask

Unit

Value 10Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10Gbit/s Multirate-4 0km -1 10Gbit/s Multirate-8 0km 0 10Gbit/s Multirate-0. 3km -7.3

dBm

-6

dB

8.2

nm

NA

NA

NA

NA

dB

30

30

30

30

G.691-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1290 to 1330 PIN 1530 to 1565 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860

dBm dBm

-11 0.5

-14 -1

-24 -7

-7.5 -1

dB

NA

NA

NA

NA

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 3.3 lb. (1.5 kg)

l l

6-138

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 65.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 71.2 W

6.10 TSXL
TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 6.10.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TSXL board is available, that is TN11. 6.10.2 Application The TSXL is a type of tributary board. The TSXL realizes the conversion between one STM-256/ OC-768 optical signals and four ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection. 6.10.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature supported by the TSXL is cross-connection at the electrical layer. 6.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TSXL consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 6.10.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TSXL front panel. 6.10.6 Valid Slots The TSXL occupies two slots. The valid slots for the TSXL are IU2-IU8 and IU12-IU16. 6.10.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 6.10.8 Specifications of the TSXL Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

6.10.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the TSXL board is available, that is TN11.

6.10.2 Application
The TSXL is a type of tributary board. The TSXL realizes the conversion between one STM-256/ OC-768 optical signals and four ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TSXL in the WDM system, see Figure 6-71. Figure 6-71 Position of the TSXL in the WDM system
G.694.1 NS2 STM-256 OC-768 TSXL 4 NS2 Client side 4 DMUX MUX 4 WDM side 4 MUX G.694.1 DMUX 4 NS2 4 NS2 TSXL STM-256 OC-768

WDM side

Client side

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-139

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6.10.3 Functions and Features

The main function and feature supported by the TSXL is cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-65. Table 6-65 Functions and features of the TSXL Function and Feature Basic function Description
l l

Maps one STM-256/OC-768 on the client side into four ODU2 signals. Realizes the transparent transmission of 40 Gbit/s services in a 10 Gbit/ s WDM network. Realizes the transparent transmission of client-side SDH/SONET service clock and alarms.

Client-side service type Cross-connect capabilities OTN function

STM-256, OC-768 Supports the cross-connection of four ODU2 signals between the TSXL and the cross-connect board.
l

Supports inversely multiplexing 40 Gbit/s signals into four channels of ODU2 services. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G. 709. Supports PM functions for ODU2.

ALS function

The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.
l l l

Protection scheme

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the tributary SNCP protection. Not supported Inloop OutlooP Supported Supported

Loopback

WDM side Client side

6.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The TSXL consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 6-72 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TSXL.

6-140

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-72 Functional modules and signal flow of the TSXL

ODU2 Client side RX TX
O/E

Backplane(service cross-connection)

E/O

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module

OTN processing module

Client-side optical module

Signal processing module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Signal Flow
The client side of the TSXL board can access the following optical signals:
l l

STM-256 optical signals OC-768 optical signals

In the signal flow of the TSXL board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSXL to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one 40 Gbit/s service signal through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals is sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU2 signals to the backplane for grooming.

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU2 electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2 virtual concatenation, demapping processing. Then, the module sends out one channel of 40 Gbit/s service signal to the client-side optical module.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-141

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one 40 Gbit/s service signal, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical interface.

Module Function
l

Client-side optical module The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and client-side transmitter.

Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of one channel of STM-256/OC-768 optical signal. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of STM-256/ OC-768 optical signal. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing module.

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function.

OTN processing module Realizes the framing of ODU2 signals.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

6.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TSXL front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-73 shows the TSXL front panel.

6-142

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Figure 6-73 TSXL front panel

TSXL
STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX RX

TSXL

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the TSXL front panel.Table 6-66 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-143

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 6-66 Types and functions of the TSXL interfaces Interface RX TX Type LC LC Function Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

6.10.6 Valid Slots

The TSXL occupies two slots. The valid slots for the TSXL are IU2-IU8 and IU12-IU16. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the TSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the TSXL occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the TSXL displayed on the NM is IU3.

6.10.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 6-67. Table 6-67 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TSXL displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel RX/TX Interface on the NM 3

Configuration Parameters
Path Use Status Optical Interface Loopback Service Type Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown

6-144

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Port Description
Figure 6-74 shows the NM ports of the TSXL board. Table 6-68 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 6-74 Port diagram of the TSXL
Client side 151(imp/imp)-1 151(imp/imp)-2 3(RX1/TX1)-1 151(imp/imp)-3 151(imp/imp)-4 Service proccessing module Fixed cross-connection

Table 6-68 Meaning of NM port of the TSXL Port Name RX/TX imp Meaning Corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. The internal mapping port. The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.

If the TSXL board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the T2000:
l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the T2000, create the crossconnections of ODU2 level between the imp port and the ODU2LP port of the TN12NS2/ TN11ND2 boards, realizing the cross-connect grooming of ODU2 services, as shown in Figure 6-75.

Figure 6-75 Cross-connection diagram of the TSXL

Fixed cross-connection WDM side ND2 board

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1

Client side
151(imp/imp)-1 151(imp/imp)-2 151(imp/imp)-3 151(imp/imp)-4

Fixed cross-connection

TSXL board

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-145

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

6.10.8 Specifications of the TSXL

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 6-69 Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side Parameters Optical Interface type Line code format Unit Specifications 40G Transponder NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectrum width Minimum side-mode suppression ratio (SMSR) Dispersion tolerance nm dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 1530 to 1565 3 0 8.2 1 35 40

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1290 to 1570 -6 3 -27

Mechanical Specifications
The TSXL consists of three main boards: board A, board B and board C. The mechanical dimension of each main board is provided below:
l l l

Board A: 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Board B: 245.1 mm (H) x 55 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 2.2 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Board C: 59 mm (H) x 48.3 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (2.3 in. (H) x 1.9 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

6-146

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l l

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 101.6 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 4.0 in. (W)) Weight: 5.5 lb. (2.5 kg)

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 90.5 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 95.4 W

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-147

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

7 Cross-connect Unit

7
About This Chapter
7.1 XCS XCS: cross-connect and clock unit

Cross-connect Unit

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

7 Cross-connect Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

7.1 XCS
XCS: cross-connect and clock unit 7.1.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the XCS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in the cross-connect and grooming capacity. 7.1.2 Application The XCS is a type of cross-connect unit. The XCS realizes the cross-connection of services. 7.1.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature of the XCS is the cross-connection at the electrical layer. 7.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The XCS board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 7.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the XCS front panel. 7.1.6 Valid Slots The XCS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the XCS are IU9 and IU10. 7.1.7 Specifications of the XCS Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

7.1.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the XCS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in the cross-connect and grooming capacity. Table 7-1 lists the version description of the XCS. Table 7-1 Version description of the XCS Item Functional version Similarity Difference Description Two functional versions of the XCS board are available: TN11 and TN12. The TN12XCS works in the same way as the TN11XCS. TN11XCS: Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 320 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 160 Gbit/s for GE services. TN12XCS: Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 360 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 180 Gbit/s for GE services. Replacement The TN12XCS board can replace the TN11XCS board, but after the replacement, the SCC software need be upgraded. The TN11XCS board, however, cannot replace the TN12XCS board.

7-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

7 Cross-connect Unit

7.1.2 Application
The XCS is a type of cross-connect unit. The XCS realizes the cross-connection of services. For the position of the XCS in the WDM system, see Figure 7-1. Figure 7-1 Position of the XCS in the WDM system
OTU XCS OTU OTU XCS OTU 40 40 1 D40 OA OA M40 40 1 M40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU XCS OTU OTU XCS OTU

7.1.3 Functions and Features

The main function and feature of the XCS is the cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 7-2. Table 7-2 Functions and features of the XCS Function and Feature Basic function Cross-connect function Description Grooms services.
l l

Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or GE services. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 320 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 160 Gbit/s for GE services. Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals or GE services or OTU1 services. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 320 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 160 Gbit/s for GE services. Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals or GE services or OTU1 services. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 360 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 180 Gbit/s for GE services.

TN11XCS:
l

TN12XCS:
l

Active/standby backup
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Provides the 1+1 hot backup.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

7 Cross-connect Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Protection scheme Switching mode

Description Supports cross-connect board 1+1 protection. Supports the manual switching and auto switching. Supports the non-revertive switching.

7.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The XCS board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 7-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCS. Figure 7-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS
Backplane(service cross-connection)

Cross-connect module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Module Function
l

Cross-connect module Receives the data of each service board from the backplane. It performs the grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals at the electrical layer, then sends the signals to each service board and implements the cross-connection.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

7-4

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

7 Cross-connect Unit

Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

7.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the XCS front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 7-3 shows the XCS front panel. Figure 7-3 XCS front panel

XCS
STAT ACT PROG SRV

XCS

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

7 Cross-connect Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
The XCS does not provide external interfaces.

7.1.6 Valid Slots

The XCS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the XCS are IU9 and IU10.

7.1.7 Specifications of the XCS

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))

Weight
l l

TN11XCS: 2.20 lb (1.0 kg) TN12XCS: 2.65 lb (1.2 kg)

Power Consumption
Board The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 20.0 25.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 22.0 27.5

TN11XCS TN12XCS

7-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

About This Chapter

8.1 M40 M40: 40-channel multiplexing unit 8.2 M40V M40V: 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA 8.3 D40 D40: 40-channel demultiplexing unit 8.4 D40V D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA 8.5 FIU FIU: fiber interface unit 8.6 ITL ITL: interleaver board

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8.1 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing unit 8.1.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the M40 board is available, that is TN11. 8.1.2 Application The M40 is a type of optical multiplexer unit. The M40 realizes the multiplexing of a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one fiber. 8.1.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the M40 are multiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring. 8.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The M40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 8.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the M40 front panel. 8.1.6 Valid Slots The M40 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the M40 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. 8.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40 The characteristic code for the M40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. 8.1.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 8.1.9 Specifications of the M40 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

8.1.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the M40 board is available, that is TN11.

Type
Table 8-1 lists the types of the TN11M40. Table 8-1 Type description of the M40 Unit TN11M4 0 Type 01 02 Description Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

8-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

8.1.2 Application
The M40 is a type of optical multiplexer unit. The M40 realizes the multiplexing of a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one fiber. For the position of the M40 in the WDM system, see Figure 8-1. Figure 8-1 Position of the M40 in the WDM system
OTU OTU 1 M40 40 1 D40 40 OA OA M40 40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU OTU

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

8.1.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the M40 are multiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-2. Table 8-2 Functions and features of the M40 Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels into one fiber.
l l

Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services. Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.

Alarms and performance events monitoring

8.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The M40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 8-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-3

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 8-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40

Optical module Splitter OUT MON Temperature Temperature control detection Detection and temperature control module PIN

M01 M02 M40

Multiplexer

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

Backplane (Controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then output them through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function
l

Optical module

Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.

Detection and temperature control module

Control and communication module

8-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

8.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the M40 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 8-3 shows the M40 front panel. Figure 8-3 M40 front panel

M40
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT M01 196.00 M11 195.00 M02 195.90 M12 194.90 M03 195.80 M13 194.80 M04 195.70 M14 194.70 M05 195.60 M15 194.60 M06 195.50 M16 194.50 M07 195.40 M17 194.40 M08 195.30 M18 194.30 M09 195.20 M19 194.20 M10 195.10 M20 194.10 M21 194.00 M22 193.90 M23 193.80 M24 193.70 M25 193.60 M26 193.50 M27 193.40 M28 193.30 M29 193.20 M30 193.10 M31 193.00 M32 192.90 M33 192.80 M34 192.70 M35 192.60 M36 192.50 M37 192.40 M38 192.30 M39 192.20 M40 192.10

MON OUT M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12

M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26

M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

M40

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

NOTE

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

There is a table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies pasted onto the front panel.

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the M40 front panel. Table 8-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 8-3 Types and functions of the M40 interfaces Interface M01-M40 OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs, receive the signals to be multiplexed. Connected to an optical amplifying board or ITL, transmits multiplexed signals. Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual signal power).

There are 40 output interfaces on the M40 front panel. Table 8-4 and Table 8-5 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40 board. Table 8-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11M4001 board (C_EVEN) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04
8-6

Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70

Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90

Interface M21 M22 M23 M24

Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70

Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Interface M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

Frequency (THz) 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

Wavelengt h (nm) 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53

Interface M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

Frequency (THz) 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

Wavelengt h (nm) 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61

Table 8-5 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11M4002 board (C_ODD) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-7

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

Frequency (THz) 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15

Wavelengt h (nm) 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13

Interface M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

Frequency (THz) 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15

Wavelengt h (nm) 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

8.1.6 Valid Slots

The M40 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the M40 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots. For example, if the M40 occupies slots IU1, IU2, and IU3, the slot number of the M40 displayed on the NM is IU1.

8.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40

The characteristic code for the M40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-6.

8-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Table 8-6 Characteristic code for the M40 Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that bear signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.

The second character

Odd/Even wavelengths

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

8.1.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 8-7. Table 8-7 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel OUT M01-M40 MON Interface on the NM 1 2-41 42

Configuration Parameters
Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity

8.1.9 Specifications of the M40

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-9

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Optical Specifications
Table 8-8 lists the optical specifications of the M40. Table 8-8 Optical specifications of the M40 Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Optical return loss Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Polarization dependence loss Temperature characteristics Maximum channel insertion loss difference Unit GHz dB dB nm dB dB dB nm/ dB Value 100 6.5 >40 1529.16-1560.61 >22 >25 0.5 0.002 3

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W)) Weight: 4.8 lb. (2.2 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 20.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 22.0 W

8.2 M40V
M40V: 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA 8.2.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the M40V board is available, that is TN11. 8.2.2 Application The M40V is a type of optical multiplexer unit. The M40V realizes the multiplexing of a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one fiber and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. 8.2.3 Functions and Features
8-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

The main functions and features supported by the M40V are multiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring and optical power adjustment. 8.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The M40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 8.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the M40V front panel. 8.2.6 Valid Slots The M40V occupies three slots. The valid slots for the M40V are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. 8.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V The characteristic code for the M40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. 8.2.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 8.2.9 Specifications of the M40V Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

8.2.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the M40V board is available, that is TN11.

Type
Table 8-9 lists the types of the TN11M40V. Table 8-9 Type description of the M40V Unit TN11M4 0V Type 01 02 Description Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

8.2.2 Application
The M40V is a type of optical multiplexer unit. The M40V realizes the multiplexing of a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one fiber and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. For the position of the M40V in the WDM system, see Figure 8-4. Figure 8-4 Position of the M40V in the WDM system
OTU OTU 1 M40V 40 1 D40 40 OA OA M40V 40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU OTU

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-11

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the M40V are multiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring and optical power adjustment. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-10. Table 8-10 Functions and features of the M40V Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one fiber and adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
l l

Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services. Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board. Adjusts the optical power of each signal before multiplexing.

Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical power adjustment

8.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The M40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 8-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40V.

8-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Figure 8-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V

Optical module Multiplexer VOA VOA

M01 M02 M40

VOA

Splitter OUT MON

VOA Temperature control control

Temperature detection

PIN

Detection and temperature control module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

Backplane (Controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer after the optical power adjustment by VOA. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then output them through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function
l

Optical module

Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals before multiplexing. Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-13

Detection and temperature control module

Control and communication module

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

8.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the M40V front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 8-6 shows the M40V front panel. Figure 8-6 M40V front panel

M40V
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT M01 196.00 M11 195.00 M02 195.90 M12 194.90 M03 195.80 M13 194.80 M04 195.70 M14 194.70 M05 195.60 M15 194.60 M06 195.50 M16 194.50 M07 195.40 M17 194.40 M08 195.30 M18 194.30 M09 195.20 M19 194.20 M10 195.10 M20 194.10 M21 194.00 M22 193.90 M23 193.80 M24 193.70 M25 193.60 M26 193.50 M27 193.40 M28 193.30 M29 193.20 M30 193.10 M31193.00 M32192.90 M33192.80 M34192.70 M35192.60 M36192.50 M37192.40 M38192.30 M39192.20 M40192.10

MON OUT M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12

M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26

M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

M40V

8-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

NOTE

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

There is a table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies pasted onto the front panel.

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the M40V front panel.Table 8-11 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 8-11 Types and functions of the M40V interfaces Interface M01-M40 OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs, receives the signals to be multiplexed. Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, transmits the multiplexed signals. Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual signal power).

There are 40 output interfaces on the M40V front panel. Table 8-12 and Table 8-13 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40V board. Table 8-12 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40V board (even) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70

Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90

Interface M21 M22 M23 M24

Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70

Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72

8-15

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

Frequency (THz) 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

Wavelengt h (nm) 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53

Interface M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

Frequency (THz) 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

Wavelengt h (nm) 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61

Table 8-13 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40V board (odd) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32

8-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Interface M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

Frequency (THz) 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15

Wavelengt h (nm) 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13

Interface M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

Frequency (THz) 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15

Wavelengt h (nm) 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

8.2.6 Valid Slots

The M40V occupies three slots. The valid slots for the M40V are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots. For example, if the M40V occupies slots IU1, IU2, and IU3, the slot number of the M40V displayed on the NM is IU1.

8.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V

The characteristic code for the M40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-14.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-17

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 8-14 Characteristic code for the M40V Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that bear signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.

The second character

Odd/Even wavelengths

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

8.2.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 8-15. Table 8-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel OUT M01-M40 MON Interface on the NM 1 2-41 42

Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity

8-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

8.2.9 Specifications of the M40V

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 8-16 lists the optical specifications of the M40V. Table 8-16 Optical specifications of the M40V Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Optical return loss Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Attenuation range Loss accuracy Unit GHz dB dB nm dB dB dB dB Value 100 8a >40 1529-1561 >22 >25 0-15 0.5 ( 0 to 10 ) 1 ( >10dB ) Polarization dependent loss Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB dB 0.5 3

NOTE a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W)) Weight: 5.1 lb. (2.3 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 38.5 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 42.3 W

8.3 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing unit

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-19

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the D40 board is available, that is TN11. 8.3.2 Application The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexer unit. The D40 realizes the demultiplexing of one optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. 8.3.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring. 8.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The D40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 8.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the D40 front panel. 8.3.6 Valid Slots The D40 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the D40 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. 8.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40 The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. 8.3.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 8.3.9 Specifications of the D40 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

8.3.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the D40 board is available, that is TN11.

Type
Table 8-17 lists the types of the TN11D40. Table 8-17 Type description of the D40 Unit TN11D40 Type 01 02 Description Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

8.3.2 Application
The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexer unit. The D40 realizes the demultiplexing of one optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the D40 in the WDM system, see Figure 8-7.
8-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Figure 8-7 Position of the D40 in the WDM system

OTU OTU 1 M40 40 1 D40 40 OA OA M40 40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU OTU

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

8.3.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-18. Table 8-18 Functions and features of the D40 Function and Feature Basic function Description Demultiplexes main path signal to a maximum of 40 channels of service.
l l

Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services. Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.

Alarms and performance events monitoring

8.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The D40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 8-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-21

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 8-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40

Optical module Splitter
IN MON

Demultiplexer

D01 D02 D40

PIN

Temperature detection

Temperature control

Detection and temperature control module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the D01-D40 optical interfaces.

Module Function
l

Optical module

Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Detection and temperature control module

Control and communication module

8-22

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

8.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the D40 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 8-9 shows the D40 front panel. Figure 8-9 D40 front panel

D40
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT D01 196.00 D02 195.90 D03 195.80 D04 195.70 D05 195.60 D06 195.50 D07 195.40 D08 195.30 D09 195.20 D10 195.10 D11 195.00 D12 194.90 D13 194.80 D14 194.70 D15 194.60 D16 194.50 D17 194.40 D18 194.30 D19 194.20 D20 194.10 D21 194.00 D22 193.90 D23 193.80 D24 193.70 D25 193.60 D26 193.50 D27 193.40 D28 193.30 D29 193.20 D30 193.10 D31 193.00 D32 192.90 D33 192.80 D34 192.70 D35 192.60 D36 192.50 D37 192.40 D38 192.30 D39 192.20 D40 192.10

MON IN D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12

D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26

D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

D40

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-23

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

NOTE

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

There is a table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies pasted onto the front panel.

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 8-19 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 8-19 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces Interface IN D01-D40 MON Type LC LC LC Function Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the signals to be demultiplexed. Transmit demultiplexed signals to the connected "IN" interface of the OTUs. Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (10dB lower than the actual signal power).

There are 40 output interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 8-20, Table 8-21 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the D40 board. Table 8-20 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D4001 board (C_EVEN) Interface D01 D02 D03 D04
8-24

Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70

Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90

Interface D21 D22 D23 D24

Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70

Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Interface D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20

Frequency (THz) 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

Wavelengt h (nm) 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53

Interface D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

Frequency (THz) 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

Wavelengt h (nm) 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61

Table 8-21 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D4002 board (C_ODD) Interface D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 Interface D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-25

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20

Frequency (THz) 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15

Wavelengt h (nm) 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13

Interface D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

Frequency (THz) 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15

Wavelengt h (nm) 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

8.3.6 Valid Slots

The D40 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the D40 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots. For example, if the D40 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the D40 displayed on the NM is IU1.

8.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40

The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-22.

8-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Table 8-22 Characteristic code for the D40 Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that bear signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.

The second character

Odd/Even wavelengths

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
NOTE

The OptiX OSN 6800 products now support only even wavelengths in C band.

8.3.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 8-23. Table 8-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN D01-D40 MON Interface on the NM 1 2-41 42

Configuration Parameters
Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-27

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8.3.9 Specifications of the D40

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 8-24 lists the optical specifications of the D40. Table 8-24 Optical specifications of the D40 Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Optical return loss Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Polarization dependent loss Temperature characteristics Maximum channel insertion loss difference -0.5 dB bandwidth -1 dB bandwidth -20 dB bandwidth Unit GHz dB dB nm dB dB dB nm/ dB nm nm nm Value 100 6.5 >40 1529-1561 >25 >30 0.5 <0.002 3 >0.2 >0.4 <1.4

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W)) Weight: 4.8 lb. (2.2 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 20.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 22.0 W

8.4 D40V
D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA 8.4.1 Version Description
8-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Only one functional version of the D40V board is available, that is TN11. 8.4.2 Application The D40V is a type of optical demultiplexer unit. The D40V realizes the demultiplexing of one signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals and adjusts the output optical power of each channel. 8.4.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the D40V are demultiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring and optical power adjustment. 8.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The D40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 8.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the D40V front panel. 8.4.6 Valid Slots The D40V occupies three slots. The valid slots for the D40V are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. 8.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V The characteristic code for the D40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. 8.4.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 8.4.9 Specifications of the D40V Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

8.4.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the D40V board is available, that is TN11.

Type
Table 8-25 lists the types of the TN11D40V. Table 8-25 Type description of the D40V Unit TN11D40V Type 01 02 Description Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

8.4.2 Application
The D40V is a type of optical demultiplexer unit. The D40V realizes the demultiplexing of one signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals and adjusts the output optical power of each channel.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-29

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

For the position of the D40V in the WDM system, see Figure 8-10. Figure 8-10 Position of the D40V in the WDM system
OTU OTU 1 M40 40 1 D40V 40 OA OA M40 40 OA OA D40V 40 1 1 OTU OTU

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

8.4.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the D40V are demultiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring and optical power adjustment. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-26. Table 8-26 Functions and features of the D40V Function and Feature Basic function Description Demultiplexes one signal into a maximum of 40 signals and adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
l l

Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services. Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board. Adjusts the optical power of each signal after demultiplexing.

Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical power adjustment

8.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The D40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 8-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40V.
8-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Figure 8-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V

Optical module Demultiplexer
VOA VOA

Splitter
IN MON PIN

VOA

D01 D02 D40

Temperature detection

Temperature VOA control control

Detection and temperature control module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the D01-D40 optical interfaces after the optical power adjustment by VOA.

Module Function
l

Optical module

Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals. Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals after demultiplexing. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-31

Detection and temperature control module

Control and communication module

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

8.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the D40V front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 8-12 shows the D40V front panel. Figure 8-12 D40V front panel

D40V
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT D01 196.00 D02 195.90 D03 195.80 D04 195.70 D05 195.60 D06 195.50 D07 195.40 D08 195.30 D09 195.20 D10 195.10 D11 195.00 D12 194.90 D13 194.80 D14 194.70 D15 194.60 D16 194.50 D17 194.40 D18 194.30 D19 194.20 D20 194.10 D21 194.00 D22 193.90 D23 193.80 D24 193.70 D25 193.60 D26 193.50 D27 193.40 D28 193.30 D29 193.20 D30 193.10 D31 193.00 D32 192.90 D33 192.80 D34 192.70 D35 192.60 D36 192.50 D37 192.40 D38 192.30 D39 192.20 D40 192.10

MON IN D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12

D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26

D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

D40V

8-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

NOTE

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

There is a table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies pasted onto the front panel.

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the D40V front panel. Table 8-27 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 8-27 Types and functions of the D40V interfaces Interface IN D01-D40 MON Type LC LC LC Function Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the signals to be demultiplexed. Connected to the "IN" interface of the OTUs, transmit demultiplexed signals. Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (10dB lower than the actual signal power).

There are 40 output interfaces on the D40V front panel. Table 8-28, Table 8-29 show the mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D40V board. Table 8-28 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V01 board (C_EVEN) Interface D01 D02 D03 D04
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70

Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90

Interface D21 D22 D23 D24

Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70

Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72

8-33

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20

Frequency (THz) 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

Wavelengt h (nm) 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53

Interface D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

Frequency (THz) 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

Wavelengt h (nm) 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61

Table 8-29 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V02 board (C_ODD) Interface D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 Interface D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32

8-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Interface D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20

Frequency (THz) 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15

Wavelengt h (nm) 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13

Interface D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

Frequency (THz) 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15

Wavelengt h (nm) 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

8.4.6 Valid Slots

The D40V occupies three slots. The valid slots for the D40V are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the D40v board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots. For example, if the D40v occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the D40 displayed on the NM is IU1.

8.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V

The characteristic code for the D40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-30.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-35

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 8-30 Characteristic code for the D40V Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that bear signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.

The second character

Odd/Even wavelengths

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

8.4.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 8-31. Table 8-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40v displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN D01-D40 MON Interface on the NM 1 2-41 42

Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity

8-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

8.4.9 Specifications of the D40V

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 8-32 lists the optical specifications of the D40V. Table 8-32 Optical specifications of the D40V Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Optical return loss Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Attenuation range Loss accuracy Polarization dependent loss Maximum channel insertion loss difference Unit GHz dB dB nm dB dB dB dB dB dB Value 100 8a >40 1529.16-1560.61 >25 >30 0-15 1 0.5 3

NOTE a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W)) Weight: 5.1 lb. (2.3 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 38.5 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 42.3 W

8.5 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit 8.5.1 Version Description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-37

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Two functional versions of the FIU board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality. 8.5.2 Application The FIU is a type of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. The FIU realizes the multiplexing and demultiplexing of the signals transmitted by the main optical path and the optical supervisory channel. 8.5.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the FIU are multiplexing, demultiplexing and online optical performance monitoring. 8.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The FIU board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 8.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the FIU front panel. 8.5.6 Valid Slots The FIU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the FIU are IU1-IU17. 8.5.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. 8.5.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 8.5.9 Specifications of the FIU Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

8.5.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the FIU board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality. Table 8-33 lists the version description of the FIU. Table 8-33 Version description of the FIU Item Functional version Similarity Difference Replacement Description Two functional versions of the FIU board are available: TN11 and TN12. The TN12FIU works in the same way as the TN11FIU. None The TN11FIU and TN12FIU boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11FIU board is replaced with the TN12FIU board, the SCC software need be upgraded.

8-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

8.5.2 Application
The FIU is a type of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. The FIU realizes the multiplexing and demultiplexing of the signals transmitted by the main optical path and the optical supervisory channel. For the position of the FIU in the WDM system, see Figure 8-13. Figure 8-13 Position of the FIU in the WDM system
OTU OTU MUX OA FIU FIU OA DMUX OTU OTU

SC1 OTU OTU

SC1 OTU OTU

DMUX

OA

OA

MUX

8.5.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the FIU are multiplexing, demultiplexing and online optical performance monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-34. Table 8-34 Functions and features of the FIU Function and Feature Basic function Online optical performance monitoring Description Realizes the multiplexing and demultiplexing of signals transmitted by the main path and the optical supervisory channel. Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services.

8.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The FIU board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 8-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the FIU.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-39

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 8-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the FIU

Optical module
RC RM

Splitter
OUT MON

Multiplexer

TC TM

Demultiplexer PIN Optical power detection module

IN

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
l

The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the RC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the RM optical interface into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the multiplexed signals through the OUT optical interface. The IN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the TC and TM optical interfaces

Module Function
l

Optical module

Performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing of main path signals and supervisory channel signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the line optical signals and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

Optical power detection module Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals. Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

8-40

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

8.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the FIU front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 8-15 shows the FIU front panel. Figure 8-15 FIU front panel

FIU
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

MON OUT IN TC RC TM RM

FIU

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-41

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the FIU front panel. Table 8-35 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 8-35 Types and functions of the FIU interfaces Interface IN OUT TC RC TM RM MON Type LC LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the line signal. Transmits the line signal. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Transmits the 1510nm optical supervisory channel signal. Receives the 1510nm optical supervisory channel signal. Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal power).

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

8.5.6 Valid Slots

The FIU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the FIU are IU1-IU17.

8.5.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU

The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board.
8-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-36. Table 8-36 Characteristic code for the FIU Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11FIU is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.

8.5.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 8-37. Table 8-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT RM/TM RC/TC MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-43

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8.5.9 Specifications of the FIU

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 8-38 Optical specifications of the FIU Interface Item Operating wavelength range Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel Optical return loss Insertion loss Unit nm nm Value 1529-1561 1500-1520

IN-TM RM-OUT IN-TC RC-OUT IN-TM IN-TC

dB dB

>40 1.5

Insertion loss

dB

1 >40 >12

Isolation Isolation

dB dB

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 4.2 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 4.6 W

8.6 ITL
ITL: interleaver board 8.6.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the ITL board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports VOA mode. 8.6.2 Application
8-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

The ITL is a type of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes/demultiplexes optical signals between the ones with the channel spacing of 100 GHz and the other ones with the channel spacing of 50 GHz. 8.6.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the ITL are multiplexing, demultiplexing and detection of the online spectrum. 8.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ITL board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 8.6.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ITL front panel. 8.6.6 Valid Slots The ITL occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ITL are IU1-IU17. 8.6.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. 8.6.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 8.6.9 Specifications of the ITL Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

8.6.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the ITL board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports VOA mode. Table 8-39 lists the version description of the ITL. Table 8-39 Version description of the ITL Item Functional version Similarity Description Two functional versions of the ITL board are available: TN11 and TN12. Supports multiplexing /demultiplexing optical signals between the ones with the channel spacing of 100 GHz and the other ones with the channel spacing of 50 GHz. The TN12ITL board supports VOA modea: transparent transmission of optical signals with the channel spacing of 100 GHz into one optical signals with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.

Difference

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-45

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Replacement

Description The TN12ITL board can replace the TN11ITL board. But after the TN11ITL is replaced with the TN12ITL, the SCC software need be upgraded. The TN11ITL board can replace the TN12ITL board only in one application scenario: multiplexing /demultiplexing optical signals between the ones with the channel spacing of 100 GHz and the other ones with the channel spacing of 50 GHz.

a: If the services are less than 40 channels, VOA mode can be configured in which all the service signals pass through the TE optical interface of even channel.

8.6.2 Application
The ITL is a type of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes/demultiplexes optical signals between the ones with the channel spacing of 100 GHz and the other ones with the channel spacing of 50 GHz. For the position of the ITL in the WDM system, see Figure 8-16. Figure 8-16 Position of the ITL in the WDM system
OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU 1 M40 40 1 M40 40 1 D40 40 1 D40 40 C_ODD ITL C_EVEN OA OA C_EVEN C_ODD C_ODD 1 D40 40 1 D40 40 1 M40 40 1 M40 40 OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU

WMU
ITL

WMU
OA OA

C_ODD

C_EVEN

C_EVEN

8.6.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the ITL are multiplexing, demultiplexing and detection of the online spectrum. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-40.

8-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Table 8-40 Functions and features of the ITL Functions and Features Basic function Detection and monitoring of the online spectrum Description Multiplexes /demultiplexes optical signals between C_ODD signals and C_EVEN signals. Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services.

8.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The ITL board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 8-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ITL. Figure 8-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the ITL
Optical module
TO TE RO RE

Interleaver Coupler Splitter

IN OUT MON

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Signal Flow
TN11ITL:
l

The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-47

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface. The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver. Then according to the requirement, get the signals all passed through the TE interface or split the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.

TN12ITL:
l

Module Function
l

Optical module Performs the transformation between C band optical signals in 100 GHz spacing and C band optical signals in 50 GHz spacing.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

8.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ITL front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 8-18 and Figure 8-19 shows the ITL front panel.

8-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Figure 8-18 TN11ITL front panel

ITL
STAT
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

MON OUT IN TO RO TE RE

ITL

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-49

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 8-19 TN12ITL front panel

ITL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

MON OUT IN TO RO TE RE

ITL

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of TN11ITL.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

There are four indicators on the front panel of TN12ITL.

l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the ITL front panel.Table 8-41 lists the type and function of each interface.
8-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Table 8-41 Types and functions of the ITL interfaces Interface IN OUT TE RE TO RO MON Type LC LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals). Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals). Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect the optical spectrum in service. The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

8.6.6 Valid Slots

The ITL occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ITL are IU1-IU17.

8.6.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL

The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 8-42.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-51

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 8-42 Characteristic code for the ITL Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the ITL is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.

8.6.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 8-43. Table 8-43 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT RE/TE RO/TO MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Board Mode

8.6.9 Specifications of the ITL

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
8-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

Optical Specifications
Table 8-44 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL Interface RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO IN-TE IN-TO Optical return loss Directivity PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range dB dB ps dB dBm >45 >45 <0.5 <0.5 26 Isolation dB >25 Insertion loss dB <2.5 Item Input channel spacinga Output channel spacinga Insertion loss Unit GHz GHz dB Value 100 50 <4.5

a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.

Table 8-45 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL Item Unit Value TN12ITL Input channel spacinga Output channel spacinga Insertion loss RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO Isolation IN-TE IN-TO Optical return loss Directivity
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

GHz GHz dB

100 50 <4.5

dB

<3.5

dB

>22

dB dB

>45 >45
8-53

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item

Unit

Value TN12ITL

PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range

ps dB dBm

<0.5 <0.5 23

a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.7 lb. (1.2 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
Board The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 0.2 10.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 0.3 11.5

TN11ITL TN12ITL

8-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

About This Chapter

9.1 CMR2 CMR2: CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 9.2 CMR4 CMR4: CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 9.3 DMR1 DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 9.4 MR2 MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 9.5 MR4 MR4: 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 9.6 MR8 MR8: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 9.7 SBM2 SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-1

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9.1 CMR2
CMR2: CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 9.1.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the CMR2 board is available, that is TN11. 9.1.2 Application The CMR2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The CMR2 realizes the adding/ dropping and multiplexing of two signals. 9.1.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the CMR2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface. 9.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CMR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,, and power supply module. 9.1.5 Front Panel There is an indicator and eight interfaces on the CMR2 front panel. 9.1.6 Valid Slots The CMR2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the CMR2 are IU1-IU17 in the subrack. 9.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2 The characteristic code for the CMR2 consists of eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board. 9.1.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 9.1.9 Specifications of the CMR2 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

9.1.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the CMR2 board is available, that is TN11.

9.1.2 Application
The CMR2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The CMR2 realizes the adding/ dropping and multiplexing of two signals. For the position of the CMR2 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-1. Figure 9-1 Position of the CMR2 in the CWDM system
Client side OTU OTU Client side OTU OTU

CMR2

CMR2

9-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

9.1.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the CMR2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-1. Table 9-1 Functions and features of the CMR2 Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascade interface Wavelength query Description Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the CWDM specification. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve the expansion. Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

9.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The CMR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,, and power supply module. Figure 9-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2. Figure 9-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2
D1 D2 MO MI A1 A2

IN

Drop optical module OADM optical module Control Memory CPU

Add optical module

OUT

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

DC power supply from a backplane

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-3

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The rest wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function
l

OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

9.1.5 Front Panel

There is an indicator and eight interfaces on the CMR2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 9-3 shows the CMR2 front panel.

9-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Figure 9-3 CMR2 front panel

CMR2
STAT

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2

CMR2

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the CMR2 front panel. Table 9-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 9-2 Types and functions of the CMR2 interfaces Interface A1-A2 Type LC Function Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.
9-5

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface D1-D2 IN OUT MI MO

Type LC LC LC LC LC

Function Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated clientside equipment. Receives the multiplexed signal. Transmits the multiplexed signal. Cascade input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board. Cascade output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

9.1.6 Valid Slots

The CMR2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the CMR2 are IU1-IU17 in the subrack.

9.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2

The characteristic code for the CMR2 consists of eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 9-3. Table 9-3 Characteristic code for the CMR2 Code The first four digits Meaning The first wavelength that bears optical signals The second wavelength that bears optical signals Description Indicate the first wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board. Indicate the second wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.

The last four digits

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571.

l l

"1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.

9-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

9.1.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 9-4. Table 9-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 MI/MO IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type

9.1.9 Specifications of the CMR2

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 9-5 lists the optical specifications of the CMR2. Table 9-5 Optical specifications of the CMR2 Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing 0.5 dB spectral width

Unit nm nm nm

Value 1271-1611 20 6.5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-7

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Correspondin g interfaces

Item Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation

Unit dB dB dB nm dB dB dB dB

Value 1.5 >25 >35 6.5 1.5 1.0 >13 >40

A1-OUT A2-OUT

0.5 dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Optical return loss

IN-MO MI-OUT -

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are five groups of wavelengths: Table 9-6 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR2 Group Wavelength (nm) A1/D1 1 2 3 4 5 1271 1471 1511 1551 1591 A2/D2 1371 1491 1531 1571 1611

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 1.8 lb. (0.8 kg)

l l

9-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W

9.2 CMR4
CMR4: CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 9.2.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the CMR4 board is available, that is TN11. 9.2.2 Application The CMR4 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The CMR4 realizes the adding/ dropping and multiplexing of four signals. 9.2.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the CMR4 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface. 9.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CMR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 9.2.5 Front Panel There is an indicator and 12 interfaces on the CMR4 front panel. 9.2.6 Valid Slots The CMR4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the CMR4 are IU1-IU17. 9.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4 The characteristic code for the CMR4 consists of eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board. 9.2.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 9.2.9 Specifications of the CMR4 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

9.2.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the CMR4 board is available, that is TN11.

9.2.2 Application
The CMR4 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The CMR4 realizes the adding/ dropping and multiplexing of four signals. For the position of the CMR4 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-4.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-9

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 9-4 Position of the CMR4 in the CWDM system

Client side OTU 4 OTU Client side OTU 4 OTU

CMR4

CMR4

9.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the CMR4 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-7. Table 9-7 Functions and features of the CMR4 Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascade interface Wavelength query Description Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the CWDM specification. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve the expansion. Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

9.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The CMR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 9-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4.

9-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Figure 9-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4

D1 D4 MO MI A1 A4

IN

Drop optical module OADM optical module Control Memory CPU

Add optical module

OUT

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The rest wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function
l

OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-11

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

9.2.5 Front Panel

There is an indicator and 12 interfaces on the CMR4 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 9-6 shows the CMR4 front panel. Figure 9-6 CMR4 front panel

CMR4
STAT

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4

CMR4

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

9-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the CMR4 front panel. Table 9-8 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 9-8 Types and functions of the CMR4 interfaces Interface A1-A4 D1-D4 IN OUT MI MO Type LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated clientside equipment. Receives the multiplexed signal. Transmits the multiplexed signal. Cascade input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board. Cascade output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

9.2.6 Valid Slots

The CMR4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the CMR4 are IU1-IU17.

9.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4

The characteristic code for the CMR4 consists of eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 9-9. Table 9-9 Characteristic code for the CMR4 Code The first and the second digits Meaning The first wavelength that bears optical signals Description Indicate the middle two digits of the first wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board. Indicate the middle two digits of the second wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.
9-13

The third and the fourth digits

The second wavelength that bears optical signals

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Code The fifth and the sixth digits

Meaning The third wavelength that bears optical signals

Description Indicate the middle two digits of the third wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board. Indicate the middle two digits of the fourth wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.

The seventh and the eighth digits

The fourth wavelength that bears optical signals

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 is 47495961.

l l l l

"47" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "49" indicates that the second wavelength is 1491 nm. "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm. "61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.

9.2.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 9-10. Table 9-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4 MI/MO IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

9-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type

9.2.9 Specifications of the CMR4

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 9-11 lists the optical specifications of the CMR4. Table 9-11 Optical specifications of the CMR4 Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing 0.5 dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT IN-MO MI-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Optical return loss Unit nm nm nm dB dB dB nm dB Value 1291-1611 (1371 nm not included) 20 6.5 2 >25 >35 6.5 2

dB dB dB

1.5 >13 >40

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The CMR4 adds/drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are four groups of wavelengths:

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-15

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 9-12 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR4 Group Wavelength (nm) A1/D1 1 2 3 4 1291 1391 1471 1511 A2/D2 1311 1411 1491 1531 A3/D3 1331 1431 1591 1551 A4/D4 1351 1451 1611 1571

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W

9.3 DMR1
DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 9.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the DMR1 board is available, that is TN11. 9.3.2 Application The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310nm wavelength on the east and west directions. 9.3.3 Functions and Features The DMR1 board supports add/drop multiplexing, port concatenation and wavelength query. 9.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 9.3.5 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the board. 9.3.6 Valid Slots The DMR1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DMR1 are IU1-IU17 in the subrack. 9.3.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1 The characteristics code for the DMR1 board consists of four digits, identifying the frequency of the optical signals processed by the board.
9-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

9.3.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 9.3.9 Specifications of the DMR1 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

9.3.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the DMR1 board is available, that is TN11.

9.3.2 Application
The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310nm wavelength on the east and west directions. For the position of the DMR1 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-7. Figure 9-7 Position of the DMR1 in the CWDM system
1310nm WD WIN WMO

OTU

OTU

1310nm EA

D M R 1
WOUT

OA

WMI

OA

O A D M

O A D M

OA

EMI

EOUT

OA

EMO

D M R 1
EIN

WA 1310nm

ED 1310nm

NOTE

The DMR1 board is able to process signals from two directions. In the figure, the two DRM1 boards are actually one physical board.

9.3.3 Functions and Features

The DMR1 board supports add/drop multiplexing, port concatenation and wavelength query. Table 9-13 provides the detailed features and functions of the DMR1 board. Table 9-13 Functions and features of the DMR1 board Functions and Features Basic functions WDM specification Supports port concatenation.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Description Adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310nm wavelength on the east and west directions. Supports the CWDM specification. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve the expansion.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-17

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Functions and Features Supports wavelength query.

Description Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

9.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The DMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 9-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1. Figure 9-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1
WD ED WMO EMO EMI WMI EA WA

WIN EIN

Drop optical module

Add optical module

EOUT WOUT

OADM optical module Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
WIN receives signals from west main path. Drop optical module extracts 1310nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through WD. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through WMO. EIN receives signals from east main path. Drop optical module extracts 1310nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through ED. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through EMO. Local 1310nm signals are added through EA, and other signals are added through EMI. After multiplexed by add optical module, the signals are sent to east main path by EOUT. Similarly,
9-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Local 1310nm signals are added through WA, and other signals are added through WMI. After multiplexed by add optical module, the signals are sent to west main path by WOUT.

Module Function
l

OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of 1310nm signals and other signals. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

9.3.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the board.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 9-9 shows the DMR1 front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-19

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 9-9 DMR1 front panel

DMR1
STAT
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

WOUT WIN EOUT EIN WMO WMI EMO EMI WD WA ED EA

DMR1

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the DMR1 board. Table 9-14 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 9-14 Types and functions of the DMR1 interfaces Interface EA/WA Type LC Function Receives the 1310nm optical signals that west and east client-side equipment transmits.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

9-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Interface ED/WD EIN/WIN EOUT/WOUT EMI/WMI EMO/WMO

Type LC LC LC LC LC

Function Transmits 1310nm optical signals to west and east client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals on west and east main paths. Transmits multiplexed signals to west and east main paths. Serves as concatenation input optical interface. It connects to the output interfaces on other boards. Serves as concatenation output optical interface. It connects to the input interfaces on other boards.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

9.3.6 Valid Slots

The DMR1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DMR1 are IU1-IU17 in the subrack.

9.3.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1

The characteristics code for the DMR1 board consists of four digits, identifying the frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. Table 9-15 provides the details on the characteristics code. Table 9-15 Characteristic code for the DMR1 Barcode First to fourth digits Meaning Optical signal frequency Description Frequency of the optical signals processed by the board

For example, the characteristics code of the DMR1 is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1THz.

9.3.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-21

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface Display
Table 9-16 lists the number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the board. Table 9-16 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board Interface on Front Panel WA/WD EA/ED WMI/WMO WIN/WOUT EMI/EMO EIN/EOUT Number on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Board Parameter Configuration

Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type

9.3.9 Specifications of the DMR1

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 9-17 Optical specifications of the DMR1 Correspondin g interfaces EA/ED/WA/ WD EIN-ED WIN-WD Item Operating wavelength range Drop channel insertion loss Isolation EA-EOUT WA-WOUT EIN-EMO EMI-EOUT
9-22

Unit nm dB dB dB dB

Value 1260-1360 1 >40 1 0.8

Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Correspondin g interfaces WIN-WMO WMI-WOUT -

Item Isolation Optical return loss

Unit dB dB

Value 25 >40

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The DMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310nm wavelength on the east and west directions from the multiplexed signals.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 1.5 lb. (0.7 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3W

9.4 MR2
MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 9.4.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the MR2 board is available, that is TN11. 9.4.2 Application The MR2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR2 realizes the adding/ dropping and multiplexing of two signals. 9.4.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the MR2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface. 9.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 9.4.5 Front Panel There is an indicator and eight interfaces on the MR2 front panel. 9.4.6 Valid Slots The MR2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the MR2 are IU1-IU17. 9.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-23

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The characteristic code for the MR2 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board. 9.4.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 9.4.9 Specifications of the MR2 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

9.4.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the MR2 board is available, that is TN11.

9.4.2 Application
The MR2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR2 realizes the adding/ dropping and multiplexing of two signals. For the position of the MR2 in the DWDM system, see Figure 9-10. Figure 9-10 Position of the MR2 in the DWDM system
Client side OTU OTU Client side OTU OTU

OA MR2 OA MR2

OA OA

9.4.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the MR2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-18. Table 9-18 Functions and features of the MR2 Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascade interface Description Adds/Drops and multiplexes random two signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the DWDM specification. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve the expansion.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

9-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Function and Feature Wavelength query

Description Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

9.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The MR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 9-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR2. Figure 9-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR2
D1 D2 MO MI A1 A2

IN

Drop optical module OADM optical module Control Memory CPU

Add optical module

OUT

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

DC power supply from a backplane

Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The rest wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-25

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Module Function
l

OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

9.4.5 Front Panel

There is an indicator and eight interfaces on the MR2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 9-12 shows the MR2 front panel.

9-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Figure 9-12 MR2 front panel

MR2
STAT

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2

MR2

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the MR2 front panel. Table 9-19 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 9-19 Types and functions of the MR2 interfaces Interface A1-A2 Type LC Function Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.
9-27

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface D1-D2 IN OUT MO MI

Type LC LC LC LC LC

Function Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated clientside equipment. Receives the multiplexed signal. Transmits the multiplexed signal. Cascade output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board. Cascade input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

9.4.6 Valid Slots

The MR2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the MR2 are IU1-IU17.

9.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2

The characteristic code for the MR2 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 9-20. Table 9-20 Characteristic code for the MR2 Code The first four digits Meaning The frequency of the first optical signal The frequency of the second optical signal Description Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the first optical signal. Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the second optical signal.

The last four digits

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 is 93609370.

l l

"9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz. "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.

9.4.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.
9-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 9-21. Table 9-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 MI/MO IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type

9.4.9 Specifications of the MR2

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 9-22 lists the optical specifications of the MR2. Table 9-22 Optical specifications of the MR2 Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing 0.5 dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Unit nm GHz nm dB dB

Value 1529-1561 100 0.11 1.5 >25

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-29

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Correspondin g interfaces

Item Non-adjacent channel isolation

Unit dB nm dB dB dB dB

Value >35 0.11 1.5 1.0 >13 >40

A1-OUT A2-OUT

0.5 dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Optical return loss

IN-MO MI-OUT -

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are no rules of adding/dropping wavelength.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W

9.5 MR4
MR4: 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 9.5.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the MR4 board is available, that is TN11. 9.5.2 Application The MR4 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR4 realizes the adding/ dropping and multiplexing of four signals. 9.5.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the MR4 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface. 9.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
9-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

9.5.5 Front Panel There is an indicator and 12 interfaces on the MR4 front panel. 9.5.6 Valid Slots The MR4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the MR4 are IU1-IU17. 9.5.7 Characteristic Code for of MR4 The characteristic code for the MR4 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board. 9.5.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 9.5.9 Specifications of the MR4 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

9.5.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the MR4 board is available, that is TN11.

9.5.2 Application
The MR4 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR4 realizes the adding/ dropping and multiplexing of four signals. For the position of the MR4 in the DWDM system, see Figure 9-13. Figure 9-13 Position of the MR4 in the DWDM system
Client side OTU 4 OTU Client side OTU 4 OTU

OA MR4 OA MR4

OA OA

9.5.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the MR4 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-23.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-31

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 9-23 Functions and features of the MR4 Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascade interface Wavelength query Description Adds/Drops and multiplexes consecutive four signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the DWDM specification. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve the expansion. Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

9.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The MR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 9-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR4. Figure 9-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR4
D1 D4 MO MI A1 A4

IN

Drop optical module OADM optical module Control Memory CPU

Add optical module

OUT

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted
9-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The rest wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function
l

OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

9.5.5 Front Panel

There is an indicator and 12 interfaces on the MR4 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 9-15 shows the MR4 front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-33

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 9-15 MR4 front panel

MR4
STAT

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4

MR4

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the MR4 front panel. Table 9-24 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 9-24 Types and functions of the MR4 interfaces Interface A1-A4 Type LC Function Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

9-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Interface D1-D4 IN OUT MI MO

Type LC LC LC LC LC

Function Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated clientside equipment. Receives the multiplexed signal. Transmits the multiplexed signal. Cascade input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board. Cascade output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

9.5.6 Valid Slots

The MR4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the MR4 are IU1-IU17.

9.5.7 Characteristic Code for of MR4

The characteristic code for the MR4 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 9-25. Table 9-25 Characteristic code for the MR4 Code The first four digits Meaning The frequency of first optical signal Description Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the first optical signal processed by the board. Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the fourth optical signal processed by the board.

The last four digits

The frequency of forth optical signal

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR4 is 92109240.

l l

"9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.

Since the four optical signals processed by the MR4 are in sequence, it is inferred that:
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-35

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

l l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.

9.5.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 9-26. Table 9-26 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR4 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4 MI/MO IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type

9.5.9 Specifications of the MR4

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 9-27 lists the optical specifications of the MR4.

9-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Table 9-27 Optical specifications of the MR4 Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing 0.5 dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT IN-MO MI-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Optical return loss Unit nm GHz nm dB dB dB nm dB Value 1529-1561 100 0.11 2.2 >25 >35 0.11 2.2

dB dB dB

1.5 >13 >40

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The MR4 adds/drops and multiplexes consecutive four signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are ten groups of wavelengths: Table 9-28 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the MR4 Group Wavelength (nm) A1/D1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1560.61 1557.36 1554.13 1550.92 1547.72 1544.53 A2/D2 1559.79 1556.55 1553.33 1550.12 1546.92 1543.73 A3/D3 1558.98 1555.75 1552.52 1549.32 1546.12 1542.94 A4/D4 1558.17 1554.94 1551.72 1548.51 1545.32 1542.14

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-37

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Group

Wavelength (nm) A1/D1 A2/D2 1540.56 1537.40 1534.25 1531.12 A3/D3 1539.77 1536.61 1533.47 1530.33 A4/D4 1538.95 1535.82 1532.68 1529.55

7 8 9 10

1541.35 1538.19 1535.04 1531.90

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W

9.6 MR8
MR8: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 9.6.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the MR8 board is available, that is TN11. 9.6.2 Application The MR8 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR8 realizes the adding/ dropping and multiplexing of eight signals. 9.6.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the MR8 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface. 9.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MR8 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 9.6.5 Front Panel There is an indicator and 20 interfaces on the MR8 front panel. 9.6.6 Valid Slots The MR8 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MR8 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. 9.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8 The characteristic code for the MR8 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
9-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

9.6.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 9.6.9 Specifications of the MR8 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

9.6.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the MR8 board is available, that is TN11.

9.6.2 Application
The MR8 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR8 realizes the adding/ dropping and multiplexing of eight signals. For the position of the MR8 in the DWDM system, see Figure 9-16. Figure 9-16 Position of the MR8 in the DWDM system
Client side OTU 8 OTU Client side OTU 8 OTU

OA MR8 OA MR8

OA OA

9.6.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the MR8 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-29. Table 9-29 Functions and features of the MR8 Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascade interface Wavelength query Description Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the DWDM specification. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve the expansion. Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-39

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The MR8 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 9-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR8. Figure 9-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8
D1 D8 MO MI A1 A8

IN

Drop optical module

Add optical module

OUT

OADM optical module Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The rest wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function
l

OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of eight wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

9-40

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

9.6.5 Front Panel

There is an indicator and 20 interfaces on the MR8 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 9-18 shows the MR8 front panel. Figure 9-18 MR8 front panel
MR8
STAT

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

MR8

OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3

D4 A4 D5 A5 D6 A6 D7 A7 D8 A8

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-41

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Interfaces
There are 20 optical interfaces on the MR8 front panel. Table 9-30 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 9-30 Types and functions of the MR8 interfaces Interface A1-A8 D1-D8 IN OUT MI MO Type LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated clientside equipment. Receives the multiplexed signal. Transmits the multiplexed signal. Cascade input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board. Cascade output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

9.6.6 Valid Slots

The MR8 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MR8 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the MR8 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the MR8 displayed on the NM is IU1.

9.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8

The characteristic code for the MR8 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 9-31.
9-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Table 9-31 Characteristic code for the MR8 Code The first four digits Meaning The frequency of the first optical signal Description Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the first optical signal processed by the board. Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the eighth optical signal processed by the board.

The last four digits

The frequency of the eighth optical signal

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8 is 92109280.

l l

"9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.

Since the eight optical signals processed by the MR8 are in sequence, it is inferred that:
l l l

The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. Inferred from it, the frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.

9.6.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 9-32. Table 9-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4 A5/D51 A6/D6 A7/D7
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-43

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface on the Panel A8/D8 MI/MO IN/OUT

Interface on the NM 8 9 10

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type

9.6.9 Specifications of the MR8

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 9-33 lists the optical specifications of the MR8. Table 9-33 Optical specifications of the MR8 Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 IN-D5 IN-D6 IN-D7 IN-D8 A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT A5-OUT
9-44

Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing 0.5 dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation 0.5 dB spectral width

Unit nm GHz nm dB dB dB

Value 1529-1561 100 0.11 4 >25 >35

nm

0.11

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Correspondin g interfaces A6-OUT A7-OUT A8-OUT

Item Add channel insertion loss

Unit dB

Value 4

IN-MRO MRI-OUT -

Insertion loss Isolation Optical return loss

dB dB dB

3.5 >13 >40

Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are five groups of wavelengths: Table 9-34 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8 Group Wavelength (nm) A1/D1 1 2 3 4 5 1560.6 1 1554.1 3 1547.7 2 1541.3 5 1535.0 4 A2/D2 1559.7 9 1553.3 3 1546.9 2 1540.5 6 1534.2 5 A3/D3 1558.9 8 1552.5 2 1546.1 2 1539.7 7 1533.4 7 A4/D4 1558.1 7 1551.7 2 1545.3 2 1538.9 8 1532.6 8 A5/D5 1557.3 6 1550.9 2 1544.5 3 1538.1 9 1531.9 0 A6/D6 1556.5 5 1550.1 2 1543.7 3 1537.4 0 1531.1 2 A7/D7 1555.7 5 1549.3 2 1542.9 4 1536.6 1 1530.3 3 A8/D8 1554.9 4 1548.5 1 1542.1 4 1535.8 2 1529.5 5

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-45

l l

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W

9.7 SBM2
SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board 9.7.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SBM2 board is available, that is TN11. 9.7.2 Application The SBM2 board drops two signals from the multiplexed signals, and at the same time adds another two signals to the multiplexed signals. 9.7.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the SBM2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals and providing a cascade interface. 9.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SBM2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 9.7.5 Front Panel There are interfaces on the SBM2 front panel. 9.7.6 Valid Slots The SBM2 occupies one slot.The valid slots for the SBM2 are IU1-IU17. 9.7.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 9.7.8 Specifications of the SBM2 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

9.7.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the SBM2 board is available, that is TN11.

9.7.2 Application
The SBM2 board drops two signals from the multiplexed signals, and at the same time adds another two signals to the multiplexed signals. For the position of the SBM2 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-19. Figure 9-19 Position of the SBM2 in the CWDM system
Client side OTU OTU Client side OTU OTU

SBM2

SBM2

9-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

9.7.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the SBM2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals and providing a cascade interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-35. Table 9-35 Functions and features of the SBM2 Function and Feature Basic function Description Drops two signals from the multiplexed signals and add other two signals into the multiplexed signals. The added and dropped optical signals must be of different wavelengths. Supports only the single-fiber dual fed CWDM system. Provides a cascade optical interface to cascade other single-fiber bidirectional OADM boards.

WDM specification Cascade interface

9.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The SBM2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 9-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2. Figure 9-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2
D1 D2 A1 A2

LINE

Drop optical module OADM optical module Control Memory CPU

Add optical module

EXT

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-47

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed signals through the LINE interface. After the optical module processes the multiplexed signals. Then, the board separates the multiplexed signals into two wavelengths of optical signals and outputs them through the D1 and D2 optical interfaces to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments. The board also receives two wavelengths of optical signals through the A1 and A2 interfaces and couples them to the multiplexed signals and outputs the coupled signals through the LINE interface. The EXT interface is used as a cascade interface. It transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the rest channels of the multiplexed signals.

Module Function
l

OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

9.7.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the SBM2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 9-21 shows the SBM2 front panel.

9-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Figure 9-21 SBM2 front panel

SBM2
STAT

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

EXT LINE D1 A1 D2 A2

SBM2

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the SBM2 front panel.Table 9-36 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 9-36 Types and functions of the SBM2 interfaces Interface A1/A2 Type LC Function Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.
9-49

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface D1/D2 LINE EXT

Type LC LC LC

Function Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated clientside equipment. Receives and transmits multiplexed signals. Cascade interface, transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/ drop the rest channels of the multiplexed signals.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

9.7.6 Valid Slots

The SBM2 occupies one slot.The valid slots for the SBM2 are IU1-IU17.

9.7.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 9-37. Table 9-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1 D1 A2 D2 LINE EXT Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

9-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Configuration Parameters
Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type

9.7.8 Specifications of the SBM2

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 9-38 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2. Table 9-38 Optical specifications of the SBM2 Correspondin g interfaces LINE-D1 LINE-D2 A1-LINE A2-LINE Optical return loss Passthrough loss Item Operating wavelength range Drop channel insertion loss Isolation Add channel insertion loss Isolation CWDM Unit nm dB dB dB dB dB dB Value 1291 to 1611 3 30 3 30 >40 1.5

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 1.8 lb. (0.8 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-51

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

10

Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

About This Chapter

10.1 RMU9 RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board 10.2 ROAM ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board 10.3 WSD9 WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board 10.4 WSM9 WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board 10.5 WSMD4 WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-1

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10.1 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board 10.1.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the RMU9 board is available, that is TN11. 10.1.2 Application The RMU9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the WSD9, the RMU9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. 10.1.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the RMU9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring. 10.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The RMU9 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 10.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the RMU9 front panel. 10.1.6 Valid Slots The RMU9 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the RMU9 are IU1-IU17. 10.1.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 10.1.8 Specifications of the RMU9 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

10.1.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the RMU9 board is available, that is TN11.

Type
Table 10-1lists the types of the RMU9. Table 10-1 Type description of the RMU9 Board TN11RMU9 Type 01 Description Processes the odd and even wavelengths of C-band.

10.1.2 Application
The RMU9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the WSD9, the RMU9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
10-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

The RMU9 can add eight single-channel signal or multi-channel signals to the main path. Being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit or optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the multiplexed channels enter the RMU9 through the channel-adding port. As for the single channels, they are directly sent to the RMU9 through the channel-adding port by the optical transponder units. For the position of the RMU9 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-1. Figure 10-1 Position of the RMU9 in the DWDM system
Client-side O O T T U U O O T T U U Client-side O O O T T T U U U MUX 8 RMU9 OA O T U

DMUX DCM 8 OA WSD9

OA

RMU9 8 MUX

WSD9 8 DMUX

OA DCM

O T U

O O T T U U

O T U

O O T T U U

O O T T U U

Client-side

Client-side

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.

10.1.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the RMU9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-2.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-3

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 10-2 Functions and features of the RMU9 Function and Feature Basic function Description Adds eight single-channel signal or multi-channel signals to the main path. Used with the OTU with tunable wavelength, the RMU9 realizes the dynamic input of eight channel signals. Supports the DWDM specification. Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services. Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.

WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring

Alarms and performance events monitoring

10.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The RMU9 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 10-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9.

10-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Figure 10-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9

AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

Optical multiplexer module

TOA ROA EXPI MONO OUT MONI

Optical module Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The wavelengths to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
NOTE

l l

The channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) must use a unique wavelength. Otherwise, the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted. The wavelength used by the channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) cannot be the same as the wavelength of the optical signals input through the EXPI optical interface. Otherwise, the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.

After being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer module, the optical signals input through the AMn optical interface are output through the TOA optical interface. The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface can be cascaded with an optical amplifier board. If no cascading is required, the optical signals are directly input to the ROA optical interface. After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added on the board through the ROA optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface. A small amount of optical signals input through the EXPI interface are separated from the main path, and output through the MONI interface. They are used for optical performance detection.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-5

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

A small amount of optical signals are separated from those output through the TOA interface, and output to the MONO interface. These signals are used for optical performance detection.

Module Function
l

Optical module

Multiplexes eight wavelengths added on the board. Eight VOAs achieve the in-service adjustment of input optical power. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

10.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the RMU9 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 10-3 shows the RMU9 front panel.

10-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Figure 10-3 RMU9 front panel

RMU9
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

MONO MONI OUT EXPI TOA ROA AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8

RMU9

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the RMU9 front panel. Table 10-3 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-7

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 10-3 Types and functions of the RMU9 interfaces Interface AM1-AM8 OUT EXPI MONI Type LC LC LC LC Function Receive the single-channel signals or multi-channel signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the optical spectrum for the input signals transmitted by the main optical path. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15dB lower than the actual signal power). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of optical spectrum for the signals output through the TOA interface. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the TOA port (15dB lower than the actual signal power). Used as the cascade output interface. Used as the cascade input interface.

MONO

LC

TOA ROA

LC LC

NOTE

When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber jumper.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

10.1.6 Valid Slots

The RMU9 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the RMU9 are IU1-IU17.

10.1.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 10-4.
10-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Table 10-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel EXPI OUT AM1-AM8 TOA/ROA MONI MONO Interface on the NM 1 2 3-10 11 12 13

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB) Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)

10.1.8 Specifications of the RMU9

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 10-5 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9. Table 10-5 Optical specifications of the RMU9 Item Insertion loss EXPI-OUT AMxa-TOA ROA-OUT Operating wavelength range Optical return loss Attenuation range Polarization dependent loss Attenuation accuracy
NOTE a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Unit dB dB dB nm dB dB dB dB

Value 8.5 12.5b 1.5 1529-1561 >40 0-15 0.5 1

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-9

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 11 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 12 W

10.2 ROAM
ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board 10.2.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the ROAM board is available, that is TN11. 10.2.2 Application The ROAM is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. 10.2.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the ROAM are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, built-in power equilibrium, and alarms and performance events monitoring. 10.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ROAM consists of the planar lightwave circuit optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 10.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ROAM front panel. 10.2.6 Valid Slots The ROAM occupies three slots. The valid slots for the ROAM are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. 10.2.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 10.2.8 Specifications of the ROAM Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

10.2.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the ROAM board is available, that is TN11.

Type
Table 10-6 lists the types of the ROAM.
10-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Table 10-6 Type description of the ROAM Board TN11ROAM Type 01 02 Description Processes the even wavelengths in C band. Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.

10.2.2 Application
The ROAM is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the ROAM in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-4. Figure 10-4 Position of the ROAM in the DWDM system
OA ROAM OA ROAM OA OA

DMUX O O T T U U

40

40

DMUX O O O T T T U U U Client-side O T U

O O T T U U

O T U

O T U

Client-side

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.

10.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the ROAM are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, built-in power equilibrium, and alarms and performance events monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-7.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-11

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 10-7 Functions and features of the ROAM Function and Feature Basic function Description Realizes the dynamic adding/dropping, pass-through, and blocking of a maximum of 40 wavelengths with the demultiplexing board as well as the dynamic grooming of wavelengths for the services on the ring network. Supports the DWDM specification. Realizes the wavelength-level equilibrium and control of optical power to flatten the spectrum for the working signals. Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.

WDM specification Power equilibrium Alarms and performance events monitoring

10.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The ROAM consists of the planar lightwave circuit optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 10-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ROAM. Figure 10-5 Functions and features of the ROAM
M01 M02 M40

VOA
OUT

VOA

VOA
EXPI

Optical multiplexer module Splitter

IN

EXPO DM

PLC optical module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

10-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Signal Flow
The main path signals are received through the IN interface. The splitter divides the main path signals into two channels of the same signals. One signal is output to the optical demultiplexer unit through the DM interface and demultiplexed into single wavelengths dropped at the local station. The other signal passes through and is output through the EXPO interface. The signals to be added at the local station are received through the corresponding M01-M40 interfaces. These signals are multiplexed with the signal input through the EXPI interface and then output through the OUT interface.

Module Function
l

PLC optical module

Multiplexes forty wavelengths added on the board. The planar lightwave circuit (PLC) optical module contains the VOA modules that realize the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The PLC optical module blocks and terminates the signals dropped at the local station and adjusts the optical power of other signals. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

10.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ROAM front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 10-6 shows the ROAM front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-13

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 10-6 ROAM front panel

ROAM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

M01 196.00 M02 195.90 M03 195.80 M04 195.70 M05 195.60 M06 195.50 M07 195.40 M08 195.30 M09 195.20 M10 195.10

M11 195.00 M12 194.90 M13 194.80 M14 194.70 M15 194.60 M16 194.50 M17 194.40 M18 194.30 M19 194.20 M20 194.10

M21 194.00 M22 193.90 M23 193.80 M24 193.70 M25 193.60 M26 193.50 M27 193.40 M28 193.30 M29 193.20 M30 193.10

M31193.00 M32192.90 M33192.80 M34192.70 M35192.60 M36192.50 M37192.40 M38192.30 M39192.20 M40192.10

EXPO

OUT IN M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10

EXPI

DM

ROAM

M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

M31 M32 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 45 optical interfaces on the ROAM front panel. Table 10-8 lists the type and function of each interface.

10-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Table 10-8 Types and functions of the ROAM interfaces Interface M01-M40 DM OUT IN EXPO EXPI Type LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Add channels from the local station. Drops channels to the local station. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Used as the cascade interface to transmit the passthrough signal. Used as the cascade interface to receive the passthrough signal.

There are 40 output interfaces on the ROAM front panel. Table 10-9 and Table 10-10 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the ROAM board. Table 10-9 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (even) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56 Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-15

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

Frequency (THz) 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

Wavelengt h (nm) 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53

Interface M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

Frequency (THz) 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

Wavelengt h (nm) 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61

Table 10-10 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (odd) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13 Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20

10-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

10.2.6 Valid Slots

The ROAM occupies three slots. The valid slots for the ROAM are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots. For example, if the ROAM occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the ROAM displayed on the NM is IU1.

10.2.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 10-11. Table 10-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN EXPO EXPI OUT DM A01-A40 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6-45

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Wavelength Target Power

10.2.8 Specifications of the ROAM

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 10-12 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-17

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 10-12 Optical specifications of the ROAM Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Mxa-OUT IN-DM EXPI-OUT IN-EXPO Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Attenuation range Attenuation precision Unit GHz dB dB dB dB nm dB dB dB dB Value 100 9b 7 14b 3 1529 - 1561 >22 >25 0 - 20 <1 (0 to 10dB) <1.5 ( >10dB ) Polarization dependent loss Module switch time Extinction ratio -0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength -0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through wavelength
NOTE a: Mx represents the M01-M40 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

dB ms dB nm nm

1.5 50 30 >0.3 >0.2

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W)) Weight: 7.0 lb. (3.2 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 66 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 73 W

10-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

10.3 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board 10.3.1 Version Description Three functional versions of the WSD9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13. The main difference among the three versions is that the channel spacing of the wavelength is different. 10.3.2 Application The WSD9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the WSM9 or the RMU9, the WSD9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. 10.3.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the WSD9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring. 10.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 10.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSD9 front panel. 10.3.6 Valid Slots The TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 occupies two slots. The TN13WSD9 occupies three slots. The valid slots for TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. The valid slots for the TN13WSD9 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. 10.3.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 10.3.8 Specifications of the WSD9 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

10.3.1 Version Description

Three functional versions of the WSD9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13. The main difference among the three versions is that the channel spacing of the wavelength is different.

Version
Table 10-13 lists the version description of the WSD9. Table 10-13 Version description of the WSD9 Item Functional version Description Three functional versions of the WSD9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-19

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Similarity Difference

Description The TN11WSD9, TN12WSD9 and TN13WSD9 boards share the same functioning principle. The wavelength of the TN11WSD9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies two slots. The wavelength of the TN12WSD9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies two slots. The wavelength of the TN13WSD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies three slots.

Replacement

The TN12WSD9 and TN11WSD9 boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11WSD9 board is replaced with the TN12WSD9 board, the SCC software need be upgraded. The boards of other versions cannot be replaced with each other.

Type
Table 10-14 lists the types of the WSD9. Table 10-14 Type description of the WSD9 Board TN12WSD9 Type A01 Description The wavelength of the board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing in C band. The wavelength of the board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band.

TN13WSD9

C01

10.3.2 Application
The WSD9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the WSM9 or the RMU9, the WSD9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. The single-channel or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the interfaces of the WSD9 based on the configuration. If the dropped signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit for demultiplexing. Then, the demultiplexed signals enter corresponding OTUs and are sent to the client-side equipment at the local station. If the dropped signal is a single-channel signal, it is directly sent to the OTU at the local station. For the position of the WSD9 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-7.

10-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Figure 10-7 Position of the WSD9 in the DWDM system

Client-side O O T T U U O O T T U U Client-side O O O T T T U U U MUX 8 WSM9 OA O T U

DMUX DCM OA 8 WSD9

OA

WSM9 8 MUX

WSD9 8 DMUX

OA DCM

O T U

O O T T U U

O T U

O O T T U U

O O T T U U

Client-side

Client-side

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.

10.3.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the WSD9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-15. Table 10-15 Functions and features of the WSD9 Function and Feature Basic function Description Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can output any wavelength combination to any interface so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths. Supports the DWDM specification. Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-21

WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical power adjustment

Description Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board. Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.

10.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 10-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9. Figure 10-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9
DM1 DM2 DM8

Splitter
IN MONI

Splitter WSS optical module

EXPO MONO

Optical module PIN Temperature detection

Temperature and optical power deteciton module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

DC power supply from a backplane

Signal Flow
The main path signal is received through the IN interface. The single-channel or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces based on
10-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

the configuration. Other channels pass through the station and are output through the EXPO interface.

Module Function
l

Optical module

The optical module can combine any wavelengths and transmit the signals through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO interfaces. The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains the VOA module that realizes the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection. Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Temperature and optical power detection module

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

10.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSD9 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 10-9 shows the WSD9 front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-23

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 10-9 WSD9 front panel

WSD9
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

WSD9
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

MONO MONI EXPO

MONO MONI EXPO IN DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8

IN DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8

WSD9

WSD9

TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9

TN13WSD9

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the WSD9 front panel. Table 10-16 lists the type and function of each interface.
10-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Table 10-16 Types and functions of the WSD9 interfaces Interface DM1-DM8 Type LC Function Transmit the single-channel or multi-channel signal separated from the main path. If the signal is a multichannel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. If the signal is a single-channel signal, it is directly sent to the optical transponder unit. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (15dB lower than the actual signal power). Connected to the output interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPO port (15dB lower than the actual signal power).

EXPO IN MONI

LC LC LC

MONO

LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

10.3.6 Valid Slots

The TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 occupies two slots. The TN13WSD9 occupies three slots. The valid slots for TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. The valid slots for the TN13WSD9 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots. For example, if the TN12WSD9 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the WSD9 displayed on the NM is IU1. If the TN13WSD9 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the WSD9 displayed on the NM is IU1.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-25

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10.3.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 10-17. Table 10-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN EXPO DM1-DM8 MONI MONO Interface on the NM 1 2 3-10 11 12

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB) Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)

10.3.8 Specifications of the WSD9

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 10-18 Optical specifications of the WSD9 Item Adjacent channel spacing TN11WSD9 TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9 Insertion loss IN-DMxa IN-EXPO Operating wavelength range
10-26

Unit GHz

Value 100 100 50

dB

8b

nm

1529 to 1561
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Item 0.5 dB spectral width Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time Optical return loss Directivity Attenuation range of each of dropping wavelengths Attenuation precision of each of dropping wavelengths Polarization dependence loss Dimension
NOTE a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.

Unit nm dB dB dB s dB dB dB dB dB -

Value >0.35 >25 >30 35 3 30 35 0-15 1 1 19

b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))

Dimensions of front panel:

l l l

TN11WSD9: 264.6 mm (H) 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W)) TN12WSD9: 264.6 mm (H) 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W)) TN13WSD9: 264.6 mm (H) 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))

Weight:
l l l

TN11WSD9: 4.9 lb. (2.2 kg) TN12WSD9: 4.9 lb. (2.2 kg) TN13WSD9: 10.6 lb. (4.8 kg)

Power Consumption
Board The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 17.0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 18.7

10-27

TN11WSD9
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 30.0 30.0

The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 35.0 35.0

TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9

10.4 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board 10.4.1 Version Description Three functional versions of the WSM9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13. The main difference among the three versions is that the channel spacing of the wavelength is different. 10.4.2 Application The WSM9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the WSD9, the WSM9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. 10.4.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the WSM9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring. 10.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 10.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSM9 front panel. 10.4.6 Valid Slots The TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9 occupies two slots. The TN13WSM9 occupies three slots. The valid slots for TN11WSM9 and and TN12WSM9 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. The valid slots for the TN13WSM9 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. 10.4.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 10.4.8 Specifications of the WSM9 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

10.4.1 Version Description

Three functional versions of the WSM9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13. The main difference among the three versions is that the channel spacing of the wavelength is different.

Version
Table 10-19 lists the version description of the WSM9.

10-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Table 10-19 Version description of the WSM9 Item Functional version Similarity Difference Description Three functional versions of the WSM9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13. The TN11WSM9, TN12WSM9 and TN13WSM9 boards share the same functioning principle. The wavelength of the TN11WSM9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies two slots. The wavelength of the TN12WSM9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies two slots. The wavelength of the TN13WSM9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies three slots. Replacement The TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11WSM9 board is replaced with the TN12WSM9 board, the SCC software need be upgraded. The boards of other versions cannot be replaced with each other.

Type
Table 10-20 lists the types of the WSM9. Table 10-20 Type description of the WSM9 Board TN12WSM9 Type A01 Description The wavelength of the board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing in C band. The wavelength of the board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band.

TN13WSM9

C01

10.4.2 Application
The WSM9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the WSD9, the WSM9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. The single-channel or multi-channel signals to be added to the main path are input through the interfaces of WSM9. If the added signal is a mutli-channel signal, it is received after being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit. If the added signal is a single-channel signal, it is directly received after being converted by the OTU. For the position of the WSM9 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-10.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-29

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 10-10 Position of the WSM9 in the DWDM system

Client-side O O T T U U O O T T U U Client-side O O O T T T U U U MUX 8 WSM9 OA O T U

DMUX DCM OA 8 WSD9

OA

WSM9 8 MUX

WSD9 8 DMUX

OA DCM

O T U

O O T T U U

O T U

O O T T U U

O O T T U U

Client-side
NOTE

Client-side

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.

10.4.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the WSM9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-21. Table 10-21 Functions and features of the WSM9 Function and Feature Basic function Description Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through any interfaces so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths. Supports the DWDM specification. Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring

10-30

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical power adjustment

Description Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board. Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.

10.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 10-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9. Figure 10-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9
AM1 AM2 AM8

Splitter
EXPI MONI

Splitter WSS optical module

OUT MONO

Optical module Temperature detection Temperature and optical power deteciton module PIN

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-31

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
l

If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSM9 board through the AMn optical interface. If single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSM9 board from the optical transponder unit through the AMn interface.

After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function
l

Optical module

Selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through AM1-AM8 or EXPI. The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains a VOA module, which realizes the optical power adjustment on a wavelength level. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection. Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Temperature and optical power detection module

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

10.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSM9 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 10-12 shows the WSM9 front panel.

10-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Figure 10-12 WSM9 front panel

WSM9
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

WSM9
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

MONO MONI

MONO MONI OUT EXPI AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8

OUT EXPI AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8

WSM9

WSM9

TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9

TN13WSM9

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the WSM9 front panel. Table 10-22 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-33

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 10-22 Types and functions of the WSM9 interfaces Interface AM1-AM8 OUT EXPI MONI Type LC LC LC LC Function Receive the single-channel signal or multi-channel signal that are to be multiplexed into the main path. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15dB lower than the actual signal power). Connected to the output interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15dB lower than the actual signal power).

MONO

LC

Laser Safety Level

TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9: The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)). TN13WSM9: The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

10.4.6 Valid Slots

The TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9 occupies two slots. The TN13WSM9 occupies three slots. The valid slots for TN11WSM9 and and TN12WSM9 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. The valid slots for the TN13WSM9 are IU1-IU15 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots. For example, if the TN12WSM9 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the WSM9 displayed on the NM is IU1. If the TN13WSM9 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the TN13WSM9 displayed on the NM is IU1.
10-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

10.4.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 10-23. Table 10-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel EXPI OUT AM1-AM8 MONI MONO Interface on the NM 1 2 3-10 11 12

Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB) Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)

10.4.8 Specifications of the WSM9

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 10-24 Optical specifications of the WSM9 Item Type Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss AMxa-OUT EXPI-OUT nm nm 1529.55-1560.61 >0.22 1529 to 1561 >0.16
10-35

Unit GHz dB

Value TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9 100 8b TN13WSM9 50 8b

Operating wavelength range 0.5 dB spectral width

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time Optical return loss Directivity Attenuation range of each of adding wavelengths Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelengths Polarization dependence loss Dimension

Unit dB dB dB s dB dB dB dB dB -

Value >25 >30 35 3 30 35 0-15 1 1 91 >25 >30 35 3 30 35 0-15 1 1 91

NOTE a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))

Dimensions of front panel:

l l l

TN11WSM9: 264.6 mm (H) 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W)) TN12WSM9: 264.6 mm (H) 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W)) TN13WSM9: 264.6 mm (H) 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))

Weight:
l l l

TN11WSM9: 4.9 lb. (2.2 kg) TN12WSM9: 4.9 lb. (2.2 kg) TN13WSM9: 10.6 lb. (4.8 kg)

Power Consumption
Board The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 17.0 30.0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 18.7 35.0

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

TN11WSM9 TN12WSM9
10-36

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Board

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 30.0

The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 35.0

TN13WSM9

10.5 WSMD4
WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 10.5.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the WSMD4 board is available, that is TN11. 10.5.2 Application The WSMD4 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit, and the optical add and drop multiplexing unit, WSMD4 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. 10.5.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the WSMD4 are service broadcasting, dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring. 10.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSMD4 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 10.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSMD4 front panel. 10.5.6 Valid Slots The WSMD4 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the WSMD4 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. 10.5.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 10.5.8 Specifications of the WSMD4 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

10.5.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the WSMD4 board is available, that is TN11.

Type
Table 10-25 lists the version description of the WSMD4.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-37

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 10-25 Version description of the WSMD4 Board TN11WSMD4 Type 01 02 Description Processes the even wavelengths in C band. Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.

10.5.2 Application
The WSMD4 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit, and the optical add and drop multiplexing unit, WSMD4 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD4 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-13. Figure 10-13 Position of the WSMD4 in the DWDM system
West client side East client side

West ODF

F I U

WSMD4

WSMD4

F I U

East ODF

South ODF

F I U

WSMD4

WSMD4

F I U

North ODF

South client side

North client side

10.5.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the WSMD4 are service broadcasting, dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-26.

10-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Table 10-26 Functions and features of the WSMD4 Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides service broadcasting function, and configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through any interfaces, and output any wavelength combination to any interface, so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths. Supports the DWDM specification. Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services. Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board. Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add wavelengths at the local station.

WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring

Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical power adjustment

10.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The WSMD4 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 10-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-39

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 10-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4

D D D D M M M M 1 2 3 4 A A A A M M M M 1 2 3 4

Splitter
IN MONI

Splitter
OUT

RDU optical WSS optical module module Optical module PIN Temperature detection PIN

MONO

Temperature and optical power deteciton module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal flow
The optical signals of the main path is accessed through the IN interface. It is broadcasted into four same optical signals through the ROADM demux unit (RDU) optical module. Then, the board outputs the single-channel or multiplexed signals to be dropped at the local station through the DM1 interface as per the configuration. Other wavelengths that are not dropped at the local station are output through the DM2-DM4 optical interfaces. Local add optical signal (single-channel or multiplexed signals) is input to the board through the AM1 optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD4 board through the AM1 optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSDM4 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM1 interface. Optical signals crossconnected from other directions are input to the board through the AM1-AM4 optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the added wavelengths at the local station. The multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module function
l

Optical module

The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of the following optical interfaces: AM1, AM2, AM3 and AM4.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

10-40

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that realizes the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The RDU optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through DM1-DM4. Realizes the broadcasting from wavelength signals to four ports. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection. Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Temperature and optical power detection module

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

10.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSMD4 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 10-15 shows the WSMD4 front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-41

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 10-15 WSMD4 front panel

WSMD4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

MONO MONI OUT IN DM1 AM1 DM2 AM2 DM3 AM3 DM4 AM4

WSMD4

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the WSMD4 front panel. Table 10-27 lists the type and function of each interface.

10-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Table 10-27 Types and functions of the WSMD4 interfaces Interface AM1-AM4 Type LC Function Receives the single-channel signal or multiplexed signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path. Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station or other stations to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15dB lower than the actual signal power). Connected to the output interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15dB lower than the actual signal power).

DM1-DM4

LC

OUT IN MONI

LC LC LC

MONO

LC

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

10.5.6 Valid Slots

The WSMD4 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the WSMD4 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the WSMD4 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the WSMD4 displayed on the NM is IU1.

10.5.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-43

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 10-28. Table 10-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD4 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN DM1 AM1 OUT DM2-DM4 AM2-AM4 MONO MONI Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 to 7 8 to 10 11 12

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB) Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB) Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity

10.5.8 Specifications of the WSMD4

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 10-29 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD4. Table 10-29 Optical specifications of the WSMD4 Item Adjacent channel spacing Operating wavelength range Insertion loss
10-44

Unit GHz nm dB

Value 100 1529-1561 8b

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

AMxa-OUT

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

Item IN-DMxa

Unit

Value

0.5 dB spectral width Adjacent channel isolation Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time Optical return loss Directivity Attenuation range per add wavelength Attenuation accuracy per add wavelength Polarization dependence loss Dimension a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface.

nm dB dB s dB dB dB dB dB -

>0.22 >25 35 3 30 35 0-15 1 1 4

b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W)) Weight: 7.1 lb. (3.2 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 17.0W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 18.7W

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-45

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

11
About This Chapter
11.3 OAU1 OAU1: optical amplifying unit 11.4 OBU1 OBU1: optical booster unit 11.5 OBU2 OBU2: optical booster unit

Optical Amplifying Unit

11.1 CRPC CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band 11.2 HBA HBA: high-power booster amplifier board

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-1

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11.1 CRPC
CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band 11.1.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the CRPC board is available, that is TN11. 11.1.2 Application The CRPC is a type of optical amplifier unit and adopts the backward pumping technology. It supports the transmission over ultra-long distance and the application of the 40G OTU. It can generate multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC must be used with the EDFA. 11.1.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature supported by the CRPC is online optical performance monitoring. 11.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CRPC board consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 11.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the CRPC front panel. 11.1.6 Valid Slots The CRPC is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is put outside the cabinet and not installed in the subrack. Its Ethernet interface is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communications with the SCC. The logical slots of CRPC is slot 28 to slot 31 on the T2000. 11.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and J4. 11.1.8 Characteristic Code for of CRPC The characteristic code for the CRPC consists of one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board. 11.1.9 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 11.1.10 Specifications of the CRPC Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.

11.1.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the CRPC board is available, that is TN11.

Type
Table 11-1 lists the types of the CRPC.

11-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Table 11-1 Type description of the CRPC Board CRPC Type 01 03 Description Adopts the backward pumping technology. Adopts the forward pumping technology.

11.1.2 Application
The CRPC is a type of optical amplifier unit and adopts the backward pumping technology. It supports the transmission over ultra-long distance and the application of the 40G OTU. It can generate multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC must be used with the EDFA.

CAUTION
Always turn off the pump laser of the CRPC before removing or inserting the fiber of the CRPC. For the position of the CRPC in the WDM system, see Figure 11-1 and Figure 11-2. Figure 11-1 Position of the CRPC in the WDM system (backward pump)
OTU OTU OTU OTU

Client side

M U X D M U X

OBU1

F I U F I U

CRPC

F I U F I U

OAU1

D M U X M U X

OTU OTU OTU OTU

Client side

Client side

OAU1

CRPC

OBU1

Client side

Figure 11-2 Position of the CRPC in the WDM system (forward pump)
Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU M U X D M U X F I U F I U CRPC F I U F I U OAU1 D M U X M U X OTU OTU OTU OTU Client side

OBU1

Client side

OAU1

CRPC

OBU1

Client side

11.1.3 Functions and Features

The main function and feature supported by the CRPC is online optical performance monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 11-2.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-3

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 11-2 Functions and features of the CRPC Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber. Realizes the distributed online amplification of signals over long distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services. Detects the optical power of the pump laser, temperature control current, pump current, and back-facet current.

Alarms and performance events monitoring

11.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The CRPC board consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. The CRPC is used at the receive end of the system, making use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect to amplify the optical signals during transmission. The CRPC is located before the receiver. The pump light travels in the reverse direction of the signal light. Figure 11-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC. The CRPC is located after the transmit end. The pump light travels in the same direction of the signal light. Figure 11-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC.

11-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Figure 11-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC (backward pump)
Signal
Pump light

Splitter Raman pump optical module

PIN Detection for temperature

LINE

Signal

SYS MON

Pump source
Pumping current and temperature control

Detection for pump light power and current

Driving and detection module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

Backplane (controlled by SCC) DC power supply from PDU SCC

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-5

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 11-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC (forward pump)
Signal
Pump light

Splitter Raman pump optical module

PIN Detection for temperature

LINE

Signal

SYS MON

Pump source
Pumping current and temperature control

Detection for pump light power and current

Driving and detection module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC DC power supply from PDU

Signal Flow
l

Backward pump The pump source of the CRPC sends the pump light to the WDM side through the LINE optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed amplification are input through the LINE interface, then the splitter splits them into two, among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring. The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC.

Forward pump The signal light is input through the SYS interface and output to the optical line through the LINE interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring. The pump light that is generated by the CRPC is output to the optical line through the LINE interface in the same direction of the signal light, to realize the distributed amplification of the optical signal. The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC.

Module Function
l

Raman pump optical module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

11-6

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical line for transmission. Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission. The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two channels of signals of different power. One of them are output through the SYS interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals are output to the MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising. Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, backlight current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the pump optical module. Drives the pump laser inside the pump optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Driving and detection module

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

11.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the CRPC front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 11-5 shows the CRPC front panel. Figure 11-5 CRPC front panel
MON
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED RADIATION

SYS

LINE

CRPC
!

CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT

ALM

RUN

WARNING: FIBERS MUST BE CONNECTED SEFORE POWER UP

RS232-1

RS232-2

LAN

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel.
l l

Running status indicator (RUN) - green Service alarm indicator (ALM) - red
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-7

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the CRPC front panel. Table 11-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 11-3 Types and functions of the CRPC interfaces Interface LINE SYS MON Type LSH/APC LC LC Function Receives the line optical signal. Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU. Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the SYS port (20dB lower than the actual signal power). LAN RJ-45 Connected to the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX interface or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communications with the SCC. RS232 communication interface

RS232-1/ RS232-2

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 4 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is above 27 dBm (500 mW)).

11.1.6 Valid Slots

The CRPC is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is put outside the cabinet and not installed in the subrack. Its Ethernet interface is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communications with the SCC. The logical slots of CRPC is slot 28 to slot 31 on the T2000.

11.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper

There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and J4. Figure 11-6 shows the number of each jumper.

11-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Figure 11-6 Jumpers on the CRPC board

CRPC J4
10 1 9

J3
2 10

CPU

Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensure the normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers.
l l l l l l l l

Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 7 to 8 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4. Connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J4. Connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J4.

Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the IP of the CRPC board. When several CRPC boards are used in an NE, an IP for each board is required to prevent IP conflict. The following are jumper setting regulations:
l l

When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.28. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.29. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.30. When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.31.

11.1.8 Characteristic Code for of CRPC

The characteristic code for the CRPC consists of one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 11-4. Table 11-4 Characteristic code for the CRPC Code The first character The two digits Meaning Gain Description This character is always G. Indicate the gain value.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-9

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.

11.1.9 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 11-5. Table 11-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel LINE SYS MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3

Configuration Parameters
Laser Status Board Work Type Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity

11.1.10 Specifications of the CRPC

Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 11-6 Optical specifications of the CRPC Item Un it nm nm dB m dB Value CRPC01 1400-1500 1529-1561 29 10 CRPC03 1400-1500 1529-1561 29.5 >10
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Pump wavelength range Operating wavelength range Maximum pump power Channel gain on G.652 fiber
11-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Item

Un it dB dB dB dB -

Value CRPC01 12 0 -1 0.5 LSH/APC, LC/PC CRPC03 NA NA NA 0.5 LSH/APC, LC/PC

Channel gain on LEAF fiber Effective noise figure on G.652 fiber Effective noise figure on LEAF fiber Polarization dependence loss Output connector type

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board: 345.0 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 76.0 mm (W) (13.8 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.0 in. (W) ) CRPC01: 8.8 1b. (4.0 kg) CRPC03: 9.2 1b.(4.2 kg)

Weight
l l

Power Consumption
Board The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) (W) 110.0 70.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) (W) 121.0 77.0

CRPC01 CRPC03

11.2 HBA
HBA: high-power booster amplifier board 11.2.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the HBA board is available, that is TN11. 11.2.2 Application The HBA is a type of optical amplifier unit. The HBA realizes the amplification of optical signals. It can be used at the transmit end. 11.2.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the HBA are online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. 11.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-11

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The HBA board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 11.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the HBA front panel. 11.2.6 Valid Slots The HBA occupies three slots. The valid slots for the HBA are IU2-IU16 in the subrack. 11.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA The characteristic code for the HBA consists of seven characters and digits, indicating the band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. 11.2.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 11.2.9 Specifications of the HBA Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

11.2.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the HBA board is available, that is TN11.

11.2.2 Application
The HBA is a type of optical amplifier unit. The HBA realizes the amplification of optical signals. It can be used at the transmit end. For the position of the HBA in the WDM system, see Figure 11-7. Figure 11-7 Position of the HBA in the WDM system
Client side Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX OAU1 OTU MUX HBA OAU1 DMUX Client side Client side

F I U

F I U

OTU OTU

HBA

MUX

OTU

11.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the HBA are online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 11-7.

11-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Table 11-7 Functions and features of the HBA Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Only applied on the transmit edge of the OTM station in the system that covers a long fiber span transmission. The HBA can amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

Typical gain Online optical performance monitoring

The typical gain of the HBA is 29 dB. Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading and expansion.
l l l

Gain lock function

Transient control function

Alarms and performance events monitoring

Detects and reports the optical power. Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. Detects the pump driving current, back-facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board.

11.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The HBA board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 11-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HBA.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-13

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 11-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA

Splitter
IN OUT

EDFA optical module Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature

MON

Driving and detection module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.

Module Function
l

EDFA optical module

Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to realize the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, backlight current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.

Driving and detection module

Control and communication module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

11-14

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

11.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the HBA front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 11-9 shows the HBA front panel. Figure 11-9 HBA front panel

HBA
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT

MON IN OUT

HBA

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-15

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the HBA front panel.Table 11-8 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 11-8 Types and functions of the HBA interfaces Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LSH/APC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/999 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30dB lower than the actual signal power).

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 3B (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 22.15 dBm (164 mW) to 27 dBm (500mW)).

11.2.6 Valid Slots

The HBA occupies three slots. The valid slots for the HBA are IU2-IU16 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot of the three occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is the number of the middle slot. For example, if the HBA occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the HBA displayed on the NM is IU2.

11.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA

The characteristic code for the HBA consists of seven characters and digits, indicating the band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given inTable 11-9.
11-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Table 11-9 Characteristic code for the HBA Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. The second character is always G. The third to the fourth digits indicate the gain value. The fifth character is always I. Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

The second character The third to the fourth digits The fifth character The sixth and the seventh digits

Gain Maximum nominal input optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA is CG29I-8. This code indicates that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power is -8 dBm.

11.2.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 11-10. Table 11-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Laser Status Gain (dB) Nominal Gain (dB)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-17

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Rated Optical Power Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11.2.9 Specifications of the HBA

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 11-11 Optical specifications of the HBA Item Type Channel allocation Unit nm Value TN11HBA 40-channel system: 192.1 THz-196.05 THz 10-channel system: Any two of the last 20 wavelengths are spaced at 200 GHz. -19 to -3 40-channel system: -19 10-channel system: -13 <8 <-45 26 <10 291 2.5 <0.5 <0.5

Nominal input power range Typical input power of a single wavelength Noise figure (NF) Output reflectance Maximum total output power Gain response time on adding/dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Polarization dependent loss Polarization mode dispersion

dBm dBm dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB ps

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

11-18

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Weight: 6.6 lb. (3.0 kg)

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 47 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 75 W

11.3 OAU1
OAU1: optical amplifying unit 11.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the OAU1 board is available, that is TN11. 11.3.2 Application The OAU1 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OAU1 realizes the amplification of optical signals. It can be used at the transmit end and the receive end. 11.3.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the OAU1 are gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. 11.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OAU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 11.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OAU1 front panel. 11.3.6 Valid Slots The OAU1 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the OAU1 are IU2-IU17 in the subrack. 11.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1 The characteristic code for the OAU1 consists of eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. 11.3.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 11.3.9 Specifications of the OAU1 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

11.3.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the OAU1 board is available, that is TN11.

Type
Table 11-12 lists the types of the OAU1.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-19

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 11-12 Type description of the OAU1 Unit TN11OAU1 Type 01 02 03 05 Description Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Gain Range 20 dB to 31 dB 20 dB to 31 dB 24 dB to 36 dB 23 dB to 34 dB

11.3.2 Application
The OAU1 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OAU1 realizes the amplification of optical signals. It can be used at the transmit end and the receive end. For the position of the OAU1 in the WDM system, see Figure 11-10. Figure 11-10 Position of the OAU1 in the WDM system
Client side Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX MUX MUX OBU1 OAU1 DMUX OTU OTU OTU OTU Client side Client side

OAU1

OBU1

11.3.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the OAU1 are gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 11-13. Table 11-13 Functions and features of the OAU1 Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

11-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Function and Feature Gain adjustment

Description The OAU101/OAU102 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU103 continuously adjusts the gain from 24 dB to 36 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU105 continuously adjusts the gain from 23 dB to 34 dB based on the input optical power.
NOTE 11.3.9 Specifications of the OAU1 only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading and expansion.
l l l

Gain lock function

Transient control function

Alarms and performance events monitoring

Detects and reports the optical power. Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. Detects the pump driving current, back-facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board.

11.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The OAU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 11-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OAU1.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-21

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 11-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the OAU1

TDC RDC MON

IN

OUT

EDFA optical module Driving current PIN

Splitter Detection for pump current and temperature

Driving and detection module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through the RDC interface. At last, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.

Module Function
l

EDFA optical module

Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to realize the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, backlight current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Driving and detection module

11-22

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

11.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OAU1 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 11-12 shows the OAU1 front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-23

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 11-12 OAU1 front panel

OAU1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

OAU1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

OAU1

OAU101/OAU102/ OAU103

MON OUT IN TDC RDC

OAU1

OAU105

MON OUT IN TDC RDC

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are five optical interfaces on the OAU1 front panel. Table 11-14 lists the type and function of each interface.

11-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Table 11-14 Types and functions of the OAU1 interfaces Interface IN OUT TDC/RDC MON Type LC LC LC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion compensation. Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal power).

Laser Safety Level

OAU101, OAU102, OAU103: The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)). OAU105: The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 3B (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 22.15 dBm (164 mW) to 27 dBm (500mW)).

11.3.6 Valid Slots

The OAU1 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the OAU1 are IU2-IU17 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the OAU1 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the OAU1 displayed on the NM is IU2.

11.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1

The characteristic code for the OAU1 consists of eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 11-15. Table 11-15 Characteristic code for the OAU1 Code The first character Meaning Description The first character is always G.
11-25

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Code The second to the fifth digits

Meaning Gain range

Description Indicate the range within which the gain can be continuously adjusted. The sixth character is always I. Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

The sixth character The seventh and the eighth digits

Maximum nominal input optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 is G2031I0. This code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.

11.3.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 11-16. Table 11-16 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OAU1 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT RDC/TDC MON Interface on the NM 1 4 5 6

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Laser Status Gain (dB) Nominal Gain (dB) Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Rated Optical Power Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity

11-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

11.3.9 Specifications of the OAU1

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 11-17 Optical specifications of the OAU101 Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel Noise figure (NF)a Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss 40 channels 80 channels Unit nm dB dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB/dB dB Value 1529 to 1561 20 -32 to 0 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 8.5 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 20 <10 202 2.0 2.0 0.5 1529 to 1561 26 -32 to -6 -32 to -22 -32 to -25 6.5 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 20 <10 262 2.0 2.0 0.5 1529 to 1561 31 -32 to -11 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 5.5 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 20 <10 312 2.0 2.0 0.5

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure adopts the typical value.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-27

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 11-18 Optical specifications of the OAU102 Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel Noise figure (NF)a Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss 40 channels 80 channels Unit nm dB dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB/dB dB Value 1529 to 1561 20 -32 to -3 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 7.5 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 17 <10 202 2 2 0.5 1529 to 1561 26 -32 to -9 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 6.0 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 17 <10 262 2 2 0.5 1529 to 1561 31 -32 to -14 -32 to -30 -32 5.5 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 17 <10 312 2 2 0.5

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure adopts the typical value.

Table 11-19 Optical specifications of the OAU103 Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels Unit nm dB dBm dBm Value 1529 to 1561 24 -32 to -4 -32 to -20 1529 to 1561 29 -32 to -9 -32 to -25 1529 to 1561 36 -32 to -16 -32

11-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Item 80 channels Noise figure (NF)a Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss

Unit dBm dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB/dB dB

Value -32 to -23 7.5 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 20 <10 242 2 2 0.5 -32 to -28 6.5 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 20 <10 292 2 2 0.5 -32 5.5 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 20 <10 362 2 2 0.5

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure adopts the typical value.

Table 11-20 Optical specifications of the OAU105 Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels 80 channels Noise figure (NF)a Input reflectance Output reflectance
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Unit nm dB dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB

Value 1529 to 1561 23 -32 to 0 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 <8.5 <-40 <-40 1529 to 1561 30 -32 to -7 -32 to -23 -32 to -26 <7 <-40 <-40 1529 to 1561 34 -32 to -11 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 <6 <-40 <-40
11-29

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss

Unit dBm dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB/dB dB

Value <-30 -27 -27 23 <10 232 2 2 0.5 <-30 -27 -27 23 <10 302 2 2 0.5 <-30 -27 -27 23 <10 342 2 2 0.5

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure adopts the typical value.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W)) Weight: 4.0 lb. (1.8 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
Board The maximum power consumption at 25 (77) 25.0 25.0 24.0 24.0 The maximum power consumption at 55 (131) 31.0 31.0 30.0 30.0

OAU101 OAU102 OAU103 OAU105

11.4 OBU1
OBU1: optical booster unit

11-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

11.4.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the OBU1 board is available, that is TN11. 11.4.2 Application The OBU1 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OBU1 realizes the amplification of optical signals. The OBU1 is of three types: OBU101, OBU103 and OBU104. 11.4.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the OBU1 are online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. 11.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OBU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 11.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OBU1 front panel. 11.4.6 Valid Slots The OBU1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the OBU1 are IU1-IU17. 11.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1 The characteristic code for the OBU1 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. 11.4.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 11.4.9 Specifications of the OBU1 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

11.4.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the OBU1 board is available, that is TN11.

Type
Table 11-21 lists the types of the OBU1. Table 11-21 Type description of the OBU1 Unit TN11OBU1 Type 01 03 04 Description Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Gain Range 201.5 dB 231.5 dB 171.5 dB

11.4.2 Application
The OBU1 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OBU1 realizes the amplification of optical signals. The OBU1 is of three types: OBU101, OBU103 and OBU104. For the position of the OBU1 in the WDM system, see Figure 11-13.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-31

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 11-13 Position of the OBU1 in the WDM system

Client side
OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX OBU1 OBU1 MUX OTU OTU OTU OTU

MUX

OBU1

OBU1

DMUX

Client side

Client side

Client side

11.4.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the OBU1 are online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 11-22. Table 11-22 Functions and features of the OBU1 Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB. The typical gain of the OBU103 is 23 dB. The typical gain of the OBU104 is 17 dB.

Typical gain

l l l

NOTE 11.4.9 Specifications of the OBU1 only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading and expansion.

Gain lock function

Transient control function

11-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring

Description
l l l

Detects and reports the optical power. Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. Detects the pump driving current, back-facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board.

11.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The OBU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 11-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU1. Figure 11-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the OBU1
Splitter IN EDFA optical module Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature OUT MON

Driving and detection module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

Backplane (Controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-33

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Module Function
l

EDFA optical module

Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to realize the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, backlight current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Driving and detection module

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

11.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OBU1 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 11-15 shows the OBU1 front panel.

11-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Figure 11-15 OBU1 front panel

OBU1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

MON OUT IN

OBU1

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the OBU1 front panel. Table 11-23 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-35

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 11-23 Types and functions of the OBU1 interfaces Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal power).

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

11.4.6 Valid Slots

The OBU1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the OBU1 are IU1-IU17.

11.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1

The characteristic code for the OBU1 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 11-24. Table 11-24 Characteristic code for the OBU1 Code The first character The second and the third digits The fourth character The fifth and the sixth digits Meaning Gain Maximum nominal input optical power Description The first character is always G. The second and the third digits indicate the gain value. The fourth character is always I. The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.

11-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

11.4.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 11-25. Table 11-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OBU1 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Laser Status Gain (dB) Nominal Gain (dB) Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Rated Optical Power Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity

11.4.9 Specifications of the OBU1

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 11-26 Optical specifications of the OBU1 Item Unit Value OBU101 Operating wavelength range Nominal input power range
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OBU103 1529-1561 -32 to -3

OBU104 1529-1561 -32 to -1

11-37

nm dBm

1529-1561 -32 to -4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item

Unit

Value OBU101 OBU103 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22 6.0 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 20 23 <10 231.5 2.0 2.0 0.5 OBU104 -32 to -17 -32 to -20 -17 -20 5.5 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 16 17 <10 171.5 2.0 2.0 0.5

Input power range per channel

40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels

dBm

-32 to -20 -32 to -23

Typical input power of a single wavelength

dBm

-20 -23

Noise figure (NF) Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Nominal gain Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss

dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm dB ms dB dB dB dB

5.5 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 16 20 <10 201.5 2.0 2.0 0.5

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.9 1b.(1.3 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
The power consumption of OBU101 and OBU104:
11-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l l

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 16 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 17.6 W

The power consumption of OBU103:

l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 18 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 20.5 W

11.5 OBU2
OBU2: optical booster unit 11.5.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the OBU2 board is available, that is TN11. 11.5.2 Application The OBU2 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OBU2 realizes the amplification of optical signals. It can be used at the transmit end and the receive end. 11.5.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the OBU2 are online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. 11.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OBU2 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 11.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OBU2 front panel. 11.5.6 Valid Slots The OBU2 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the OBU2 are IU2-IU17 in the subrack. 11.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2 The characteristic code for the OBU2 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. 11.5.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 11.5.9 Specifications of the OBU2 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

11.5.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the OBU2 board is available, that is TN11.

11.5.2 Application
The OBU2 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OBU2 realizes the amplification of optical signals. It can be used at the transmit end and the receive end. For the position of the OBU2 in the WDM system, see Figure 11-16.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-39

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 11-16 Position of the OBU2 in the WDM system

Client side Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX MUX OBU2 OBU2 DMUX OTU OTU OTU OTU Client side Client side

OBU2

OBU2

MUX

11.5.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the OBU2 are online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 11-27. Table 11-27 Functions and features of the OBU2 Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

Typical gain

The typical gain of the OBU205 is 23 dB.

NOTE 11.5.9 Specifications of the OBU2 only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading and expansion.
l l l

Gain lock function

Transient control function

Alarms and performance events monitoring

Detects and reports the optical power. Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. Detects the pump driving current, back-facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board.

11-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

11.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The OBU2 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 11-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2. Figure 11-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2
Splitter
IN

EDFA optical module Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature

OUT MON

Driving and detection module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.

Module Function
l

EDFA optical module

Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to realize the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

Driving and detection module

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-41

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, backlight current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

11.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OBU2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 11-18 shows the OBU2 front panel.

11-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Figure 11-18 OBU2 front panel

OBU2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT

OBU2

MON OUT IN

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the OBU2 front panel. Table 11-28 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-43

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 11-28 Types and functions of the OBU2 interfaces Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal power).

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 3B (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 22.15 dBm (164 mW) to 27 dBm (500mW)).

11.5.6 Valid Slots

The OBU2 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the OBU2 are IU2-IU17 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the OBU2 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the OBU2 displayed on the NM is IU2.

11.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2

The characteristic code for the OBU2 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given inTable 11-29. Table 11-29 Characteristic code for the OBU2 Code The first character The second and the third digits The fourth character The fifth and the sixth digits Meaning Gain Maximum nominal input optical power Description The first character is always G. The second and the third digits indicate the gain value. The fourth character is always I. The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

11-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 is G23I00. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.

11.5.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 11-30. Table 11-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OBU2 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Laser Status Gain (dB) Nominal Gain (dB) Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Rated Optical Power Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity

11.5.9 Specifications of the OBU2

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 11-31 Optical specifications of the OBU2 Item Unit Value OBU205 Operating wavelength range
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

nm

1529-1561
11-45

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item

Unit

Value OBU205

Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 Channels 80 Channels Typical input power of a single wavelength 40 Channels 80 Channels Noise figure (NF) Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Nominal gain Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss

dBm dBm

-24 to 0 -24 to -16 -24 to -19

dBm

-16 -19

dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm dB ms dB dB dB/dB dB

7.0 <-40 <-40 <-30 -27 -27 23 23 <10 231.5 2.0 2.0 0.5

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W)) Weight: 4.2 lb. (1.9 kg)

l l

11-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

11 Optical Amplifying Unit

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 26 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 33 W

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-47

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

12 System Control and Communication Unit

12

System Control and Communication Unit

About This Chapter

12.1 SCC SCC: system control and communication unit 12.2 AUX AUX: system auxiliary interface unit

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-1

12 System Control and Communication Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

12.1 SCC
SCC: system control and communication unit 12.1.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SCC board is available, that is TN11. 12.1.2 Application The SCC is a type of system control and communication unit. Working with the network management system to manage each board, the SCC realizes the communications between equipments. 12.1.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the SCC are DCC communication, subrack cascading, clock and power supply backup. 12.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module, communication module, CPU and control module, and power supply module. 12.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators, buttons and an LED indicator on the front panel. 12.1.6 Valid Slots The SCC occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SCC are IU17 and IU18. By default, the SCC is installed in IU18. 12.1.7 Jumper There is a three-bit jumper inside the SCC. It is used to switch on or off the power supplied by the battery on the board. 12.1.8 Specifications of the SCC Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

12.1.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the SCC board is available, that is TN11.

12.1.2 Application
The SCC is a type of system control and communication unit. Working with the network management system to manage each board, the SCC realizes the communications between equipments.

12.1.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the SCC are DCC communication, subrack cascading, clock and power supply backup. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 12-1.

12-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

12 System Control and Communication Unit

Table 12-1 Functions and features of the SCC Function and Feature Basic function Description Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack.
l

Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack. Supports the backup of the SCC data. Supports the function of the CF card to back up the data of the SCC so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement of the SCC. Supports IP over DCC.

l l

DCC communication Active/Standby backup Clock function Subrack cascading

Supports DCC communication with the NEs for network management. Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system that can provide the 1+1 hot backup. When the active board fails, the standby board becomes active automatically. Provides clock source for the system communications. Supports subrack cascading. When subracks are cascaded, the subrack in which the optical layer/overhead processing board is installed is usually selected as the master subrack. A slave subrack cannot be upgraded to a master subrack. The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and is in charge of the configuration and grooming of services inside the subrack. Besides these functions, the SCC in a master subrack also processes the overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks. The SCC in the master subrack is connected to the network management system. The configuration commands are issued to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.

Power supply backup

Provides 1:N power supply backup for the system.

12.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module, communication module, CPU and control module, and power supply module. Figure 12-1 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCC.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-3

12 System Control and Communication Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 12-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC

Other boards

Clock module

Overhead processing module

CPU and control module

Monitoring module

Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

Communication module

Backplane DC power supply from a backplne Other boards

Module Function
l

CPU and control module Realizes the control, monitoring and management of each functional module of the board. Overhead processing module

Receives overhead signals from the service board and processes the overhead bytes.In the TN11SCC board, the 360 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. Sends the overhead signals to the service board.

Monitoring module Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the T2000. Clock module Provides the clock source for the system.

Receives the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station, and ensures that the local clock of the local board is synchronous with the clock. Sends the local clock to the downstream station by using the OSC board.

Communication module Communicates with each board in the subrack, and reports the data of other boards to the T2000.

Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the T2000. Transmits urgent data through the RS485.

Power supply module Supplies power for the SCC. It also provides the entire OSN 6800 system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system. In

12-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

12 System Control and Communication Unit

addition, it provides power backup to the boards of which the total power consumption is less than 60W.

12.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, buttons and an LED indicator on the front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 12-2 shows the SCC front panel. Figure 12-2 SCC front panel

SCC
STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC

SubRACK_ID

RESET

LAMP TEST

ALM CUT

SCC

Indicators
There are eight indicators on the front panel.
l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12-5

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

12 System Control and Communication Unit

l l l l l l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) System power supply indicator (PWRA)- dual-colored (red, green) System power supply indicator (PWRB)- dual-colored (red, green) Protection power indicator (PWRC)- dual-colored (red, green) Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow

Buttons
There are three buttons on the front panel. Table 12-2 lists the function of each button. Table 12-2 Functions of the SCC buttons Button RESET ALM CUT LAMP TEST Function Used to reset the SCC. Used to clear the sound alarm. Used to test all the indicators in the subrack.

LED
There is an LED indicator on the front panel. Table 12-3 shows the its function. Table 12-3 Function of the SCC LED indicator LED indicator SubRack_ID Function The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary one when subracks are cascaded. "0" indicates that the subrack which the SCC placed is a primary one. "1" to "7" indicates that the subrack which the SCC placed is a secondary one. "E" indicates that the AUX board is out of service and the subrack ID cannot be obtained.

Interfaces
The SCC does not provide external interfaces.

12.1.6 Valid Slots

The SCC occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SCC are IU17 and IU18. By default, the SCC is installed in IU18.

12.1.7 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the SCC. It is used to switch on or off the power supplied by the battery on the board.
12-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

12 System Control and Communication Unit

When the board is in normal use, the jumper cap should be installed onto the two pins that are close to the board edge.

12.1.8 Specifications of the SCC

Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption of at 25 (77): 30.0 W The maximum power consumption of at 55 (131): 33.0 W

12.2 AUX
AUX: system auxiliary interface unit 12.2.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the AUX board is available, that is TN11. 12.2.2 Application The AUX is a type of system control and communication unit. It provides various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces. 12.2.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the AUX are providing various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces. 12.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The AUX board consists of the CPU and control module, communication module, and power supply module. 12.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the AUX front panel. 12.2.6 Valid Slots The AUX occupies one slot. The valid slot for the AUX is IU21. 12.2.7 Jumper There is a six-bit jumper inside the AUX, which is used to set the subrack ID. 12.2.8 Specifications of the AUX Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

12.2.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the AUX board is available, that is TN11.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12-7

12 System Control and Communication Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

12.2.2 Application
The AUX is a type of system control and communication unit. It provides various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.

12.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the AUX are providing various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 12-4. Table 12-4 Functions and features of the AUX Function and Feature Basic function Interface Description Provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces. Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management interface. Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communications interfaces Setting of subrack ID Sets the subrack ID that contains six bits.

12.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The AUX board consists of the CPU and control module, communication module, and power supply module. Figure 12-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the AUX. Figure 12-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the AUX

CPU and control module

Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication module

Backplane DC power supply from a backplne Other boards

12-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

12 System Control and Communication Unit

Module Function
l

CPU and control module The CPU module realizes the control, monitoring and management of the communication module and detects the power supply at the same time. The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information.

Communication module

Provides the inter-board communication interface to connect the service boards and the SCC. Realizes the data communication between boards. Provides the NM interface and the NM cascading interface that are used to connect the NM terminal. Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communication network interfaces.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

12.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the AUX front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 12-4 shows the AUX front panel. Figure 12-4 AUX front panel

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 ETH1 ETH2

STAT PROG

AUX

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12-9

12 System Control and Communication Unit

l l

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)

Interfaces
There are four interfaces on the AUX front panel. Table 12-5 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 12-5 Types and functions of the AUX interfaces Interface NM_ETH1 Type RJ-45 Function
l

Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 through a network cable to that on the T2000 server to achieve the management of the T2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 through a network cable to that on the T2000 server to achieve the management of the T2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.

NM_ETH2

RJ-45

ETH1 ETH2

RJ-45 RJ-45

Inter-subrack communications network interfaces Inter-subrack communications network interfaces

12.2.6 Valid Slots

The AUX occupies one slot. The valid slot for the AUX is IU21.

12.2.7 Jumper
There is a six-bit jumper inside the AUX, which is used to set the subrack ID. The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel.

12.2.8 Specifications of the AUX

Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

12-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

12 System Control and Communication Unit

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of the board (PCB):85 mm (H) x 220 mm (W) x 2mm (T) (3.4 in. (H) x 8.8 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of the front panel: 107.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (4.2 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 1.1 lb. (0.5 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 14.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 15.4 W

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-11

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

13

Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

About This Chapter

13.1 SC1 SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit 13.2 SC2 SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-1

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

13.1 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit 13.1.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the SC1 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality. 13.1.2 Application The SC1 is a type of optical supervisory channel unit. The SC1 realizes the processing of one supervisory channel in one direction. It transmits and extracts the overhead information of the system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC. 13.1.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the SC1 are processing and regeneration of optical supervisory signals. 13.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 13.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC1 front panel. 13.1.6 Valid Slots The SC1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SC1 are IU1-IU17. 13.1.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1 The characteristic code for the SC1 consists of twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and numbers of optical interface. 13.1.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 13.1.9 Specifications of the SC1 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

13.1.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the SC1 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality. Table 13-1 lists the version description of the SC1. Table 13-1 Version description of the SC1 Item Functional version Similarity
13-2

Description Two functional versions of the SC1 board are available: TN11 and TN12. The TN12SC1 works in the same way as the TN11SC1.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

Item Difference Replacement

Description None The TN11SC1 and TN12SC1 boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11SC1 is replaced with the TN12SC1, the SCC software need be upgraded.

13.1.2 Application
The SC1 is a type of optical supervisory channel unit. The SC1 realizes the processing of one supervisory channel in one direction. It transmits and extracts the overhead information of the system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC. For the position of the SC1 in the WDM system, see Figure 13-1. Figure 13-1 Position of the SC1 in the WDM system

OA F I U F I U

OA SC2 SCC OA F I U F I U

OA

SCC

SC1

SC1

SCC

OA

OA

NE1

NE2

NE3

In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 13-1, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

13.1.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the SC1 are processing and regeneration of optical supervisory signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-2.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-3

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 13-2 Functions and features of the SC1 Function and Feature Basic function Technical features Description The SC1 is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical supervisory signal. The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The SC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC1 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the boards in the paired slot and monitor other stations . Regeneration function The SC1 transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added. The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.

Operating wavelength

13.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The SC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC1.

13-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

Figure 13-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1

RM

O/E

CMI encoding module

Overhead processing module

CMI decoding module

E/O
Optical transmitting module

TM

Optical receiving module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. At last, the electrical supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical transmitting module.

Frame Structure of the OSC Signals

Figure 13-3 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32 timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31. Figure 13-3 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead
0 1 2 3

...

14

15

16

...

31

For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table 13-3.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-5

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 13-3 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC Timeslot Number 1 2 3-13, 15 Name E1 byte F1 byte D1-D12 bytes Function Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface. DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performances. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing. 14 17 ALC byte F2 byte Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol byte. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.

18

F3 byte

19 21-23

E2 byte Optical layer overhea d bytes Reserve d

Other

Module Function
l

Optical receiving module Performs the O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal. Optical transmitting module Performs the E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal. CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s signal.

Overhead processing module Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to the optical transmitting module.

13-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

13.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC1 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 13-4 shows the SC1 front panel. Figure 13-4 SC1 front panel
SC1
STAT ACT PROG SRV EOW

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TM RM

SC1

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-7

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the SC1 front panel.Table 13-4 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-4 Types and functions of the SC1 interfaces Interface TM RM EOW Type LC LC Function Transmits the supervisory signal. Receives the supervisory signal. Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires, to realize orderwire communication between NEs.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

13.1.6 Valid Slots

The SC1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SC1 are IU1-IU17.

13.1.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1

The characteristic code for the SC1 consists of twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and numbers of optical interface. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 13-5. Table 13-5 Characteristic code for the SC1 Code The first character The second to the tenth characters Meaning Optical signal wavelength range Description The first character is always W. The optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm processed by the board.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

13-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

Code The eleventh character The twelfth digit

Meaning Numbers of optical interface

Description The eleventh character is always P. The number of optical interface is one.

For example, the characteristic code for the SC1 is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of optical interface is one.

13.1.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 13-6. Table 13-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel RM/TM Interface on the NM 1

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Loopback Laser Status

13.1.9 Specifications of the SC1

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 13-7 lists the optical specifications of the SC1.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-9

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 13-7 Optical specifications of the SC1 Item Signal rate Operating wavelength range Signal coding Launched optical power Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Unit Mbit/s nm dBm dBm dBm Value 16.896 1500 to 1520 CMI -4 to 0 -46 -3 -48 4.096

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 11.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 14.9 W

13.2 SC2
SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit 13.2.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality. 13.2.2 Application The SC2 is a type of optical supervisory channel unit. The SC2 realizes the processing of two supervisory channels in opposite directions. It transmits and extracts the overhead information of the system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC. 13.2.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the SC2 are processing and regeneration of optical supervisory signals. 13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SC2 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 13.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC2 front panel. 13.2.6 Valid Slots
13-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

The SC2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SC2 are IU1-IU17. 13.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2 The characteristic code for the SC2 consists of twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and numbers of optical interface. 13.2.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 13.2.9 Specifications of the SC2 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

13.2.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality. Table 13-8 lists the version description of the SC2. Table 13-8 Version description of the SC2 Item Functional version Similarity Difference Replacement Description Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. The TN12SC2 works in the same way as the TN11SC2. None The TN11SC2 and TN12SC2 boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11SC2 is replaced with the TN12SC2, the SCC software need be upgraded.

13.2.2 Application
The SC2 is a type of optical supervisory channel unit. The SC2 realizes the processing of two supervisory channels in opposite directions. It transmits and extracts the overhead information of the system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC. For the position of the SC2 in the WDM system, see Figure 13-5. Figure 13-5 Position of the SC2 in the WDM system
OA F I U F I U OA SC2 SCC OA F I U F I U OA

SCC

SC1

SC1

SCC

OA

OA

NE1

NE2

NE3

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-11

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 13-5, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

13.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the SC2 are processing and regeneration of optical supervisory signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-9. Table 13-9 Functions and features of the SC2 Function and Feature Basic function Technical features Description The SC2 is used to receive, process, and transmit two optical supervisory signals. The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The SC2 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC2 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations. Regeneration function The SC2 transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added. The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.

Operating wavelength

13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The SC2 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC2.

13-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

Figure 13-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2

RM1

O/E O/E Optical receiving module CMI encoding module Overhead processing module CMI decoding module

E/O E/O Optical transmitting module

TM1 TM2

RM2

Control Memory CPU Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication

Control and communication module

DC power supply from a backplne

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. At last, the electrical supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical transmitting module.

Frame Structure of the OSC Signals

Figure 13-7 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32 timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31. Figure 13-7 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead
0 1 2 3

...

14

15

16

...

31

For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table 13-10.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-13

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 13-10 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC Timeslot Number 1 2 3-13, 15 Name E1 byte F1 byte D1-D12 bytes Function Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface. DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performances. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing. 14 17 ALC byte F2 byte Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol byte. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.

18

F3 byte

19 21-23

E2 byte Optical layer overhea d bytes Reserve d

Other

Module Function
l

Optical receiving module Performs the O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals. Optical transmitting module Performs the E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals. CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s signal.

Overhead processing module Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to the optical transmitting module.

13-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

13.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 13-8 shows the SC2 front panel. Figure 13-8 SC2 front panel
SC2
STAT ACT PROG SRV EOW

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TM1 RM1 TM2 RM2

SC2

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-15

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the SC2 front panel. Table 13-11 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-11 Types and functions of the SC2 interfaces Interface TM1/TM2 RM1/RM2 EOW Type LC LC Function Transmits the first/second supervisory signal. Receives the first/second supervisory signal. Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires, to realize orderwire communication between NEs.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

13.2.6 Valid Slots

The SC2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SC2 are IU1-IU17.

13.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2

The characteristic code for the SC2 consists of twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and numbers of optical interface. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 13-12. Table 13-12 Characteristic code for the SC2 Code The first character The second to the tenth characters Meaning Optical signal wavelength range Description The first character is always W. The optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm processed by the board.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

13-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

Code The eleventh character The twelfth digit

Meaning Numbers of optical interface

Description The eleventh character is always P. The numbers of optical interface are two.

For example, the characteristic code for the SC2 is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical interface are two.

13.2.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 13-13. Table 13-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel RM1/TM1 RM2/TM2 Interface on the NM 1 2

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Loopback Laser Status

13.2.9 Specifications of the SC2

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 13-14 lists the optical specifications of the SC2.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-17

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 13-14 Optical specifications of the SC2 Item Signal rate Operating wavelength range Signal coding Launched optical power Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Unit Mbit/s nm dBm dBm dBm Value 16.896 1500 to 1520 CMI -4 to 0 -46 -3 -48 4.096

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 12.5 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 14.9 W

13-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

14
About This Chapter
14.2 OLP OLP: optical line protection unit

Optical Protection Unit

14.1 DCP DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit

14.3 SCS SCS: sync optical channel separator unit

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-1

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14.1 DCP
DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit 14.1.1 Version Description The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the single mode or multimode. 14.1.2 Application The DCP is a type of optical protection unit. The DCP realizes the intra-board 1+1 protection, the client-side 1+1 protection and optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection). 14.1.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the DCP are intra-board 1+1 protection and clientside 1+1 protection. 14.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DCP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 14.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the DCP front panel. 14.1.6 Valid Slots The DCP occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DCP are IU1-IU17. 14.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP The characteristic code for the DCP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. 14.1.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 14.1.9 Specifications of the DCP Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

14.1.1 Version Description

The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the single mode or multimode.

Version
Table 14-1 lists the version description of the DCP. Table 14-1 Version description of the DCP Item Functional version Similarity
14-2

Description Two functional versions of the DCP board are available: TN11 and TN12. The TN12DCP works in the same way as the TN11DCP.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

Item Difference

Description The TN11DCP supports signle mode and multimode. The TN12DCP supports signle mode.

Replacement

The TN11DCP and TN12DCP boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other when the single mode is used. But after the TN11DCP is replaced with the TN12DCP, the SCC software need be upgraded.

Type
Table 14-2 lists the type description of the DCP. Table 14-2 Type description of the DCP Board TN11DCP Type 01 02 Description Supports single-mode optical module. Supports multi-mode optical module.

14.1.2 Application
The DCP is a type of optical protection unit. The DCP realizes the intra-board 1+1 protection, the client-side 1+1 protection and optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection). For the position of the DCP in the WDM system, see Figure 14-1, Figure 14-2 and Figure 14-3. Figure 14-1 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
TO11 TO21 MUX TI1 RO1 RI1 1

DMUX RI21 FIU FIU

TO11 RO1 TI1 OTU

OTU

RI11 RI21 DMUX

MUX TO21
RI12

DCP TO12
TI2

DCP
RO2 TI2

OTU RO2

TO22 MUX RI12 RI22 DMUX

DMUX RI22 FIU FIU

TO12

OTU

MUX TO22

NOTE

When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the DCP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-3

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 14-2 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TI1 RO1 TO21 RI21 TO11 RI11

MUX OTU (W) FIU DMUX MUX FIU DMUX FIU FIU

DMUX MUX DMUX

RI11 TO11

Client-side
RO1 TI1

OTU RI21 (W)

TO21 RI12 TO12

DCP
TI2 RO2

TO12 RI12

DCP
RO2 TI2

OTU TO22 (P)

RI22

OTU (P) RI22 MUX

TO22

NOTE

When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks, the DCP board can be used for client-side protection.

Figure 14-3 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (OWSP protection)
OTU1 OTU2 2 1 OADM (West) 2 1 (West) 2 1 OADM (East) 1 2 OTU1 OTU2

2/1

1/2 2 x DCP

2/1 2 x DCP

1/2

FIU

FIU

OADM 2/1 (East) 1/2 (East) FIU

OADM 2/1 (West) 1/2 FIU

FIU OADM 1/2 (West) 2/1 2 x DCP 2/1 1/2

FIU 2/1 OADM 1/2 (East)

2 1 OADM (East) 1 2

FIU

FIU

2 1 OADM (West) 1 2

2 x DCP

2/1 OTU2 OTU1 OTU2 OTU1

1/2

: Working signal

: Protection signal

: Optical signal

14.1.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the DCP are intra-board 1+1 protection and clientside 1+1 protection.
14-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-3. Table 14-3 Functions and features of the DCP Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Provides the intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function. Compared with the OLP, the DCP provides protection for two signals so as to realize high-integrated 1+1 protection. Provides the client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services. Provides the OWSP protection, make use of two different channels to achieve the protection of one channel of service between all stations.

Protection scheme

The intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection:

l

The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and singleend switching. When the performance of the working fiber declines, the system automatically switches the service from the working path to the protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is not needed.

NOTE The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-end switching for GE services.

The OWSP protection:

l

The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and dual-end switching. When the performance of the working fiber declines, the system automatically switches the service from the working path to the protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is needed.

Protection switching time

The protection switching time of the system is less than 50 ms.

14.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The DCP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCP.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-5

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 14-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP

TI1 TI2 RO1 TO11 TO12 TO21 TO22 RI11 RI12 RI21 RI22

Optical switch Optical switch

RO2

Optical power detecting module Optical module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
One DCP board supports the dual-fed and selective receiving of two channels of optical signals. The DCP board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.
l

Transmit direction The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.

Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI11 and RI12 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface. The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch

14-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.

Module Function
l

Optical module The optical module consists of two signal dual-fed parts and two signal selection parts.

Signal dual-fed part Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels.

Signal selection part Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of optical signals and outputs it.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

14.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the DCP front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 14-5 shows the DCP front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-7

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 14-5 DCP front panel

DCP
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TO11 RI11 TO12 RI12 TO21 RI21 TO22 RI22 RO1 TI1 RO2 TI2

DCP

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the DCP front panel. Table 14-4 lists the type and function of each interface.

14-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

Table 14-4 Types and functions of the DCP interfaces Interface TI1 Type LC Function Receives the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intraboard 1+1 protection) Receives the first channel of client-side signals. (clientside 1+1 protection) Receives one channel of client-side signals. (OWSP protection) TI2 LC Receives the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Receives the optical signals from the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection) RO1 LC Transmits the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Transmits one WDM-side optical signal to the OTU board. (OWSP protection) RO2 LC Transmits the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Transmits one optical signal to the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection) TO11 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Serves as a dual-fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the working router. (OWSP protection) TO12 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Dual fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the protection router. (OWSP protection)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-9

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface TO21

Type LC

Function Transmits the second channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the RI12 interface of another DCP board in the same station by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)

TO22

LC

Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the RI22 interface on the same DCP board by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)

RI11/RI12

LC

Receives the first channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Serve as selective receive interfaces, connecting to the working route and protection route, respectively. (OWSP protection)

RI21/RI22

LC

Receives the second channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intraboard 1+1 protection) Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the TO12 and TO22 interfaces on the same DCP board, respectively, by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

14.1.6 Valid Slots

The DCP occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DCP are IU1-IU17.

14.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP

The characteristic code for the DCP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time.
14-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 14-5. Table 14-5 Characteristic code for the DCP Code The first character The second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the DCP is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

14.1.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 14-6. Table 14-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TO11/RI11 TO12/RI12 TO21/RI21 TO22/RI22 TI1/RO1 TI2/RO2 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) Varance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-11

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14.1.9 Specifications of the DCP

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 14-7 Optical specifications of the DCP Interface Item Unit Value TN11DCP TI1-TO11 TI1-TO12 TI2-TO21 TI2-TO22 RI1-RO11 RI1-RO12 RI2-RO21 RI2-RO22 Insertion loss at the transmit end Insertion loss at the receive end single mode multimo de single mode multimo de single mode multimo de Operating wavelength single mode multimo de Operating wavelength deviation single mode multimo de Switching threshold of optical power difference dB dB dB dB dBm dBm nm nm nm nm dB 4 4.5 1.5 2 -35 to 7 -35 to 0 1310, 1550 850 40 (1310) 20 (1550) 20 5 TN12DCPa 4 1.5 -35 to 7 1310, 1550 40 (1310) 20 (1550) 5

Range of the input optical power

a: TN12DCP has no multimode optical module.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

l l

14-12

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 6.8 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 7.5 W

14.2 OLP
OLP: optical line protection unit 14.2.1 Version Description The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the single mode or multimode. 14.2.2 Application The OLP is a type of optical protection unit. The OLP realizes the optical line protection, intraboard 1+1 protection and the client-side 1+1 protection. 14.2.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the OLP are optical line protection, intra-board 1 +1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection. 14.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OLP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 14.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OLP front panel. 14.2.6 Valid Slots The OLP occupies one slot. The valid slots for the OLP are IU1-IU17. 14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP The characteristic code for the OLP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. 14.2.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 14.2.9 Specifications of the OLP Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

14.2.1 Version Description

The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the single mode or multimode.

Version
Table 14-8 lists the version description of the OLP.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-13

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 14-8 Version description of the OLP Item Functional version Similarity Difference Description Two functional versions of the OLP board are available: TN11 and TN12. The TN12OLP works in the same way as the TN11OLP. The TN11OLP supports signle mode and multimode. The TN12OLP supports signle mode. Replacement The TN11OLP and TN12OLP boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other when the single mode is used. But after the TN11OLP is replaced with the TN12OLP, the SCC software need be upgraded.

Type
Table 14-9 lists the type description of the OLP. Table 14-9 Type description of the OLP Board TN11OLP Type 01 02 Description Supports single-mode optical module. Supports multi-mode optical module.

14.2.2 Application
The OLP is a type of optical protection unit. The OLP realizes the optical line protection, intraboard 1+1 protection and the client-side 1+1 protection. For the position of the OLP in the WDM system, see Figure 14-6, Figure 14-7 and Figure 14-8. Figure 14-6 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (optical line protection)
OTU OTU MUX
TI TO1 RI1 RI1 TO1 RO

DMUX

OTU OTU

FIU OTU OTU

RO

OLP
TO2 RI2 TO2 RI2

OLP
TI

FIU OTU OTU

DMUX

MUX

14-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

NOTE

14 Optical Protection Unit

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.

Figure 14-7 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
TO1

MUX FIU
DMUX

DMUX

RI1 TO1

RI1

FIU MUX

OTU

TI RO OLP

TO2 RI2

MUX FIU
DMUX

DMUX

RI2

OLP

RO TI OTU

FIU MUX

TO2

NOTE

When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the OLP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.

Figure 14-8 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TO1 RI1 RO OLP TO2 OTU RI2 (P) TI

Cient-side OTU (W) MUX FIU

DMUX DMUX

FIU MUX

OTU RI1 (W) TO1 OLP

RO TI

MUX FIU
DMUX

DMUX

FIU MUX

OTU RI2 (P) TO2

NOTE

When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks, the OLP board can be used for client-side protection.

14.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the OLP are optical line protection, intra-board 1 +1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-10.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-15

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 14-10 Functions and features of the OLP Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides the optical line protection to ensure the normal receiving of signals when the line fiber fails. Provides the intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function. Provides the client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services. Protection scheme The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and single-end switching.
NOTE The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-end switching for GE services.

Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is not required. Protection switching time For the optical line protection, the switching time is less than 100 ms. For the intra-board 1+1 protection and the client-side 1+1 protection, the switching time is less than 50 ms.

14.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The OLP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OLP.

14-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

Figure 14-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP

TI TO1 TO2 RI1 RI2 Optical power detecting module

Optical switch
RO

Optical module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
l

Transmit direction The TI optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through the TO1 and TO2 optical interfaces.

Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI1 and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO optical interface. The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.

Module Function
l

Optical module The optical module consists of a signal dual-fed part and a signal selection part.

Signal dual-fed part

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-17

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels.

Signal selection part Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of optical signals and outputs it.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

14.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OLP front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 14-10 shows the OLP front panel.

14-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

Figure 14-10 OLP front panel

OLP
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

TO1 RI1 TO2 RI2 RO TI

OLP

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the OLP front panel. Table 14-11 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-19

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 14-11 Types and functions of the OLP interfaces Interface TI Type LC Function Receives the line signal from the FIU board. (optical line protection) Receives one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection) RO LC Transmits the line signal to the FIU board. (optical line protection) Transmits one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection) TO1/TO2 LC Transmits the working and the protection signals to the line side. (optical line protection) Transmits signals to the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits signals to the working and the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) RI1/RI2 LC Receives the working or the protection signal from the line side. (optical line protection) Receives the signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

14.2.6 Valid Slots

The OLP occupies one slot. The valid slots for the OLP are IU1-IU17.

14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP

The characteristic code for the OLP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 14-12.

14-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

Table 14-12 Characteristic code for the OLP Code The first character The second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the OLP is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

14.2.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 14-13. Table 14-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TO11/RI11 TO12/RI12 TI/RO Interface on the NM 1 2 3

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) Varance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

14.2.9 Specifications of the OLP

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-21

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Optical Specifications
Table 14-14 Optical specifications of the OLP Interface Item Unit Value TN11OLP TI-TO1 TI-TO2 Insertion loss at the transmit end Insertion loss at the receive end single mode multimode single mode multimode single mode multimode Operating wavelength single mode multimode Operating wavelength deviation single mode multimode Switching threshold of optical power difference dB dB dB dB dBm dBm nm nm nm nm dB 4 4.5 1.5 2 -35 to 7 -35 to 0 1310, 1550 850 40 (1310) 20 (1550) 20 5 TN12OLPa 4 1.5 -35 to 7 1310, 1550 40 (1310) 20 (1550) 5

RI1-RO RI2-RO

Range of the input optical power

a: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W))

Weight
l l

TN11OLP: 1.98 lb (0.9 kg) TN12OLP: 2.20 lb (1.0 kg)

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 6.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 6.6 W
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

14-22

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

14.3 SCS
SCS: sync optical channel separator unit 14.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SCS board is available, that is TN11. 14.3.2 Application The SCS is a type of optical protection unit. The SCS realizes the client-side 1+1 protection and Board-level protection (extended mode). 14.3.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature supported by the SCS is the client-side 1+1 protection. 14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SCS board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 14.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SCS front panel. 14.3.6 Valid Slots The SCS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SCS are IU1-IU17. 14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS The characteristic code for the SCS consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. 14.3.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 14.3.9 Specifications of the SCS Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

14.3.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the SCS board is available, that is TN11.

Type
Table 14-15 lists the type description of the SCS. Table 14-15 Type description of the SCS Board SCS Type 01 02 Description Supports single-mode optical module. Supports multi-mode optical module.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-23

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14.3.2 Application
The SCS is a type of optical protection unit. The SCS realizes the client-side 1+1 protection and Board-level protection (extended mode). For the position of the SCS in the WDM system, see Figure 14-11 and Figure 14-12. Figure 14-11 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TI1 RO1 TO11 RI11

MUX FIU
DMUX

OTU TO21 (W)

RI21

DMUX

FIU MUX
DMUX

OTU (W) RI21

RI11 TO11

Client-side
RO1 TI1

TO21 RI12 TO12

SCS
TI2 RO2

TO12 RI12

SCS
RO2 TI2

OTU TO22 (P)

RI22

MUX FIU
DMUX

FIU MUX

OTU (P) RI22

TO22

Figure 14-12 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended mode)
TBE1 TBE2 TBE1 TBE2 O A D M O A D M TBE1 TBE2 TBE1 TBE2

R1

S C S

L 4 G

F I U

F I U

L 4 G

S C S

R1

14.3.3 Functions and Features

The main function and feature supported by the SCS is the client-side 1+1 protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-16. Table 14-16 Functions and features of the SCS Function and Feature Basic function Description
l

Receives signals from the working and the protection OTUs and realizes the client-side 1+1 protection. Receives signals from the working and the protection TBE and realizes the board-level protection (extended mode).

Protection scheme

The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not need the support of protocol. Instead, the channel protection executes switching by detecting SD and SF events of the channel.

14-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The SCS board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCS. Figure 14-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS
Optical module
TI1 TI2 RO1 RO2

Splitter Splitter Coupler Coupler

TO11 TO12 TO21 TO22 RI11 RI12 RI21 RI22

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
One SCS board supports the dual-fed and dual receiving of two channels of optical signals. The SCS board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.
l

Transmit direction The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection channels through the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.

Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection channels are input through the RI1 and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the coupler. The system activates one of the two channels of optical signals based on the service quality. In this way, the selection of path optical signals is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface. Normally, the working OTU at the receive end is active, and the protection OTU is standby. Once a fault occurs in the services, an alarm triggers a protection switching. The system shuts down the working OTU, and activates the protection OTU.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-25

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Module Function
l

Optical module The optical module consists of the splitters and couplers.

Splitter Divides the one channel of optical signals into to two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels.

Coupler Receives the signals in the working and the protection channels. The system selects one channel of optical signals based on the service quality.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

14.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SCS front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 14-14 shows the SCS front panel.

14-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

Figure 14-14 SCS front panel

SCS
STAT

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TO11 RI11 TO12 RI12 TO21 RI21 TO22 RI22 RO1 TI1 RO2 TI2

SCS

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the SCS front panel. Table 14-17 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-17 Types and functions of the SCS interfaces Interface TI1/TI2 Type LC Function Receives the first/second channel of client-side signals.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-27

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface RO1/RO2 TO11/TO12 TO21/TO22 RI11/RI12 RI21/RI22

Type LC LC LC LC LC

Function Transmits the first/second channel of client-side signals. Transmits the first channel of signals to the working and protection OTU. Transmits the second channel of signals to the working and the protection OTU. Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1 (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).

14.3.6 Valid Slots

The SCS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SCS are IU1-IU17.

14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS

The characteristic code for the SCS consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 14-18. Table 14-18 Characteristic code for the SCS Code The first character The second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the SCS is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

14.3.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.
14-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

14 Optical Protection Unit

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 14-19. Table 14-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TI1/RO1 TO11/RI11 TO12/RI12 TI2/RO2 TO21/RI21 TO22/RI22 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

14.3.9 Specifications of the SCS

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 14-20 lists the optical specifications of the SCS. Table 14-20 Optical specifications of the SCS Interface TI1-TO11 TI1-TO21 TI2-TO21 TI2-TO22 RI11-RO1 RI12-RO1 RI21-RO2 RI22-RO2 Item Splitting insertion loss single mode multimode Unit dB dB Value 4 4.5

Coupling insertion loss

single mode multimode

dB dB

4 4.5

Operating wavelength

single mode multimode

nm nm

1310, 1550 850

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-29

14 Optical Protection Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface

Item single mode multimode

Unit nm nm

Value 40 (1310) 20 (1550) 20

Operating wavelength deviation

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 1.8 lb. (0.8 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W

14-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

15
About This Chapter
15.3 WMU WMU: wavelength monitored unit

Spectrum Analyzer Unit

15.1 MCA4 MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 15.2 MCA8 MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-1

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

15.1 MCA4
MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 15.1.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the MCA4 board is available, that is TN11. 15.1.2 Application The MCA4 is a type of spectrum analyzer unit. The MCA4 supports spectral analysis for four channels. 15.1.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the MCA4 are spectral analysis, detection and APE. 15.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MCA4 board consists of the 1x4 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 15.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the MCA4 front panel. 15.1.6 Valid Slots The MCA4 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MCA4 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. 15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4 The characteristic code for the MCA4 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. 15.1.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 15.1.9 Specifications of the MCA4 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

15.1.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the MCA4 board is available, that is TN11.

15.1.2 Application
The MCA4 is a type of spectrum analyzer unit. The MCA4 supports spectral analysis for four channels. For the position of the MCA4 in the WDM system, see Figure 15-1. Figure 15-1 Position of the MCA4 in the WDM system
OTU OTU
MCA4 MCA4

MUX

OAU

OAU

DMUX

OTU OTU OTU OTU

OTU OTU

DMUX

OAU

OAU

MUX

15-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

NOTE

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

The MCA4 is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at both the receive and transmit ends, you can configure MCA4 supervision at both ends.

15.1.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the MCA4 are spectral analysis, detection and APE. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-1. Table 15-1 Functions and features of the MCA4 Function and Feature Basic function Detection function Description Provides the spectral analysis for four channels. Supports the following detection functions and reports to the SCC.
l l l l

Optical power of the channel Central wavelength Optical signal-to-noise ratio Number of wavelengths in the main optical path

APE function

Realizes the APE function in cooperation with other boards. Detects the optical power of each channel.

15.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The MCA4 board consists of the 1x4 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-3

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 15-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4

R01 R02 R03 R04 14

Spectral analysis module

optical switch Control signal Driving signal Driving and control module Data signal

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The 1x4 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the T2000. The final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the T2000.

Module Function
l

1x4 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed four channels of optical signals for spectrum analysis.

Spectral analysis module Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of wavelengths.

Driving and control module

Drives and controls spectrum. Controls the 1x4 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Control and communication module

15-4

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

15.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the MCA4 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 15-3 shows the MCA4 front panel. Figure 15-3 MCA4 front panel

MCA4
STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

MCA4

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-5

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the MCA4 front panel.Table 15-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-2 Types and functions of the MCA4 interfaces Interface IN1-IN4 Type LC Function Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to four "MON" interfaces at the same time.

15.1.6 Valid Slots

The MCA4 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MCA4 are IU1-IU16 in the subrack. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if the MCA4 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the MCA4 displayed on the NM is IU1.

15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4

The characteristic code for the MCA4 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 15-3. Table 15-3 Characteristic code for the MCA4 Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.

15-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 is C, indicating C band.

15.1.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 15-4. Table 15-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1-IN4 Interface on the NM 1-4

Configuration Parameters
Optical Monitoring Monitor Interval (min.) Wavelength Monitor Status

15.1.9 Specifications of the MCA4

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 15-5 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4. Table 15-5 Optical specifications of the MCA4 Item Operating wavelength range Detect range for single channel optical power Detect accuracy for optical power Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.) Detect accuracy for central wavelength Numbers of optical interface Unit nm dBm dBm dB Value 1529-1561 -30 to -10 1.5 1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19) 2 (OSNR: 19 to 23) 0.1 4

nm pcs

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-7

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W)) Weight: 4.18 lb (1.9 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 16.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 17.6 W

15.2 MCA8
MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit 15.2.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the MCA8 board is available, that is TN11. 15.2.2 Application The MCA8 is a type of Spectrum Analyzer unit. The MCA8 supports spectral analysis for eight channels. 15.2.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the MCA8 are spectral analysis, detection and APE. 15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MCA8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 15.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the MCA8 front panel. 15.2.6 Valid Slots The MCA8 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MCA8 are IU1-IU16. 15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8 The characteristic code for the MCA8 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. 15.2.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 15.2.9 Specifications of the MCA8 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

15.2.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the MCA8 board is available, that is TN11.

15-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

15.2.2 Application
The MCA8 is a type of Spectrum Analyzer unit. The MCA8 supports spectral analysis for eight channels. For the position of the MCA8 in the WDM system, see Figure 15-4. Figure 15-4 Position of the MCA8 in the WDM system
OTU OTU
MCA8 MCA8

MUX

OAU

OAU

DMUX

OTU OTU OTU OTU

OTU OTU

DMUX

OAU

OAU

MUX

NOTE

The MCA8 is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at both the receive and transmit ends, you can configure MCA8 supervision at both ends.

15.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the MCA8 are spectral analysis, detection and APE. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-6. Table 15-6 Functions and features of the MCA8 Function and Feature Basic function Detection function Description Provides the spectral analysis for four channels. Supports the following detection functions and reports to the SCC.
l l l l

Optical power of the channel Central wavelength Optical signal-to-noise ratio Number of wavelengths in the main optical path

APE function

Realizes the APE function in cooperation with other boards. Detects the optical power of each channel.

15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The MCA8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-9

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 15-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8

R01 R02 R03 R04 R05 R06 R07 R08

18 optical switch Control signal

Spectral analysis module

Driving signal Driving and control module

Data signal

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the T2000. The final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the T2000.

Module Function
l

1x8 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals for spectrum analysis.

Spectral analysis module Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of wavelengths.

Driving and control module

Drives and controls spectrum. Controls the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Control and communication module

15-10

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

15.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the MCA8 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 15-6 shows the MCA8 front panel. Figure 15-6 MCA8 front panel

MCA8
STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8

MCA8

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-11

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the MCA8 front panel.Table 15-7 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-7 Types and functions of the MCA8 interfaces Interface IN1-IN8 Type LC Function Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to eight "MON" interfaces at the same time.

15.2.6 Valid Slots

The MCA8 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MCA8 are IU1-IU16. The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if the MCA8 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the MCA8 displayed on the NM is IU1.

15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8

The characteristic code for the MCA8 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 15-8. Table 15-8 Characteristic code for the MCA8 Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.

15-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 is C, indicating C band.

15.2.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 15-9. Table 15-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1-IN8 Interface on the NM 1-8

Configuration Parameters
Optical Monitoring Monitor Interval (min.) Wavelength Monitor Status

15.2.9 Specifications of the MCA8

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 15-10 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8. Table 15-10 Optical specifications of the MCA8 Item Operating wavelength range Detect range for single channel optical power Detect accuracy for optical power Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.) Detect accuracy for central wavelength Numbers of optical interface Unit nm dBm dBm dB Value 1529-1561 -30 to -10 1.5 1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19) 2 (OSNR: 19 to 23) 0.1 8

nm pcs

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-13

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W)) Weight: 4.18 lb (1.9 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 17.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 18.7 W

15.3 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitored unit 15.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the WMU board is available, that is TN11. 15.3.2 Application The WMU board realizes the wavelength monitoring in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing. 15.3.3 Functions and Features The WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing. 15.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WMU board consists of the 1x2 optical switch, optical wavelength and power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 15.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the WMU front panel. 15.3.6 Valid Slots The WMU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the WMU are IU1-IU17 in the subrack. 15.3.7 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 15.3.8 Specifications of the WMU Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

15.3.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the WMU board is available, that is TN11.

15.3.2 Application
The WMU board realizes the wavelength monitoring in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing. For the position of the WMU in the WDM system, seeFigure 15-7.
15-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

Figure 15-7 Position of the WMU in the WDM system

OSC DMUX OA DMUX FIU ITL WMU OA MUX DMUX OA ITL MUX MUX OA WMU FIU

MUX

DMUX

O O O T T T U U U

O T U

NOTE

One WMU board can realize the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions.Figure 15-7 shows the WMU in two places. Actually it refers to the same one WMU board.

15.3.3 Functions and Features

The WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-11. Table 15-11 Functions and features of the WMU Function and Feature Basic function Description The board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing; and performs centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU at the transmit end in a transmission system. In addition, the board can monitor the wavelengths in two different optical transmit directions. The optical switch is used to select the optical signals from the desired transmission direction to monitor.

Optical switch

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-15

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

15.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The WMU board consists of the 1x2 optical switch, optical wavelength and power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WMU. Figure 15-8 Functional block diagram of the WMU

IN1 IN2

1X2 optical switch Control signal

Optical wavelength and power detection module Driving signal Control Data signal

Memory

CPU

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The 1x2 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the optical wavelength and power detection module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, the wavelength and optical power information is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the results to the SCC board and the T2000. The final results are displayed on the T2000.

Module Function
l

1x2 optical switch Selects one channel of signals from the signals accessed through two optical interfaces for optical wavelength and power detection.

Optical wavelength and power detection module Detects each single-wavelength optical signals from the optical channel selection module, and reports the wavelength and optical power information to the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

15-16

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

15.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the WMU front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 15-9 shows the WMU front panel. Figure 15-9 WMU front panel

WMU
STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN1 IN2

WMU

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-17

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the WMU front panel.Table 15-12 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-12 Types and functions of the WMU interfaces Interface IN1/IN2 Type LC Function Connects to the MON optical interface on the optical amplifier boards in two different transmit directions, respectively, for centralized wavelength monitoring.

15.3.6 Valid Slots

The WMU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the WMU are IU1-IU17 in the subrack.

15.3.7 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 15-13. Table 15-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1 IN2 Interface on the NM 1 2

15.3.8 Specifications of the WMU

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
15-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

Optical Specifications
Table 15-14 Optical specifications of the WMU Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing Unit nm Value 1529-1561 Supports the monitoring to system wavelengths with spacing of 50 GHz. -36 to -16 <2.5 <2 -10 to 10

Per-channel input optical power range Detect accuracy for central wavelength Detect accuracy for single channel optical power Detect range for Central wavelength offset

dBm GHz dB nm

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.25 lb (1.02kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 12W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 15W

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-19

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

16

Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

About This Chapter

16.1 VA1 VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit 16.2 VA4 VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-1

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

16.1 VA1
VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit 16.1.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the VA1 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality. 16.1.2 Application The VA1 is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VA1 realizes the power adjustment for one signal. 16.1.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the VA1 are optical power adjustment, alarm monitoring and power-off protection. 16.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The VA1 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 16.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VA1 front panel. 16.1.6 Valid Slots The VA1 occupies one slot in a subrack. The valid slots for the VA1 are IU1-IU17. 16.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1 The characteristic code for the VA1 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. 16.1.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 16.1.9 Specifications of the VA1 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

16.1.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the VA1 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality. Table 16-1 lists the version description of the VA1. Table 16-1 Version description of the VA1 Item Functional version Similarity Difference
16-2

Description Two functional versions of the VA1 board are available: TN11 and TN12. The TN12VA1 works in the same way as the TN11VA1. None
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

Item Replacement

Description The TN11VA1 and TN12VA1 boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11VA1 is replaced with the TN12VA1, the SCC software need be upgraded.

16.1.2 Application
The VA1 is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VA1 realizes the power adjustment for one signal. For the position of the VA1 in the WDM system, see Figure 16-1. Figure 16-1 Position of the VA1 in the WDM system
OTU OTU VA1 VA1 VA1 OA MR2 OA VA1 MR2 OA VA1 OTU OTU VA1 VA1 VA1 OA

16.1.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the VA1 are optical power adjustment, alarm monitoring and power-off protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 16-2. Table 16-2 Functions and features of the VA1 Function and Feature Basic function Alarm monitoring Power-off protection Description Adjusts the optical power of one optical signal according to the control command sent by the SCC. Detects the input optical power, attenuation and reports various alarms to the SCC. Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages caused by too high optical power to the corresponding optical receiver when the power supply recovers. When there is no power supplied to the VA1, the attenuation of the VA1 changes to its maximum value automatically. Shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA1 still remains its maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set last time.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16-3

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Function and Feature Attenuation range

Description The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB.

16.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The VA1 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 16-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA1. Figure 16-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1

IN

Variable optical attenuator

OUT

Driving and control module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC board, the VA1 board adjusts the power of input signals by using a variable optical attenuator.

Module Function
l

Variable optical attenuator Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals. Driving and control module

Detects the input and output optical power of the VA1 board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

16-4

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to the control and communication module. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

16.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VA1 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 16-3 shows the VA1 front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-5

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 16-3 VA1 front panel

VA1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

OUT IN

VA1

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the VA1 front panel. Table 16-3 lists the type and function of each interface.

16-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

Table 16-3 Types and functions of the VA1 interfaces Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Receives the optical signals to be adjusted. Transmits the adjusted optical signals.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

16.1.6 Valid Slots

The VA1 occupies one slot in a subrack. The valid slots for the VA1 are IU1-IU17.

16.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1

The characteristic code for the VA1 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 16-4. Table 16-4 Characteristic code for the VA1 Code The first to the third digits Meaning Attenuation value Description Indicate the maximum attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.

16.1.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 16-5. Table 16-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-7

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

NOTE

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB) Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB) Path Use Status

16.1.9 Specifications of the VA1

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 16-6 lists the optical specifications of the VA1. Table 16-6 Optical specifications of the VA1 Item Unit Value TN11VA1 IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracy dB dB dB 1.5 0-20 1 TN12VA1 1.5 0-20 1(attenuation10dB) 1.3(attenuation15dB) 1.8(attenuation>15dB) WDL dB 0.5 1.0 (attenuation 15dB) 1.5 (attenuation 20dB) PDL dB 0.5 0.7 (attenuation 15dB) 1.0 (attenuation 20dB) PMD ps 0.2 0.2

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T))
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

16-8

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l l

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 6.5 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 7.2 W

16.2 VA4
VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit 16.2.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the VA4 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality. 16.2.2 Application The VA4 is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VA4 realizes the power adjustment for four optical signals. 16.2.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the VA4 are optical power adjustment, alarm monitoring, and power-off protection. 16.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The VA4 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 16.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VA4 front panel. 16.2.6 Valid Slots The VA4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the VA4 are IU1-IU17. 16.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4 The characteristic code for the VA4 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. 16.2.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 16.2.9 Specifications of the VA4 Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

16.2.1 Version Description

Two functional versions of the VA4 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality. Table 16-7 lists the version description of the VA4.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-9

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 16-7 Version description of the VA4 Item Functional version Similarity Difference Replacement Description Two functional versions of the VA4 board are available: TN11 and TN12. The TN12VA4 works in the same way as the TN11VA4. None The TN11VA4 and TN12VA4 boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11VA4 board is replacement with the TN12VA4 board, the SCC software need be upgraded.

16.2.2 Application
The VA4 is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VA4 realizes the power adjustment for four optical signals. For the position of the VA4 in the WDM system, see Figure 16-4. Figure 16-4 Position of the VA4 in the WDM system
OTU OTU VA4 VA4 OA MR2 OA VA4 VA4 MR2 OA VA4 OTU OTU VA4 VA4 OA

16.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the VA4 are optical power adjustment, alarm monitoring, and power-off protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 16-8. Table 16-8 Functions and features of the VA4 Function and Feature Basic function Alarm monitoring Description Adjusts the optical power of four optical signals respectively according to the control command sent by the SCC. Detects attenuation and reports various alarms to the SCC.

16-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

Function and Feature Power-off protection

Description Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages caused by too high optical power to the corresponding optical receiver when the power supply recovers. When there is no power supplied to the VA4, the attenuation of the VA4 changes to its maximum value automatically. Shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA4 still remains its maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set last time.

Attenuation range

The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB.

16.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The VA4 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 16-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA4. Figure 16-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Variable optical attenuator Variable optical attenuator Variable optical attenuator Variable optical attenuator

OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

Driving and control module

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-11

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC board, the VA4 board adjusts the power of four channels of optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.

Module Function
l

Variable optical attenuator Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals. Driving and control module

Detects the input and output optical power of the VA4 board. Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to the control and communication module. Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Control and communication module

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

16.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VA4 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 16-6 shows the VA4 front panel.

16-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

Figure 16-6 VA4 front panel

VA4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

OUT IN OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4

VA4

Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the VA4 front panel. Table 16-9 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-13

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table 16-9 Types and functions of the VA4 interfaces Interface IN1-IN4 OUT1-OUT4 Type LC LC Function Receives the optical signals to be adjusted. Transmits the adjusted optical signals.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

16.2.6 Valid Slots

The VA4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the VA4 are IU1-IU17.

16.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4

The characteristic code for the VA4 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 16-10. Table 16-10 Characteristic code for the VA4 Code The first to the third digits Meaning Attenuation value Description Indicate the maximum attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.

16.2.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 16-11. Table 16-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2
16-14

Interface on the NM 1 2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

Interface on the Panel IN3/OUT3 IN4/OUT4

Interface on the NM 3 4

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration Parameters
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB) Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB) Path Use Status

16.2.9 Specifications of the VA4

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 16-12 lists the optical specifications of the VA4. Table 16-12 Optical specifications of the VA4 Item Unit Value TN11VA4 IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracy dB dB 1.5 0-20 TN12VA4 1.5 0-20

dB

1(attenuation10dB) 1.3(attenuation15dB) 1.8(attenuation>15dB)

WDL

dB

0.5

1.0 (attenuation15dB) 1.5 (attenuation20dB)

PDL

dB

0.5

0.7 (attenuation15dB) 1.0 (attenuation20dB)

PMD

ps

0.2

0.2

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-15

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 8.5 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 9.4 W

16-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

17
About This Chapter

Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

17.1 DCU DCU: dispersion compensation unit 17.2 GFU GFU: gain flatness unit

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-1

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

17.1 DCU
DCU: dispersion compensation unit 17.1.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the DCU board is available, that is TN11. 17.1.2 Application The DCU board is a kind of dispersion compensation board, compensating for the dispersion which is accumulated in an optical transmission system. It is used at the transmit end and the receive end in the transmission system. 17.1.3 Functions and Features The DCU board compensates for the dispersion which is accumulated in the fiber during transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical signals transmitted can be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board, the DCU board can realize long haul optical transmission. 17.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DCU board consists of the dispersion compensation module, control and communication module, and power supply module. 17.1.5 Front Panel There are interfaces and laser safety label on the DCU front panel. 17.1.6 Valid Slots The DCU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DCU are IU1-IU17. 17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU The characteristic code for the DCU board consists of characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. 17.1.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 17.1.9 Specifications of the DCU Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

17.1.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the DCU board is available, that is TN11.

17.1.2 Application
The DCU board is a kind of dispersion compensation board, compensating for the dispersion which is accumulated in an optical transmission system. It is used at the transmit end and the receive end in the transmission system. For the position of the DCU in the WDM system, see Figure 17-1.

17-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

Figure 17-1 Position of the DCU in the WDM system

DCU OTU OTU OTU OTU DCU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU MUX DMUX OTU OTU OTU OTU

OBU

OAU

DMUX

OAU

OBU

MUX

MUX

DCU

OBU

OAU

DMUX

DMUX

OAU

OBU

DCU

MUX

17.1.3 Functions and Features

The DCU board compensates for the dispersion which is accumulated in the fiber during transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical signals transmitted can be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board, the DCU board can realize long haul optical transmission. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-1. Table 17-1 Functions and features of the DCU Function and Feature Basic function Dispersion compensation method Long haul transmission with optical regeneration Description Provides dispersion compensation for different transmission distance. Compensates for the dispersion accumulated in an optical transmission system, and compresses the optical signal pulse. In this way the optical signals transmitted can be restored at the output end. Realizes long haul transmission when used together with an optical amplifier board.

17.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The DCU board consists of the dispersion compensation module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCU.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17-3

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 17-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU

IN

Dispersion compensation EDFA optical module module Control Memory CPU Communication

OUT

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

Backplane (Controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow
The dispersion compensation module (DCM) performs the dispersion compensation with the main path optical signals received through the IN optical interface. Then, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function
l

The dispersion compensation module After the optical signal is transmitted for a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is widened because of the positive dispersion accumulated in the system. In this case, the system transmission performance is severely affected. The DCM employs the negative dispersion borne with the dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) to offset the positive dispersion in the transmission fiber, and compresses the input optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical signals at the output end are restored back to the original signals.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

17.1.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces and laser safety label on the DCU front panel.
17-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 17-3 shows the DCU front panel. Figure 17-3 DCU front panel

DCU

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

OUT IN

DCU

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the DCU front panel.Table 17-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-2 Types and functions of the DCU interfaces Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Accesses the multiplexed signals to be compensated in terms of dispersion. Outputs the multiplexed signals that have been compensated in terms of dispersion.
17-5

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

17.1.6 Valid Slots

The DCU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DCU are IU1-IU17.

17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU

The characteristic code for the DCU board consists of characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 17-3. Table 17-3 Characteristic code for the DCU Code The character before hyphen (-) The character after hyphen (-) Meaning Fiber type Dispersion compensation distance Description Type of the fiber that the DCU board works with The transmission distance achieved through dispersion compensation

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km.
NOTE

If the characteristic code contains varieties of the dispersion compensation distance, the symbol "&" is used to separate each distance variety.

17.1.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-4. Table 17-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

17-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

17.1.9 Specifications of the DCU

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 17-5 Optical specifications of the DCU Item Unit Value DC U0 1 Typical dispersion compensation distance Maximum insertion loss Dispersion compensation slope Polarization mode dispersion Polarization dependent loss Maximum input power Operating wavelength range Dispersion compensating fiber type km dB ps dB dBm nm 20 3.3 DC U0 2 40 4.7 DC U0 3 60 6.4 DC U0 4 80 8 DC U0 5 100 9 DC U06 120 9.8 D CU 07 5 2.3 DCU0 8 10 2.6

90%-110% 0.4 0.1 20 0.5 0.1 20 0.6 0.1 20 0.7 0.1 20 0.8 0.1 20 0.8 0.1 20 0.3 0.1 20 0.3 0.1 20

1525-1565 G.652 fiber

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.5W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.5W

17.2 GFU
GFU: gain flatness unit

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-7

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

17.2.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the GFU board is available, that is TN11. 17.2.2 Application The GFU is a kind of optical power and dispersion slope equalizing unit. It is used to equalize optical power by working with the ROP board in the remote optical pumping amplifier subsystem. 17.2.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the GFU are optical power equalization and software loading in-service. 17.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The GFU unit consists of four parts: the optical module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. 17.2.5 Front Panel There are interfaces and laser safety label on the GFU front panel. 17.2.6 Valid Slots The GFU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the GFU are IU1-IU17. 17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the GFU The characteristic code for the GFU consists of two characters and two digits, indicating the gradient of optical signals processed by the board. 17.2.8 NM Configuration Reference NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000. 17.2.9 Specifications of the GFU Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

17.2.1 Version Description

Only one functional version of the GFU board is available, that is TN11.

17.2.2 Application
The GFU is a kind of optical power and dispersion slope equalizing unit. It is used to equalize optical power by working with the ROP board in the remote optical pumping amplifier subsystem. For the position of the board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-4. Figure 17-4 Position of the GFU in the WDM system
DCM
OTU OTU OTU OTU

D 4 0 M 4 0 V

OAU

GFU

CRPC

ROP

RGU

HBA

M 4 0 V D 4 0

OTU OTU OTU OTU

HBA

RGU

ROP

CRPC

GFU

OAU DCM

OTM

OTM

17-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

NOTE

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

For details of the ROP board, refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide.

17.2.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the GFU are optical power equalization and software loading in-service. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-6. Table 17-6 Functions and features of the GFU Function and Feature Basic function Description Equalizes the optical power of the ROP board in the ROPA (remote optical pumping amplifier) subsystem and offers static compensation for the gain flatness of the system. Queries board ambient temperature, detailed board information, board software version and optical component type. Supports online loading of board software.

Information query Software loading inservice

17.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The GFU unit consists of four parts: the optical module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 17-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the GFU. Figure 17-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the GFU
Optical module IN GFF module OUT

Control Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplne

Backplane (Controlled by SCC) SCC

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-9

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC board, the GFU board provides the fixed optical power equilibrium function by using the gain flattening filter (GFF) module.

Module Function
l

Optical module Adopts the GFF module. Provides static compensation for the gain unflatness after cascaded amplifiers.

Control and communication module

Controls the operations on the board. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

17.2.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces and laser safety label on the GFU front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 17-6 shows the GFU front panel.

17-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

Figure 17-6 GFU front panel

GFU
STAT
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

IN OUT

GFU

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - dual-colored (red, green)

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the GFU front panel. Table 17-7 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-7 Types and functions of the GFU interfaces Interface IN
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Connector Type LC

Description Receives optical signals to be gain flattened.

17-11

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Interface OUT

Connector Type LC

Description Sends optical signals after gain flattening.

Laser Safety Level

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M (The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW)).

17.2.6 Valid Slots

The GFU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the GFU are IU1-IU17.

17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the GFU

The characteristic code for the GFU consists of two characters and two digits, indicating the gradient of optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 17-8. Table 17-8 Characteristic code for the GFU Code The first and second characters The third and fourth digits Meaning Gradient Description The first and second characters are always GF. Indicate the gradient of optical signals.

For example, the characteristic code for the GFU is GF10. This code indicates that the gradient of optical signals processed by the board is 10.

17.2.8 NM Configuration Reference

NM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-9. Table 17-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the GFU displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1

17-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

NOTE

17 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit

The number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

17.2.9 Specifications of the GFU

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications
Table 17-10 Optical specifications of the GFU Item Operating wavelength range Channel insertion loss Polarization dependent loss Unit nm dB dB Value 1529-1561 0.5-6.0 0.5

Mechanical Specifications
l

Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) (9.6 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 0.1 in. (T)) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) (10.4 in. (H) x 1.0 in. (W)) Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)

l l

Power Consumption
l l

The maximum power consumption at 25 (77): 0.2 W The maximum power consumption at 55 (131): 0.3 W

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-13

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

18 Cables

18
About This Chapter

Cables

18.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables The OptiX OSN 6800 has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables. 18.2 Optical Fibers Optical fibers of the OptiX OSN 6800 can be classified into three types: LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/ PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-SC/PC. 18.3 Grounding Cables OptiX OSN 6800 has grounding cables, including cabinet door grounding cables and a PDU grounding cable. 18.4 Alarm Cables Alarm cables of the OptiX OSN 6800 include cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/ inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable. 18.5 Management Cables Management cables of the OptiX OSN 6800 include the OAM serial port cable.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-1

18 Cables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

18.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables

The OptiX OSN 6800 has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables. 18.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables The -48 V, BGND, and PGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet. One end of the power cable is connected to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room. The other end is connected to the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top. 18.1.2 Subrack Power Cables The subrack power cables connect the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top and the power interface in the subrack interface area, which lead the -48 V power supply from the top of the cabinet to the subracks. The subrack power cables have been correctly connected before delivery.

18.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables

The -48 V, BGND, and PGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet. One end of the power cable is connected to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room. The other end is connected to the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top.

Structure
Figure 18-1 shows the structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND grounding cable.Figure 18-2 shows the structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable. Figure 18-1 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable
1 2

1. Cord end terminal

2. OT naked crimping connector

3. Cable clip

18-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

18 Cables

Figure 18-2 Structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable

3 2 4 6

1. OT naked crimping connector 4. Heat shrink tube

2. Cable clip 5. Heat shrink tube

3. JG two-hole naked crimping connector 6. Cable

Pin Assignment
None

Technical Parameters
Table 18-1 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(16 mm2) Item Cabinet -48 V power cable Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of the cable Cabinet BGND grounding cable Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of the cable Description Cord end terminal-16 mm2-0.024mm-80AInsertion depth 16mm-Green OT naked crimping connector-16 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-227 IEC 02(RV)-16mm2-Blue-85 A Cord end terminal-16 mm2-0.024mm-80AInsertion depth 16mm-Green OT naked crimping connector-16 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-227 IEC 02(RV)-16mm2-Black-85 A

Table 18-2 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(25 mm2) Item Cabinet -48 V power cable
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Description Connector 1 Cord end terminal-25 mm2-30 mm-75 AInsertion depth 16 mm-Brown
18-3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18 Cables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Connector 2 Type of the cable Cabinet BGND grounding cable Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of the cable

Description OT naked crimping connector-25 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm2Blue-110 A Cord end terminal-25 mm2-30 mm-75AInsertion depth 16 mm-Brown Naked crimping connector-OT type-25 mm2M8 Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm2Black-110 A

Table 18-3 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (35 mm2) Item Cabinet -48 V power cable Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of the cable Cabinet BGND grounding cable Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of the cable Description Cord end terminal-35mm2-0.03m-105AInsertion depth 16mm-Cream-colored OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-750V/450V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-35mm2-Blue-135 A Cord end terminal-35mm2-0.03m-105AInsertion depth 16mm-Cream-colored OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-750V/450V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-35mm2-Black-135 A

Table 18-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables Item Cabinet PGND grounding cable Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of the cable Description OT naked crimping connector-25 mm2-M8 JG dual-hole naked crimping connector-25 mm2-M6-150 A-Tin plating Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm2Yellow and green-110 A

18-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

18 Cables

18.1.2 Subrack Power Cables

The subrack power cables connect the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top and the power interface in the subrack interface area, which lead the -48 V power supply from the top of the cabinet to the subracks. The subrack power cables have been correctly connected before delivery.

Structure
Figure 18-3 shows the subrack power cable. Figure 18-3 Structure of the subrack power cable
1 A A3 A2 A1 A X1 W1 W2 X3 X2 2 3

500

1. Cable connector

2. Cable clip

3. Naked crimping connector

Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of subrack power cables, refer to Table 18-5. Table 18-5 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables Cable W2 W1 Cable Connector X1.A1 X1.A3 Cord End Terminal X2 X3 Connection A1 connects to X2. A3 connects to X3. Core Color Blue (-48 V power) Black (power ground)

Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of subrack power cables are listed in Table 18-6. Table 18-6 Technical parameters of subrack power cables Item Cable connector X1 Description Cable connector-D type-3PIN-Female-Solder injection molding type-No middle contact
18-5

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18 Cables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Cord end terminals X2, X3 Type of the cable W2 Type of the cable W1

Description Common terminal-Conductor Cross Section-6 mm2Length 20 mm-30 A-Insertion depth 12 mm-Black Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2-Blue-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2-Black-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable

18.2 Optical Fibers

Optical fibers of the OptiX OSN 6800 can be classified into three types: LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/ PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-SC/PC. 18.2.1 Classification The connectors and the length of the fibers are selected based on the results of site survey. 18.2.2 Connectors All optical interfaces on the front panel of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards are of LC/PC type. LC/ PC fiber connectors are used with these board. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the equipment room are generally of FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors are used with them.

18.2.1 Classification
The connectors and the length of the fibers are selected based on the results of site survey. The optical fibers used by the equipment are classified as shown in Table 18-7. Table 18-7 Classification of optical fiber jumpers Types of the Connectors at Both Ends LC/PCLC/PC Type of the Cable 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) single-mode fiber 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) multimode fiber LC/PCFC/PC 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) single-mode fiber 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) multimode fiber LC/PCSC/PC 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) single-mode fiber 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) multimode fiber LSH/APCSC/APC 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) single-mode fiber 2.0 mm (0.1 in.) multimode fiber

18-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

18 Cables

18.2.2 Connectors
All optical interfaces on the front panel of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards are of LC/PC type. LC/ PC fiber connectors are used with these board. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the equipment room are generally of FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors are used with them. The classification of fiber connectors is given in Table 18-8. Table 18-8 Classification of fiber connectors Type of Fiber Connectors LC/PC FC/PC SC/PC LSH/APC Description Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished Round fiber connector/protruding polished Square fiber connector/protruding polished Fiber connector with auto-protective dustproof cap/ eight-degree radian surface/protruding polished

The appearances of the fiber connectors are shown in Figure 18-4, Figure 18-5, Figure 18-6 and Figure 18-7. Figure 18-4 LC/PC fiber connector

LC/PC connector Protective cap

Figure 18-5 FC/PC fiber connector

Protective cap

FC/PC connector

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-7

18 Cables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 18-6 SC/PC fiber connector

Protective cap

SC/PC connector

Figure 18-7 LSH/APC fiber connector

18.3 Grounding Cables

OptiX OSN 6800 has grounding cables, including cabinet door grounding cables and a PDU grounding cable. 18.3.1 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables The cabinet door grounding cables ground the front door, rear door and side doors. The cabinet door grounding cables have been correctly connected before delivery. 18.3.2 PDU Grounding Cable One end of the PDU grounding cable is connected to a protection grounding screw of the power distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection grounding screw on the top of the cabinet. The PDU grounding cable has been correctly connected before delivery.

18.3.1 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables

The cabinet door grounding cables ground the front door, rear door and side doors. The cabinet door grounding cables have been correctly connected before delivery.

Structure
Figure 18-8 shows the structure of the cabinet door grounding cables.
18-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

18 Cables

Figure 18-8 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable

1

X1 L

X2

1. OT naked crimping connector

Pin Assignment
None

Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the cabinet door grounding cables are listed in Table 18-9. Table 18-9 Technical parameters of the cabinet door grounding cables Item Connector X1/X2 Type of the cable Description Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm2 (0.01 in.2)-M6-Tin platingInsulated ring terminal-12-10AWG Electric power cable-600V-UL1015-0 mm2-10AWG-Yellow/ Green-50 A-105 core strand

18.3.2 PDU Grounding Cable

One end of the PDU grounding cable is connected to a protection grounding screw of the power distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection grounding screw on the top of the cabinet. The PDU grounding cable has been correctly connected before delivery.

Structure
Figure 18-9 shows the structure of the PDU grounding cable.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-9

18 Cables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 18-9 Structure of the PDU grounding cable

1 2

X1

X2

1. OT naked crimping connector

2. Heat-shrink tube

Pin Assignment
None

Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the PDU grounding cable are listed in Table 18-10. Table 18-10 Technical parameters of the PDU grounding cable Item Connector X1/X2 Type of the cable Description Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6 Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02 (RV)-10 mm2 (0.02 in.2)-Yellow/Green-62 A

18.4 Alarm Cables

Alarm cables of the OptiX OSN 6800 include cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/ inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable. 18.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable The cabinet indicator cable is used to cascade the signals of the indicators at different subracks in the same cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of one subrack. The other end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of another subrack. 18.4.2 Alarm Interface Cable The alarm interface cable between cabinets is connected to the ALMI interface in the EFI board area of the subrack to achieve the input of alarm signals. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm outputs. By default, critical, major, and minor alarms use the first three alarm outputs. The other five are reserved. The output alarm signals can be concatenated. 18.4.3 Alarm Concatenating/Inter-Subrack Concatenating Cable The inter-subrack indicator/alarm concatenating cable is used to concatenate alarm signals of the different subracks in one cabinet. Both ends of the cable use the RJ-45 connector. Each end is connected to ALMO interface of the EFI in a different subrack.
18-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

18 Cables

18.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to cascade the signals of the indicators at different subracks in the same cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of one subrack. The other end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of another subrack.

Structure
The structure of the cable indicator alarm cable is displayed in Figure 18-10. Figure 18-10 Structure of the cabinet indicator alarm cable
1 View A 8 1 3 2 X2 X3 X1 A X4 X5 B 4 View B 1 2

1. Network interface connector

2. Heat-shrink tube

3. Common plug

4. Ordinary connector

Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable, refer to Table 18-11. Table 18-11 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable Connector X1 X1.4 X1.5 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 Connectors X2, X3, X4, X5 X2.2 X2.1 X3.2 X3.1 X4.2 X4.1 X5.2 X5.1 Color White Green White Blue White Brown White Orange Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-11

18 Cables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable are listed in Table 18-12. Table 18-12 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable Item Connector X1 Description Network interface connector-8PIN-single row-single port-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector Common plug-2PIN-single row/2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Twisted pair cable -100SEYPVPV-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairs-black 8 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

Connector X2/X3/X4/X5 Type of the cable

Number of cores Core diameter

18.4.2 Alarm Interface Cable

The alarm interface cable between cabinets is connected to the ALMI interface in the EFI board area of the subrack to achieve the input of alarm signals. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm outputs. By default, critical, major, and minor alarms use the first three alarm outputs. The other five are reserved. The output alarm signals can be concatenated.

Structure
Figure 18-11 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable. Figure 18-11 Alarm interface cable
1 View A 8 6 3 1

X1 L
1. Network interface connector

X2

Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm interface cable, refer to Table 18-13.
18-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

18 Cables

Table 18-13 Pin assignment of X1 Connector X1 X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7 Color Orange White-orange Green White-green Blue White-blue Brown White-brown Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair

Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the alarm interface cable are listed in Table 18-14. Table 18-14 Technical parameters of the alarm interface cable Item Connector X1 Description Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitunshielded-RJ-45 connector-uniconductor flat cable Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100UTPCAT5E-0.5 mm (0.02 in.)-24AWG-4 pairs-PANTONE 430U-low-smoke and halogen-free cable 8 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

Type of the cable W1

Number of cores Core diameter

18.4.3 Alarm Concatenating/Inter-Subrack Concatenating Cable

The inter-subrack indicator/alarm concatenating cable is used to concatenate alarm signals of the different subracks in one cabinet. Both ends of the cable use the RJ-45 connector. Each end is connected to ALMO interface of the EFI in a different subrack.

Structure
Figure 18-12 shows the structure of the cable.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18-13

18 Cables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Figure 18-12 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable

8 1 1 8 1

X1
1. Network interface connector-RJ-45

X2

Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 18-15. Table 18-15 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable Connector X1 X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7 Color Orange White-orange Green White-green Blue White-blue Brown White-brown Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair

Technical Parameters
For the technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 18-16. Table 18-16 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable Item Connector X1/X2 Description Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitcrystal model connector

18-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

18 Cables

Item Type of the cable Number of cores Core diameter

Description Communication cable-8 cores category-5 twisted pair-24AWG 8 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

18.5 Management Cables

Management cables of the OptiX OSN 6800 include the OAM serial port cable. 18.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable The OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface.

18.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable

The OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface.

Structure
Figure 18-13 shows the structure of the OAM serial port cable. Figure 18-13 Structure of the OAM serial port cable

1. DB9 connector

Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable, refer to Table 18-17. Table 18-17 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port Connector X1 X1.1 X1.5 X1.2
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Connector X2 X2.1 X2.5 X2.2

Relationship Pair

Pair
18-15

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18 Cables

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Connector X1 X1.3 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X1.9

Connector X2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 X2.9

Relationship

Pair

Pair

Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable are listed in Table 18-18. Table 18-18 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable Item Connector X1, X2 Type Description Cable connector-D type-9 PIN-Male-Cable welding type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable-100ohmSEYVP-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairsBlack 4 pairs 10.0m (0.4 in.), 20.0m (0.8 in.)

Number of cores Length

18-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

A Indicators

A
A.4 Fan Indicator There is one indicator on the FAN to indicate the status. A.5 PIU Indicator There is one indicator on the PIU to indicate the status.

Indicators

A.1 Cabinet Indicators There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and yellow. A.2 Subrack Indicator There are altogether four indicators in different colors of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800: red, orange, yellow and green. A.3 Board Indicators There are indicators on the front panel to indicate the status of running and alarm.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-1

A Indicators

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

A.1 Cabinet Indicators

There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and yellow. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-1. Table A-1 Indicators description of the cabinet Indicator power Name Power indicator Status On (green) Off critical Critical alarm indicator Major alarm indicator Minor alarm indicator On (red) Off On (Orange) Off On (Yellow) Off Description The cabinet is powered on. The cabinet is not powered on. There is a critical alarm. There is no critical alarm. There is a major alarm. There is no major alarm. There is a minor alarm. There is no minor alarm.

major

minor

A.2 Subrack Indicator

There are altogether four indicators in different colors of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800: red, orange, yellow and green. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-2. Table A-2 Indicators description of the subrack Indicator PWR Name Power indicator Status On (Green) Off CRI Critical alarm indicator Major alarm indicator On (Red) Off On (Orange) Off Description The subrack works normally. The subrack does not work. There is a critical alarm. There is no critical alarm. There is a major alarm. There is no major alarm.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

MAJ

A-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

A Indicators

Indicator MIN

Name Minor alarm indicator

Status On (Yellow) Off

Description There is a minor alarm. There is no minor alarm.

A.3 Board Indicators

There are indicators on the front panel to indicate the status of running and alarm. The corresponding messages of board indicators are listed inTable A-3 and Table A-4. Table A-3 Indicator description of the boards Indicator STAT Name Board Hardware Indicator Status On (green) On (red) Description The board works normally. The board hardware fails or the optical module of the board is not inserted. The board is not powered on. Memory check failed/ loading unit software failed/the FPGA file is lost/the unit software is lost. 100ms on and 100ms off BOOTROM check failed. Blinking quickly (green) Blinking slowly (green) 100ms on and 100ms off Writing FLASH. 300ms on and 300ms off BIOS booting/loading FPGA/loading unit software. The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully. Service is normal, no service alarm occurs.

Off PROG Board Software Indicator On (red)

Blinking (red)

On (green)

SRV

Service Alarm Indicator

On (green)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-3

A Indicators

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Indicator

Name

Status On (red) On (yellow) Off

Description Critical or major alarm occurs to service. Minor or remote alarm occurs to service. No service is configured. The board is in working mode. The board is in the active mode.

ACT

Service Activation Indicator

On (green)

Off

The board is not in working mode. The board is in the standby mode.

Blinking quickly (green)

100ms on and 100ms off Backing up the system database in patches.

Table A-4 Indicator description of the SCC board Indicator STAT Name Board Hardware Indicator Status On (green) On (red) Off PROG Board Software Indicator On (red) Description The board works normally. The board hardware fails. The board is not powered on. Memory check failed/ loading unit software failed/the FPGA file is lost/the unit software is lost. 100ms on and 100ms off BOOTROM check failed. Blinking quickly (green) Blinking slowly (green) 100ms on and 100ms off Writing FLASH. 300ms on and 300ms off BIOS booting/loading FPGA/loading unit software.

Blinking (red)

A-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

A Indicators

Indicator

Name

Status On (green)

Description The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully. Service is normal, no service alarm occurs. Critical or major alarm occurs to service. Minor or remote alarm occurs to service. No service is configured. The board is in working mode. The board is in the active mode.

SRV

Service Alarm Indicator

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

ACT

Service Activation Indicator

On (green)

Off

The board is not in working mode. The board is in the standby mode.

Blinking quickly (green)

100ms on and 100ms off Backing up the system database in patches. The -48 V power supply A is normal. The -48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed). No power supply inputs. The -48 V power supply B is normal. The -48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed). No power supply inputs. The +3.3 V protection power is normal. The +3.3 V protection power is lost.

PWRA

Indicator for system power supply

On (green) On (red) Off

PWRB

Indicator for system power supply

On (green) On (red) Off

PWRC

Indicator for protection power supply

On (green) On (red)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-5

A Indicators

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Indicator ALMC

Name Alarm cut indicator

Status On (yellow) Off

Description Currently in permanent alarm cut-off status. Give sound warning upon alarm.

A.4 Fan Indicator

There is one indicator on the FAN to indicate the status. The corresponding messages of Fan indicator are listed in Table A-5. Table A-5 Indicator description of the FAN Indicator STAT Name Fan indicator Status On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off Description The fan is normal The major alarm exists; two or more fans are faulty. The minor alarm exists; one fan is faulty. The fan is not powered on, or is absent, or the software is not loaded.

A.5 PIU Indicator

There is one indicator on the PIU to indicate the status. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-6. Table A-6 Indicators description of the PIU Indicator RUN Name Running status indicator Status On (green) Off Description Indicates that the power is accessed normally. Indicates that the power is not accessed.

A-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

Bar Code for Boards

There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code. B.1 Overview There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs. B.3 Characteristic Code for Line Unit The characteristic code for line unit indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the DWDM optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules. B.4 Characteristic Code for FOADMs The characteristic code for FOADMs indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. B.5 Characteristic Code for MCAs The characteristic code for MCAs indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. B.6 Characteristic Code for OAUs The characteristic code for OAUs indicates the gain, gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board. B.7 Characteristic Code for Optical MUX/DMUX Units The characteristic code for optical MUX/DMUX units indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board, whether the wavelengths that bear the signals are odd or even wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. B.8 Characteristic Code for Protection Units The characteristic code for optical protection boards indicates the maximum protection switching time. B.9 Characteristic Code for VOAs
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-1

B Bar Code for Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The characteristic code for VOAs indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. B.10 Characteristic Code for PDE Units The characteristic code for PDE units indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with, the dispersion compensation distance and the gradient of optical signals.

B-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

B.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. The information of a bar code includes can be queried on the T2000, for details refer to Supporting Tasks.
NOTE

Such information as frequency of signals queried on the T2000 is a commissioning value, different from that on the bar code.

Figure B-1 and Figure B-2 show a bar code. Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)
Delivery information Board version (TN11) Board model number

2102313242 1059000003 Y TN1M1L4G 01 19210PA

BOM Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly) Board name Characteristic code

Figure B-2 Description of the bar code (example 2)

Delivery information Board version Board model number

030FBQ1073000001 N TN11MR4 01 -94509520

Last four numbers of the BOM Environmental friendliness flag (N: Environmentally unfriendly) Board name Characteristic code

B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs

The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs. B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-3

B Bar Code for Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

The characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU. B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU. B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs The characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and type of the optical module in the OTU.

B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs

The characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information of the characteristic code is listed in Table B-1. Table B-1 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU Code The first five digit Meaning The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module The type of the DWDM-side receiving optical module The type of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module Description Indicate the frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module. The value can be A or P. A represents APD. P represents PIN. The detailed meaning of the character is shown in Table B-2.

The sixth character

The seventh character

NOTE

In the case of the OTU boards with dual fed optical interfaces, such as the LDGD, LQMD, LWXD and LWX2 boards, the characteristic code consists of eight digits. The frequency values of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side are indicated.

The types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules are listed in Table B-2. Table B-2 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules Character A Dispersion (1550 nm) 1600ps/nm 3200ps/nm 800ps/nm 3200ps/nm
B-4

Distance 80km 170km 40km 160km

Rate 2.5G 2.5G 10.66G 2.5G

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

Character B

Dispersion (1550 nm) 1500ps/nm 1600ps/nm 3200ps/nm

Distance 80km 80km 170km 40km 640km 320km 640km 320km 40km >30km >30km 40km 90km 640km 640km 80km >30km >30km 320km 320km 80km 170km 40km >30km

Rate 10.66G 10.66G 2.5G 10.66G 2.5G 2.5G 2.5G 2.5G 10.71G 10.71G 10.66G 10.66G 2.66G 2.66G 2.5G 10.66G 10.66G 10.71G 4.9-5.4G 10.66G 10.71G 4.9-5.4G 10.71G 10.71G

800ps/nm 12800ps/nm 6500ps/nm

D E G H

12800ps/nm 6500ps/nm 800ps/nm >600ps/nm >600ps/nm

800ps/nm 1800ps/nm

12800ps/nm 12800ps/nm 1500ps/nm

>600ps/nm >600ps/nm 6400ps/nm 6400ps/nm 1500ps/nm 3400ps/nm

Z U

800ps/nm >600ps/nm

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11L4G is 19210PA. This code indicates the following features: The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is 192.10 THz; PIN is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is A. For details, refer to Table B-2.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-5

B Bar Code for Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs

The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information of the characteristic code is listed in Table B-3. Table B-3 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU Code The first character Meaning Wavelength-tunable Description T is the abbreviation for Tunable, indicating that the wavelength is tunable. The value can be A or P. A represents APD. P represents PIN. The detailed meaning of the character is shown in Table B-4.

The second character

The type of the DWDM-side receiving optical module The type of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module

The third character

The types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules are listed in Table B-4. Table B-4 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules Character T Dispersion (1550 nm) 1200ps/nm 12800ps/nm 12800ps/nm 3400ps/nm -1000 to 1100ps/nm 4800ps/nm Distance 60km 640km 640km 170km 60km 240km Rate 10.71G 2.66G 2.67G 5.33G 10.71G 11.3G

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LSX is TAT. This code indicates the following features: This board is a wavelength-tunable OTU; APD is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is T. For details, refer to Table B-4.

B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs

The characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information of the characteristic code is listed in Table B-5.
B-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

Table B-5 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU Code The first four digits Meaning The wavelength of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module The type of the CWDM-side receiving optical module The type of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module Description Indicate the wavelength of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module. The value can be A or P. A represents APD. P represents PIN. The value can be L or S. L represents long haul. S represents short haul.

The fifth character

The sixth character

NOTE

As for the LWX2 board, only the information of the first wavelength is indicated.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGS is 1531PS. This code indicates the following features: The wavelength is 1531 nm; PIN is adopted by the CWDM-side receiving optical module; the CWDM-side transmitting optical module is used for short-haul transmission (80 km).

B.3 Characteristic Code for Line Unit

The characteristic code for line unit indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the DWDM optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules. The line unit shares the same feature code with the WDM-side DWDM optical module of the wavelength tunable unit. For details, refer to B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs and B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs.

B.4 Characteristic Code for FOADMs

The characteristic code for FOADMs indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR2 The characteristic code for the CMR2 consists of eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board. B.4.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR4 The characteristic code for the CMR4 consists of eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board. B.4.3 Characteristic Code for the DMR1 The characteristics code for the DMR1 board consists of four digits, identifying the frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the MR2 The characteristic code for the MR2 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-7

B Bar Code for Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B.4.5 Characteristic Code for of MR4 The characteristic code for the MR4 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board. B.4.6 Characteristic Code for the MR8 The characteristic code for the MR8 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.

B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR2

The characteristic code for the CMR2 consists of eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-6. Table B-6 Characteristic code for the CMR2 Code The first four digits Meaning The first wavelength that bears optical signals The second wavelength that bears optical signals Description Indicate the first wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board. Indicate the second wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.

The last four digits

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571.

l l

"1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.

B.4.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR4

The characteristic code for the CMR4 consists of eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-7. Table B-7 Characteristic code for the CMR4 Code The first and the second digits Meaning The first wavelength that bears optical signals Description Indicate the middle two digits of the first wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board. Indicate the middle two digits of the second wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

The third and the fourth digits

The second wavelength that bears optical signals

B-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

Code The fifth and the sixth digits

Meaning The third wavelength that bears optical signals

Description Indicate the middle two digits of the third wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board. Indicate the middle two digits of the fourth wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.

The seventh and the eighth digits

The fourth wavelength that bears optical signals

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 is 47495961.

l l l l

"47" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "49" indicates that the second wavelength is 1491 nm. "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm. "61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.

B.4.3 Characteristic Code for the DMR1

The characteristics code for the DMR1 board consists of four digits, identifying the frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. Table B-8 provides the details on the characteristics code. Table B-8 Characteristic code for the DMR1 Barcode First to fourth digits Meaning Optical signal frequency Description Frequency of the optical signals processed by the board

For example, the characteristics code of the DMR1 is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1THz.

B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the MR2

The characteristic code for the MR2 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-9.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-9

B Bar Code for Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table B-9 Characteristic code for the MR2 Code The first four digits Meaning The frequency of the first optical signal The frequency of the second optical signal Description Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the first optical signal. Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the second optical signal.

The last four digits

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 is 93609370.

l l

"9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz. "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.

B.4.5 Characteristic Code for of MR4

The characteristic code for the MR4 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-10. Table B-10 Characteristic code for the MR4 Code The first four digits Meaning The frequency of first optical signal Description Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the first optical signal processed by the board. Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the fourth optical signal processed by the board.

The last four digits

The frequency of forth optical signal

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR4 is 92109240.

l l

"9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.

Since the four optical signals processed by the MR4 are in sequence, it is inferred that:
l l

The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.

B-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

B.4.6 Characteristic Code for the MR8

The characteristic code for the MR8 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-11. Table B-11 Characteristic code for the MR8 Code The first four digits Meaning The frequency of the first optical signal Description Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the first optical signal processed by the board. Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the eighth optical signal processed by the board.

The last four digits

The frequency of the eighth optical signal

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8 is 92109280.

l l

"9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.

Since the eight optical signals processed by the MR8 are in sequence, it is inferred that:
l l l

The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. Inferred from it, the frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.

B.5 Characteristic Code for MCAs

The characteristic code for MCAs indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4 The characteristic code for the MCA4 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8 The characteristic code for the MCA8 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4

The characteristic code for the MCA4 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-12.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-11

B Bar Code for Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table B-12 Characteristic code for the MCA4 Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 is C, indicating C band.

B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8

The characteristic code for the MCA8 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-13. Table B-13 Characteristic code for the MCA8 Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 is C, indicating C band.

B.6 Characteristic Code for OAUs

The characteristic code for OAUs indicates the gain, gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board. B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA The characteristic code for the HBA consists of seven characters and digits, indicating the band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1 The characteristic code for the OAU1 consists of eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1 The characteristic code for the OBU1 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2
B-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

The characteristic code for the OBU2 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. B.6.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC The characteristic code for the CRPC consists of one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA

The characteristic code for the HBA consists of seven characters and digits, indicating the band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given inTable B-14. Table B-14 Characteristic code for the HBA Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. The second character is always G. The third to the fourth digits indicate the gain value. The fifth character is always I. Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

The second character The third to the fourth digits The fifth character The sixth and the seventh digits

Gain Maximum nominal input optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA is CG29I-8. This code indicates that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power is -8 dBm.

B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1

The characteristic code for the OAU1 consists of eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-15. Table B-15 Characteristic code for the OAU1 Code The first character Meaning Description The first character is always G.
B-13

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B Bar Code for Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Code The second to the fifth digits

Meaning Gain range

Description Indicate the range within which the gain can be continuously adjusted. The sixth character is always I. Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

The sixth character The seventh and the eighth digits

Maximum nominal input optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 is G2031I0. This code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.

B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1

The characteristic code for the OBU1 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-16. Table B-16 Characteristic code for the OBU1 Code The first character The second and the third digits The fourth character The fifth and the sixth digits Meaning Gain Maximum nominal input optical power Description The first character is always G. The second and the third digits indicate the gain value. The fourth character is always I. The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.

B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2

The characteristic code for the OBU2 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given inTable B-17.

B-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

Table B-17 Characteristic code for the OBU2 Code The first character The second and the third digits The fourth character The fifth and the sixth digits Meaning Gain Maximum nominal input optical power Description The first character is always G. The second and the third digits indicate the gain value. The fourth character is always I. The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 is G23I00. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.

B.6.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC

The characteristic code for the CRPC consists of one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-18. Table B-18 Characteristic code for the CRPC Code The first character The two digits Meaning Gain Description This character is always G. Indicate the gain value.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.

B.7 Characteristic Code for Optical MUX/DMUX Units

The characteristic code for optical MUX/DMUX units indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board, whether the wavelengths that bear the signals are odd or even wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40 The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V The characteristic code for the D40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-15

B Bar Code for Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the FIU The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the ITL The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the M40 The characteristic code for the M40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40V The characteristic code for the M40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths.

B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40

The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-19. Table B-19 Characteristic code for the D40 Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that bear signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.

The second character

Odd/Even wavelengths

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
NOTE

The OptiX OSN 6800 products now support only even wavelengths in C band.

B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V

The characteristic code for the D40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths.
B-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-20. Table B-20 Characteristic code for the D40V Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that bear signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.

The second character

Odd/Even wavelengths

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the FIU

The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-21. Table B-21 Characteristic code for the FIU Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11FIU is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.

B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the ITL

The characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-22.
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-17

B Bar Code for Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table B-22 Characteristic code for the ITL Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the ITL is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.

B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the M40

The characteristic code for the M40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-23. Table B-23 Characteristic code for the M40 Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that bear signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.

The second character

Odd/Even wavelengths

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40V

The characteristic code for the M40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-24.

B-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

Table B-24 Characteristic code for the M40V Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that bear signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.

The second character

Odd/Even wavelengths

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.8 Characteristic Code for Protection Units

The characteristic code for optical protection boards indicates the maximum protection switching time. B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP The characteristic code for the DCP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP The characteristic code for the OLP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS The characteristic code for the SCS consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time.

B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP

The characteristic code for the DCP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-25. Table B-25 Characteristic code for the DCP Code The first character Meaning Description The first character is always P.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-19

B Bar Code for Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Code The second and third digits

Meaning Maximum protection switching time

Description Indicate the maximum protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the DCP is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP

The characteristic code for the OLP consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-26. Table B-26 Characteristic code for the OLP Code The first character The second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the OLP is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS

The characteristic code for the SCS consists of one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-27. Table B-27 Characteristic code for the SCS Code The first character The second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the SCS is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
B-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

B.9 Characteristic Code for VOAs

The characteristic code for VOAs indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1 The characteristic code for the VA1 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4 The characteristic code for the VA4 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1

The characteristic code for the VA1 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-28. Table B-28 Characteristic code for the VA1 Code The first to the third digits Meaning Attenuation value Description Indicate the maximum attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.

B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4

The characteristic code for the VA4 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-29. Table B-29 Characteristic code for the VA4 Code The first to the third digits Meaning Attenuation value Description Indicate the maximum attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-21

B Bar Code for Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B.10 Characteristic Code for PDE Units

The characteristic code for PDE units indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with, the dispersion compensation distance and the gradient of optical signals. B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU The characteristic code for the DCU board consists of characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU The characteristic code for the GFU consists of two characters and two digits, indicating the gradient of optical signals processed by the board.

B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU

The characteristic code for the DCU board consists of characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-30. Table B-30 Characteristic code for the DCU Code The character before hyphen (-) The character after hyphen (-) Meaning Fiber type Dispersion compensation distance Description Type of the fiber that the DCU board works with The transmission distance achieved through dispersion compensation

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km.
NOTE

If the characteristic code contains varieties of the dispersion compensation distance, the symbol "&" is used to separate each distance variety.

B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU

The characteristic code for the GFU consists of two characters and two digits, indicating the gradient of optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-31. Table B-31 Characteristic code for the GFU Code The first and second characters
B-22

Meaning -

Description The first and second characters are always GF.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

B Bar Code for Boards

Code The third and fourth digits

Meaning Gradient

Description Indicate the gradient of optical signals.

For example, the characteristic code for the GFU is GF10. This code indicates that the gradient of optical signals processed by the board is 10.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-23

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

C
C.5 Optical Amplifier Units C.7 Optical Protection Units C.8 Spectrum Analyzer Units

Parameter Description

C.1 Optical Transponder Units (OTUs), Tributary Units and Line Units C.2 Optical Multiplexing Units (MUXs) and Optical Demultiplexing Units (DMUXs) C.3 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Units (OADMs) C.4 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit (ROADMs)

C.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Units (OSCs)

C.9 Variable Optical Attenuator Units (VOAs)

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-1

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C.1 Optical Transponder Units (OTUs), Tributary Units and Line Units
C.1.1 Path Use Status C.1.2 Optical Interface Loopback C.1.3 Service Type C.1.4 Client Service Bearer Rate (M) C.1.5 Port Mapping C.1.6 Laser Status C.1.7 Automatic Laser Shutdown C.1.8 Current Bearer Rate (M) C.1.9 Service Mode C.1.10 FEC Working State C.1.11 FEC Type C.1.12 PAUSE Frame Flow Control C.1.13 Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) C.1.14 Configure Band Type C.1.15 Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) C.1.16 Actual Band Type C.1.17 Maximum Packet Length C.1.18 Ethernet Working Mode C.1.19 LPT Enabled C.1.20 Path Loopback C.1.21 SD Trigger Condition C.1.22 FC Distance Extension C.1.23 Board Mode C.1.24 Line Rate

C.1.1 Path Use Status

Item Parameter description Description Used to set the path use status.

C-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards

Description Used, Unused Default value: Used Used In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages When the Path Use Status of an optical interface is set to Unused, service alarms at this interface are suppressed, which disables the automatic laser turn on function. OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, ECOM, TMX, LSXL, LSXLR, LQG, LDMD, LDMS, LDM, LQM, LQMD, LQMS, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2 Tributary unit: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS, TOM, TQX, TSXL Line unit: NS2, ND2

Configuration requirements

When the channel is not required, its Path Use Status can be set to Unused. In this case, a command should be issued to shut down the laser of this path; otherwise, an alarm indicates that the laser is forcibly turned on is reported.

C.1.2 Optical Interface Loopback

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Description Used to set the loopback mode of the current optical interface. Non-Loopback, Outloop, Inloop Default value: Non-Loopback Non-Loopback: indicates that the equipment is in normal state. Optical interface loopback is not required when the equipment normally operates. Inloop: indicates a mode that signals to be output from the output interface of the local-end equipment are looped back to the signal input interface of this equipment. Inloop is used to test the signal processing on the board. Outloop: indicates a mode that unprocessed signals accessed to the local-end equipment are directly looped back to the corresponding output interface without the signal structure changed. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-3

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards

Description Non-Loopback In commissioning and maintenance stages When the loopback mode is set to Inloop or Outloop, services are interrupted. OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, ECOM, TMX, LSXL, LSXLR, LQG, LDMD, LDMS, LDM, LQM, LQMD, LQMS, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2 Tributary unit: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS, TOM, TQX, TSXL Line unit: NS2, ND2

Configuration requirements

None

C.1.3 Service Type

Item Parameter description Description Used to set the type of services at a client-side optical interface.

C-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Parameter values

Description LDM: OTU1, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC-200, FICON Express, HDTV, GE, FC-100, FICON, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON, FE, FDDI LDMD, LDMS: OTU1, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC-200, FICON Express, HDTV, GE, FC-100, FICON, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON, FE, FDDI LOM: GE, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FICON, FICON Express, ISC 1G, ISC 2G LQM: GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, OTU-1, HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI LQMS, LQMD: GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, OTU1, HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI LSX: 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, FC-1200 LSXL: STM-256, OC-768 LWXS: GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON, ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO LWXD, LWX2: GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCON TMX: STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 TOM: OC-3, STM-1, OC-12, STM-4, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FE, GE, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, HDTV, FDDI TQM: GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, OTU1, HDTV, DVB-SDI, FDDI TQS: OTU1, OC-48, STM-16

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-5

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item

Description TQX: 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, STM-64, OC-192 TDX: 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, STM-64, OC-192 TSXL: STM-256, OC-768

Parameter value description (default value)

LSX, TN11TDX: 10GE LAN LWXS, LWXD, LWX2: Any LOM: GE TQS, TMX: OTU1

Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards

None In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None OTU: LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LQM, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LOM, TMX, LSXL Tributary unit: TQM, TDX, TQS, TOM, TQX, TSXL

Configuration requirements

The type of actually accessed services must be the same as the type of configured services. Otherwise, the services are not available. If the LQMS, LQMD, LQM, TOM, or TQM board is configured with electrical-layer cross-connections, the type of services in the corresponding channels cannot be changed.

C.1.4 Client Service Bearer Rate (M)

Item Parameter description Parameter value range (M) Parameter value description Recommend ed value Description Used to set the bearer rate of client-side services. 16.0-2500.0

The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the client-side services are of Any type. The set value should equal to the maximum rate of actually accessed services. None

C-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuratio n requirements (the set value of bearer rate should be the same as the rate of actually accessed services)

Description In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. LWXS, LWXD, LWX2 Actually accessed services STM1 STM4 STM16 OC3 OC12 OC48 HDTV DVB-SDI DVB-ASI Set value 155.5 622 2488.3 155.5 622 2488.3 1485 270 270 Actually accessed services GE FE FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express ESCON FDDI Set value 1250 125 1062 2124 1062 2124 270 125

C.1.5 Port Mapping

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Description Used to set and query the port mapping. Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) Default value: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

None In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-7

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description LSX, TDX, TQX Services other than 10GE LAN do not require configuring the port mapping. The port mapping of 10GE LAN services can be configured as Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G). Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) and Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) meet customers' demand for transparent bit transport of 10GE LAN signals. Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) services provide an FEC/AFEC coding gain value equivalent to that of 10G SDH services. Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) services occupy some AFEC areas and thus provide a weaker AFEC coding gain. MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G) meets customers' demand for transparently transporting 10GE MAC frames only. MAC transparently mapped (10.7G) services have the standard OTU2 frame structure and supports the FEC/AFEC code which is the same as that of 10G bit/s SDH services.
NOTE TN12LSX does not support the configuration of MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G).

C.1.6 Laser Status

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Description Used to set the laser Open/Close status. Open, Close Default value: Open Open: The laser is turned on to start transmitting services. Close: The laser is turned off to stop service transmitting. Open In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages When the laser is set to Close, services are interrupted.

C-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Relevant boards

Description OTU: ECOM, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG Tributary unit: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS, TOM, TQX, TSXL Line unit: NS2, ND2

Configuration requirements

When an optical interface is unused or is not connected to a fiber, the laser at this interface should be set to Open.

C.1.7 Automatic Laser Shutdown

Item Parameter description Description Used to set whether to enable automatic laser shutdown (ALS) of the downstream laser of the local board in the case of loss of received signals. If ALS is enabled, when the received signals are lost, the laser is automatically shut down and stops transmitting signals. ALS prolongs the service life of a laser and avoids injury of laser to human. Enabled, Disabled ALS of optical interfaces on OTU client sides and tributary units is set to Enabled by default. ALS of optical interfaces on OTU client sides and tributary units is set to Enabled. In configuration and maintenance stages None OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG Tributary unit: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS, TOM, TQX, TSXL Configuration requirements None

Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards

C.1.8 Current Bearer Rate (M)

Item Parameter description
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Description Used to query the current bearer rate of client-side services.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-9

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description Queriable only None None In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None LWXS, LWXD, LWX2 None

C.1.9 Service Mode

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to set the mode of line-side services. OTN, SDH Default mode: OTN OTN In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LQG The mode of line-side services of boards on an NE at the local end should be the same as that at the opposite end. When a local-end board need be connected to an SDH service board of another product, the mode of lineside services should be set to SDH.

C-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description Used to set the mode of electrical layer grooming services. ODU1, ODU2 None None In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None ND2TN12NS2 When grooming the ODU1 services, ODU1mode must be configured. When grooming the ODU2 services, ODU2mode must be configured.

C.1.10 FEC Working State

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Description Used to set and query the FEC working state. Enabled, Disabled Default value: Enabled Enabled In configuration and commissioning stages Enabling the FEC working state lowers the requirement of optical signalto-noise ratio (OSNR) at the receive end and stretches the distance between an optical amplifying station and a regenerating station. OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG Tributary unit:, TOM Line unit: NS2, ND2

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-11

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Configuration requirements

Description During configuration, the FEC working states of two corresponding optical interfaces at the two ends of the transport line should be the same. Otherwise, the setting of FEC working states fails. FEC is enabled in most cases unless in scenarios where the requirement of transport delay is extremely high.

C.1.11 FEC Type

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Description Used to select the FEC type. FEC, AFEC Default value: FEC AFEC In configuration and commissioning stages None OTU: LSX, LOG, LOM, TMX, LSXR, LSXL, LSXLR Line unit: NS2, ND2 Configuration requirements Relationships between service type, port mapping and FEC type:
l

When the service type is 10GE LAN, if the port mapping is without flow control, the FEC type can be AFEC only; if the port mapping is in other modes, the FEC type is not limited. FEC types of services other than 10GE LAN are not limited.

During configuration, the FEC types of two corresponding optical interfaces at the two ends of the transport line should be the same.

C.1.12 PAUSE Frame Flow Control

Item Parameter description Description Used to select whether to enable flow control.

C-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description Enabled, Disabled Default value: Enabled Enabled In configuration and commissioning stages None TN11LSX, TDX This parameter can be configured only when the service type is 10GE LAN.

C.1.13 Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Description Used to configure the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. C-band wavelength spacing: 100G (192.100-196.00 THz) CWDM-band wavelength spacing: 20 nm (1271-1611 nm) The operating wavelength of a fixed-wavelength OTU should be set to the actual wavelength of the OTU. The operating wavelength of a tunablewavelength OTU should be set upon the network wavelength planning. In configuration stage
l

The same wavelength should be used for a service in the receive and the transmit directions. If a service travels through multiple regenerating stations, it is recommended that these regenerating sections use the same wavelength. It is recommended that the active and standby channels use the same wavelength when the inter-board channel protection or client-side path protection is adopted.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-13

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Relevant boards

Description OTU: ECOM, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG Line unit: NS2, ND2

Configuration requirements

The configured logic wavelength must be the same as the actual physical wavelength. Otherwise, a CFGDATA_OUTRANGE alarm is reported. As for tunable optical modules, issuing the captioned command directly changes their physical wavelengths (but does not change the band). As for non-tunable optical modules, issuing this command changes their logic wavelengths only.

C.1.14 Configure Band Type

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Description Used to configure the band type. C, CWDM None None In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None OTU: ECOM, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG Line unit: NS2, ND2 Configuration requirements The configured logic band must be the same as the actual physical band. Otherwise, a CFGDATA_OUTRANGE alarm is reported.

C.1.15 Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

Item Parameter description
C-14

Description Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards

Description Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages None OTU: ECOM, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG Tributary unit: TOM Line unit: NS2, ND2

Configuration requirements

None

C.1.16 Actual Band Type

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Description Used to query the band type. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages None OTU: ECOM, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL, LSXLR, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG Tributary unit: TOM Line unit: NS2, ND2

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-15

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Configuration requirements

Description None

C.1.17 Maximum Packet Length

Item Parameter description Parameter value range (byte) Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Description Used to configure the maximum packet length of data services. 1518-9600 Value range: 1518-9600 Default value: 1518 1518 In configuration and commissioning stages None OTU: LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, LQMS, LQMD, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG Tributary unit: TDX, TQM, TDG, TOM, TQX Configuration requirements The maximum packet length can be set when the service type is 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, GE or FE. If a customer requires extra long packets, set the maximum packet length according to the requirement.

C.1.18 Ethernet Working Mode

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Description Used to query and set the Ethernet working mode. Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex Default value: 1000M Full-Duplex Auto-Negotiation

C-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards

Description In configuration and commissioning stages None OTU: LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, LQMS, LQMD, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG Tributary unit: TDG, TQM, TOM

Configuration requirements

The Ethernet working mode of the local station should be the same as that of the upstream. If the two ports protect each other, these two active and standby ports must be set to be in the same Ethernet working mode. The LOM, TQM, LQMS, LQMD, LQM, LDM, LDMD, LDMS, TOM boards support the Ethernet working mode setting only when the service type is GE.

C.1.19 LPT Enabled

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Description Used to query and set the Enabled/Disabled state of link state pass through (LPT). Enabled, Disabled None Disabled In configuration and commissioning stages None OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LDM, LQM, LDMD, LDMS, LQG Tributary unit: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TOM, TQX Configuration requirements LPT is valid for only data services. When the router has redundant protection paths, LPT of the access ports of the corresponding routers should be set to Enabled.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-17

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C.1.20 Path Loopback

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Description Used to query and set the path loopback. Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Non-Loopback: indicates the normal state. Path loopback is not required when the equipment normally operates. Inloop: indicates a mode that signals to be output from the output path of the local-end equipment are looped back to the signal input path of this equipment. Inloop is used to test the signal processing on the board. Outloop: indicates a mode that unprocessed signals accessed to the local-end equipment is directly looped back to the corresponding output path without the signal structure changed. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors. Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Non-Loopback In commissioning and maintenance stages Path loopback interrupts services. NS2, ND2 The path loopback should be configured upon the commissioning purpose.

C.1.21 SD Trigger Condition

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Description Used to configure the trigger condition to perform SD switching on the board. B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG, None B1_SD: Regeneration section (B1) signal degrade OTUk_DEG: OTUk signal degrade ODUk_PM_DEG: ODUk_PM signal degrade None: No condition is configured for SD switching. Recommended value Application scenarios
C-18

Set the value to None. In commissioning and maintenance stages

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Impact on the system Relevant boards

Description When the B1_SD, OTUk_DEG or ODUk_PM_DEG alarm occurs, the protection group might be triggered to perform protection switching. OTU: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, LSX, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LSXL Tributary unit: TN11TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS, TQX Line unit: TN11NS2

Configuration requirements

Set the value to B1_SD, OTUk_DEG or ODUk_PM_DEG if the protection mechanism needs such a trigger condition.

C.1.22 FC Distance Extension

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Description To enable or disable the function for extending the transmission distance for the FC services. enable, disable enable: To enable the function for extending the transmission distance for the FC services. disable: To disable the function for extending the transmission distance of FC services. disable In commissioning and maintenance stage Extends the transmission distance for the FC services. LOM When the board accesses FC100/FC200/FC400 services, this parameter must be enabled.

Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

C.1.23 Board Mode

Item Parameter description Parameter values Description Used to configure the working mode of the board. ECOM: Service Mode, HUB Mode

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-19

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item

Description TN12LQMS: NS1 Mode, LQM Mode TOM: Connect Mode, Alone Mode

Parameter value description

Service Mode: Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x GE service. HUB Mode: Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x FE service. NS1 Mode: As a line board, this board adds and drops OTU1 signals in conjunction with another tributary board. LQM Mode: As a tributary/line integrated board, this board converges four channels of Any signals into a channel of OTU1 signals. Connect Mode: Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDMside optical interfaces. The board supports multiplexing up to eight channels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals. Alone Mode: RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces. The board supports multiplexing up to four channels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals.

Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system

None In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages For the board that supports various board modes, the board mode must be configured based on the application scenario. If the board mode configured is not consistent with the current application scenario, the board cannot work normally. ECOM, TN12LQMS, TOM The board mode configured must be consistent with the current application scenario.

Relevant boards Configuration requirements

C.1.24 Line Rate

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Description Used to configure the line rate of OTN. Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Standard Mode: The speed of WDM side is 10.7 Gbit/s. Speedup Mode: The speed of WDM side is 11.1 Gbit/s. None

C-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages The line rate must be configured based on the actual speed supported by the board. Otherwise, the service must be interrupted. TN12NS2, TN11ND2 If the cross-connect services at the ODU1 level are configured on the TN12NS2, TN11ND2 or TN51NQ2, only the 10.7 Gbit/s line rate can be supported. If the line rate is set to 11.1 Gbit/s, services must be interrupted. If the cross-connect services at the ODU2 level is configured on the TN12NS2, TN11ND2 or TN51NQ2, the line rate must be configured based on the actual speed supported by the board.

C.2 Optical Multiplexing Units (MUXs) and Optical Demultiplexing Units (DMUXs)
C.2.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) C.2.2 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) C.2.3 Configure Band C.2.4 Configure Working Band Parity C.2.5 Actual Band C.2.6 Actual Working Band Parity C.2.7 Board Mode

C.2.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Item Parameter description Parameter value range (dB) Parameter value description Description Used to adjust the attenuation of optical power in the corresponding channels to equalize the optical power of each wavelength. 0.0-15.0 Value range: varies with boards. The value range of optical interface attenuation ratio of a board can be obtained by querying the Maximum Attenuation Ratio and Minimum Attenuation Ratio of the board. Default value: 15 dB (maximum attenuation ratio of the board) Recommended value Configured upon the engineering optical power planning.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-21

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages Influences the downstream optical power. M40V, D40V The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be too large. It should be controlled within 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. In an expansion project or maintenance, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within 1 dB.

C.2.2 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Indicates the lower threshold of input optical power loss (an MUT_LOS alarm is reported). Queriable only The default value varies with boards. None In commissioning and maintenance stages None D40, D40V, FIU None

C.2.3 Configure Band

Item Parameter description Parameter values Description Used to configure type of the working band of a board. C

C-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description Supports only C band. None In commissioning and maintenance stages None FIU, M40, M40V, D40, D40V, ITL None

C.2.4 Configure Working Band Parity

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Description Selects the desired parity of the working band. All, Even, Odd All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the FIU and ITL. Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the M40, M40V, D40 and D40V boards. Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the M40, M40V, D40 and D40V boards. Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Corresponding wavelengths are used according to different requirements. In commissioning and maintenance stages None FIU, M40, M40V, D40, D40V, ITL When configuring the parity of wavelengths on the T2000, make sure that the parity configured is consistent with that of the actual working wavelengths.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-23

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C.2.5 Actual Band

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to query the actual working band of the board. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages None FIU, M40, M40V, D40, D40V, ITL None

C.2.6 Actual Working Band Parity

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to query the parity of the actual working band of the board. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages None FIU, M40, M40V, D40, D40V, ITL None

C-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

C.2.7 Board Mode

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Description To configure the working mode of the board. ITL Mode, VOA Mode ITL Mode: Supports multiplexing /demultiplexing optical signals between the ones with the channel spacing of 100 GHz and the other ones with the channel spacing of 50 GHz. VOA Mode: Supports transparent transmission of optical signals with the channel spacing of 100 GHz into one optical signals with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. None In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages No impact on the original even wavelengths of the system. TN12ITL The TE optical interface supports even wavelengths only.

Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

C.3 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Units (OADMs)

C.3.1 Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) C.3.2 Configure Band Type

C.3.1 Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Description Used to configure the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. C-band wavelength spacing: 100G (192.100-196.00 THz) CWDM-band wavelength spacing: 20 nm (1271-1611 nm) Parameter value description MR2, MR4, MR8: values of C-even 40 wavelengths CMR2, CMR4, DMR1: CWDM-band values

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-25

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description None In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None MR2, MR4, MR8, CMR2, CMR4, DMR1, SBM2 The configured logic wavelength must be the same as the actual physical wavelength. Otherwise, a CFGDATA_OUTRANGE alarm is reported. The same wavelength cannot be configured at different optical interfaces of the same board.

C.3.2 Configure Band Type

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to configure the band type. C Supports only C band. The default value varies with boards. Refer to the value obtained on site through the T2000. In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None MR2, MR4, MR8, CMR2, CMR4, DMR1, SBM2 None

C.4 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit (ROADMs)

C.4.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) C.4.2 Wavelength Target Power (dBm)
C-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

C.4.3 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) C.4.4 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB) C.4.5 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB) C.4.6 Configure Band C.4.7 Configure Working Band Parity C.4.8 Actual Band C.4.9 Actual Working Band Parity

C.4.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Indicates the lower threshold of input optical power loss (an MUT_LOS alarm is reported). Queriable only The default value varies with boards and subjects to the on-site queried result. None In commissioning and maintenance stages None ROAM, WSD9, RMU9, WSMD4 None

C.4.2 Wavelength Target Power (dBm)

Item Parameter description Parameter value range (dB) Parameter value description Description Applies to the ROAM board only and is used to set the singlewavelength target output optical power after add wavelengths are multiplexed. -32.0 to 8.0 None

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-27

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description Standard single-wavelength input optical power at the IN interface of an optical amplifying unit connected to the OUT interface of an ROAM board. In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages Influences the downstream optical power. ROAM The configuration of target output optical power takes effect only when optical cross-connections are configured in the corresponding channels.

C.4.3 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Item Parameter description Parameter value range (dB) Description Used to adjust the attenuation of optical power in the corresponding channels to equalize the optical power of each wavelength. WSM9: 0-20 WSD9: 0-20 RMU9: 0-15 WSMD4: 0-40 Parameter value description Value range: varies with boards. The value range of optical interface attenuation ratio of a board can be obtained by querying the Maximum Attenuation Ratio and Minimum Attenuation Ratio of the board. Default value: maximum attenuation ratio of the board Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Configured upon the engineering optical power planning. In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages Influences the downstream optical power. WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, WSMD4 The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be too large. It should be controlled within 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. In an expansion project or maintenance, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within 1 dB.

C-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

C.4.4 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Indicates the maximum optical power attenuation ratio of a board. Queriable only Value type: integers None In maintenance stage None WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, WSMD4 None

C.4.5 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Indicates the minimum optical power attenuation ratio of a board. Queriable only Value type: integers None In maintenance stage None WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, WSMD4 None

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-29

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C.4.6 Configure Band

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to configure type of the working band of a board. C Supports only C band. None In commissioning and maintenance stages None RMU9, ROAM, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD4 None

C.4.7 Configure Working Band Parity

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Description Selects the desired parity of the working band. All, Even, Odd All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the RMU9, TN13WSD9, TN13WSM9 board. Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the ROAM, WSMD4, TN12WSD9, TN12WSM9, TN11WSD9, TN11WSM9 boards. Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the ROAM, WSMD4, TN12WSD9, TN12WSM9, TN11WSD9, TN11WSM9 boards. Recommended value Application scenarios Corresponding wavelengths are used according to different requirements. In commissioning and maintenance stages

C-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description None RMU9, ROAM, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD4 When configuring the parity of wavelengths on the T2000, make sure that the parity configured is consistent with that of the actual working wavelengths.

C.4.8 Actual Band

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to query the actual working band of the board. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages None RMU9, ROAM, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD4 None

C.4.9 Actual Working Band Parity

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Description Used to query the parity of the actual working band of the board. Queriable only None None

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-31

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description In commissioning and maintenance stages None RMU9, ROAM, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD4 None

C.5 Optical Amplifier Units

C.5.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) C.5.2 Laser Status C.5.3 Gain (dB) C.5.4 Nominal Gain (dB) C.5.5 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) C.5.6 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) C.5.7 Rated Optical Power (dBm) C.5.8 Board Work Type C.5.9 Configure Band C.5.10 Configure Working Band Parity C.5.11 Actual Band C.5.12 Actual Working Band Parity

C.5.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Description Indicates the lower threshold of input optical power loss (an MUT_LOS alarm is reported). Queriable only The default value varies with boards and subjects to the on-site queried result. None

C-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description In commissioning and maintenance stages None OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA None

C.5.2 Laser Status

Item Parameter description Parameter values Description Used to set the laser Enabled/Disabled status. Enabled, Disabled . Default value of the OAU1/OBU1: Enabled. Default value of the CRPC: Disabled Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Enabled: The laser is turned on to start transmitting services. Disabled: The laser is turned off to stop service transmitting. Enabled In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages When the laser is set to Disabled, services are interrupted. OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA, CRPC When services are normal, the laser of the optical amplifying unit should be set to Enabled.

C.5.3 Gain (dB)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Description Used to query the optical power gain of the current optical amplifying unit. Queriable only

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-33

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description None None In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA Normally, the queried result should range from the nominal gain minus 2.5 dB to the nominal gain plus 2.5 dB.

C.5.4 Nominal Gain (dB)

Item Parameter description Parameter value range (dB) Parameter value description Recommended value Description Used to set and query the gain at optical interfaces to optimize the flatness of optical channels. 0-40 Value range: varies with boards. The nominal gain value range of a board can be obtained by querying the Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and Nominal Gain Lower Threshold of the board. OAU101: 20dB OAU102: 20dB OAU103: 24dB OAU105: 23dB OBU101: 20dB OBU103: 23dB OBU104: 17dB OBU205: 23dB HBA: 29dB Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages Gain values influence the performance of downstream services. OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA

C-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Configuration requirements

Description The nominal gain should be correctly set upon the network optical power budget. The OBU1 , OBU2, HBA does not require the nominal gain setting and adopts the recommended value.

C.5.5 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to query the nominal gain upper threshold. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages None OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA None

C.5.6 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Description Used to query the nominal gain lower threshold. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-35

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description None OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA None

C.5.7 Rated Optical Power (dBm)

Item Parameter description Description Used to set and query the single-wavelength rated optical power as the reference value for automatic optical power adjustment. When the optical amplifying unit and ROADM are used for networking, this parameter is set in the optical amplifying unit. -30.0 to 30.0 Default value at the input optical interface: -19 dBm. Default value at the output optical interface: 4 dBm. OAU101: input interface: -16 dBm; output interface: 4 dBm OAU102: input interface: -19 dBm; output interface: 1 dBm OAU103: input interface: -20 dBm; output interface: 0 dBm OAU105: input interface: -16 dBm; output interface: 4 dBm OBU101: input interface: -20 dBm; output interface: 0 dBm OBU103: input interface: -19 dBm; output interface: 4 dBm OBU104: input interface: -17 dBm; output interface: 0 dBm OBU205: input interface: -16 dBm; output interface: 7 dBm Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA The rated input and output optical power should be configured by referring to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifying unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifying unit normally operates.

Parameter value range (dBm) Parameter value description Recommended value

C-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

C.5.8 Board Work Type

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to query and set the board work type. C, C+L, L None C In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None CRPC None

C.5.9 Configure Band

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to configure type of the working band of a board. C Supports only C band. None In commissioning and maintenance stages None CRPC, HBA, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 None

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-37

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C.5.10 Configure Working Band Parity

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Description Selects the desired parity of the working band. All, Even, Odd All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the CRPC, HBA, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 boards. Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the CRPC board. Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the CRPC board. Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Corresponding wavelengths are used according to different requirements. In commissioning and maintenance stages None CRPC, HBA, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 When configuring the parity of wavelengths on the T2000, make sure that the parity configured is consistent with that of the actual working wavelengths.

C.5.11 Actual Band

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Description Used to query the actual working band of the board. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages

C-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description None HBA, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 None

C.5.12 Actual Working Band Parity

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to query the parity of the actual working band of the board. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages None CRPC, HBA, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 None

C.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Units (OSCs)

C.6.1 Optical Interface Loopback C.6.2 Laser Status

C.6.1 Optical Interface Loopback

Item Parameter description Parameter values
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Description Used to set the loopback mode of the current optical interface. Non-Loopback, Outloop, Inloop
C-39

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Parameter value description

Description Default value: Non-LoopbackNon-Loopback: indicates the normal state. Path loopback is not required when the equipment normally operates. Inloop: indicates a mode that signals to be output from the output interface of the local-end equipment are looped back to the signal input interface of this equipment. Inloop is used to test the signal processing on the board. Outloop: indicates a mode that unprocessed signals accessed to the local-end equipment are directly looped back to the corresponding output interface without the signal structure changed. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors.

Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Non-Loopback In commissioning and maintenance stages When the loopback mode is set to Inloop or Outloop, services in the supervisory channel are interrupted. SC1, SC2 None

C.6.2 Laser Status

Item Parameter description Parameter values Description Used to set the laser Enabled/Disabled status. Enabled, Disabled Default value: Enabled Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Enabled: The laser at an optical interface is turned on. Disabled: The laser at an optical interface is turned off. Enabled In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages None SC1, SC2

C-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Configuration requirements

Description None

C.7 Optical Protection Units

C.7.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) C.7.2 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) C.7.3 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

C.7.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

Item Parameter description Parameter value range (dBm) Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Description Indicates the lower threshold of input optical power loss (an MUT_LOS alarm is reported). -35.0 to -10.0 Default value: -35.0 -35.0 In commissioning and maintenance stages This parameter directly influences the SF switching condition of OLP protection, OTU+OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection with the OLP/DCP board. The larger the parameter value is, the more likely the SF switching occurs. DCP, OLP Normally, the threshold should be set to the recommended value. The actual network situation and fiber aging, however, should be considered during the parameter configuration to avoid mis-switching.

Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-41

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C.7.2 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Item Parameter description Parameter value range (dB) Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Description Indicates the initial variance value between primary and secondary input power. Initial variance value = initial input power at the primary optical interface - initial input power at the secondary optical interface -10.0 to 10.0 Default value: 0.0 0.0 In commissioning and maintenance stages This parameter serves as the SD switching threshold reference value for OLP protection, OTU+OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/ DCP client-side 1+1 protection with the OLP/DCP board. Variance between primary and secondary input power = input power at the primary optical interface - input power at the secondary optical interface - initial variance During SD switching judgement, if the absolute value of variance between primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching threshold, SD switching is actuated. Relevant boards Configuration requirements DCP, OLP The parameter should be set upon the actual variance between primary and secondary input power.

C.7.3 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Item Parameter description Parameter value range (dB) Parameter value description Description Used to set the variance threshold between primary and secondary input power at which signals degrade (SD). 3.0-8.0 Default value: 5.0

C-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system

Description 5.0 In commissioning and maintenance stages This parameter serves as the SD switching threshold reference value for OLP protection, OTU+OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/ DCP client-side 1+1 protection with the OLP/DCP board. Variance between primary and secondary input power = input power at the primary optical interface - input power at the secondary optical interface - initial variance During SD switching judgement, if the absolute value of variance between primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching threshold, SD switching is actuated.

Relevant boards Configuration requirements

DCP, OLP Generally, the threshold is set to the recommended value. In special cases, the threshold can be adjusted upon the actual on-site situation. When the variance between primary and secondary input power reaches 5 dB, if services in channels with lower optical power are still normal, the threshold can be properly elevated. When the variance between primary and secondary input power is far from reaching 5 dB while services degrade, the threshold should be properly lowered.

C.8 Spectrum Analyzer Units

C.8.1 Optical Monitoring C.8.2 Monitor Interval (min) C.8.3 Wavelength Monitor Status C.8.4 Configure Band C.8.5 Configure Working Band Parity C.8.6 Actual Band C.8.7 Actual Working Band Parity

C.8.1 Optical Monitoring

Item Parameter description Description Used to set the optical interface monitoring state.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-43

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description Enabled, Disabled Default value: Enabled None In configuration stage When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not analyze the wavelength at this interface. MCA4, MCA8 The monitoring state of optical interfaces that require monitoring should be set to Enabled.

C.8.2 Monitor Interval (min)

Item Parameter description Parameter value range (min) Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to set the supervisory channel of the current board for analyzing the channel status monitor interval. 5-49995 Default value: 10 10 In configuration stage None MCA4, MCA8 The default value is recommended.

C-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

C.8.3 Wavelength Monitor Status

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to set whether to monitor the current wavelength. Monitor, No Monitor Default value: No Monitor It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear services to Monitor. In configuration stage None MCA4, MCA8 The monitor status of wavelengths that bear services should be set to Monitor.

C.8.4 Configure Band

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to configure type of the working band of a board. C Supports only C band. None In commissioning and maintenance stages None MCA4, MCA8 None

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-45

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C.8.5 Configure Working Band Parity

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Description Selects the desired parity of the working band. All, Even, Odd All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the MCA4 and MCA8 board. Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the MCA4 and MCA8 board. Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the MCA4 and MCA8 board. Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Corresponding wavelengths are used according to different requirements. In commissioning and maintenance stages None MCA4, MCA8 When configuring the parity of wavelengths on the T2000, make sure that the parity configured is consistent with that of the actual working wavelengths.

C.8.6 Actual Band

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Description Used to query the actual working band of the board. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages

C-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description None MCA4, MCA8 None

C.8.7 Actual Working Band Parity

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to query the parity of the actual working band of the board. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages None MCA4, MCA8 None

C.9 Variable Optical Attenuator Units (VOAs)

C.9.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) C.9.2 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB) C.9.3 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB) C.9.4 Path Use Status C.9.5 Configure Band C.9.6 Configure Working Band Parity C.9.7 Actual Band C.9.8 Actual Working Band Parity
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-47

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C.9.9 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

C.9.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Item Parameter description Parameter value range (dB) Parameter value description Description Used to adjust the attenuation of optical power in the corresponding channels to meet the requirement of optical power test. Varies with the environment or optical components and subjects to the on-site query result. Value range: varies with boards. The value range of optical interface attenuation ratio of a board can be obtained by querying the Maximum Attenuation Ratio and Minimum Attenuation Ratio of the board. Default value: maximum attenuation ratio of the board (21.5 dB) Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Configured upon the requirement of optical power test. In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages Influences the downstream optical power. VA1, VA4 The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be too large. It should be controlled within 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. In an expansion project or maintenance action, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within 1 dB.

C.9.2 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Description Indicates the maximum optical power attenuation ratio of a board. Queriable only None None In maintenance stage

C-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description None VA1, VA4 None

C.9.3 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Indicates the minimum optical power attenuation ratio of a board. Queriable only None None In maintenance stage None VA1, VA4 None

C.9.4 Path Use Status

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Description Used to set the path use status. Used, Unused Value type: enumeration Default value: Used Used: indicates that the port is in use. Unused: indicates that the port is not in use.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-49

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Item Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description Used In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages If the port is set to Unused, alarms generated at this port are suppressed. VA1, VA4 If a port has services, its use status must be set to Used. If the port has no services, its use status should be set to Unused to suppress alarms, generated by the port, of no concerns.

C.9.5 Configure Band

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to configure type of the working band of a board. C Supports only C band. None In commissioning and maintenance stages None VA1, VA4 None

C.9.6 Configure Working Band Parity

Item Parameter description Parameter values
C-50

Description Selects the desired parity of the working band. All

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C Parameter Description

Item Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements

Description All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the VA1 and VA4 board. Corresponding wavelengths are used according to different requirements. In commissioning and maintenance stages None VA1, VA4 When configuring the parity of wavelengths on the T2000, make sure that the parity configured is consistent with that of the actual working wavelengths.

C.9.7 Actual Band

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to query the actual working band of the board. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages None VA1, VA4 None

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-51

C Parameter Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C.9.8 Actual Working Band Parity

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Used to query the parity of the actual working band of the board. Queriable only None None In commissioning and maintenance stages None VA1, VA4 None

C.9.9 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

Item Parameter description Parameter values Parameter value description Recommended value Application scenarios Impact on the system Relevant boards Configuration requirements Description Indicates the lower threshold of input optical power loss (an MUT_LOS alarm is reported). Queriable only The default value varies with boards. Refer to the value obtained on site through the T2000. None In commissioning and maintenance stages None VA1, VA4 None

C-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Quick Reference Table of the Units

Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards. D.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. D.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification The main specifications of the optical amplifying unit include the operating wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength. D.3 Other Unit Specification The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board. D.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio Some boards of WDM equipment provide a MON interface. A small number of supervisory signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service performance monitoring of the optical signals. D.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. D.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different loopback. D.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function. D.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-1

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification

The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. D.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the Client Side The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU) include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. D.1.2 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side The main wdm-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.

D.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the Client Side
The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU) include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. Table D-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTU boards Board Name Access Service Type Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm) Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) TN11ECO M FE 100 BASEFX-1310 nm-40km 100 BASEFX-1310 nm-2km 1.25 Gbit/s multirate 2.67 Gbit/s multirate TN11L4G GE 2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km
D-2

Minimu m (dBm) -5 -30 -10 eSFP

-14

-19

-30

-14

5 5 -2.5 -3

0 0 -9.5 -11.5

-19 -28 -17 -19

-3 -9 0 -3

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km 1.25 Gbit/s multirate-40km 2.67 Gbit/s multirate-80km TN11LDG D GE 2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km 1.25 Gbit/s multirate-40km 2.67 Gbit/s multirate-80km TN11LDG S GE 2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km 1.25 Gbit/s multirate-40km 0 5 5 5 -2.5 -3 0 5 5 5 -2.5 -3 0 5 5

Minimu m (dBm) -4.5 -2 0 0 -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 0 0 -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 0 -20 -22 -19 -28 -17 -19 -20 -22 -19 -28 -17 -19 -20 -22 -19 -3 -3 -3 -9 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 -9 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 eSFP CWDM eSFP eSFP CWDM eSFP eSFP CWDM

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-3

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) 2.67 Gbit/s multirate-80km TN12LDM FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE TN11LDM D FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s multirate 5 -2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3 5

Minimu m (dBm) 0 -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2 0 -28 -17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28 -19 -9 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9 -3 eSFP CWDM eSFP

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km

-2.5 -3

-9.5 -11.5

-17 -19

0 -3

eSFP

D-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE TN11LDM S FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s multirate 0 5 -3 0 3 3 5

Minimu m (dBm) -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2 0 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28 -19 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9 -3 eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km

-2.5 -3 0 5 -3

-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10

-17 -19 -20 -22 -18

0 -3 -3 -3 -3

eSFP

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/

I-16

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-5

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE TN11LOG GE 1.25 Gbit/s multirate 0 3 3 5

Minimu m (dBm) -5 -2 -2 0 -18 -27 -28 -19 0 -9 -9 -3 eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km 1.25 Gbit/s multirate 2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-2.5 -3 0 5 5 5 -2.5

-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 0 0 -9.5

-17 -19 -20 -22 -19 -28 -17

0 -3 -3 -3 -3 -9 0

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

TN11LOM

GE

2.125 Gbit/s multirate

eSFP

D-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km FC 100/ FC 200/ FC 400/ FICON/ FICON Express FC 400 moduleMultimode FC 400 moduleSingle-mode FC 100/ FICON/ FC 200/ FICON Express moduleMultimode FC 100/ FICON/ FC 200/ FICON Express module-Singlemode GE/ FC 100/ FC 200 1.25 Gbit/s multirate 2.67 Gbit/s multirate TN11LQG GE 2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km -3 0 5 -1 -2 -2.5

Minimu m (dBm) -11.5 -4.5 -2 -9 -8 -9.5 -19 -20 -22 -14 -16 -17 -3 -3 -3 0 0 0

-3

-10

-18

5 5 -2.5 -3 0

0 0 -9.5 -11.5 -4.5

-19 -28 -17 -19 -20

-3 -9 0 -3 -3

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-7

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) 1000 BASEZX-80km 1.25 Gbit/s multirate 1.25 Gbit/s multirate TN13LQM FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s multirate 5 5 5 -2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3 5

Minimu m (dBm) -2 0 0 -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2 0 -22 -19 -28 -17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28 -19 -3 -3 -9 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9 -3 eSFP CWDM eSFP eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

D-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) TN11LQM D/ TN12LQM D FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE TN11LQM S/ TN12LQM S FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s multirate 2.67 Gbit/s multirate -2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3 5

Minimu m (dBm) -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2 0 -17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28 -19 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9 -3 eSFP CWDM eSFP

-28

-9

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km

-2.5 -3 0

-9.5 -11.5 -4.5

-17 -19 -20

0 -3 -3

eSFP

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-9

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) 1000 BASEZX-80km OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE TN11LSX/ TN12LSX OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ FC1200a I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s multirate 5 -3 0 3 3 5

Minimu m (dBm) -2 -10 -5 -2 -2 0 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28 -19 -3 -3 0 -9 -9 -3 eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

10Gbit/s multirate-10km 10Gbit/s multirate-40km 10Gbit/s singlerate-0.3km 10Gbit/s multirate-80km

-1 2 -1.3 4 3 -2.5

-6 -1 -7.3 0 0 -9.5

-11 -14 -7.5 -24.0 -5 -17

0.5 -1 -1 -7 3 0

XFP

TN11LSX L TN11LWX 2

STM-256/ OC-768 FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE

Transponder 2.125 Gbit/s multirate

eSFP

D-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LWX D FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LWX S/ TN12LWX S FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ ETR/ CLOc/ STM-16/ FC200/ I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s multirate -3 0 3 5

Minimu m (dBm) -10 -5 -2 0 -18 -18 -28 -19 -3 0 -9 -3 eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

2.125 Gbit/s multirate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s multirate

-2.5 -3 0 3 5

-9.5 -10 -5 -2 0

-17 -18 -18 -28 -19

0 -3 0 -9 -3

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

2.125 Gbit/s multirate I-16 S-16.1

-2.5 -3 0

-9.5 -10 -5

-17 -18 -18

0 -3 0

eSFP

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-11

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE ISC 1G/ ETR/ CLO/ GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ ETR/ CLO/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11TMX STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 (without FEC) L-16.2 3

Minimu m (dBm) -2 -28 -9

1.25 Gbit/s multirate

-19

-3

eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.67 Gbit/s multirate 2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-3 0 3 3 5 3 0

-10 -5 -2 -2 0 0 -5

-18 -18 -27 -28 -28 -28 -30

-3 0 -9 -9 -9 -9 -10

eSFP

eSFP CWDM eSFP DWDM eSFP

TN11TBE

FE

100 BASEFX-1310 nm-40km 100 BASEFX-1310 nm-2km

-14

-19

-30

-14

GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

2.125 Gbit/s multirate

-2.5

-9.5

-17

D-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km 10Gbit/s multirate-10km 10Gbit/s multirate-40km 10Gbit/s singlerate-0.3km 10Gbit/s multirate-80km FE/ GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN 1.25 Gbit/s multirate 2.67 Gbit/s multirate 2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km 1.25 Gbit/s multirate-40km 2.67 Gbit/s multirate-80km -3 0 5 -1 2 -1.3 4 5 5 -2.5 -3 0 5 5 5

Minimu m (dBm) -11.5 -4.5 -2 -6 -1 -7.3 0 0 0 -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 0 0 -19 -20 -22 -11 -14 -7.5 -24 -19 -28 -17 -19 -20 -22 -19 -28 -3 -3 -3 0.5 -1 -1 -7 -3 -9 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 -9 eSFP CWDM eSFP eSFP CWDM XFP

TN11TDG

GE

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-13

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) TN11TDX / TN12TDX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192 10Gbit/s multirate-10km 10Gbit/s multirate-40km 10Gbit/s singlerate-0.3km 10Gbit/s multirate-80km TN11TOM FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s multirate -1 2 -1.3 4 -2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3 5

Minimu m (dBm) -6 -1 -7.3 0 -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2 0 -11 -14 -7.5 -24 -17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28 -19 0.5 -1 -1 -7 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9 -3 eSFP CWDM eSFP XFP

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

D-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE TN11TQM / TN12LQM FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 2.67 Gbit/s multirate 3

Minimu m (dBm) 0 -28 -9 eSFP DWDM

2.125 Gbit/s multirate 1000 BASELX-10km 1000 BASELX-40km 1000 BASEZX-80km

-2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3 5

-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2 0

-17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28 -19

0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9 -3

eSFP

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE TN11TQS STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1

I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s multirate

eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

2.67 Gbit/s multirate

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

I-16

-3

-10

-18

-3

eSFP

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-15

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Optical Module Type

Maximu m (dBm) S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.67 Gbit/s multirate TN11TQX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192 10Gbit/s multirate-10km 10Gbit/s multirate-40km 10Gbit/s singlerate-0.3km 10Gbit/s multirate-80km TN11TSX L STM-256/ OC-768 40G Transponder 0 3 3 5 -1 2 -1.3 4 3

Minimu m (dBm) -5 -2 -2 0 -6 -1 -7.3 0 0 -18 -27 -28 -28 -11 -14 -7.5 -24 -5 0 -9 -9 -9 0.5 -1 -1 -7 3 eSFP CWDM XFP

a: Only TN12LSX supports FC1200 service. b: Only TN12LQMD/TN12LQMS/TN12TQM support OTU1 service. c: Only TN12LWXS supports ISC 1G/ISC 2G/ETR/CLO services.

D.1.2 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side
The main wdm-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.

D-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Table D-2 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards Board Name Access Service Type Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximum (dBm) 2 -1 4 -4 -4 0 0 0 0 -1 -1 3 3 3 3 3 -4 0 Minimum (dBm) -2 -5 0 -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2 0 -8 -5 Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) -9 -9 -9 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9 -9 -9 -9

TN11L4G

OTU 5G

3400 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm 3400 ps/nmtunable

-25 -25 -25 -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28 -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28 -28 -28 -26

TN11LDG D

STM-16/ OTU1

12800 ps/nm-PIN 12800 ps/nmAPD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/ nm-2mW-APD 12800 ps/nmtunable 6400 ps/nm- four channels- tunable

TN11LDG S

STM-16/ OTU1

12800 ps/nm-PIN 12800 ps/nmAPD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/ nm-2mW-APD 12800 ps/nmtunable 6400 ps/nm- four channels- tunable

TN12LDM TN11LDM D

OTU1 OTU1

2.67 Gbit/s multirate 12800 ps/nmAPD 12800 ps/nmtunable

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-17

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximum (dBm) 0 -1 3 3 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 -1 Minimum (dBm) -5 -5 -2 -2 -3 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -2 -5 Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) -9 -9 -9 -9 0 -9 0 -9 -9 0 0 0 -9 0 -9 -9 0 0 -9 -9

6400ps/nmtunable TN11LDM S OTU1 12800 ps/nmAPD 12800 ps/nmtunable 6400ps/nmtunable TN11LOG OTU2 800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 1200 ps/nmtunable-PIN 1200 ps/nmtunable-APD 4800 ps/nmODB-tunable 800 ps/nm-DRZtunable 800 ps/nm-fixed TN11LOM OTU2/ OTU2v 800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 1200 ps/nmtunable-PIN 1200 ps/nmtunable-APD 4800 ps/nmODB-tunable 800 ps/nm-DRZtunable 800 ps/nm-fixed TN11LQG FEC 5G/ OTU5G 3400 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm

-28 -28 -26 -28 -16 -26 -16 -26 -26 -16 -16 -16 -26 -16 -26 -26 -16 -16 -25 -25

D-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximum (dBm) 4 2 3 -4 -4 0 0 0 0 -4 0 0 -1 -1 3 3 3 3 Minimum (dBm) 0 -3 0 -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 -5 -8 -5 -5 -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2 Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) -9 -9 -9 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9 -9 -9 -9 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9

3400 ps/nmtunable 6400 ps/nm-ODB tunable TN13LQM TN11LQM D OTU1 OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s multirate 12800 ps/nm-PIN 12800 ps/nmAPD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/ nm-2mW-APD 12800 ps/nmtunable 6400 ps/nm- four channels- tunable TN12LQM D OTU1 12800 ps/nmAPD 12800 ps/nmtunable 6400ps/nmtunable TN11LQM S OTU1 12800 ps/nm-PIN 12800 ps/nmAPD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/ nm-2mW-APD 12800 ps/nmtunable 6400 ps/nm- four channels- tunable

-25 -25 -28 -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28 -28 -26 -28 -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-19

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximum (dBm) -1 3 3 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 4 2 2 2 2 Minimum (dBm) -5 -2 -2 -3 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -5 -5 -5 -5 -3 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) -9 -9 -9 0 -9 0 -9 -9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -9 0 -9 -9 0

TN12LQM S

OTU1

12800 ps/nmAPD 12800 ps/nmtunable 6400ps/nmtunable

-28 -26 -28 -16 -26 -16 -26 -26 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -26 -16 -26 -26 -16

TN11LSX/ TN12LSX

OTU2/ OTU2v

800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 1200 ps/nmtunable-PIN 1200 ps/nmtunable-APD 4800 ps/nmODB-tunable 800 ps/nm-DRZtunable 800 ps/nm-fixed

TN11LSX L TN11LSX LR TN11LSX R

OTU3

ODB- tunable DRZ- tunable

OTU3

ODB- tunable DRZ- tunable

OTU2/ OTU2v

800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 1200 ps/nmtunable-PIN 1200 ps/nmtunable-APD 4800 ps/nmODB-tunable 800 ps/nm-DRZtunable

D-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximum (dBm) 2 -1 -1 3 3 3 -4 -4 0 0 0 0 -1 -1 3 3 3 3 Minimum (dBm) -3 -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2 Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) 0 0 9 0 -9 -9 0 9 0 -9 -9 -9 0 9 0 -9 -9 -9

800 ps/nm-fixed TN11LWX 2 STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE 12800 ps/nmPINa 12800ps/nmAPDa 6500 ps/nm -PIN 3200 ps/nm -2mW-APD 6400 ps/nm- four channels- tunable TN11LWX D STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE 12800 ps/nmPINa 12800ps/nmAPDa 6500 ps/nm -PIN 3200 ps/nm -2mW-APD 12800 ps/nmtunable 6400 ps/nm- four channels- tunable TN11LWX S/ TN12LWX S STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE/ ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ ETR/ CLO 12800 ps/nmPINa 12800ps/nmAPDa 6500 ps/nm -PIN 3200 ps/nm -2mW-APD 12800 ps/nmtunable 6400 ps/nm- four channels- tunable

-16 -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 -28 -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 -28

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-21

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximum (dBm) 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Minimum (dBm) -3 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) 0 -9 0 -9 -9 0 0 0 0 -9 0 -9 -9 0 0 0 0 -9 -9

TN11TMX

OTU2

800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 1200 ps/nmtunable-PIN 1200 ps/nmtunable-APD 4800 ps/nmODB-tunable 800 ps/nm-DRZtunable 800 ps/nm-fixed

-16 -26 -16 -26 -26 -16 -16 -16 -16 -26 -16 -26 -26 -16 -16 -16 -16 -26 -26

TN11ND2 TN11NS2

OTU2 OTU2

800 ps/nm- NRZfixed 800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 1200 ps/nmtunable-PIN 1200 ps/nmtunable-APD 4800 ps/nmODB-tunable 800 ps/nm-DRZtunable 800 ps/nm-fixed

TN12NS2

OTU2

800ps/nm- NRZfixed 1200 ps/nm tunable- PIN 1200 ps/nm tunable-APD 4800 ps/nm ODB- tunable

D-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximum (dBm) 2 Minimum (dBm) -3 Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) 0

800 ps/nm- DRZtunable

-16

a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode. b: Only TN12LWXS supports ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ ETR/ CLO services.

Table D-3 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards Board Name Access Service Type Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximum (dBm) 5 5 5 2 5 5 5 2 5 Minimum (dBm) 0 0 2.5 -0.5 2.5 0 0 -0.5 2.5 Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) -3 -9 -9 -9 -9 -9 -9 -9 -9

TN11ECO M

GE

1.25 Gbit/s Multirate 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

-19 -28 -25 -28 -28 -28 -28 -28 -28

TN11L4G TN11LDG D TN11LDG S TN12LDM TN13LQM TN11LQM D TN11LQM S

OTU.5G STM-16/ OTU1 STM-16/ OTU1 OTU1 OTU1 OTU1 OTU1

3400 ps/nm 1600 ps/ nm-4mW 1600 ps/ nm-4mW 2.67 Gbit/s multirate 2.67 Gbit/s multirate 1600 ps/ nm-4mW 1600 ps/ nm-4mW

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-23

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximum (dBm) 5 Minimum (dBm) 2.5 Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) -9

TN11LWX 2

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ DVB-SDI/ FE/FICON/ FICON Express STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ DVB-SDI/ FE/FICON/ FICON Express STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ DVB-SDI/ FE/FICON/ FICON Express/ ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ ETR/ CLO

1600 ps/ nm-4mW

-28

TN11LWX D

1600 ps/ nm-4mW

-0.5

-28

-9

TN11LWX S TN12LWX S

1600 ps/ nm-4mW

2.5

-28

-9

a: Only TN12LWXS supports ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ ETR/ CLO services.

D.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification

The main specifications of the optical amplifying unit include the operating wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength. Table D-4 Quick reference table for optical amplifying unit Board Name Gain Adjustable Range (dB) Nomin al Chann el Gain (dB) 20 Input Power Range per Channel (dBm) 40 channels -32 to -16 80 channels -32 to -19 Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 40 channels 80 channels -

OAU101

20 to 23

D-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Gain Adjustable Range (dB)

Nomin al Chann el Gain (dB) 26 31 20 26 31 24 29 36 23 30 34 20 23 17 23

Input Power Range per Channel (dBm) 40 channels -32 to -22 -32 to -27 -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30 -32 to -20 -32 to -25 -32 -32 to -16 -32 to -23 -32 to -27 -32 to -20 -32 to -19 -32 to -17 -24 to -16 80 channels -32 to -25 -32 to -30 -32 to -22 -32 to -28 -32 -32 to -23 -32 to -28 -32 -32 to -19 -32 to -26 -32 to -30 -32 to -23 -32 to -22 -32 to -20 -24 to -19

Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 40 channels 80 channels

23 to 29 29 to 31 OAU102 20 to 23 23 to 29 29 to 31 OAU103 24 to 28 28 to 30 30 to 36 OAU105 23 to 26 26 to 33 33 to 34 OBU101 OBU103 OBU104 OBU205 -

-20 -19 -17 -16

-23 -22 -20 -19

Table D-5 Quick reference table for CRPC Board Name Channel Gain (dB) G.652 fiber CRPC01 CRPC03 10 >10 LEAF fiber 12 NA Maximum Pump Power (dBm) 29 29.5

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-25

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Table D-6 Quick reference table for HBA Board Name Channel Gain (dB) Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 40 channels HBA 29 -19 10 channels -13 Nominal Input Power Range (dBm) -19 to -3 Channel Allocation (nm) 40 channels 1529 to 1561 10 channels Any two of the last 20 wavelengths are spaced at 200 GHz.

D.3 Other Unit Specification

The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board. Table D-7 Quick reference table for specifications of other boards Board Name TN11MR2 Insertion Loss (dB) IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11MR4 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11MR8 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11CMR2 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11CMR4 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11DMR1 EIN-EMO EMI-EOUT WIN-WMO WMI-WOUT Add/drop channel
D-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1.0

1.5 1.5

2.2 3.5

4 1.0

1.5 1.0

2 0.8

1
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name TN11SBM2 TN11D40 TN11D40V TN11FIU/TN12FIU

Insertion Loss (dB) Add/drop channel 6.5 8a IN-TM RM-OUT IN-TC RC-OUT 1 <4.5 1.5 3

TN11ITL

RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO

<2.5

TN12ITL

RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO

<4.5

<3.5

TN11M40 TN11M40V TN11DCP

6.5 8a Transmit-end insertion loss Receive-end insertion loss Single mode Multimode Single mode Multimode 4 4.5 1.5 2 4 1.5 4 4.5 1.5 2 4 1.5

TN12DCP

Transmit-end insertion loss Receive-end insertion loss

Single mode Single mode Single mode Multimode Single mode Multimode

TN11OLP

Transmit-end insertion loss Receive-end insertion loss

TN12OLP

Transmit-end insertion loss Receive-end insertion loss

Single mode Single mode

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-27

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name TN11SCS

Insertion Loss (dB) Wavelength dropping insertion loss Wavelength adding insertion loss Single mode Multimode Single mode Multimode 4 4.5 4 4.5 8.5 12.5a 1.5 9a 7 14a 3 8a

TN11RMU9

EXPI-OUT AMxb-TOA ROA-OUT

TN11ROAM

Mxc-OUT IN-DM EXPI-OUT IN-EXPO

TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9/TN13WSD9 TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9/ TN13WSM9 TN11WSMD4

IN-DMxd IN-EXPO AMxb-OUT EXPI-OUT AMxb-OUT IN-DMxd

8a

8a

TN11GFU

Channel insertion loss

0.5-6

a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB. b: AMx denotes AM1-AM8. c: Mx denotes M1-M40. d: DMx denotes DM1-DM8.

D.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio

Some boards of WDM equipment provide a MON interface. A small number of supervisory signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service performance monitoring of the optical signals. Table D-8 lists the ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board.

D-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Table D-8 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board Board Name CRPC D40 D40V FIU HBA ITL M40 M40V OAU1 OBU1 OBU2 RMU9 WSD9 WSM9 WSMD4 Ratio of MON Interface to Received Signal in Main Path "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10dB) "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10dB) "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15dB) Ratio of MON Interface to Transmitting Signal in Main Path "MON"/"SYS" = 1/99 (20dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 1/999 (30dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB) "MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15dB)

D.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table D-9. Table D-9 Basic functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards Board Name Tunabl e Wavel ength Functi on x ESC Functio n ALS Functio n OTN Functio n FEC Encoding FEC AFEC WDM Specification DWD M x CWDM Optical Modul e

TN11E COM

eSFP

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-29

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Tunabl e Wavel ength Functi on x x

ESC Functio n

ALS Functio n

OTN Functio n

FEC Encoding FEC AFEC

WDM Specification DWD M CWDM

Optical Modul e

TN11L4 G TN11L DGD TN11L DGS TN11L DM TN11L DMD TN11L DMS TN11L OG TN11L OM TN11L QG TN13L QM TN11L QMD TN12L QMD TN11L QMS TN12L QMS TN11LS X / TN12LS X TN11LS XL

x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x

eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP XFP

D-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Tunabl e Wavel ength Functi on

ESC Functio n

ALS Functio n

OTN Functio n

FEC Encoding FEC AFEC

WDM Specification DWD M CWDM

Optical Modul e

TN11LS XLR TN11LS XR TN11L WX2 TN11L WXD TN11L WXS / TN12L WXS TN11T MX TN11N D2 TN11N S2 / TN12N S2 TN11T BE TN11T DG TN11T DX / TN12T DX TN11T OM

x x x

x x x

x x x

x x

x XFP eSFP eSFP eSFP

x x x

eSFP x x

x x x

x x x

x x x

x x x

x x x

x x x

x x x

eSFP XFP eSFP eSFP

eSFP

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-31

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Tunabl e Wavel ength Functi on x

ESC Functio n

ALS Functio n

OTN Functio n

FEC Encoding FEC AFEC

WDM Specification DWD M x CWDM

Optical Modul e

TN11T QM / TN12T QM TN11T QS TN11T QX TN11TS XL

NOTE

eSFP

x x x

x x

x x

x x x

x x x

x x x

eSFP XFP x

l "" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "x" indicates that the OTU does not support the function l The SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information

about the modules can be obtained through a query on the T2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface.

D.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different loopback. Table D-10 Loopback function of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards Board Name ECOM LDGD LDGS LDM LDMD LDMS LOG LOM Client-Side Inloop Client-Side Outloop WDM-Side Inloop WDM-Side Outloop x

D-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name LQG LQM LQMD LQMS LSX LSXL LSXLR LSXR LWX2 LWXD LWXS TMX ND2a NS2a TDG TDX TOM TQM TQS TQX TSXL

Client-Side Inloop x x x x x

Client-Side Outloop x x x x x

WDM-Side Inloop x x x x x x x x

WDM-Side Outloop x x x x x x x x

a: NS2 /ND2 also support path loopback.

NOTE "" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "x" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

Table D-11 Loop function of the Ethernet boards Board Name L4G Interface Client side Loop Mode MAC inloop PHY outloop WDM side
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Inloop
D-33

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Interface

Loop Mode Outloop

TBE

10GE optical interface

MAC inloop MAC outloop PHY inloop PHY outloop

GE optical interface

MAC inloop PHY inloop

GE electric interface

MAC inloop PHY inloop PHY outloop

FE optical interface

MAC inloop PHY inloop

FE electric interface

MAC inloop PHY inloop PHY outloop

D.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function. For detailed protection mode, refer to Table D-12. Table D-12 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards Board Name Protection Mode SW SNC P VLA N SNC P OD Uk SNC P Clie ntSide 1+1 Prote ction IntraBoard 1+1 Protec tion OWS P Prote ction OD Uk SPRi ng Prot ectio n x x Bo ard Le vel Pro tect ion x x DB PS DL AG MS SNCP Tribut ary SNCP

ECOM L4G
D-34

x x

x x

x x

x x

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Protection Mode SW SNC P VLA N SNC P OD Uk SNC P Clie ntSide 1+1 Prote ction IntraBoard 1+1 Protec tion OWS P Prote ction OD Uk SPRi ng Prot ectio n x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Bo ard Le vel Pro tect ion x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x DB PS DL AG MS SNCP Tribut ary SNCP

LDGD LDGS LDM LDMD LDMS LOG LOM LQG LQM LQMD LQMS LSX LSXL LSXLR LSXR LWX2 LWXD LWXS TMX ND2 NS2 TBE TDG TDX TOM

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x

x x x x x x x

x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-35

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board Name

Protection Mode SW SNC P VLA N SNC P OD Uk SNC P Clie ntSide 1+1 Prote ction IntraBoard 1+1 Protec tion OWS P Prote ction OD Uk SPRi ng Prot ectio n x x x x Bo ard Le vel Pro tect ion x x x x DB PS DL AG MS SNCP Tribut ary SNCP

TQM TQS TQX TSXL

x x x

x x x x

x x x x

x x x x

x x x x

x x x x

x x x

NOTE "" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "x" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

D.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection. For detailed electrical cross-connection functions, refer to Table D-13. Table D-13 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards Board Name Electrical Cross-Connection Integrated Cross-Connection ECOM L4G LDGD LDGS LDM LDMD LDMS LOG LOM LQG 1 x GE 4 x GE 2 x GE 2 x GE x x x 8 x GE x 4 x GE Distributed Cross-Connection 1 x GE 4 x GE 2 x GE 2 x GE x x x 8 x GE x 4 x GE

D-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Board Name

Electrical Cross-Connection Integrated Cross-Connection Distributed Cross-Connection 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1 x x x x x x x x x 4 x ODU1 16 x GE 2 x GE/1 x ODU1 8 x ODU1 8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any/4 x ODU1 4 x GE/4 x Any/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1 4 x ODU1 x x

LQM LQMD LQMS LSX LSXL LSXLR LSXR LWX2 LWXD LWXS TMX ND2 NS2 TBE TDG TDX TOM TQM TQS TQX TSXL

4 x GE/1 x OTU1 4 x GE/1 x OTU1 4 x GE/1 x OTU1/1 x ODU1 x x x x x x x x 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2 4 x ODU1/1 x ODU2 16 x GE 2 x GE/1 x ODU1 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2 8 x GE/4 x ODU1/1 x OTU1 4 x GE/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1 4 x ODU1 4 x ODU2 4 x ODU2

NOTE "x" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-37

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

E
Board

Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

This chapter describes the power consumption, weight and valid slots of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800 system. The power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards are shown in Table E-1. The values listed in the following table indicate the power consumption of the boards when they normally work at 25 and 55.

Table E-1 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards Module Type Maximum Power Consumpti on at 25C (W) 14.0 0.2 0.2 110.0 70.0 20.0 38.5 6.8 0.5 0.2 19.6 Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (W) 15.4 0.3 0.3 121.0 77.0 22.0 42.3 7.5 0.5 0.3 21.6 Weight (kg) Numb er of Occupi ed Slots 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 Valid Slots

TN11AUX TN11CMR2 TN11CMR4 TN11CRPC01 TN11CRPC03 TN11D40 TN11D40V TN11DCP/ TN12DCP TN11DCU TN11DMR1 TN11ECOM

0.5 0.8 0.9 4.0 4.2 2.2 2.3 1.0 1.5 0.7 1.0

IU21 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU15 IU1-IU15 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-1

E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board

Module Type

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 25C (W) 4.2 0.2 47.0 0.2 10 50.0

Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (W) 4.6 0.3 75.0 0.3 11.5 55.0

Weight (kg)

Numb er of Occupi ed Slots 1 1 3 1 1 1

Valid Slots

TN11FIU/ TN12FIU TN11GFU TN11HBA TN11ITL TN12ITL TN11L4G

NRZ-fixed(D)(5G) (3400 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm) NRZ-fixed(C)(5G) (3400 ps/nm) NRZ-tunable(5G) (3400 ps/nm)

1.0 0.9 3.0 1.2 1.2 1.4

IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU16 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

45.0 53.0 34.0

50.0 58.0 37.4 1.4 1 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11LDGD

Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/ nm-PIN 12800 ps/nm-APD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD 1600 ps/nm-4mW) Tunable(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm)

38.0

41.8

TN11LDGS

Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/ nm-PIN 12800 ps/nm-APD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD 1600 ps/nm-4mW) Tunable(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm)

32.0

35.2

1.2

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

36.0

39.6

TN12LDM TN11LDMD TN11LDMS

22.6 26.9 26.9

24.8 29.6 29.6

1.1 1.2 1.1

1 1 1

IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17

E-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

Board

Module Type

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 25C (W) 49.5

Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (W) 54.5

Weight (kg)

Numb er of Occupi ed Slots 1

Valid Slots

TN11LOG

NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

1.6

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

50.0

55.0

51.2

56.1

55.0

60.5

TN11LOM

NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

92.7

101.7

2.3

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

92.9

101.9

93.4

102.7

98.2

108.0

TN11LQG

NRZ-fixed (5G)(3400 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm)

30.0

33.0

1.3

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-3

E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board

Module Type

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 25C (W) 31.0 36.0 32.6 54.9

Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (W) 34.4 40.0 35.9 60.4

Weight (kg)

Numb er of Occupi ed Slots

Valid Slots

NRZ-tunable (5G) (3400 ps/nm) ODB-tunable (5G) (6400 ps/nm) TN13LQM TN11LQMD Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/ nm-PIN 12800 ps/nm-APD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD 1600 ps/nm-4mW) Tunable(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm) TN12LQMD TN11LQMS Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/ nm-PIN 12800 ps/nm-APD 6500 ps/nm-PIN 3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD 1600 ps/nm-4mW) Tunable(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm) TN12LQMS TN11LSX NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed)

1.1 1.4

1 1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

59.1

65.1

32.1 53.2

35.3 58.5

1.4 1.3

1 1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

57.8

63.6

32.1 47.7

35.3 52.3

1.3 1.3

1 1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU17

E-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

Board

Module Type

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 25C (W) 47.9

Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (W) 52.5

Weight (kg)

Numb er of Occupi ed Slots

Valid Slots

NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) TN12LSX NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) TN11LSXL DRZ-tunable(40G) (Transponder) DRZ-tunable(40G) (Transponder) TN11LSXLR DRZ-tunable(40G) (Transponder) DRZ-tunable(40G) (Transponder)

49.7

52.7

52.7

55.7

32.0

38.4

1.4

IU1-IU17

32.2

38.6

34.0

40.8

36.0

43.2

103.0 98.0 87.0 82.0

110.0 105.0 90.0 85.0

5.0

IU1-IU14

3.1

IU1-IU14

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-5

E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board

Module Type

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 25C (W) 34.8

Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (W) 38.3

Weight (kg)

Numb er of Occupi ed Slots 1

Valid Slots

TN11LSXR

NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

1.2

IU1-IU17

35.0

38.5

36.8

40.3

39.8

43.3

TN11LWX2 TN11LWXD TN11LWXS/ TN12LWXS TN11M40 TN11M40V TN11MCA4 TN11MCA8 TN11MR2 TN11MR4 TN11MR8 TN11ND2

38.5 35.8 33.9 20.0 38.5 16.0 17.0 0.2 0.2 0.2 68.0

42.4 39.4 37.3 22.0 42.3 17.6 18.7 0.3 0.3 0.3 74.8

1.3 1.2 1.1 2.2 2.3 1.9 1.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.6

1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 1

IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU15 IU1-IU15 IU1-IU16 IU1-IU16 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

E-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

Board

Module Type

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 25C (W) 38.0

Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (W) 41.8

Weight (kg)

Numb er of Occupi ed Slots 1

Valid Slots

TN11NS2

NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

1.2

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

39.0

42.9

41.0

45.1

44.0

48.4

TN12NS2 TN11OAU101 TN11OAU102 TN11OAU103 TN11OAU105 TN11OBU101 / TN11OBU104 TN11OBU103 TN11OBU205 TN11OLP TN12OLP TN11PIU TN11RMU9 TN11ROAM

39.5 25.0 25.0 24.0 24.0 16.0

47.4 31.0 31.0 30.0 30.0 17.6

1.2 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.3

1 2 2 2 2 1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU17 IU2-IU17 IU2-IU17 IU2-IU17 IU1-IU17

18.0 26.0 6.0 6.0 35 11.0 66.0

20.5 33.0 6.6 6.6 35 12.1 72.6

1.3 1.9 0.9 1.0 0.5 1.1 3.2

1 2 1 1 1 1 3

IU1-IU17 IU2-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU19, IU20 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU15

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-7

E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Board

Module Type

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 25C (W) 0.2 11.0 12.5 30.0 0.2 40.7 30.0 78.0 40.0 40.3

Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (W) 0.3 14.9 14.9 33.0 0.3 44.8 33.0 80.0 44.0 44.3

Weight (kg)

Numb er of Occupi ed Slots 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Valid Slots

TN11SBM2 TN11SC1/ TN12SC1 TN11SC2/ TN12SC2 TN11SCC TN11SCS TN11TBE TN11TDG TN11TDX TN12TDX TN11TMX

NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed 800 ps/nm-80 channels fixed) NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable 1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable) DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable) ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

0.8 1.0 1.0 1.2 0.8 1.4 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.4

IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU17, IU18 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU17

42.1

46.4

42.4

46.6

46.5

51.2

TN11TOM

55.0

60.0

1.1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

E-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

Board

Module Type

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 25C (W) 50.3 25.0 43.0 65.0 90.5 6.5 8.5 12.0 17.0 30.0 30.0 17.0 30.0 30.0 17.0 20.0 25.0

Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (W) 57.6 27.5 47.3 71.2 95.4 7.2 9.4 15.0 18.7 35.0 35.0 18.7 35.0 35.0 18.7 22.0 27.5

Weight (kg)

Numb er of Occupi ed Slots 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 1

Valid Slots

TN11TQM TN12TQM TN11TQS TN11TQX TN11TSXL TN11VA1/ TN12VA1 TN11VA4/ TN12VA4 TN11WMU TN11WSD9 TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9 TN11WSM9 TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9 TN11WSMD4 TN11XCS TN12XCS

1.2 1.1 1.2 1.5 2.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.2 2.5 2.5 2.2 2.5 2.5 3.2 1.0 1.2

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU1, IU4, IU11, IU14 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU17 IU1-IU16 IU1-IU16 IU1-IU15 IU1-IU16 IU1-IU16 IU1-IU15 IU1-IU16 IU9, IU10 IU9, IU10

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-9

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

F Glossary

F
Numerics
1+1 protection 3R Regeneration, Reforming, Rtiming.

Glossary

A protection mechanism in which the same service is sent to the working and protection channels (dual fed) at the transmit end and the receive end selects the service in the working channel under normal situations. When the working channel is faulty. The receive end selects the service in the protection channel. It is also called single-ended switching, that is, switching occurs only at the receive end. This protection mechanism is applicable to channel level protection, board level protection, and even equipment level protection.

A
Alarm APD A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a failure or an emergency has occurred. See also Event. Avalanche Photodiode. A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other semiconductor electronics.

B
Back up Bandwidth A method to copy the important data into a backing storage in case that the original is damaged or corrupted. Information-carrying capacity of a communication channel. Analog bandwidth is the range of signal frequencies that can be transmitted by a communication channel or network. An error occurs to some bits in the digital code stream after being received, judged, and regenerated, thus damaging the quality of the transmitted information. The ratio of the errored bit count to the transmitted bit count in a certain period of time. In the digital communication system, bit error rate is the ratio of the errored bit count to the received bit count in a typical period of time. The act of sending a frame addressed to all stations on the network
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. F-1

Bit error Bit Error Rate

Broadcast
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

F Glossary

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

C
Channel Configure Connection The trail at the channel layer. To set the basic parameters of an operation object. A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "unidirectional connections" capable of simultaneously transferring information in opposite directions between their respective inputs and outputs. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or several channels of required signals. In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters a probe so it appears that the described messages were so modified. Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology for transmitting signals at multiple wavelengths through the same fiber with wide spacing between optical channels. Typical spacing is several nanometers or more.

Convergence Conversion

CWDM

D
DC power distribution See Power Box. The DC power distribution box on the top of a cabinet provides power supply to subracks in the cabinet. box DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber. A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. Dispersion Compensation Module. A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber. Data Communication Network. A communication network within a TMN or between TMNs which supports the data communication function (DCF). Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.

DCM DCN DWDM

E
EDFA Erbium Coped Fiber Amplifier. An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range. Electric Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes the communication among all the nodes and transmits the monitoring data in the optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals. Enterprise System Connection. A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

ESC

ESCON

F-2

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

F Glossary

ESD Ethernet

Electrostatic Discharge. The phenomena the energy being produced by electrostatic resource discharge instantly. A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers. It is a broadcast networking technology that can use several different physical media, including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernet networks. A graphic presentation formed by the superimposition of the waveforms of all possible pulse sequences.

Eye pattern

F
F1 byte The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte. A module which contains fans used for heat dissipation. The spool on the side of a subrack which is used for fiber routing. An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the T2000 or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port. A cyclic set of consecutive time slots in which the relative position of each time slot can be identified.

Fan tray assembly Fiber spool Flow

Frame

G
Gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB.

H
History alarms Alarms that have been cleared and acknowledged.

I
Internal cable IP over DCC The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces within the cabinet. The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

F-3

F Glossary

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

IPA

Intelligent Power Adjustment. The technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, the performance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well. Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the slice of broken fiber.

L
Label Laser A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. The device that generates the directional light covering a narrow range of wavelengths. Laser light is more coherent than ordinary light. Semiconductor diode lasers are the used light source in fiber-optic system. A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information.

Layer

M
MAN Metropolitan Area Network. A network where the computer resources in a geographic region are connected. The coverage of a MAN is larger than the coverage of a local area network (LAN) but smaller than the coverage of a wide area network (WAN). The process by which tributary signals are adapted into the corresponding virtual container at the PDH/SDH edge. Managed Object. The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that may be managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receive port, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, and regenerator section. A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.

Mapping MO

Multiplexing

N
NE A network unit, including the hardware and software. Normally a network unit has at least one SCC board, which manages and monitors the entire network unit. NE software runs on the SCC board. An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing a system.

Noise figure

O
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer. A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel. Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

ODF
F-4

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

F Glossary

ODF OLA

Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input optical signals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA is the EDFA amplifier. A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and singleended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibers forms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line is normal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carries line signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large. Optical Network Element. An independent physical entity in an optical transmission network. An ONE provides the functions that are similar to an NE. The ONE can be an OTM, OLA, or OADM. One ONE can consist of multiple subrack NEs. A device or subsystem in which optical signals are amplified by means of photon energy transfer. A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects, or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line. Optical Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm). Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio. Ratio of the optical power of the transmitted optical signal to the noise on the received signal. Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.

OLP

ONE

Optical Amplifier Optical switch OSC

OSNR OTU

P
Path protection The working principle of path protection: When the system works in path protection mode, the PDH path uses the dual-fed and signal selection mode. Through the tributary unit and cross-connect unit, the tributary signal is sent simultaneously to the east and west lines. Meanwhile, the cross-connect matrix sends the signal dually sent from the opposite end to the tributary board through the active and standby buses, and the hardware of the tributary board automatically and selectively receive the signal from the two groups of buses automatically according to the AIS number of the lower order path. Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- and n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers. The maximum variation of loss result from a variation of the state of polarization of the input signal at nominal operating conditions.

PIN Polarization dependence loss

Power distribution box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. It is another name of power box.

R
Receiver sensitivity REG
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER. A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. F-5

F Glossary

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Regeneration Ring network RS232

The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits. One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be a cycle. In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19. 2 kbit/s.

S
SD SF Signal Degrade. A signal that indicates the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect condition is active. Signal Fail. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a nearend defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.

T
T2000 A network management system that Huawei provides to manage transmission networks. The T2000 is located between the NE level and the network level in the telecommunication management network structure. That is, the T2000 is a subnetwork management system. The T2000 provides all management functions at the NE layer and some of the management functions at the network layer. One of the key protocols in the Internal protocol suite. The hosts that connect to each other through the TCP protocol can create connection between each other and exchange data. The TCP protocol ensures that the data can be transmitted from the transmitter to the receiver in a reliable and orderly manner. The TCP can also distinguish data for the concurrent applications on the same host. Single timeslot on a E1 digital interfacethat is, a 64-kbps, synchronous, full-duplex data channel, typically used for a single voice connection.

TCP/IP

Timeslot

U
User The user of the T2000 client, and the user and password define the corresponding authority of operation and management of the T2000.

W
Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.

F-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

G Acronyms and Abbreviations

G
A ADM AFEC AIS ALC ALS APD APE APS ATM

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Add and Drop Multiplexer Advanced Forward Error Correction Alarm Indication Signal Automatic Level Control Automatic Laser Shutdown Avalanche Photo Diode Automatic Power Equilibrium Automatic Protection Switch Asynchronous Transfer Mode

B BER Bit Error Ratio

C CAR CMI CoS CWDM Committed Access Rate Coded Mark Inversion Class of Service Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplex

D DCC Data Communication Channel

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

G-1

G Acronyms and Abbreviations

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

DCF DCM DCN DMUX DWDM

Dispersion Compensation Fiber Dispersion Compensation Module Data Communication Network Double Multiplexer Dense Wave Division Multiplexer

E ECC EDFA EMC EPL ESCON eSFP ETSI EVPL Embedded Control Channel Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier Electromagnetic Compatibility Ethernet Private Line Enterprise Systems Connection Enhanced Small Form-Factor Pluggable European Telecommunication Standards Institute Ethernet Virtual Private Line

F FC FEC FICON FOADM Fiber Channel Forward Error Correction Fiber Connection Fixed Optical add/drop Multiplexer

G GE Gigabit Ethernet

I ID IEEE IP IPA ITU-T Identity Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Internet Protocol Intelligent Power Adjustment International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Sector

G-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

G Acronyms and Abbreviations

L LAG LAN LCN LCT LOS Link Aggregation Group Local Area Network Local Communication Network Local Craft Terminal Loss Of Signal

N NE NRZ Network Element Non Return to Zero

O OA OADM OAM OD ODUk OLA OLP OM OMS OSC OSI OSN OSNR OTM OTN OTU Optical Amplifier Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Operation Administration and Maintenance Optical Demultiplexing Optical Channel Data Unit-k Optical Line Amplifier Optical Line Protection Optical Multiplexing Optical Multiplex Section Optical Supervisory Channel Open Systems Interconnection Optical Switch Node Optical Signal-to-noise Ratio Optical Terminal Multiplexer Optical Transmission Network Optical Transponder Unit

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

G-3

G Acronyms and Abbreviations

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

PIN

Positive Intrinsic Negative

Q QA QoS QinQ Q Adaptation Quality of Service 802.1Q in 802.1Q

R RDU ROADM RS ROADM Demux Unit Reconfiguration Optical Add/drop Multiplexer Reed-Solomon

S SAN SCC SD SDH SF SLM SM SNCP SONET Storage Area Network System Control & Communication Signal Degrade Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Signal Fail Single Longitudinal Mode Section Monitoring Subnetwork Connection Protection Synchronous Optical Network

T TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring

V VC VLAN VOA Virtual Container Virtual Local Area Network Variable Optical Attenuator

G-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

G Acronyms and Abbreviations

W WAN WDM WSS Wide Area Network Wavelength Division Multiplex Wavelength Selective Switching

X XFP 10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

G-5

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Index

Index
A
alarm concatenating cable, 18-13 alarm interface cable, 18-12 appearance and dimensions, 4-2 aux application, 12-8 DIP switch and jumper, 12-10 front panel, 12-9 functions and features, 12-8 signal flow, 12-8 slots, 12-10 specifications, 12-10 version, 12-7 working principle, 12-8 SCS, B-19 VOA, B-21 cmr2 application, 9-2 characteristic code, 9-6, B-8 front panel, 9-4 functions and features, 9-3 NM configuration reference, 9-7 signal flow, 9-3 slots, 9-6 specifications, 9-7 working principle, 9-3 cmr4 application, 9-9 characteristic code, 9-13, B-8 front panel, 9-12 functions and features, 9-10 NM configuration reference, 9-14 signal flow, 9-10 slots, 9-13 specifications, 9-15 working principle, 9-10 crpc application, 11-3 characteristic code, 11-9, B-15 front panel, 11-7 functions and features, 11-3 NM configuration reference, 11-10 signal flow, 11-4 slots, 11-8 specifications, 11-10 working principle, 11-4 CRPC frame, 3-2

B
bar code, 4-5, B-3

C
cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cable, 18-2 cabinet door grounding cable, 18-8 cabinet Indicator cable, 18-11 cabinet structure, 1-2 cable, 18-2, 18-8 alarm concatenating cable, 18-13 alarm interface cable, 18-12 cabinet Indicator cable, 18-11 inter-subrack cable, 18-13 OAM serial port cable, 18-15 PDU grounding cable, 18-9 subrack power cable, 18-5 characteristic code DCP, B-19 DCU, B-22 FOADM, B-7 GFU, B-22 MCA, B-11 OAU, B-12 OLP, B-19 optical MUX/DMUX, B-15 OTU, B-3

D
d40 application, 8-20 characteristic code, 8-26, B-16 front panel, 8-23 functions and features, 8-21 NM configuration reference, 8-27 signal flow, 8-21 slots, 8-26
i-1

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Index

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

specifications, 8-28 working principle, 8-21 d40v application, 8-30 characteristic code, 8-35, B-17 front panel, 8-14, 8-32 functions and features, 8-30 NM configuration reference, 8-36 signal flow, 8-30 slots, 8-35 specifications, 8-37 working principle, 8-30 DC power distribution box, 1-4 DCM frame, 3-2 dcp application, 14-3 characteristic code, 14-10, B-19 front panel, 14-7 functions and features, 14-4 NM configuration reference, 14-11 signal flow, 14-5 slots, 14-10 specifications, 14-12 version, 14-2 working principle, 14-5 dcu application, 17-2 characteristic code, 17-6, B-22 front panel, 17-4 functions and features, 17-3 NM configuration reference, 17-6 signal flow, 17-3 slots, 17-6 specifications, 17-7 working principle, 17-3 dmr1 application, 9-17 characteristic code, 9-21, B-9 front panel, 9-19 functions and features, 9-17 NM configuration reference, 9-21 signal flow, 9-18 slots, 9-21 specifications, 9-22 working principle, 9-18

F
fiu application, 8-39 characteristic code, 8-42, B-17 front panel, 8-41 functions and features, 8-39 NM configuration reference, 8-43 signal flow, 8-39 slots, 8-42 specifications, 8-44 working principle, 8-39

G
GFU application, 17-8 function and feature, 17-9 NM configuration reference, 17-12 signal flow, 17-9 slot, 17-10 slots, 17-12 specifications, 17-13 working principle, 17-9 gfu characteristic code, 17-12, B-22

H
hba application, 11-12 characteristic code, 11-16, B-13 front panel, 11-15 functions and features, 11-12 NM configuration reference, 11-17 signal flow, 11-13 slots, 11-16 specifications, 11-18 working principle, 11-13

I
indicators board, A-3 cabinet, A-2 fan, A-6 scc, A-3 subrack, A-2 integrated cabinet configuration, 1-3 specifications, 1-3 inter-subrack cable, 18-13 interfaces AUX, 2-15 EFI, 2-13 interface area, 2-13 PIN assignment, 2-16
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

E
ECOM functions and features, 5-4 ecom application, 5-3 front panel, 5-9 signal flow, 5-5 slots, 5-10 specifications, 5-13 working principle, 5-5

i-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Index

itl

characteristic code, 8-51, B-17 signal flow, 8-47 working principle, 8-47 log

L
l4g application, 5-17 front panel, 5-22 functions and features, 5-17 signal flow, 5-19 slots, 5-24 specifications, 5-27 T2000 configuration reference, 5-24 working principle, 5-19 laser safety label, 4-4 ldgd application, 5-33 characteristic code, 5-39 front panel, 5-37 functions and features, 5-33 signal flow, 5-35 slots, 5-39 specifications, 5-42 T2000 configuration reference, 5-40 working principle, 5-35 ldgs application, 5-48 front panel, 5-52 functions and features, 5-48 NM configuration reference, 5-53 signal flow, 5-49 slots, 5-53 specifications, 5-56 working principle, 5-49 ldm application, 5-62 characteristic code, 5-69 front panel, 5-67 functions and features, 5-63 NM configuration reference, 5-69 signal flow, 5-65 slots, 5-69 specifications, 5-70 working principle, 5-65 ldmd application, 5-78 characteristic code, 5-84 front panel, 5-83 functions and features, 5-79 NM configuration reference, 5-85 signal flow, 5-80 slots, 5-84 specifications, 5-86 working principle, 5-80 ldms application, 5-93

front panel, 5-97 functions and features, 5-94 signal flow, 5-95 slots, 5-99 specifications, 5-100 working principle, 5-95

signal flow, 5-109 working principle, 5-109 lom signal flow, 5-124 slots, 5-129 working principle, 5-124 lqg application, 5-138 front panel, 5-142 functions and features, 5-138 signal flow, 5-140 specifications, 5-147 T2000 configuration reference, 5-144 working principle, 5-140 lqm application, 5-152 characteristic code, 5-159 front panel, 5-157 functions and features, 5-153 NM configuration reference, 5-159 signal flow, 5-155 slots, 5-159 specifications, 5-163 working principle, 5-155 lqmd application, 5-172 characteristic code, 5-179 front panel, 5-177 functions and features, 5-172 NM configuration reference, 5-180 signal flow, 5-174 slots, 5-179 specifications, 5-183 version, 5-171 working principle, 5-174 lqms application, 5-193 front panel, 5-200 functions and features, 5-194 NM configuration reference, 5-202 signal flow, 5-196 slots, 5-202 specifications, 5-207 version, 5-193 working principle, 5-196 lsx application, 5-217 front panel, 5-222 functions and features, 5-218 NM configuration reference, 5-224 signal flow, 5-219
i-3

Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Index

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

slots, 5-224 specifications, 5-225 version, 5-217 working principle, 5-219 lsxl front panel, 5-235 functions and features, 5-231 signal flow, 5-232 slots, 5-236 specifications, 5-237 T2000 configuration reference, 5-237 working principle, 5-232 lsxlr front panel, 5-244 functions and features, 5-241 signal flow, 5-242 slots, 5-245 specifications, 5-246 T2000 configuration reference, 5-245 working principle, 5-242 lsxr application, 5-248 front panel, 5-252 functions and features, 5-249 NM configuration reference, 5-253 signal flow, 5-250 slots, 5-253 specifications, 5-254 working principle, 5-250 lwx2 application, 5-258 characteristic code, 5-263 front panel, 5-261 functions and features, 5-258 NM configuration reference, 5-264 signal flow, 5-259 slots, 5-263 specifications, 5-265 working principle, 5-259 lwxd application, 5-271 characteristic code, 5-277 front panel, 5-275 functions and features, 5-272 NM configuration reference, 5-278 signal flow, 5-273 slots, 5-277 specifications, 5-278 working principle, 5-273 lwxs application, 5-286 front panel, 5-289 functions and features, 5-286 NM configuration reference, 5-291 signal flow, 5-287 slots, 5-291 specifications, 5-292 working principle, 5-287
i-4

M
m40 application, 8-3 characteristic code, 8-8, B-18 front panel, 8-5 functions and features, 8-3 NM configuration reference, 8-9 signal flow, 8-3 slots, 8-8 specifications, 8-9 working principle, 8-3 m40v application, 8-11 characteristic code, 8-17, B-18 functions and features, 8-12 NM configuration reference, 8-18 signal flow, 8-12 slots, 8-17 specifications, 8-19 working principle, 8-12 mca4 characteristic code, 15-6, B-11 front panel, 15-5 functions and features, 15-3 NM configuration reference, 15-7 signal flow, 15-3 slots, 15-6 specifications, 15-2, 15-7 working principle, 15-3 mca8 characteristic code, 15-12, B-12 front panel, 15-11 functions and features, 15-9 NM configuration reference, 15-13 signal flow, 15-9 slots, 15-12 specifications, 15-9, 15-13 working principle, 15-9 mr2 application, 9-24 characteristic code, 9-28, B-9 front panel, 9-26 functions and features, 9-24 NM configuration reference, 9-29 signal flow, 9-25 slots, 9-28 specifications, 9-29 working principle, 9-25 mr4 application, 9-31 characteristic code, 9-35, B-10 front panel, 9-33 functions and features, 9-31 NM configuration reference, 9-36 signal flow, 9-32 slots, 9-35
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Index

specifications, 9-36 working principle, 9-32 mr8 application, 9-39 characteristic code, 9-42, B-11 front panel, 9-41 functions and features, 9-39 NM configuration reference, 9-43 signal flow, 9-40 slots, 9-42 specifications, 9-44 working principle, 9-40

N
nd2 application, 6-2 characteristic code, 6-8 front panel, 6-6 functions and features, 6-3 NM configuration reference, 6-8 signal flow, 6-4 slots, 6-8 specifications, 6-12 working principle, 6-4 ns2 application, 6-14 characteristic code, 6-22 front panel, 6-20 functions and features, 6-15 NM configuration reference, 6-22 signal flow, 6-17 slots, 6-22 specifications, 6-26 version, 6-14 working principle, 6-17

specifications, 11-37 working principle, 11-33 obu2 application, 11-39 characteristic code, 11-44, B-14 front panel, 11-42 functions and features, 11-40 NM configuration reference, 11-45 signal flow, 11-41 slots, 11-44 specifications, 11-45 working principle, 11-41 olp application, 14-14 characteristic code, 14-20, B-20 front panel, 14-18 functions and features, 14-15 NM configuration reference, 14-21 signal flow, 14-16 slots, 14-20 specifications, 14-21 version, 14-13 working principle, 14-16 optical fiber classification, 18-6 connectors, 18-7 FC/PC, 18-6, 18-7 LC/PC, 18-6, 18-7 LSH/APC, 18-6, 18-7 SC/PC, 18-6, 18-7

P
PDU grounding cable, 18-9

R
rmu9 application, 10-2 front panel, 10-6 functions and features, 10-3 NM configuration reference, 10-8 signal flow, 10-4 slots, 10-8 specifications, 10-9 working principle, 10-4 roam application, 10-11 front panel, 10-13 functions and features, 10-11 NM configuration reference, 10-17 signal Flow, 10-12 slots, 10-17 specifications, 10-17 working principle, 10-12

O
OAM serial port cable, 18-15 oau1 application, 11-20 characteristic code, 11-25, B-13 front panel, 11-23 functions and features, 11-20 NM configuration reference, 11-26 signal flow, 11-21 slots, 11-25 specifications, 11-27 working principle, 11-21 obu1 application, 11-31 characteristic code, 11-36, B-14 front panel, 11-34 functions and features, 11-32 NM configuration reference, 11-37 signal flow, 11-33 slots, 11-36
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i-5

Index

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

subrack power cable, 18-5

S
sbm2 application, 9-46 front panel, 9-48 functions and features, 9-47 signal flow, 9-47 slots, 9-50 specifications, 9-51 working principle, 9-47 sc1 application, 13-3 characteristic code, 13-8 front panel, 13-7 functions and features, 13-3 NM configuration reference, 13-9 signal flow, 13-4 slots, 13-8 specifications, 13-9 version, 13-2 working principle, 13-4 sc2 application, 13-11 characteristic code, 13-16 front panel, 13-15 functions and features, 13-12 NM configuration reference, 13-17 signal flow, 13-12 slots, 13-16 specifications, 13-17 version, 13-11 working principle, 13-12 scc application, 12-2 front panel, 12-5 functions and features, 12-2 jumper, 12-7 signal flow, 12-3 slots, 12-6 specifications, 12-7 version, 12-2 working principle, 12-3 scs application, 14-24 characteristic code, 14-28, B-20 front panel, 14-26 functions and features, 14-24 NM configuration reference, 14-28 signal flow, 14-25 slots, 14-28 specifications, 14-29 working principle, 14-25 subrack data communication interfaces, 2-12 equipment maintenance interfaces, 2-12 slot description, 2-4 structure, 2-2
i-6

T
tbe application, 6-31 front panel, 6-37 functions and features, 6-32 NM configuration reference, 6-39 signal flow, 6-34 slots, 6-39 specifications, 6-41 working principle, 6-34 application, 6-47 front panel, 6-50 functions and features, 6-47 NM configuration reference, 6-52 signal flow, 6-48 slots, 6-52 specifications, 6-55 working principle, 6-48

tdg

tdx

application, 6-58 front panel, 6-63 functions and features, 6-59 NM configuration reference, 6-65 signal flow, 6-60 slots, 6-65 specifications, 6-68 version, 6-58 working principle, 6-60 tmx signal flow, 5-301 slots, 5-305 working principle, 5-301 tom application, 6-71 functions and features, 6-74 signal flow, 6-76 slots, 6-87 specifications, 6-94 T2000 configuration reference, 6-87 working principle, 6-76 tqm application, 6-102 front panel, 6-107 functions and features, 6-103 NM configuration reference, 6-108 signal flow, 6-104 slots, 6-108 specifications, 6-112 working principle, 6-104 tqs application, 6-119 front panel, 6-122 functions and features, 6-119 NM configuration reference, 6-124
Issue 02 (2008-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

Index

tqx

signal flow, 6-120 slots, 6-124 specifications, 6-126 working principle, 6-120

application, 6-130 front panel, 6-133 functions and features, 6-130 signal flow, 6-131 slots, 6-135 specifications, 6-137 T2000 configuration reference, 6-135 working principle, 6-131 tsxl application, 6-139 front panel, 6-142 functions and features, 6-140 NM configuration reference, 6-144 signal flow, 6-140 slots, 6-144 specifications, 6-146 working principle, 6-140

V
va1 application, 16-3 characteristic code, 16-7, B-21 front panel, 16-5 functions and features, 16-3 NM configuration reference, 16-7 signal flow, 16-4 slots, 16-7 specifications, 16-8 version, 16-2 working principle, 16-4 va4 application, 16-10 characteristic code, 16-14, B-21 front panel, 16-12 functions and features, 16-10 NM configuration reference, 16-14 signal flow, 16-11 slots, 16-14 specifications, 16-15 working principle, 16-11

wsd9 application, 10-20 front panel, 10-23 functions and features, 10-21 NM configuration reference, 10-26 slots, 10-25 specifications, 10-26 wsm9 application, 10-29 front panel, 10-32 functions and features, 10-30 NM configuration reference, 10-35 signal flow, 10-31 slots, 10-34 specifications, 10-35 working principle, 10-31 wsmd4 application, 10-38 front panel, 10-41 functions and features, 10-38 NM configuration reference, 10-43 signal flow, 10-39 slots, 10-43 specifications, 10-44 working principle, 10-39

X
xcs application, 7-3 front panel, 7-5 functions and features, 7-3 signal flow, 7-4 slots, 7-6 specifications, 7-6 version, 7-2 working principle, 7-4

W
WMU signal flow, 15-16 working principle, 15-16 wmu slots, 15-18 version, 15-14 WSD9 signal flow, 10-22 working principle, 10-22
Issue 02 (2008-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i-7